Home

Technical Manual TNC 407, TNC 415 B, TNC 425

1. 3 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Power supply 01 98 i 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Power supply 3 23 i 5 Measuring systems The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are designed for the installation of incremental linear and angular measuring systems The control controls the actual position with a measuring step of 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 Measuring systems and encoders with a graduation period of 0 001 mm or 0 001 to 0 1 mm or 0 1 may be used It does not matter whether the measuring system or encoder has one or several reference marks However HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of measuring systems with distance coded reference marks since the traversing distance when referencing is thereby reduced to a minimum See Chapter Machine Integration The current requirement per measuring system input must not exceed 300 mA The maximum current requirement for all measuring system inputs together is limited to 1 2 A 5 1 Linear measuring systems Measurement of length is best performed by a linear measuring system or encoder Insofar as it is compatible with the accuracy requiremen
2. 4 220 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 14 Datum correction 01 98 i 14 Datum correction The PLC datum correction function is used to shift the zero or datum point with the PLC program Each axis X Y Z 4 5 is assigned a double word D528 to D544 for the correction value The datum correction is activated by Marker M2716 during a strobe The correction is computed in the actual value display the display then relates to the shifted coordinate system Example Actual position display for X axis without correction 50 Correction in D528 20 Strobe marker M2716 set i e correction is active New actual position display X 70 The corrections can be transferred to double words D528 to D544 from different memory areas Enter values in MP4210 0 to MP4210 47 and they will also be in D768 to D956 now copy values via PLC program into D528 to D544 Define corrections in the NC program in function FN19 and they will also be in D280 or D284 see description of FN19 now copy values via PLC program into D528 to D544 A description of the machine geometry via machine parameters MP7510 and following e g cylinder surface must have the same reference position as any datum shift Address Function D528 Datum correction for X axis D532 Datum correction for Y axis D536 Datum correction for Z axis
3. 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 11 i 1 2 Axis designation The coordinate axes and their directions of travel are standardized in ISO 841 The directions of traverse may be simply determined by using the Right hand rule Z t X LACH CT In the direction of the spindle axis the convention is The movement of the tool towards the workpiece is the negative direction of traverse When creating an NC program one proceeds as if the tool is moving and the workpiece is always stationary If the machine moves the workpiece then the direction of movement and the direction of the axis are opposite to one another The positive relative directions of movement are then designated X Y etc X 4 x The fourth or fifth axis can be used either as an axis of rotation or alternatively as an extra linear axis While the three principal axes have the standard designations X Y and Z the designations of the fourth and fifth axes can be selected by a machine parameter An axis of rotation is designated by the letter A B or C The correlation with the principal axes and determination of the direction of rotation is standardized in ISO 841 Z fs Y B 7A X 4 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L A secondary linear axis is designated by the lette
4. 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 65 i 3 4 Arithmetic Commands 3 4 1 ADDITION Abbreviation for the PLC Editor PLUS Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ys 0 5 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 7 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 4 6 Operands B W D K Operation With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator 32 bits Then the contents of the operand are added to the Word Accumulator The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further Example A constant and a stored value in Word W6 are to be added The result is then stored in Doubleword D8 Initial state Constant 100000 dec Word W6 200 dec Doubleword D8 In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and operand are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K100000 100 000 2 W tO 0 2 00 3 D8 100 200 100 200 Line 1 The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator and Word W6 are added Line 3 The result is assigned to Doubleword D8 7 66 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 3 4 2 SUBTRACTION Abbreviation for the PLC Editor MINUS
5. CH d Es ol __ Ta GE GO KI e 71 m m HHS oi Eal L ch Hrg 4 Push parts A D on to the cable alternatively assemble the screw connection for the armouring according to diagram 3 Strip back 22 mm of the outside sleeving Unpick the outer screen and fold back 5 Cut off the outer screen to a length of 3 mm and slide the screen contact sleeve E between the internal sleeving and the braided screen 6 Cut back the internal sleeving to a length of 5 mm 7 1 twist the inner screen together 2 insulate the twisted inner screen with heat shrinkable sleeving 8 Strip off the insulation on all leads for 3 mm tin and solder in accordance with the connection diagram to G or G1 9 Assemble part F 10 Push the connector together The following points must be observed when assembling the measuring system The inner screen pin 9 must not make any electrical connection with the outer screen connector ousing The outer screen of the measuring system cable must have an electrical connection with the connector housing The measuring system is grounded through its mechanical fixings the mounting block in the case of encapsulated systems and the housing of the scale When using external pulse forming electronics EXE the ground must be electrically co
6. Transmitter Receiver Speicher Schnittstellen Puffer Schnittstellen Puffer Speicher Memory Interface buffer Interface buffer Memory 0 MSB o gt 0 gt 0 MSB 0 1 H a ef 1 i gt ue of cd ju el n o gt b 1 1 gt wl 0 gi kO gt 0 0 1 1 E POH 1 LSB 1 gt gt 1 LSB 4 Ubertragungsstrecke V Transmission path One obvious advantage of serial data transmission becomes apparent when long distances have to be covered With parallel transmission the cost of the cable increases with every additional bit which has to be transmitted In addition the effect of interference on adjacent wires from sharp signal edges and electrical coupling is far greater over long lines than it is with serial transmission which is relatively slower and uses fewer wires The comparatively slow speed of serial data transmission is at the same time its greatest drawback Since the individual bits are sent along the line one after the other and each transfer takes a specified time it takes far longer to send a binary word to the receiver than it would if conveyed by parallel transmission As it happens most peripheral devices work fairly slowly and cannot in fact cope with data transmitted at high speed Serial data transmission is generally adequate for devices such as external memories or mechanical printers especially as such devices have a large internal buffer for incoming characters 1
7. 400 D u 378 5 1 5 io 8 98 14 9 04 4 H A i j N i 5 Z ny o Da 1 2 Nip i D i f reie S 10 j i le l C gt l T i it i T 1 ee el 5 6 98 0 3 278 0 3 376 0 3 tol o DIA 22 3 86 012 10 94 012 14 8 012 NIO 25 365 2 25 M5 98 0 2 278 0 2 376 0 2 98 _ 14 37 98 3 86 008 10 94 008 14 8 008 l I R E f l S 5 l 5 l l 8 IS 5 F l _ l H 4 Sele LE lo C Elie l Lo m gt l l oO E i l hi i S SS d i l Z 0 5 Ge f l Ai ojm 2 7 02 37241 08 14 65 04 K 3 96 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 2 Machine integration Contents 1 Machine axes 1 1 Measuring systems 1 1 1 Signal period 1 1 2 Direction of traverse 1 1 38 Measuring system monitoring 1 2 Axis designation 1 2 1 Assignment 1 2 2 Current tool axis 1 3 VDU display 1 4 Traverse ranges 1 5 Lubrication pulse 1 6 Axis error compensation 1 6 1 Backlash compensation 1 6 2 Compensation for reversal errors in circular motion 1 6 3 Linear axis error compensation 1 6 4 Non linear axis error compensation 1 6 5 Temperature compensation 1 6 6 Stiction 1 7 PLC positioning 1 8 PLC axes 1 9 Swivel axes 1 9 1 Tilt working plane function 1 9 2 Five axis NC programs with swivel axes 1 10 Synchronized axes 1 10 1 Synchronization control 1 10 2 Conventions 2 Reference marks 2 1 P
8. 400 z Ss 15 75 ae 1220 2 JL 37640 2 Fd 2s 472 008 14 803 008 SEN S y Si LU mawo ome d a z Boe C T AZ A bal se HF as i m Mi z 0 5 EBEN 9 BE 376 0 2 M5 DA ZEIT C 14 803 008 i Y V 1 Ze H Ay i Em I S FE DE EI J E S TL 2 as Ge W 356 5 l 384 0 5 ER 14 04 15 118 02 ci 3 94 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 2 f 16 11 TE 400 B 400 2 371 18 Lag at Ss Lag 15 75 08 14 61 71 376 0 2 ot vol 14 803 008 AT Y 18 Ty a A ES F F F 7 0 o000000000000 0000 o 2 GoOoDDDDob00000 0000 JE NS OOO00000000000 0000 a S 0000000000000 0000 L de SE E F fata No ooo ooooo 28290 M5 za O00 00000 O00 e P AIS O E 600000000 0O00 000 0 00000 O Ei Y 1232 9 13 5 5 32 5 1 47 e DIA 216 1 28 04 1 85 M5 ewe ok ie COUP y Mee H EN L LOIN ol bis Sch NIN o SG O O 2 079 380 0 5 14 96 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 95 2 16 12 BC 120
9. 0 01 gt 0 03 U roooi fo0072 A 2 E OO OI a EES Or a Y A Y DIA 1 181 EE 0IA 1 338 76 5 J 3 011 Lange 3m ZB LENGTH 9 8ft 41 5 1 634 3 92 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 2 16 9 MB 410 400 o 15 75 ol S 6 0 2 3880 2 Fig 20 POSE 236 008 15 276 008 Ole mr G8 j i J E i be io lk LU eem meaa d E q Si to SE oas alom E Q SIS eee ap _ ei d 4 a WF S dest A als 234 75 glt 9 213 2 953 EIS o 5 io Montageflache Silo MOUNTING SURFACE oa CS 2 DIA 35 y erg 388 0 2 9 i w DIN eo 15 276 008 Ze E 1 is co d Frontplattenausschnitt F q nil SS FRONT PANEL OPENING ol 10 SS DIA A yo 40 re 1 57 l 356 5 _ 378 1 14 03 14 88 04 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions f 3 93 2 16 10 MB 420
10. MP912 0 Software limit switch X MP912 1 Software limit switch Y MP912 2 Software limit switch Z MP912 3 Software limit switch 4 MP912 4 Software limit switch 5 MP922 0 Software limit switch X MP922 1 Software limit switch Y MP922 2 Software limit switch Z MP922 3 Software limit switch 4 MP922 4 Software limit switch 5 MP7490 is used to select whether one or three traverse ranges can be defined with the MOD unction MP7490 is also used to select whether the datum applies for all traverse ranges or whether a separate datum can be set for each traverse range see table below MP7490 Number of traverse ranges and datum points Entry 0 to 3 Entry Number of Number of traverse ranges datum points The change over to the selected traverse range must be activated by the strobe marker M2824 by the PLC This strobe marker is reset by the NC after the change over has been carried out fx 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 17 e Marker Function Set Reset M2824 Activation of the selected traverse range PLC NC M2816 M2817 If one of the software limit switches is reached the error message LIMIT SWITCH appears and he appropriate marker M2624 to M2633 is set Marker Function Set Reset M2624 Limit switch X NC NC M2625 Limit switch X M2626 Limit switch Y M2627 Limit switch Y M2628 Limit switch Z M2629 Limit switch Z M2630 Limit switch 4 M2631 Limit switch 4
11. Machine parameter MP7224 1 MP7226 0 MP7226 1 MP7228 MP7230 MP7240 Function and input Page via Protect file type PLC RUN RESET 4 150 Entry XXXXXXX CN 123 0 Not protected 1 Protected i HEIDENHAIN programs i DIN ISO programs i Tool tables i Datum tables i Pallet tables i Text files i Help files i Point tables Size of pallet tables 4 151 Entry 0 to 255 lines CN 123 Size of datum tables PS 4 151 Entry 0 to 255 lines CN 123 Storage requirement in drip feed mode 8 20 Entry 0 to 1024 bytes DI D DD D DE D ct et NOOBWN O MP7228 0 Minimum storage MP7228 1 Maximum storage Change dialogue language PLC RUN 4 153 Entry 0 or 1 CN 123 0 First dialogue language 1 Basic language English PGM entry inhibit at PGM NAME PLC RUN 9 5 OEM cycle number in EPROM CN 123 Entry 0 or 1 0 Inhibited 1 Not inhibited 5 34 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o Machine parameter MP7245 0 MP7245 1 MP7246 Function and input Page via Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN cycles 1 to 15 PLC RUN 4 144 Entry 0 to 65 535 0 to FFFF 0 not disabled 1 disabled Bi Cycle 1 Bi Cycle 2 Bi Cycle 3 Bi Cycle 4 Bi Cycle 5 Bi Cycle 6 Bi Cycle 7 Bi Cycle 8 Bi Cycle 9 B Cycle 10 B Cycle 11 B Cycle 12 B Cycle 13 B Cycle 14 B Cycle 15 4 145 WWWWWWWWAWWWWWWWDW Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles 16 to30 PLC RUN
12. 6 3 24 E anes 4 176 LEE 3 36 APE VOU dE 3 38 Arc end point roleranmce 2 15 4 155 Arithmetic Commandes 7 66 ASCI COdG eet EE eens 12 2 Let ll E 3 9 ASSIGN 2 EE 7 43 ASSIGN BYTE BS despues 7 45 ASSIgN Commande 7 36 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD Di 7 45 ASSIGN NOT N o ae 7 46 ASSIGN TWO S COMPLEMENT 7 46 ASSIGN WORD IW 7 45 Le TEE 4 13 Assignment of the analogue outputs 4 14 Assignment of the measuring SVSTEMMADUTS aere ae ae 4 13 Assignment Lable reer 7 161 Asynchronous data format 8 5 Auxiliary AXES tiv ee ee eege 4 38 AXES IN MOTION 2 ee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteees 4 91 DES IN POSITION iienaa a 4 90 AXIS ClaMpe EE 4 92 Axis desigmation 4 12 4 13 Axis displayed on VDL 4 14 Axis error Compensation s es 2 16 Avis enable 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeteenaees 4 89 Axis error Compensation ee 4 23 El EEN 4 16 Axis stop on TOOL CAL 4 102 B B ASSIGN BT 7 45 Backlash Compensation 4 23 BACKUP eigene gegen doter Bar Chart Basic language English 008 4 153 Battery voltage lOW ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 178 BAUD RATE NOT POSSIBLE 8 48 BUC CN 8 8 BG BIT GERT nites eae 7 97 EIER a DEE 3 4 3 70 3 77 BE oeann As Adil ties 8 18 8 36 EIN WS WEE 7 97 Bit Commandes 7 96 EIN RE E Bee ie tt crest E ca 7 96 BIMVEST BU eenegen 7 98 Block Check Character 8 10 8 36 Block numbers step size 4 151 Block processing me
13. The adapter includes a cable with a 9 pin connector from the connection to the logic unit and two terminals for connecting the 24 V of the EMERGENCY STOP control circuit max load 1 2 A See also the Section Mounting dimensions 10 3 Integral handwheel HR 130 The HR 130 is the integral version of the HR 330 without the keys for the axes rapid traverse etc It may be attached directly to the logic unit or via an extension cable Id Nr 249 814 The HR 130 Id Nr 254 040 is available in several versions standard cable length 1 m small knob axial cable exit version 01 small knob radial cable exit version 02 large knob axial cable exit version 03 large knob radial cable exit version 04 ergonomic knob radial cable exit version 05 You will find dimension drawings for the knobs at the end of this chapter 3 44 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 01 98 e max 6m Adapter HR 130 E HR 130 max 49 m f X23 Electronic handwheel Id Nr 254 040 d Mr 281 429 ch A r A A i Wh EE WH 2112 ov el ee 3 3 BN al 4 BN A 4 12V 0 6V Uv 5 5 5 5 a ele YL 6 6 DTR 717 717 GN GN J gJ 8 8 FO tw 8 8 RXD 9 9 9 9 a max 50 m gt 10 4 Portable handwheels with permissive buttons HR 332 Handwheel HR 332 has two enable buttons and a
14. 4 234 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 L S gt N Double Changing Arm M2600 1 The pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred first After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle M2046 0 1 M2483 0 1 M2093 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No N Pocket No S W264 Tool No N Tool No 0 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 235 i M N Normal tool follows Manual tool With this tool change sequence two pocket numbers or tool numbers must be transferred in succession M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe M2046 follows Irrespective of flag M2600 pocket number 255 and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number O tells the PLC to clear the spindle Pocket number 255 means that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of the new tool called tool are transferred M2046 M2483 M2093 M2600 M2401 M2402 M2403 M2601 W262 W264 Pocket No 255 Pocket No N Tool No 0 Toot No N 4 236 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer f 01 98 2 M M Manual tool follows Manual tool The pocket number 255 tells the PLC that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the
15. EES ZIZ Z 2 ES ES ES OLIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOI OJO ZIZI ziz z Z Z Z Z 2 Z 2 2 OIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOIOILOIOIOIO ch M2067 M2068 _ S Code zm Td 258 M2069 M2070 _ S Code 7 Bit II M2071_ S Code 8 Bit msb M2072_ M Code_1 Bit sb TT M2073_ MCode 2 Bit LI M2074 M Code 3 Bit II M2075 _ M Code 4 Bit LI S M2076 _ M Code _5 Bit LC woo M2077 _ M Code 6 Bit LI S M2078 _ M Code 7 Bit o S S M2079 M Code_8 Bit msb To ST minimum speed from MP3020_1 Bit lsb M2081 inimum speed from MP3020 2 M2082 inimum speed from MP3020 3 M2083 inimum speed from MP3020 4 S CH CH M2080 minimum speed from MP3020 1 Bit Isb Ir M2084 inimum speed from MP3020 5 M2085 inimum speed from MP3020 6 M2086 inimum speed from MP3020 7 B B B B B B t t t t t t t t M2087_ minimum speed from MP3020_8 Bit msb M2088 _ Increment from MP3020_1 Bit Is S fT M2089 Increment from MP3020 2 Bit I M2090_ IncrementfromMP3020 3 Bit_ T M2091 Increment from MP3020_4 Bit msb d 7 180 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 01 98 2 1 Marker M2104 M2105 M2106 M2112 M2113 M2114 M2115 M2116 M2117 M2118 M2119 M2176 M2177 M2178 M2179 M2186 M2192 o M2239 M2452 M2453 M2454 M2455 M2468 M2469 M2470 M2471 M2522 M2527 M2538 M2543 M2560 o M2589 M2597 M2800 o M2807 M2808 M2809 M2817 M2818 M2819 M2832 o M2839
16. MP4060 Path dependent lubrication Entry range 0 to 65 535 units of 65 536 um MP4060 0 X axis MP4060 1 Y axis MP4060 2 Z axis MP4060 3 4th axis MP4060 4 5th axis El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 19 e Marker Function Set Reset M2012 Lubrication pulse X axis since value of MP4060 0 NC NC was exceeded M2013 Lubrication pulse Y axis since value of MP4060 1 was exceeded M2014 Lubrication pulse Z axis since value of MP4060 2 was exceeded M2015 Lubrication pulse 4th axis since value of MP4060 3 was exceeded M2029 Lubrication pulse 5th axis since value of MP4060 4 was exceeded M2548 Reset of accumulated distance for PLC PLG lubrication X axis M2549 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication Y axis M2550 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication Z axis M2551 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication 4th axis M2613 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication 5th axis 4 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L Example PLC program example of activating the lubrication for the X axis In the machine parameter MP4060 0 the traverse distance after which the X axis should be lubricated is entered The duration of the lubrication is defined by the timer TO MP4110 0 The PLC output O24 is to be set for the duration of the X axis lubrication In our example the lubrication is activated as soon as the marker M2012 is set If for some reason
17. X3 Measuring system 3 X5 Measuring system 5 X6 Measuring system S X8 Nominal value output 1 2 3 4 S X9 Screen unit for commissioning only B Operational ground X21 PLC output X22 PLC input X23 TNC keyboard TE for commissioning only X24 24 V supply for PLC X25 RS 422 V 11 data interface V 24 RS 232 X31 24 V supply for LE X11 X12 and X26 are not required X4 is not fitted Connecting cable LE 234 003 B C LE 407 415 Id Nr 292 123 max 50 m 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 10 3 L Pin layout X25 data interface RS 422 V 11 and RS 232 C V 24 Flange socket with female insert 25 pin Pin No Assignment Assignment RS 422 V 11 RS 232 C V 24 Sereen P RD Cd TX CCT CRS Pp CT CO CO NM MD Or BLO NM d a sf sf 3 2 3 olola A GW NM oO DO Q 2 J xiolzig A Ola a I wn EERE Ol a GI 2 OD O Z CO n 5 D D Li 17 18 GND Signal NININ N gt Oo QO TS N w 4 x J 24 25 Chassis Outer screen GND Chassis 2 n X5 Measuring system Input 5 TU Pin No Assignment 5 Ua1 6 Ua 8 Ua2 1 Uaz 3 Uao 4 Uso 7 Uas 2 5 V Up 12 5 V Up 11 0 V UN 10 O V Un 9 spring Screen Chassis 10 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 01 98 2 1 3 EMERGENCY STOP routine
18. 55 9624 Y 232 3492 7 8668 B 331 0000 2 c 12 5000 Via H M 5 9 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE RERET EDIT NEXT TOOL D T POCKET TABLE TABLE ment OFF ON LINE TABLE The tool and pocket tables cannot be edited if they are disabled or protected by MP7224 see section Display and operation The number of tools in the tool table is defined in machine parameter MP7260 If MP7260 contains a zero value then the system will run without a tool table TOOL T does not exist Tool length and tool radius are programmed in the NC program with TOOL DEF see User s Manual Automatic tool management is not possible when operating with no tool table The number of pockets in the tool magazine is defined in machine parameter MP7621 No pocket table is generated if MP7621 is defined as zero The elements displayed in the tables and their sequence are defined in machine parameters MP7266 x and MP7264 x The PLC can read and overwrite the tool and pocket tables with modules 9092 9093 and 9094 see chapter PLC Programming The current tool data appear in the additional status display see section Display and Programming 1 4 224 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 L MP7224 0 Disable file types Bit 2 Tool tables 0 not disabled 1 disabled MP7224 1 Protect file types Bit 2 Tool tables 0 not protected 1 protected MP7260 Number of tools in tool table Entry 0 to 254 MP7261 Number of p
19. 7 160 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Error numbers 0 No error element was written 1 Call was not from SUBMIT Job 2 No such file type 3 No file of specified type with M status found 4 Line number not in file 5 Wrong element number 6 Element value is outside permitted range 4 7 3 Non linear Axis Error Compensation Module 9095 Selects a line in the compensation table for non linear axis error compensation The module selects the specified line in the active compensation assignment table CMA as the active line and activates the non linear axis error compensation according to the compensation tables entered on this line Constraints The specified line stays selected as the active line after a control reset Once an NC program starts the module only operates during the output of M G S T T2 O strobes The axis nominal values may alter slightly when the compensation table is switched over Possible errors There is no CMA file The specified line does not exist in the selected CMA file One or more compensation tables COM from the selected line do not exist The module was not called from a Submit Job The module was called after the start of an NC program without any strobe marker being active Call PS B W D K lt active line gt CM 9095 PL B W D lt Error code gt No error Entered line does not exist No such compensation table COM Compensation valu
20. Function Set Reset TNC 407 415 G Code S analogue_1st Bit sb Tue G Code S analogue 2ndBit_ LL G Code S Analogue 3rd Bit msb LI T number P number decade 1 s LI T number P number decade f T T number P number decade LI T number P number decade 1 msb LL 262 T number P number decade 2 Is _ _ w2e4 Tnumber Pnumber decade2 LI Tnumber Pnumber decade2 LI T number P number decade 2 msb Mode code sb o S S Mode code 272 Modecode ooo O d Mode code msb _ _ o OS S D276 Markers controllable by MP4310 0 MP4310 1 and NC C W976 MP4310 2 to W980 M2704 M2705 Activate PLC positioning Z axis PLC _ NC__ M2706 EE E a EYEE PLC Activate PLC positioning axis 5 M2708 M2712 complemen PE positioning axis 5 PLC BCD SE values for PLC positioning tool PLC PLC number spindle orientation and O parameters SC Tool number output mode 0 binary 1 BCD PLC B M2813 M2713 W516 W516 M2716 Key code of the operated disabled key W274 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7 181 i Marker Function Set Reset TNC 407 415 M3200 Values from MP4310 3 to MP4310 6 NC NC W 972 to to M3263 W 988 5 3 Incompatibility It has not been possible to maintain compatibility in all areas of the PLC programs This is because the TNC 355 differs considerably from the TNC 407 and TNC 415 both in memory organ
21. lt STX gt last line lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt M lt ACK gt d lt ETX gt lt EOT gt h 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 39 1 The so transm tware handshake is very easy to accomplish when transmitting with BCC The receiver its neither a positive lt ACK gt nor a negative lt NAK gt acknowledgement and the transmitter waits until it receives one of these characters When he receive buffer of the receiver unit is ready to receive again the unit transmits another lt ACK gt and the transmitter resumes the data transfer The so tware handshake can also be done with the aid of the control characters lt DC1 gt and lt DC3 gt however If the hardware handshake EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 was selected this is identical with the standard data transfer and BCC transfer see section Freely configurable interfaces 3 2 2 Protocols In the following the transmission protocols are listed for the various file input and output possibi If an er lities FE2 mode is set ror occurs at a peripheral device the following block must be sent to the TNC lt SOH gt Error text lt ETB gt BCC Peripheral unit lt SOH gt Error lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt Transmission path TNC d t lt ACK gt lt EOT gt id The received error message is displayed in the TNC but can be acknowledged and erased with the CE key 8
22. 3 68 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 TNC keyboard 01 98 E On the TNC keyboard X2 for the connection to the logic unit Pin connections as for X45 on the logic unit X1 for the connection to the soft keys on the Visual Display Unit BC Pin Number Assignment SLO SL1 SL2 SL3 Do not use RL15 RL14 RL13 RL12 O CO N OP oy A OPN 13 2 Connecting cable Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables Standardkabel Verlangerungskabel Id Nr 263 954 Id Nr 263 955 TE 400 E E SS LE _Lf J L max 40 m The flat cable between the TNC keyboard and the VDU is included in the package delivered with the VDU 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 TNC keyboard 3 69 E 14 VDU The power supply for the VDU BC 110 B is described under the heading Power supply The video signals are transmitted via a connecting cable from the logic unit to the display unit The soft keys for the VDU are connected to the TNC keyboard by a flat cable This flat cable is one of the items supplied with the VDU 14 1 Pin connections X43 VDU BC 110 D sub female connector 15 pin Pin Number Assignment 1 8 11 GND 2 to 6 12 13 Do not use 7 R 9 V SYNC 10 H SYNC 14 G 15 B Housing External shield 14 2 Connecting cable Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables Standardkabel Verl ngerungskabel Id Nr 250 477 Id Nr 254 640 max 40 m a ag The flat connecting cable between
23. Enter NC program with the scanning cycles Range and Meander and the scanning direction X and the probe point interval 1 mm e g 0 BEGIN PGM OPTIDIG MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 10 Blocks 1 to 4 are needed 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 10 for the parallel graphics 3 TOOL DEF 1 L 0 R 4 of the TNC 415 4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S1000 5 TCH PROBE 5 0 RANGE Define the range 6 TCH PROBE 5 1 PGM NAME DIGIDAT to be digitized with 7 TCH PROBE 5 2 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 10 the program name for 8 TCH PROBE 5 3 X 100 Y 100 Z 10 the digitized data and 9 TCH PROBE 5 4 HEIGHT 25 clearance height absolute 10 TCH PROBE 6 0 MEANDER Meander scanning in X 11 TCH PROBE 6 1 DIRECTN X direction with probe point 12 TCH PROBE 6 2 TRAVEL 0 5 L SPAC 1 P P INT 1 and line interval and the 13 END PGM OPTIDIGI MM stroke for clearing steep edges 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 185 2 Optimize the X and Y axes by defining the range such that only the level surface of the component is scanned war Min Optimize the Z axis by defining the range such that mainly the vertical face is scanned 4 186 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 i Procedure for optimizing machine parameters Connect a storage oscilloscope to the nominal command input of the servo amplifier for the X axis In the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode select OPTIDIGI program and operate the external START KEY Machine runs digitizing starts
24. 6 1 Machine datum In the operating modes Manual operation and Electronic handwheel a workpiece datum can be defined NC positioning blocks normally refer to this datum If a positioning block should be referenced to the machine datum instead of the workpiece datum this must be programmed in M91 The distance of the machine datum to the scale datum is entered in machine parameter MP960 x All REF referenced displays and positioning movements are referenced to the machine datum If the NC positioning blocks should always be referenced to the machine datum then the datum setting can be disabled for the individual axes through MP7295 With MP950 x you can define a further machine referenced position If you wish to reference to this position in a positioning block you must program it in with M92 MP950 x defines the distance from this machine referenced position to the machine datum att M91 and M92 are non modal MP7296 can be used to select whether a new datum point can be set with the DATUM SET soft key or additionally with the axis keys 4 126 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 1 Ce Scale reference point RM Reference mark MP950 Datum point for positioning blocks with M92 Entry 99 999 999 to 99 999 999 mm or Values referenced to the machine datum MP950 0 X axis MP950 1 Y axis MP950 2 Z axis MP950 3 Ath axis MP950 4 5th axis MP960 Machine datum Entry 99 999 999
25. Abbreviation for PLC Editor XONI EXCL OR NOT Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 7 to 1 5 0 7 to 1 5 Number of bytes 8 8 Operands none Function of Parentheses with Logic Commands The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses The open parentheses command loads the contents of the Accumulator onto the Program Stack If the Logic Accumulator is addressed in the previous command prior to a parentheses open instruction the content of the Logic Accumulator is loaded into the Program Stack By addressing the Word Accumulator the content of the Word Accumulator will be distributed The close parentheses instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack with the Logic Accumulator and or the Word Accumulator depending on which Accumulator was addressed prior to the parentheses open instruction The result is then available in the corresponding Accumulator The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 81 o Examples for the commands AND AND NOT OR OR NOT EXCLUSIVE OR EXCLUSIVE OR NOT With the use of parentheses an instruction listing may be developed according to the following logic block diagram 012 Initial state Marker M500 Olnput I0 0 Output 012 Marker M501 1Input 11 1 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents bit 31 7 0 x x x x x x Xx x x x x
26. Advanced switch time of spindle for tapping cycle PLC RUN with coded output Entry 0 to 65 535 s 5 32 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7150 Positioning window for tool axis PLC EDIT 4 118 Entry 0 0001 to 2 mm MP7160 Spindle orientation with Cycle 17 4 118 Entry 0 or 1 0 spindle orientation before execution of Cycle 17 1 no spindle orientation before execution of Cycle 17 3 11 Display and operation Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7210 Programming station CN 123 RESET 4 153 Entry 0 1 2 0 Control and programming 1 Programming station PLC active 2 Programming station PLC inactive MP7212 POWER INTERRUPTED PLC RUN 4 155 Entry 0 or 1 CN 123 0 POWER INTERRUPTED message must be acknowledged with CE key 1 no POWER INTERRUPTED message MP7220 Block number increment size for ISO programs En 4 151 Entry 0 to 255 CN 123 MP7222 Filename length PLC RUN 4 150 Entry 0 to 2 CN 123 0 8 characters 1 12 characters 2 16 characters MP7224 0 Disable file type PLC RUN RESET 4 150 Entry XXX XXXXX CN 123 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled i HEIDENHAIN programs i DIN ISO programs i Tool tables i Datum tables i Pallet tables i Text files i Help files i Point tables 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 33 o WWWWWWWW
27. M301 1 active 0 not active L M1 S M304 Submit 1 ready L M1 M1 1 S M2719 start word memory processing S M2495 open activation control loop axis 4 S M2547 open control loop axis 4 EM LBL 292 interrogate Submit RPLY B128 lt gt K 0 EMT SUBM 293 B128 Job identifier EM 4 214 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 01 98 2 LBL 293 read MP430 3 PS K 430 PS K 3 CM 9032 PL D28 Hirth grid L M1 R M302 S M305 Submit 2 ready EM LBL 300 Subprogram for Hirth positioning L M2719 word memory processing started S M3021 PLC error message word memory not opened L M2011 axis 4 in position A M2707 strobe PLC positioning axis 4 not active CMT 30 scalculate nominal grid value left and right CM 360 actual axis 4 in grid spacing Locking and unlocking LN M2011 axis 4 in position not fulfilled S o3 reset lock L M2 axis in grid spacing A M2011 axis 4 in position R O3 lock Close control loop LN M2011 axis 4 in position A 14 lock released AN I6 avis not locked R M2547 Close control loop axis 4 Open control loop L M2 saxis in grid spacing A M2011 axis in position A I6 avis locked AN 14 avis not locked S M2547 open control loop axis 4 R M300 reset activation Hirth UP Close control loop LN 14 lock released AN 16 axis not locked AN M2011 axis in position AN M2547 Control loop axis 4 closed S M2547
28. The USES command links another file to the program The GLOBAL command supplies a jump label from its own file as an entry that can be used by all other files The EXTERN command supplies a jump label defined in another file where it is declared as GLOBAL for use in its own file Splitting the source code up into a number of files helps improve clarity and overview by swapping out individual function groups The number of possible jump labels increases dramatically because the maximum of 1000 jump labels can be used for each individual file This means a theoretical number of 60 000 jump labels for 60 files In all up to 64 files can be linked to form a program Each file can generate up to 64 K of code The total potential length of the code is limited to 128 K TNC 407 64 K Where several files exist the main program must have the status flag M in the directory In the RAM this is done by selecting the PLC program function COMPILE once in the EPROM it is done by specifying the M option after the main program in the Linker file for binary output 3 19 1 USES Instruction The USES instruction links other files to the main program Files linked with USES can also link other files with the USES instruction It is also acceptable for one file to be linked by several other files with USES and code for that file is only generated once The USES instruction requires a file name as its argument Linking files from the RAM is not a
29. gmm 237 524 02 X 6 mm 237 524 15 237 525 07 IL 8mm 23752410 237 525 04 12 pole mm 237 524 06 237 525 01 8mm 237 524 07 237 525 03 Ge 6 mm 237 524 14 237 525 09 8mm 237 524 12 237 525 06 3 28 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 01 98 o Assembly of the connector 237 524 Assembly of the coupling 237 525 he fis Gg gt d fo gg Ee e GY 4 i beem D 3 1a 2a Do not open connector or coupling with a mating connector lt Ga 1b The special assembly tool Id Nr 236 148 01 and a 22 mm spanner are absolutely necessary to assemble the connector 2b An adjustable pipe wrench with plastic jaws is required to assemble the coupling A BCD E F G H K C1 G1 H1 bh E ZYX A1 ace Sl 3 The diagram shows the various component parts of the connector and the coupling and the two different versions of the screw connections for the armoured version PG7 and PG9 The screw connection PG9 with the Id Nr 209 629 01 consisting of the parts X4 Y4 Z must be ordered separately 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 3 29 2 El
30. 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 7 Bit ASCII code 12 3 1 Character a b C d e f g h i j k m n O p q r s t u v w x y z 12 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 7 Bit ASCII code 2 Powers of 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Powers of 2 12 5 1 Subject Index AMIN S eege ege 7 67 MINUS 2 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeee 7 85 factor spindle override 008 4 99 EE 4 140 r EE E EES 4 150 8 18 GMA anemie naiaiae a 4 28 7 161 COM eat aaia 4 28 7 161 8 18 E EE E PEPEE E E EEA 4 150 8 18 Ee 8 18 Eltere eebe ee 8 18 EPR lex e r N 8 18 EE 8 18 E EE 4 150 8 18 ee 4 150 8 18 Kee Ee 8 18 eebe 4 150 8 18 Ee e 8 18 SE 4 150 8 18 J ADINIDE tarcsa iaaa ae ia 7 69 HEIE ADMDET iiuen 7 85 oF bia chia E E E e 7 115 DUU 7 66 1 APLUS T eenegen 7 85 lt lt LESS THAN o esu getnede 7 74 7 119 lt LESS THAN J seess 7 89 lt lt SHIRT LEFT ts cseccsscstescaed ocascetenestere 7 93 g LESS EQUAL scssicsssenstdondesass 7 76 7 120 lt LESS EQUAL II 7 89 lt gt NOT EOUAL ee 7 78 7 121 lt gt NOT EQUAL uo ee 7 90 Eeer 7 116 EE 7 43 EQUAL arruntena ie 7 73 Ge UE 7 119 EQUAL unuara 7 89 gt gt GREATER THANI 7 75 7 120 gt GREATER THAN 7 89 gt GREATER EQUAL 7 120 Se GREATER EQUAL euer 7 77 gt GREATER EQUAL TI 7 90 S gt SHIFT RIGHT riiisg 7 94 1 UE 4 152 UE E 4 152
31. 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 M functions 4 161 2 7 5 Selecting Kv factors with M105 M106 A second set of Kv factors is selected with M function M105 These Kv factors are defined in machine parameters MP1515 x feed precontrol and MP1815 x lag mode Selecting a higher Kv factor can selectively enhance the contour accuracy M105 influences the compensation of reversal spikes during circular movement M105 activates the machine parameters MP715 and MP716 The original set of Kv factors is restored by the M function M106 M functions M105 M106 are enabled by MP7440 Bit 3 MP7440 Activating M functions Entry Xxxxx Bit O Program halt at M06 0 program halt at M06 1 no program halt at MO6 Bit 1 Modal cycle call M89 0 normal code transfer from M89 at start of block 1 modal cycle call M89 at end of block Bit 2 Program run hold with 0 program run hold until feedback of M functions M function 1 no program run hold no waiting for feedback Bit 3 Select Kv factors with 0 function not active M105 M106 1 function active Bit 4 Reduced feed rate in the 0 function not active tools with M108 F 1 function active 4 162 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 M functions 01 98 E Ei 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key
32. 50 0 2 1 969 008 Halter 106 4 17 2 677 008 HOLDER 237 5 Kabellange nach Kundenwunsch CABLE L SE ENGTH AS REQUESTED 01 98 T NC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 89 1 16 7 5 Portable handwheel HR 410 gt gt Hoel EJI ol OO NIN of offe i JAR eromen e Ed IL Jie 311 i 12 244 333 3 90 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 16 7 6 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 for HR 150 58 1 2 28 04 I Es q Ri RE OR 00 y A 5 38 q H l Lo 2 dE 9 le e e T P E Go l kel 35 230 0 2 el gt 9 055 008 E Datenausgang HRA DATA INTERFACE HRA ei A ST Sz ela Masseanschlu amp M5 GROUND CONNECTION M5 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 91 1 16 8 TT 110 for tool calibration
33. Increase the feedrate 1 with the override potentiometer until X nominal command attains maximum value and shows only minor voltage dips axis should just still traverse at even speed ULV Umax Increment MP6230 e g by 10 mm min Are oscillations in normal direction visible stylus tip is seen to lift off workpiece surface Decrement Mp6230 again e g by 10 mm min Repeat optimizing sequence for Y axis Switch the NC program to scanning direction Y 2 1 Keep a note of the maximum feedrate that is possible in the worst axis 2 The optimizing sequence is geared to the worst axis This is bois why the feedrate must not be further Repeat opumizing Sequence Ve ANIS increased with the override Change the scanning range accordingly potentiometer and normal feedrate Pay particular attention to vertical face 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe Ei 4 187 2 Calculation of possible oscillations in normal direction optimised F mm min PP INT 2 mm x 60 s min MP 6210 1 s When the calculated machine parameter MP 6210 is entered the feed override potentiometer is trimmed to the attained feed rate NW Maximum possible feed rate noted during optimizing 2 PP INT is the programmed maximum probe point interval from the Meander scanning cycle in the example PP INT 1 mm 1 4 188 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o 9 3 Digitising with the T
34. MP960 0 X axis MP960 1 Y axis MP960 2 Z axis MP960 3 4th axis MP960 4 5th axis 3 2 Positioning Machine parameter MP1010 via id traverse PLC EDIT 4 70 y 10 to 300 000 mm min 1010 0 Xaxis 1010 1 Y axis 1010 2 Zaxis 1010 3 4th axis 1010 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 13 i Machine parameter MP1020 MP1030 MP1040 MP1050 MP1060 MP1070 via Manual feed Entry 10 to 300 000 mm min MP1020 0 MP1020 1 MP1020 2 MP1020 3 MP1020 4 X axis Y axis Z axis Ath axis 5th axis Positioning window Entry 0 0001 to 2 0000 mm or MP1030 0 MP1030 1 MP1030 2 MP1030 3 MP1030 4 X axis Y axis Z axis Ath axis 5th axis E i E i Polarity of the nominal value voltage for the positive direction of traverse Entry Xxxxx Bit O Axis X 0 positive Bit 1 Axis Y 1 negative Bit 2 Axis Z Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Analogue voltage for rapid traverse Entry 1 000 to 9 000 V MP1050 0 Xaxis MP1050 1 Y axis MP1050 2 Zaxis MP1050 3 4th axis MP1050 4 5th axis Acceleration Entry 0 001 to 5 000 m s2 E i MP1060 0 MP1060 1 MP1060 2 MP1060 3 MP1060 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Radial acceleration Entry 0 001 to 5 000 m s2 E i 9 Kl Page 4 70 4 87 4 8 4 70 4 68 4 80 5 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 Machine pa
35. Select measuring system for position control Entry Xxxxx 0 linear measuring system for position control 1 motor rotary encoder for position control Ratio of grating period LS to ROD Entry 0 1 to 100 MP1960 MP1970 MP1980 MP1955 0 MP1955 1 MP1955 2 MP1955 3 MP1955 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Compensation for reversal spikes Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 MP1960 0 MP1960 1 MP1960 2 MP1960 3 MP1960 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Motion monitor for position and speed Entry 0 to 300 0000 mm 0 no monitor MP1970 0 MP1970 1 MP1970 2 MP1970 3 MP1970 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP Entry 0 to 1 9999 sec 11 10 11 10 11 11 11 11 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 21 3 6 Spindle Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP3010 Spindle speed output Spindle orientation PLC EDIT RESET 4 94 Entry 0 to 8 No spindle speed output BCD coded output of the spindle speed only if the spindle speed changes BCD coded output of the spindle speed at every TOOL CALL Analogue output of the spindle speed but gear change signal only if the gear range changes Analogue output of the spindle speed and gear change signal at every TOOL CALL Analogue output of the spindle speed and no gear change signal As for entry value 3 bu
36. The internal EMERGENCY STOP shutdown of the TNCs is tested when the supply voltage is switched on i e the supply voltage to each processor is turned off for a short time Suitable protective circuitry must be used to ensure that the positioning module is not ready for operation if the NC test reveals an error i e the voltage for the feedback is mutually interrupted This can be achieved by the circuit illustrated The test starts when the control voltage is switched on LE 407 415 Switch opens for a short time when control voltage to each processor is turned on X41 34 X44 2 X44 1 X42 4 N A A i Control is 24V not 24V Feedback ready interruptible interruptible Control ready EMERGENCY STOP buttons 7 Control L voltage k1 on L k3 LE 234 003 Switch opens for a short time when control voltage to each processor is turned on X41 34 X44 2 X44 1 X42 4 FN A AN IN Control is 24V not 24V Feedback ready interruptible interruptible Control ready EMERGENCY STOP buttons f k1 Control 24 V voltage PLC Qn K1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 10 5 L 1 4 Reference signal evaluation After reference signal evaluation of the NC axes reference signal evaluation of the PLC axes of the positioning module must be initiated either automatically e g by NC Start or manually by special keys PLC positioning i
37. i Function and input Change Reaction parameter via MP6270 Rounding of decimal places PLC RUN Entry 0 to 2 CN 123 O Output in 0 001 mm increments 1 um 1 Output in 0 01 mm increments 10 um 2 Output in 0 0001 mm increments 0 1 um 3 9 2 Digitizing with TM 110 only with digitizing option Page 4 181 Machine Function and input oe Reaction Page parameter MP6310 Stylus deflection depth measuring touch probe Entry 0 1000 to 2 0000 mm MP6320 Counting direction of the measuring system signals measuring touch probe Entry xxx BitO Xaxis Positive Bit 1 Y axis Negative Bit2 Zaxis MP6321 Measuring the centre offset while calibrating the TM110 Entry 0 or 1 0 Calibrate and measure centre offset 1 Calibrate without measuring centre offset MP6322 Assignment of touch probe axes to the machine axes Entry 0 to 2 O Touch probe axis X 1 Touch probe axis Y 2 Touch probe axis Z MP6322 0 Machine axis X MP6322 1 Machine axis Y MP6322 2 Machine axis Z MP6330 Maximum stylus deflection measuring touch probe Entry 0 1 to 4 000 mm MP6350 Feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and contour approach Measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6360 Probing feed rate measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6361 Rapid traverse in scanning cycle measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 10 000 mm min 5 30 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters
38. 0 Memory test at switch on 1 No memory test at switch on 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 47 o 1 List of markers The markers listed in italics have been retained to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 It is recommended however that these functions be activated through the new word functions Marker Function Set Reset Page M2000 4 89 M2001 4 89 M2002 4 89 M2003 4 89 M2004 4 97 M2005 4 97 M2007 4 108 M2008 4 90 M2009 4 90 M2010 4 90 M2011 4 90 M2012 Lubrication pulse X axis since value of MP4060 0 NC C 4 20 was exceeded SEH M2013 Lubrication pulse Y axis since value of MP4060 1 NC C 4 20 was exceeded EE d M2014 _ Lubrication pulse Z axis since value of MP4060 2 NC NC 4 20 was exceeded RER M2015 Lubrication pulse 4th axis since value of MP4060 3 NC C 4 20 was exceeded K scht M2016 4 89 M2017 4 90 M2018 4 148 M2019 4 148 M2022 Touch probe system not ready ready signal missing on NC C 4 178 connector X12 or signals from TM are faulty Sa EN M2023 4 178 M2025 4 178 M2026 4 178 M2027 Battery voltage too low battery warning on connector X12 NC NC 4 178 is evaluated only during the probe operation ee M2029 Lubrication pulse 5 axis since value of MP4060 4 NC NC 4 20 accu etc M2032 NC__ 7 177 M2033 NC 7177 M2034 7 155 M2035 7 155 M2036 7 155 M2037 7 155 M2038 7 155 M2039 7 155 M2041 4 153 M2042 4 95 M2043 4 101 M2044 4 1
39. 1 Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible 2 Enter the max feed rate for machining For axes which are mutually interpolated the k factor must be the same In this case the worst axis determines the entry value 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 265 o 1 Kink point Check multiplicatjon factor for the kv MP1820 0 1 and kink point ax machining feed rate x 100 Rapid traverse Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer of the servo amplifier of the X axis Enter following program in PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode LBL 1 X 1001 RO F MAX X 0 ROF MAX CALL LBL 1 REP 100 100 Press external START button in PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating mode machine runs y Does tacho signal overshoot U V t s YES NO Reduce MP1820 multiplication factor progressively until Kink point is not required overshoot disappears Repeat trimming procedure for axes Y Z IV and V 1 Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible 4 266 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 o 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 42
40. 3 3 248 4 4 247 5 5 246 6 6 245 7 7 244 8 8 243 9 9 242 10 10 241 11 11 240 12 12 239 X9 Pin number Assignment Assignment PL 400 1 PL 400 2 Do not use Do not use Do not use 3 58 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 01 98 L f 11 3 4 PLC inputs outputs on the PL 410 PL 410B X3 Pin number a CO CO N Oypor A oN gt hh 5 Oto eA Ww NM fo X5 Pin number 3 CO CO NW MPC BY CO NM sf so o 35 Oo EiGoika Alc These PLC inputs are not available when analogue inputs are active Assignment PL 410B 1 PL 410 1 164 Lis 165 Lie 166 1194 167 gp 168 n96 leo 1197 70 gg 71 Lg 172 1200 731201 174 1202 175 1203 76 1204 77 1205 78 1206 79 1207 Assignment PL 410B 1 PL 410 1 196 1224 197 1225 198_ 7 199 227 moo 1228 m01 1229 102 1280 1mos 1231 104 1282 05 2 06 1234 107 226 108 1236 m09 1287 mio i238 pnn 1239 PL410B 2 PL 410 2 PL 410 B 2 PL 410 2 X4 Pin number COJN Oypor BR GNM gt X6 Pin number CO N Oyo AJOIN gt Assignment PL 410B 1 PL 410 1 1208 180 181 1209 182 1210 83 121 s4 L ae e621 87 8 ies 2 IECH 190 2 91 i219 192 1220 193 1221 194 1222 195 1223 COFN DM or A OPM Assignment PL 410B 1 PL 410 1 112 1240 isa n14 242 n15 1243 mie L 117 1245 118 1246
41. BC 110 B Visual display unit PL 410B max 2 PLC I O boards optional The TNC 407 is not subject to export restrictions An export version is not required Logic unit LE 415 B Id Nr 267 223 LE 407 A Id Nr 264 430 TNC keyboard VDU TE 400 Id Nr 250 517 03 BC 110 B Id Nr 260 520 01 Joined to the logic unit via 14 inch colour VDU with soft keys connecting cable Joined to the logic unit and the TNC keyboard via connecting cable H 9 o o fe o ft O O we oo o o o o o o 3 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware components 01 98 o PLC I O unit Option PL 410 B without analog inputs PL 410 B with analog inputs Id Nr 263 371 12 Id Nr 263 371 02 64 PLC inputs 56 PLC inputs 31 PLC outputs 29 PLC outputs 1 Control is operational output 4 analog inputs 10V 4 inputs for Pt 100 thermistors 1 Control is operational output Connected with the logic unit by cable No more than two PL 410B can be connected to the LE a PLC analog board Option PA 110 Id Nr 262 651 01 Connected with the logic unit via cable or with the first PL
42. Call after program started Control not in correct mode Pallet file not found No such line in pallet file Wrong type of NC program or point missing NC program not found NC program name not clear Datum table not found OO JO Oo P Obh zz CH Error status after call M3171 0 Files were selected 1 Error condition as Status word 4 7 2 Tool and Datum Table Module 9092 9093 9094 Module 9092 Searching for an entry in tables selected for machining T D TCH With Module 9092 values can be sought in specific columns in a table with M status set selected for machining The function supplies the number of the line in which the value is found This makes it possible for example to search for the vacant pocket corresponding to TO in the pocket table TCH Constraints The module can only run within a SUBMIT Job The value must be entered as an integer shifted by the number of definable places after the decimal point If the value is to be sought again the starting line must be entered as the line in which the value was found plus one Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job There is no file of the specified type that has M status The specified line number is not in the file The specified file type does not exist The specified element does not exist The entered numerical value was not found Call PS BAW D K lt File type gt PS B W D K Element val
43. D540 Datum correction for IV axis D544 Datum correction for V axis Marker Function M2716 Strobe marker for datum correction f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 14 Datum correction 4 221 e PLC example Datum correction with M20 activated with M21 deactivated LN M2045 S M10 L M1920 A M2045 M20 activated A M10 Buffered marker for strobe marker 2716 CMT 200 Datum correction call R M10 L M1921 A M2045 M21 activated S M10 Buffered marker for strobe marker 2716 C 201 Deactivate datum correction call R M10 L M1920 O M1921 A M2045 AN M2716 S M2482 Feedback for M20 and M21 EM End of main program LBL 200 Activate module for datum correction L D896 Value from MP4210 32 D528 Shift X axis L KO Do not shift Y Z 4th and 5th axis D532 D536 D540 D544 L M10 S M2716 Activate datum compensation EM LBL 201 Deactivate module for datum correction L D900 Value from MP4210 33 D528 Shift X axis L KO Do not shift Y Z 4th and 5th axis D532 D536 D540 D544 L M10 S M2716 Activate datum correction EM 4 222 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 14 Datum correction 01 98 e 15 Tool changer A tool changer can be operated with the PLC of the HEIDENHAIN contouring control If the tool changer is to have servo controlled axes this must be done using a positioning module see chapter Positioning Module However it is possible to control a tool changer by simple proximity switches Tool data a
44. Example Input 14 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to Output O2 Initial state Input 14 0 Input I5 0 Output 02 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 Met H 0 1 L4 o 2 ON IS E 3 02 Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR NOT Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 59 o Word execution with the OR NOT command Operands B W D K Operation The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand B W D K are gated with OR NOT In accordance with the different sizes of operand B 8 bit W 16 bit D K 32 bit 8 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator Thus Bit O in the Accumulator is gated with bit O in the operand Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator Example The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to Word W8 Initial state Word W4 36 AA hex Word W6 3C 36 hex Word W8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit Sts 15 7 0 15 87 0 OX KX XXX XXX x x x xxx xxx 1 L W6 00001 1110000110110 00111100 00110110 2 ON W4 we Cr D 1 7 a 1 0 1 0 1 1 10111 00110110 10101010 3 W8 1111111101 011
45. HEIDENHAIN Technical Manual TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 Valid for the NC software types 259 96 TNC 415 A 259 97 TNC 415 E 243 02 TNC 407 up to version 09 and 259 93 TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 94 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 243 03 TNC 407 up to version 12 and 280 54 TNC 415 B TNC 425 280 56 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 280 58 TNC 407 up to version 06 208 732 E2 January 98 208 732 21 6 5 1 98 S Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice D Preface This Technical Manual is intended for manufacturers and distributors of machine tools It contains all the necessary information for the assembly electrical installation start up and PLC programming for the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls When hardware or software is improved in these HEIDENHAIN contouring controls you will receive a free delivery of updated information Please arrange and insert this updated information in your manual without delay This will ensure that your manual always remains at the current revision level You can use extracts from this manual for your machine documentation An enlargement of the manual format 17 cm x 24 cm by a factor of 1 225 will produce pages in DIN A4 format No documentation can be perfect Like all living things it must grow and change Among other things it lives from your impulses and suggestions for improvement Please help us by letting us know your ideas DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Depar
46. ILE NAME NOT PROGRAM NAME ame of NC program and name of file do not match ZT vu ROGRAM INCOMPLETE C program does not contain an end block el ROTECTED FILE ile which is protected with read only or hidden attribute is likely to be overwritten n DATA CARRIER IS FULL Data carrier gt lt full A precise description of this software is given in the Operating Manual of the transmission software 8 50 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Error messages 01 98 o OEM cycles Contents 1 Creating OEM cycles 1 1 Dialog block with DLG DEF or DLG CALL 1 2 Q parameters and functions in OEM cycles 2 Dialogs for OEM cycles 3 Output in binary code 4 Bolt hole circle OEM cycle example 5 OEM cycles in NC programs 5 1 Calls ina HEIDENHAIN dialog program 5 2 Calls ina DIN ISO program 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 11 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Creating OEM cycles OEM cycles customized macros are programmed in the HEIDENHAIN dialog as NC programs By using these cycles in machining programs created in the HEIDENHAIN dialog or in accordance with DIN ISO repetitive machining tasks or machine specific functions can be executed via a single call Execution of the OEM cycles can be affected by parameter transfer Up to 32 different OEM cycles with a maximum of 128 different customer specific dialog texts can be produced tested and stored in the NC program memory In order not to tie up the NC program mem
47. M2600 The PLC must evaluate and acknowledge both pocket numbers tool numbers The logic diagrams for the nine different tool change sequences are shown on the following pages activated by TOOL CALL 4 232 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 2 N N Normal tool follows Normal tool The pocket number and tool number of the called tool are transferred M2046 on GE 0 1 M2483 0 1 M2093 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No new N W264 Tool No new N 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 233 1 S gt N Normal tool follows Special tool With this toolchange two pocket numbers or tool numbers must be transferred in succession M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe M2046 follows With M2600 the PLC can determine the sequence in which the pocket numbers are transferred The decision will depend on whether a single or double changing arm is in use S gt N Single Changing Arm M2600 0 The pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number O tells the PLC to clear the spindle After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred M2046 0 M2483 0 M2093 0 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No S Pocket No N W264 Tool No Tool No N
48. M2891 M2892 M2897 inhibit 4 168 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 01 98 2 le ek DI inhibit 111 PLC PLC E D e e o o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 4 169 1 Key code for the alphabetic keyboard aal PO Hex ASCII key code see Appendix Key code for the soft key row on the screen xx51 Hex xx results as follows GB ovo vu 08 00 01 02 03 04 Key code for changeover keys at right of screen xx52 Hex xx results as follows a GRAPHICS 01 TEXT SPLIT SCREEN Code for soft key functions 0000 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 Hex INTERNAL STOP Hex M M function Hex S S function Hex TOUCH PROBE Hex PASS OVER REFERENCE Hex RESTORE POSITION OA 4 170 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 01 98 2 f Example If the Positions transfer key is pressed in the operating mode Positioning with manual entry linear NC block with all three principal coordinates X Y Z is to be generated 66 CASE W272 Interrogate operating mode 70 CM 3 Positioning with manual entry 75 ENDC 1102 EM End main program 1103 LBL 3 Operating mode Positioning with manual entry 1104 L M10 Key simulation active 1105 SN M2896 No then disable Positions transfer key 1106 L M2182 Disabled key operated 1107
49. Number 1st byte destination block gt PS B IW D K lt Length of block in bytes gt CM 9001 Transfer in word range Error status after call M3171 0 Block was transferred 1 Error conditions see above 7 136 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 1 2 Read in Word Range Module 9010 9011 9012 A byte word or doubleword is read from the defined position in the word memory and returned to the stack as an output variable Indexed reading in the memory is possible by specifying a variable as the name of the memory cell Possible errors The defined address is outside the valid range 0 1023 Module 9011 The defined address is not a word address not divisible by 2 Module 9012 The defined address is not a doubleword address not divisible by 4 Call PS B W D K CM 9010 PL B or PS B W D K CM 9011 PL W or PS B W D K CM 9012 PL D lt Number of byte to be read gt read byte lt byte read gt lt Number of word to be read gt read word lt word read gt lt Number of doubleword to be read gt read doubleword lt doubleword read gt Example of Module 9010 Wortspeicher STACK B10 B35 B100 Error status after call M3171 Address Value Address Value Address Value PS B10 CM9010 PL B100 0 Byte word doubleword was read 1 Error condition see above 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 137 i 4 1 3 Wr
50. PL Line Instruction STRING Accumulator 1 129 1 L S HYDRAULICS HI Y D R IA U L II ICIS 2 50 H y o rfajulcliicisfoip 3 OVWR S1 H YIDIRJAJUJLIIICIS Otfe Final condition _ _128 SO OJI IL S1 NIO HIYIDIRIA IUIL I ICISOIL IL S2 S3 Line 1 Load the immediate STRING into the STRING accumulator Line 2 The contents of the STRING memory SO is added to the contents of the STRING accumulator Line 3 The STRING accumulator overwrites the contents of the STRING memory S1 El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 117 L 7 118 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 15 Logical Comparisons in STRING Execution Two STRINGS are compared according to the argument as follows If STRING memory or Immediate STRING are entered in the command both STRINGS are compared character for character The Logic Accumulator is reset after the first character for which the comparison conditions are not fulfilled The remaining characters are checked no further For the purposes of comparison the number of the character in the ASCII table is always used This results in for example A lt B AA gt A If PLC Error messages or PLC Dialogue texts are entered the position in the file 0 to 4095 is compared not the act
51. reference end position is necessary This trip dog must be fixed at the end of the traverse range by the manufacturer of the machine The trigger signal from the trip dog is connected to an available PLC input In the PLC program this PLC input is combined with the markers for Reference end position M2506 M2556 to M2559 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4 53 e f 2 1 1 Measuring systems with distance coded reference marks Machine parameter MP1350 x 3 Reference marks Reference end closed postion trip dog open ls Traverse dirction MP1320 4 54 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 o Sequence Automatic passing over reference marks press the external START key MP1350 x 3 Press the external START key Trip dog Reference end position closed Yes Machine traverse in direction from MP1320 x Machine traverses in inverted direction from MP1320 x Trip dog Reference end position is closed before reference mark is passed over Two successive reference marks are traversed Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Yes Machine moves to No software limit switch Machine stops 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4 55 2 Machine parameter MP1350 x 0 EE Reference marks Trip dog Closed Reference end position Open EE WE Traverse direction M
52. 0 Datum point is workpiece datum 1 Datum point is machine datum 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 151 o 6 10 User parameters With the MOD function up to 16 different machine parameters can be made accessible to the machine operator as User parameters The machine manufacturer determines in machine parameter MP7330 x which machine parameters are to be defined as User parameters If for example you wish to define MP5030 1 as the first user parameter you must enter the value 5030 01 in MP 7330 0 If a User parameter is selected by the operator a dialogue appears on the screen Machine parameter MP7340 X determines which dialogue should be displayed A line number from the PLC dialogues is defined with an entry value between 0 and 4095 see PLC description MP7330 Determination of the User Parameters Entry range 0 to 9999 00 No of the desired machine parameters MP7330 0 User parameter 0 MP7330 1 User parameter 1 MP7330 14 User parameter 14 MP7330 15 User parameter 15 MP7340 Dialogues for User parameter Entry 0 to 4095 line number of the PLC dialogs MP7340 0 Dialogue for User parameter 0 MP7340 1 Dialogue for User parameter 1 MP7340 14 Di MP7340 15 Di D ogue for User parameter 14 ogue for User parameter 15 D 6 11 Code numbers The MOD functions can be used to enter code numbers for the control These code numbers can be used to activate certain control functio
53. 3 56 3 56 3 56 3 57 3 59 3 60 3 60 3 61 3 61 3 61 3 62 3 62 3 62 3 63 3 63 3 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 01 98 2 f 12 Machine control panel 3 65 12 1 Pin connections 3 66 12 2 Connecting cable 3 67 13 TNC keyboard 3 68 13 1 Pin connections 3 68 13 2 Connecting cable 3 69 14 VDU 3 70 14 1 Pin connections 3 70 14 2 Connecting cable 3 70 14 3 Connecting the BC 120 3 71 15 Cable overview 3 72 16 Dimensions 3 74 16 1 LE 407 3 74 16 2 LE 415 3 75 16 3 TE 400 3 76 16 4 BC110B 3 77 16 5 PLC expansion boards 3 78 16 6 Cable adapters 3 81 16 7 Handwheels 3 84 16 7 1 HR 130 integral handwheel 3 84 16 7 2 HR 150 3 87 16 7 3 Portable handwheel HR 330 3 88 16 7 4 Portable handwheel HR 332 3 89 16 7 5 Portable handwheel HR 410 3 90 16 7 6 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 for HR 150 3 91 16 8 TT 110 for tool calibration 3 92 16 9 B 410 3 93 16 10 MB 420 3 94 16 11 TE 400 B 3 95 16 12 BC 120 3 96 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware components The TNC 415B consists of the following hardware components LE 415B Logic unit TE 400 TNC keyboard BC 110 B Visual display unit PL 410B max 2 PLC I O boards optional The export version which is offered is the TNC 415 F In the TNC 415 F an LE 415F is delivered in place of the LE 415B The export software is built into the LE 415 F The TNC 407 consists of the following hardware components LE 407 A Logic unit TE 400 TNC keyboard
54. 4 6 Graphics display teia aia 4 133 Graphics wipdonn 4 132 GREATER THAN ei 7 75 7 120 GREATER THAN GI 7 89 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt 7 120 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt 7 77 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOLI gt I 7 90 Gross positioning erfor eeeeeeeeee 4 84 Gross positioning error A 4 85 Gross positioning error H 4 86 Gross positioning error Ce 4 86 Gross positioning error D 4 87 Gross positioning error E 4 77 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 13 5 be EE 7 27 HE 7 27 e e EE 7 27 IAS AISI Geteste eis Eier 7 123 R Elle 3 6 IF ELSE ENDI Structure 7 128 Immediate GTDING 7 119 Increment POSItIONING eeeeeeeeeee 4 209 INDEX Regester 7 112 Infrared transmission 3 36 4 176 Inhibited K nne deet enk 4 165 INPUts hea eben dE th cece edhe 7 18 INPUT TFEQUENCY deel hode ninin 3 25 INSTRUCTION NOT ALLOWED 8 50 Integral component cece eee 4 75 Integral faCtOFr in iuri 4 78 4 272 Interface EE 8 3 INTERFACE ALREADY ASSIGNED 8 48 Interface elechronics 3 36 4 176 Interference SOUICES cc ceeeceeeeeeeeeeseees 3 9 INTERNAL STOP scesersctinsticastenskersieeuties 4 148 INTE ee Tel 2 3 Interpolation and digitising electronics EXE u un 3 26 Interpolation factOr EE 4 7 Interpolation factor for handwheel 4 196 POAC EE 3 13 SE GER ER 4 12 J JOG elle GEN 4 101 JPF JUMP IF FALSE 000 c ee 7 105 JPT JUMP IF TRUE
55. 99 999 9999 mm The override adjustment in 2 steps was dropped The minimum input value for MP6130 was changed to 1 mm and for MP6140 to 0 001 mm MP440 was dropped Mid program startup block scan now works for ISO programs during blockwise transfer with simultaneous execution New Module 9035 TNC 415 A 259 96x 05 TNC 415 E 259 97x 05 TNC 407 243 02x 05 Release 5 92 New functions The input value 4 was added to MP7480 The distance D to an auxiliary point with the coordinates PDX and PDY is now entered without algebraic sign TNC 415 A 259 96x 06 TNC 415 E 259 97x 06 TNC 407 243 02x 06 Release 9 92 New functions Electronic Handwheel mode A new marker 2826 has been introduced Setting this marker disables the evaluation of the counting pulses received by the handwheel The handwheel cannot be used to position when the marker is set Transfer values to PLC umerical values can be entered in the new machine parameters MP4230 00 to MP4230 31 and MP4231 0 to MP4231 31 which the PLC can read with module 9032 MP4230 0 to MP4230 31 Transfer value to PLC with module 9032 MP4231 0 to MP4231 31 Entry 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 DIN ISO Programming The maximum permitted length of an NC block in DIN ISO has been increased from 130 to 150 characters 1 2 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 E TNC 415 A 259 96x 07 TNC 415 E 259 97x 07 TNC 407 243 02x 07 Rel
56. Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 36 hex Word W8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 15 87 0 XX XXX XxX xX xX X X X xX xX xX xX xX xX 1 L Pe 0000000000 0 0110110 00110110 2 O85 0000000000 0 0111110 00101010 3 W8 0000000000f0 0111110 00000000 00111110 Line 1 The contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with OR Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Word W8 7 58 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f 3 3 4 OR NOT ON Abbreviation for the PLC Editor ON OR NOT Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 9 0 5 to 0 9 0 5 to 0 9 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 8 8 10 Logic execution with the OR NOT command Operands M O T C Operation This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program a At the start of a logic chain this command functions as an LN command i e the complement of the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 control which did not have the special LN command In PLC programs for the TNC 407 TNC 415 a logic chain should always be started with a load command see L LN L Di Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand M O T C are gated with OR NOT The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator
57. D el g 180 5 PL Ausg nge 7402 s PL OUTPUTS MasseanschlufS M5 GROUND CONNECTION M5 PL 410 B 282 8 P TIT WIR 23 5 235 0 2 93 P 9 252 008 gt 18 0 5 52 5 Poz or io 3 PL Eingange 140 5 47 5 We GE PL INPUTS 044 02 487 y A i n Pe a J E GE IS DIAS RA COTO LITT Titi tit titi We Dr eco i F OO sh S Zo d ll 18 se se db 3 Sei e e H e TTT E Op 180 5 p p PL Ausg nge 7 02 PL OUTPUTS Masseanschluf M5 GROUND CONNECTION M5 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions PA 110 1 5 0 5 06 02 MasseanschluR M5 GROUND CONNECTION A 42 1 1 65 04 205 1 gt R 30 vA 8 07 04 118 y IT k ee as g S SS s L S S x A D DDD DDDDDWDDD D D 140 0 2 9 512 008 Montageschiene nach DIN 50022 32 5 MOUNTING SPAR AS PER DIN 50022 1 28 2 600 2 2 362 008 16 5 D I 3 80 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 L Ei 16 6 Cable adapters Cable adapter for TS 120 Id Nr 244 891 8 80 315 y 955 DIA2 165 1 575 G47 240 3 DIA1 858 012 2 047 Cable adapter for HR 330 Id Nr 249 889 936 DIA1 417 Mounting opening for wall thickness S lt 4 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 81 i Cable adapter for TM 110 I
58. E HOO0O HR 330 ls OO 251534 VL Dm Sg 889 Cable assembly VB 289 111 262 006 281 429 max 20 m_ HR 150 Sei 909 a HR 150 hie 261 097 01 Meier H Y Y ro p 257 061 RS 422 C Adapter block J LE 415 B k 249 819 01 Step switch a 208 ess 270 308 LE 407 l mu TNC 415 1 input Ces VB TNC 407 2 inputs 239 760 Included with FE Lt 545 01 nnan EE FE 401 B EE 251 029 01 RS 232 C Adapter block 262 006 Connection box 284 574 TM 110 251 249 01 284 212 LE 415B orly 50m Ma temi TT 110 262 004 288 949 KA VB VB 274 543 e 290 109 244 005 W gt 55 Ki TS 120 VB VB 265 348 262 011 290 110 263 954 D T D E VB APE 510 227 590 01 SE 510 274 539 APE 511 275 759 01 230 473 01 20m 40m max 30m 3m 15 pin male connector Di 37 pin male connector a B Gs max 7m ec VB 243 971 ZY 243 937 ZY we TS 511 265 349 Ee Nominal value PLC 1 0 214540 age output TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Cable overview 3 72 New ID numbers for connecting cables Connecting cable Old Id Nr New Id Nr LE BC 110B LE BC 110 B extension LE encoder LE encoder LE encoder LE encoder 262 011 Connector male 15 pin 243 971 ZY Connector male 37 pin 243 937 ZY 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Cable overview 3 73 i vL azy ONL SLY ONL LOv ONL SUOISUBUIG QL 8
59. ETB End of Text Block ETB terminates a data transfer block The character that follows ETB BCC is used for data checking DCH Start data transfer GON DC1 starts the transfer of data DC3 Stop data transfer XOFF DC3 stops the transfer of data ETX End of Text ETX is transmitted at the end of a program EOT Transmission EOT terminates the data transfer and establishes the idle state The character is transmitted by the TNC at the end of a program input and to the external device in the event of an error ACK Positive checkback ACK is transmitted by the receiver Acknowledge when a data block has transferred without error NAK Negative checkback Not NAK is transmitted by the receiver Acknowledge when a data block has transferred with an error The transmitter must re transmit the block 8 38 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o Example To upload a Pallet file with the name PPP to a peripheral device e g FE 401 FE 401 Transmission path TNC lt SOH gt lt L gt PPP lt A gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt i lt ACK gt lt STX gt 1st line lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt WM lt ACK gt gt an lt STX gt 10th line lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt 4 lt NAK gt D lt STX gt 10th line lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt Id lt ACK gt Di lt STX gt 11th line lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt M lt ACK gt MN
60. Entry 0 to 5 O Main axis 1 Axis tracked to X axis 2 Axis tracked to Y axis 3 Axis tracked to Z axis 4 Axis tracked to 4th axis 5 Axis tracked to 5th axis MP850 0 MP850 1 MP850 2 MP850 3 MP850 4 Synchronization monitoring Entry 0 to 100 0000 mm 0 Monitoring inactive MP855 0 MP855 1 MP855 2 MP855 3 MP855 4 Datum for synchronization control Entry 0 or 1 0 Datum at position upon switch on 1 Datum at reference marks machine datum MP860 0 MP860 1 MP860 2 MP860 3 MP860 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis PLC EDIT g 4 49 PLC EDIT 8 4 50 PLC EDIT E 4 50 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 11 parameter via MP910 Traverse range 1 PLC EDIT 4 16 Default setting after switch on ivated by PLC M2817 0 M2816 0 Software limit switch X Software limit switch Y Software limit switch Z Software limit switch 4 Software limit switch 5 MP911 Traverse range 2 PLC EDIT 4 16 ivated by PLC M2817 0 M2816 1 Software limit switch X Software limit switch Y Software limit switch Z Software limit switch 4 Software limit switch 5 MP912 Traverse range 3 PLC EDIT 4 17 ivated by PLC M2817 1 M2816 0 MP912 0 Software limit switch X MP912 1 Software limit switch Y MP912 2 Software limit switch Z MP912 3 Software l
61. Entry 0 to 65 535 0 to FFFF 0 not disabled 1 disabled i Cycle 16 i Cycle 17 i Cycle 18 i Cycle 19 i Cycle 20 i Cycle 21 i Cycle 22 i Cycle 23 i Cycle 24 i Cycle 25 i Cycle 26 i Cycle 27 i Cycle 28 i Cycle 29 i Cycle 30 i Cycle 31 Disable paraxial positioning blocks PLC RUN 4 155 Entry 0 or 1 O paraxial positioning blocks enabled 1 paraxial positioning blocks disabled 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 35 o 1 Machine parameter MP7250 MP7251 MP7260 MP7261 MP7264 MP7266 via Difference between Q parameter numbers for PLC RUN 9 5 DLG CALL block and DLG DEF block in OEM cycle Entry 0 to 50 Number of global Q parameters transferred from PLC RUN 9 5 OEM cycle to calling program Entry 0 to 100 Entry 0 to 254 Entry 0 to 254 Entry 0 to 3 Zz ZZZ Z Z SE E E E E E E E E E E E Items in tool table CN 123 Entry 0 to 99 0 No display 1 to 99 Position in tool table P7266 0 Tool name NAME P7266 1 Tool length L P7266 2 Tool radius R P7266 3 Tool radius 2 R2 P7266 4 Oversize tool length DL P7266 5 Oversize tool radius DR P7266 6 Oversize tool radius 2 DR2 P7266 7 Tool locked TL P7266 8 Replacement tool RT P7266 9 TIME 1 P7266 10 TIME 2 P7266 11 CURRENT TIME P7266 12 Commentary on the tool DOC P7266 13 No of tool cutting edges CUT P7266 14 Wear tolerance for tool length LTOL P7266 15 Wear tolerance for
62. Input O or 1 0 TS 120 1 TS 511 MP6200 Selection between triggering or measuring touch probe Entry 0 or 1 O Triggering touch probe e g TS 120 1 Measuring touch probe e g TM 110 MP6120 Probing feed rate triggering touch probe Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6360 Probing feed rate measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6130 Maximum measuring range Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6140 Setup clearance above measuring point Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6150 Rapid traverse in probing cycle triggering touch probe Entry 10 to 10000 mm min 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 177 e MP6321 Measuring the centre offset when calibrating the TM 110 Entry 0 or 1 0 Calibration with measuring the centre offset 1 Calibration without measuring the centre offset MP6361 Rapid traverse in the touch probe cycle measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 10 000 mm min MP6160 Spindle orientation 180 rotation Entry 1 to 88 1 Spindle orientation directly through NC 0 Function not active 1 to 88 Number of the M function for spindle orientation by PLC MP7411 Tool data in touch probe block Entry O or 1 O With the touch probe block the current tool data are overwritten with the calibrated data of the probe system 1 The current tool data are retained even with a touch probe block Marker Function Set Reset M2502 NC STOP with deflected stylus in all modes not TS 511
63. MP712 0 MP712 1 MP712 2 MP712 3 MP712 4 X axis Y axis Z axis Ath axis 5th axis Compensation for reversal spikes in circular interpolation M105 Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm MP715 0 MP715 1 MP715 2 MP715 3 MP715 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Compensation per control loop cycle time M105 Entry 0 000000 to 99 999999 mm MP716 0 MP716 1 MP716 2 MP716 3 MP716 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Linear axis error compensation Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm m MP720 0 MP720 1 MP720 2 MP720 3 MP720 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Selection of linear or non linear axis error Change Reaction Page via PLC RUN PLC RUN PLC RUN PLC EDIT 4 25 4 25 4 26 4 26 4 31 compensation Entry XXXXX Linear axis error compensation Non linear axis error compensation X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis 0 not active 1 active PLC EDIT 5 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 f Machine parameter MP810 MP850 MP855 MP860 Function and input Page via Display mode for rotary axes and PLC auxiliary axes Entry 0 0000 to 9 999 9999 0 Display 99 999 9999 software limit switch active 0 Modulo value display software limit switch not active MP810 0 MP810 1 MP810 2 MP810 3 MP810 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis PLC EDIT i 4 135 Synchronized axes
64. PAGE INSERT DELETE NEXT HEAD TABLE TABLE D tT LINE LINE LINE LINE The ballscrew pitch error in Z Z F Z is entered in file AXIS Z COM Ge tion COMPENSATION VALUE TABLE COMPENSATION VALUE FILE ACHSE 2 MM DATUM 200 DIST3iG K Y Z UV 232 6784 71248 25712 0176 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE INSERT DELETE NEXT HEAD TABLE TABLE D ff LINE LINE LINE LINE 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes Ei 4 29 e Then the files AXIS Y COM and AXIS Z COM are assigned to the Y and Z axis respectively in a file of the CMA type e g CONFIG CMA COMPENSATION VALUE TABLE OPERATION FILE KONE IG ACHSE Y ACHSE Z ACHSE Z SET CLEAR ACTIV ACTIV LINE LINE A number of different assignments can be entered in the CONFIG CMA file if required Only one line can be active at any one time The active line is selected by soft key In our example this must be line 0 4 30 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 2 Input and output of the correction tables via the data interface The CMA and COM files can be uploaded and downloaded via the data interface in the PLC Programming mode The CMA file is assigned the extension S and the COM file the extension V An axis of rotation is a special case With an axis of rotation the system only recognizes corrections of entries from 0 to 360 Correction table with code number 105 296 In the interest of compatibility we have retained the entry of correctio
65. PLC PLC M2503 Enable marker for probing functions NC PLC M2022 Touch probe not ready no standby signal at connector X12 NC NC or signals from TM 110 are faulty M2023 Stylus deflected before start of probing cycle NC NC M2025 Stylus deflected probing sequence is executed NC PLC M2026 Probing sequence ended or interrupted NC NC M2027 Low battery voltage battery warning at connector X12 NC NC only evaluated during the probing sequence M2499 Open the spindle control loop PLC PLC M2127 Spindle in motion NC NC 4 178 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 e Example Enable of probing function in the PLC 489 LN 19 19 0 gt TS not in holder 490 M2502 _ stop if stylus deflected 491 f 492 L M2503 493 AN 19 494 R M2503 acknowledge probing cycle 495 496 497 safety function 498 M03 M04 deactivate if TS not in holder 499 500 L M2485 MO3 activated 501 O M2486 M04 activated 502 AN 9 touch probe not in holder 503 S M2487 display M05 504 R M2485 deactivate M03 505 R M2486 deactivate M04 506 R M922 clear buffered marker M03 507 R M923 _ clear buffered marker M04 508 R M2488 NC stop 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 179 i 9 2 Digitizing with TS 120 Digitizing is possible with all HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes However because the digitizing process can take several hours to complete it is advisable to use the TS 120 touch probe with signal transmission by cable The
66. Prob SVST6Miiteceiie sae a a tii 2 19 Probing drecton 4 192 Probing feed rate 0cceee 4 176 4 177 hid vec e eegene 4 180 4 191 4 192 Processing time 0 0 Program Gr atiop sare a aaa PROGRAM INCOMPLETE PROGRAM INCOMPLETE DPROGRAMNOTPRESENT 8 50 Program StTUCTUNG og etegESNEEER ENNEN ia 7 16 PrOQraM StFUCTUlES ste csetiah nectersderats 7 127 Programmed spindle speed 4 95 Programming station 00 ceeeceeeeees 4 153 PROTECTED FILE ic betta niet oa ess 8 50 Protection IP degree of 3 13 PS RUSH geess ee 7 100 PSL PUSH LOGICACCU iasanen 7 101 PSW PUSH WORDACCU 7 102 BRECH ie ht thse eene Maden eg 3 53 4 32 PETOS ebe Rina Ray a aa EEN 3 18 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 13 9 Q Q parameters Q Parameters R R ARESE EE 7 49 Radial acceleration ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 80 BEIA SEE 0 1 A ERE A At a ite 4 114 Ramp slope for spindle c0 cees 4 97 Range Module 9010 9011 9012 7 137 Range cycle ng eeler aetna oh 4 182 Rapid raverse 2 15 4 70 4 174 Papeete Seite EE 4 177 4 178 4 191 Read in Word 7 137 Re approaching the contour 2 14 4 148 Reduced feed rate of tool ais 4 161 Reference end position 4 53 Referenc MAK s serccssicoscsseuttiebestees 4 36 4 62 Reference Marks eee 4 7 4 52 Reference marks traversing s ee 2 15 Reference point 4 16 Reference pulse inhibit s sss1ses11es1a
67. This is done by entering an axis specific factor to compensate the stiction in machine parameter 1511 guideline factor 5000 to 10000 A higher nominal value based on this factor is then output while traversing A S eae x kx MP1511 Fada Additional feed rate H As Servo lag difference after one control loop cycle mm tc Control loop cycle time us a m min ky Position loop gain SS d MP1511 Factor for stiction compensation us ae MP1050 xF Vada Additional analog voltage V add MP1010 add MP1050 Analog voltage for rapid traverse V MP1010 Rapid traverse Hy min This increase in nominal value is limited by MP1512 If this limit is set too high then the machine will oscillate at standstill guideline lt 50 MP 1512 limits the value Asa in the above formula MP1512 ASalimit X 256 MP1512 Limi to the amount of stiction compensation GP counting steps A n Limit value for As um GP Grating period of the measuring system um Compensation may only be active at low feed rates as the increased nominal value would cause oscillation at high speed The feed rate limit for stiction compensation is defined in MP1513 Stiction compensation is effective only during operation with feed precontrol If stiction compensation is to be in effect in the manual operating modes as well feed precontrol MP1391 must be activated for manual operation in each axis MP1511 Factor for stiction compensation
68. generally the responsibility of the computer system The computer system therefore has to meet certain requirements The interfaces which primarily consist of the physical links between the computer system and the peripherals need appropriate software in order to control the transfer of information between the individual units The relationship between hardware and software which fully defines an interface is illustrated by the following diagram Interface e g PC e g Printer Controller external memory The hardware in the diagram covers all the physical components such as circuit construction pin layout electrical characteristics etc The software includes for example the drivers for the output modules which are part of the operating software both of the computer system and the peripherals Due to the wide variety of computers controllers and peripherals standard interfaces have been introduced which in an ideal situation enable extremely varied devices to be connected to each other Such standards include for example the RS 232 C V 24 and RS 422 V 11 interfaces which are described in detail later 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 8 3 1 1 1 Principles of data transfer Since all information is conveyed as data one first needs to become familiar with a few of the principles of data transfer The term Data is used to describe all of the information which the computer is capable of collectin
69. interruptible feedback EMERGENCY STOP buttons e ie k1 Control 24V ek voltage PLC on K1 qt This is merely a suggestion for switching The machine manufacturer must ensure that all necessary safety specifications are met 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 121 e 5 2 Flow diagram The external electronics must meet the specified conditions In particular the acknowledgement for Control ready must reach the TNC 415 after a maximum of 114 ms for the TNC 407 146 ms 5 2 1 TNC 415 X41 34 X42 4 k VDU display 1 Wait for control voltage RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING 2 Recognize the control voltage on X42 4 and switch off of the control is ready signal on X41 34 by the first microprocessor t lt 66 ms 3 Maximum time during which the acknowledgement of Control readiness on X42 4 must go to 0 t lt 114 ms If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE 4 Recognize the acknowledgement and set X41 34 t lt 20 ms 5 Wait for control voltage RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING 6 Recognize the control voltage on X42 4 and switch off of the control is ready signal on X41 34 by the second microprocessor t lt 66 ms 7 Maximum time during which the acknowledgement of control readiness on X42 4 must go to 0 t lt 114 ms If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE 8 Recognize the acknowledgement and set X41 34 t lt 20 ms 9 Wait for control voltage RE
70. lt gt 7 78 3 6 Parentheses with logical gating 7 80 3 6 1 AND WU 7 80 3 6 2 AND NOT ANI 7 80 3 6 3 OR OL 7 80 3 6 4 ORNOT ONT H 7 80 3 6 5 EXCLUSIVE OR XO 7 81 3 6 6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT XONI 7 81 3 7 Parentheses with arithmetic Commands 7 85 3 7 1 ADD 7 85 3 7 2 SUBTRACT Oh 7 85 3 7 3 MULTIPLICATION el 7 85 3 7 4 DIVISION uh 7 85 3 7 5 REMAINDER MODI 7 86 3 8 Parentheses with comparison Commands 7 89 3 8 1 EQUALTO 1 789 7 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 01 98 3 8 2 LESS THAN GI 7 89 3 8 3 GREATER THAN gt 7 89 3 8 4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt 7 89 3 8 5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOLI gt 7 90 3 8 6 NOT EQUAL TO lt gt 7 90 3 9 Shift Commands 7 93 3 9 1 SHIFT LEFT lt lt 7 93 3 9 2 SHIFT RIGHT gt gt 7 94 3 10 Bit Commands 7 96 3 10 1 BIT SET BS 7 96 3 10 2 BIT RESET BC 7 97 3 10 3 BIT TEST BT 7 98 3 11 Stack Operations 7 100 3 11 1 Load Data onto the Data Stack PS 7 100 3 11 2 Acquire Data from the Data Stack PL 7 101 3 11 3 Load Logic Accumulator onto the Data Stack PSL 7 101 3 11 4 Load Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack PSW 7 102 3 11 5 Acquire Logic Accumulator from the Data Stack PLL 7 102 3 11 6 Acquire Word Accumulator from the Data Stack PLW 7 102 3 12 Jump Commands 7 105 3 12 1 Unconditional Jump JP 7 105 3 12 2 Jump if Logic Accumulator 1 JPT 7 105 3 12 3 Jump if Logic Accumulator 0 JPF 7
71. seg setae 7 105 JUMP UP ueis ie emeei 7 105 Jump Commandes 7 105 Jump Label t LBEJ ytin Eeer 7 110 K EE 4 164 Key SIMUIAtION 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 164 ISIN KS POING eege seed 4 72 Kneb neared omd eae 3 44 3 86 LEE Ee 4 70 4 76 KW TaCtOR iere egene Sessa 4 68 KV faCtO rvs anh eaan tenders domes 4 108 L Sege gestoen tienes ne Seege tec 7 40 8 18 E H LOAD inn 7 36 7 115 NAG RE 4 264 Language of the Country 2 7 ae dead See Me 4 275 LB LOAD BIEL 7 41 EBE LABE e en a a 7 110 LD LOAD DOUBLE WOR 7 41 KEE see earen Er dE 3 74 ERR Et ebe ege 3 4 3 75 LEASE esate ite tothe atin esl sabe a tae te 3 4 Lead screw pitch error ceeeeeceeeeeees 4 27 LESS THAN lt enenu ioy 7 119 LESS THAN K i iet aea 7 74 CESS THAN Fi wE a beets 7 89 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt 7 76 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt 7 120 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt I 7 89 LIMIT SWITCH acetic ea a a 4 18 Linear axis error compensation 4 26 Linear measurement 4 6 Linear measuring SySteMS 00 ee 3 24 LIStOT INStHUCTIONS ea at ines 7 6 LN LOAD NOT ii n e 7 38 LOAD icc onto thas dea setae 7 36 7 115 LOAD BYTE RI 7 41 L Oad command EE 7 36 LOAD DOUBLEWORD UD 7 41 CEOAD NOT LN en 7 38 LOAD TWO S COMPLEMENT L gt 7 40 LOAD WORD WI 7 41 Local Q parameters 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 4 LOGIC DIAGRAM in aiin 7 12 Beleeg ECH 7 53
72. the lag tracking becomes active Lag tracking means that the actual machine position changes by a certain value per PLC cycle until it has changed by the full value from the words W576 to W584 This does not change the value in the actual position display The increment of change per PLC cycle must be defined in MP4070 W576 to W584 Lag tracking error compensation Compensation speed from MP4070 Input range 32 767 to 32 768 Error um W576 Axis X W578 Axis Y W580 Axis Z W582 Ath axis W584 5th axis MP4070 Compensation per PLC cycle for lag tracking error compensation Entry 0 000 1 to 0 005 mm Example The temperature value transmitted through the PA110 to the word W506 is multiplied by a compensation factor linear expansion is assumed and is sent to the word W578 Y axis for lag tracking The correction factor which can only be determined through exact measurements of the machine is entered for example in MP4210 44 L D944 correction factor from MP4210 44 X W506 correction factor x temperature value from PA 110 X8 current thermal expansion W578 value for lag tracking of the Y axis 4 32 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L 1 6 6 Stiction Guideways with a relatively high level of stiction can cause servo lag at low feed rates even when using feed precontrol A servo lag can be detected using for example the TNC s integral oscilloscope and the TNC can also compensate the error
73. with TOOL DEF PLC PLC Sequence of tool number or PLC PLC pocket number transfer M2093 1 Special tool to original pocket despite PLC PLC variable pocket coding Pocket number Tool number Machine parameters used MP7260 90 Number of tools in tool table Number of pockets in tool magazine Number of pockets vacant beside special tool Output of pocket number and tool number with every TOOL CALL block Output of pocket number and tool number with every TOOL DEF block The sequence diagram for this tool changer is subdivided into modules List of modules subroutines TOOL DEF TOOL CALL STANDBY STANDBY BACK MANUAL TOOL IN MANUAL TOOL OUT MANUAL OUT IN CHANGE COMPUTE SHORTEST PATH Search tool and load in GRE1 Automatic tool change Search tool and load in GRE1 Return tool from GRE1 to magazine Manual tool follows Normal or Special tool Normal or Special tool follows Manual tool Manual tool follows Manual tool Take old tool out and put new tool in COMPARE P CODE WITH ISTREG COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 247 2 15 3 1 Program module TOOL DEF Search tool and load in GRE1 Feedback is TOOL DEF immediate so feedback that the NC PGM can continue No Message CANNOT Manual tool PREPARE y MANUAL ee TOOL No Tool already in spindle Yes No Tool already in GRE1 Yes Load GRE1 No STANDBY Module GRE1 empty Yes GRE1 ass
74. 0 to 99 999 999 rom PLC RUN PLC RUN PLC RUN PLC EDIT PLC EDIT Function and input Page via 4 108 4 108 4 108 4 97 4 97 MP3520 0 Spindle speed activated by marker M2501 PLC RUN 4 108 Entry 0 to 99 999 999 rom MP3520 1 Spindle speed for spindle orientation PLC RUN 4 106 Entry 0 to 99 999 999 rom 5 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 3 7 Integral PLC Machine parameter MP4010 MP4060 0 4 MP 4070 MP4110 0 MP4110 47 MP4120 0 MP4120 31 MP4130 MP4210 0 O MP4210 47 MP4220 0 4 MP4230 0 O MP4230 31 MP4231 0 O MP4231 31 MP4310 0 6 MP4410 via PLC program from RAM or from EPROM RESET 7 28 Entry 0 or 1 0 EPROM operation 1 RAM operation Path dependent lubrication PLC RUN 4 19 Entry 0 to 65 535 units of 65 536 um Compensation value per PLC cycle for axis error 4 32 compensation with lag tracking Entry 0 0001 to 0 005 mm 25 Value for Timer TO to T47 PLC RUN 7 Entry 0 to 65 535 PLC cycles TNC 415 20 ms TNC 407 24 ms Pre set value for counters CO to C31 PLC RUN 7 26 Entry 0 to 65 535 PLC cycles Fast PLC input to suppress the monitoring PLC EDIT 4 83 functions Entry 0 to 255 No of the PLC input Activation condition for fast PLC input from EDIT 4 83 MP4130 Entry 0 or 1 Set a number in the PLC D768 to D956 PLC EDIT 7 21 Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 m
75. 1 Connector assignment 3 35 7 2 Connecting cable 3 35 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 8 1 Connector assignment X12 8 2 Connection of the touch probe system 8 2 1 TS 120 8 2 2 TS511 8 2 3 TM 110 9 Data interface 9 1 RS 232 C V 24 data interface 9 2 RS 422 V 11 data interface 10 Handwheel input 10 1 Pin assignment 10 2 Portable handwheel HR 330 10 3 Integral handwheel HR 130 10 4 Portable handwheels with permissive buttons 10 5 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 11 PLC inputs outputs 11 1 Technical data 11 1 1 PLC inputs 11 1 2 PLC outputs 11 1 3 Analog inputs 11 1 4 Inputs for Pt 100 thermistors 11 2 Connector assignment 11 2 1 PLC inputs 11 2 2 PLC outputs 11 2 3 PL connection 11 3 Connector assignment on the PL 11 3 1 Connection to LE or PL 1 11 3 2 Connection of PL 2 11 3 3 PLC inputs outputs on the PL 400 11 3 4 PLC inputs outputs on the PL 410 PL410B 11 3 5 Analog inputs on the PL 410 PL 410B 11 3 6 Inputs for thermistors on the PL 410 PL 410B 11 4 Connector assignment on the PA 110 11 5 Connecting cable 11 5 1 Connection of PLC inputs outputs on the LE 11 5 2 PL 400 connection 11 5 3 PL 410 PL 410 B connection 11 5 4 PA 110 connection 11 5 5 Connection to analog inputs 11 5 6 Connection to inputs for thermistors 3 36 3 36 3 37 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 40 3 40 3 41 3 43 3 43 3 43 3 44 3 45 3 49 3 51 3 52 3 52 3 52 3 53 3 53 3 54 3 54 3 55 3 55
76. 105 3 12 4 Call Module CM 7 107 3 12 5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator 1 CMT 7 107 3 12 6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator 0 CMF 7 108 3 12 7 End of Module Program End EM 7 110 3 12 8 End of Module if Logic Accumulator 1 EMT 7 110 3 12 9 End of Module if Logic Accumulator 0 EMF 7 110 3 12 10 Jump Label LBL 7 110 3 13 INDEX Register 7 112 3 14 Commands for STRING Execution 7 114 3 14 1 LOAD L 7 115 3 14 2 ADD 7 115 3 14 3 Storinga STRING 7 116 3 14 4 Overwriting of aSTRING OVWR 7 116 3 15 Logical Comparisons in STRING Execution 7 119 3 15 1 EQUALTO 7 119 3 15 2 LESS THAN lt 7 119 3 15 3 GREATER THAN gt 7 120 3 15 4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt 7 120 3 15 5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt 7 120 3 15 6 UNEQUAL lt gt 7 121 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 3 3 16 Submit Programs 7 123 3 16 1 Call up of the Submit Program SUBM 7 123 3 16 2 Status Interrogation of a Submit Program RPLY 7 124 3 16 3 Cancellation of a Submit Program CAN 7 124 3 17 Constants Field KF 7 127 3 18 Program Structures 7 127 3 18 1 IF ELSE ENDI Structure 7 128 3 18 2 REPEAT UNTIL Structure 7 128 3 18 3 WHILE ENDW Structure 7 129 3 18 4 CASE Branch 7 129 3 19 Linking Files 7 131 3 19 1 USES Instruction 7 131 3 19 2 GLOBAL Instruction 7 132 3 19 3 EXTERN Instruction 7 133 4 PLC Modules 7 136 4 1 Marker Byte Word Doubleword 7 136 4 1 1 Copy in Marker or Word Range Module 9000 9
77. 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 L Ei 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 261 i 16 3 Commissioning the control The machine must be prepared in accordance with section 16 2 before the machine parameters for commissioning can be optimized Before connecting the control the NC and PLC supply voltages and the ground connections should be tested once more see Mounting and Electrical Installation 16 3 1 Entry of the provisional and pre defined machine parameters After switching on the machine for the first time the control will first of all display the message Operating parameters erased which means that the machine parameters still have to be entered see Machine parameters Most machine parameters can be pre defined and entered according to the machine parameter list and the functional descriptions The parameters which affect the control loop must be assigned provisional values see section 16 3 6 In order to avoid lengthy delays on restarting during the commissioning of the control the memory test can be suppressed by MP7690 see section Display and operation 16 3 2 Entry of the PLC program A complete PLC program for all machine functions must be created
78. 2 11 Stylus delected ese 4 178 Soft KEY geeiert ege 4 164 Stylus deflection cee eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 191 Soft KEYS eege CNEL 3 68 Stylus deflection eee ceeeeeeeeeeeee 4 181 e ET 2 7 SUBM SUBMIT een 7 123 Software bandebaking 3 9 Submit Program 7 123 Software limit switch ee eeeeeeee 4 53 Submit QUEUE een 7 123 Software limit switches 4 16 Subprograms oi NTE ERAN 7 123 Software Imtt ewwitch 4 264 SUBTRACT Hennes 7 85 Software option 2 8 SUBTRACTION eneen 7 67 Software protection module 2 8 4 180 4 189 Surface CUttINg speed 4 195 Software renlacement 2 13 SWIVELAXCS osna a e a Ea 4 41 Software types u 27 Synchronized axes cece eeeteeeesteeeeeaes 4 49 EE 4 99 leede EE 4 275 SpeclalitOlins wa disdegeetegrer edd 2 15 Speed controller Optimizing ss 1502 4 11 12 Spindel in position c cece 4 109 lee TEEN 4 94 Spindle orientation ccccceeeeee 3 27 4 94 Spindle rotation left 4 101 Spindle rotation right c0 eee 4 101 Spindle run in characteristic 00 4 118 Spindle run on time ceceeeeeeeeeeee 4 114 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 13 11 T EE 3 36 4 176 E tege 7 24 8 18 eege 3 36 3 92 4 192 EE 7 12 IIe 4 176 El EE 4 151 TWO S complermmermt eset ees tes tesesesees 7 40 TaD DIN EE 4 112 Tapping with floating tap holder 4 113 4 116 U Tapping without floating tap holder 2 17 UNEQUAL Les 7 7
79. 2 Dialogue 03F3828 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 39 o Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via Colour for Standard colour adjustment PLC RUN 4 130 MP 7354 Program text display Machine MP 7354 0 Background 0080400 MP 7354 1 General program text 038240C MP 7354 2 Current block 038341C MP 7354 3 Background of active window 00C0800 MP7355 Program text display Programming MP7355 0 Background 0080400 MP7355 1 General program text 038240C MP7355 2 Current block 038341C MP7355 3 Background of active window 00C0800 MP7356 Status and PLC window MP7356 0 Background 00C0800 MP7356 1 Axis positions in the status display 03F2C18 MP7356 2 Status display except axis positions 03F280C MP7357 Soft key display Machine MP7357 0 Background 0000000 MP7357 1 Symbols 03F3828 MP7358 Soft key display Programming MP7358 0 Background 0000000 MP7358 1 Symbols 03F3828 MP7360 Graphics 3D depiction MP7360 0 Background 0000000 MP7360 1 Surface 0203038 MP7360 2 Front face 00C1820 MP7360 3 Text display in graphics window 03F3F3F MP7360 4 Side face 0102028 MP736 Graphics view in three planes and oscilloscope MP7361 0 Background 0000000 MP7361 1 Plan Grating 0203038 MP7361 2 Front and side view not selected channel 0203038 MP7361 3 Axis cross and text in graphics display cursor data s
80. 3 35 el ng Eerst Eeer Mattel etna eels 2 14 REMAINDER MOD 7 70 REMAINDER TT MODT 0 eee 7 86 REPEAT UNTIL Structure asaaaa0aaa 7 128 REPLY e g etter E AE tarde RESET R en a a RESET NOT RN Resolution of input and display 2 3 4 134 Resolution input and display step 2 14 RESTORE suche aus EE 2 13 2 18 HESGSTOREATN cee cceeececeteeeeetteeeeeaes 4 148 RESTORE POSITION naasis 4 148 4 149 Reversal emors 4 24 Reversal spikes compensation for 11 11 Right hand rue 4 12 Rigid tapping 2 14 2 17 4 117 RM Reference mark 4 127 RN RESET NOT sis deii ees 7 51 PRO AE RE Ee 2 15 tele 4 12 Rotary encoder and ballscrew 005 4 6 Rotation non controlled e 2 15 Rounding arc insertion seseeseseeeeeeeeee 4 82 RPLY REPLY a 7 124 RS 232 C N2 Akre anea 3 40 8 10 RN eut cee 3 40 3 41 8 15 13 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 01 98 S Spindle speed for gear ranges 4 97 Ee A A A ateecces 8 18 Spindle speed range eee 4 104 SAS ESL ee geb Ster erben 7 48 Spindle orientation eeecseeecereeeee es 4 106 S analogue voltage for gear range 4 97 Spindle speed OUtpUut 0 eee 4 94 ee EE 4 126 Stack Operations EE 7 100 SCaliAG daptog ae 4 147 Stack Load PSL esses 7 101 Scaling factor axis specific oo cece 2 18 Stack Load PSW ee 7 102 Scanning cycles 4 182 Stack
81. 3 to 0 4 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on The addressed bit is set to 1 through the use of the BS command The selection addressing of the corresponding bit is derived from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant In the bit numbering bit O corresponds to the LSB and bit 31 the MSB For operand contents larger than 32 the operand value Modulo 32 is used i e the integer remainder from the division operand value 32 Example Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator set the bit 0 of the Accumulator to 1 and store the result in Doubleword D12 Initial state Doubleword D8 3E80 hex Doubleword D12 Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content XX XX XX XX 1 LD8 2 BS K 0 00 00 3E 81 3 D12 00 00 3E 81 UU 00 3E 81 Line 1 Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator Line 2 The bit specified in the operand is set to 1 Line 3 The result is stored in Doubleword D12 7 96 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f 3 10 2 BIT RESET BC Abbreviation for PLC Editor BC BIT CLEAR Byte Word Double Constant Execution time us 0 5 to 0 8 0 3 to 0 4 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on The addressed bit is set to 0 through the use of the BC command The
82. 4 18 M2632 4 18 M2633 Limit switch 5 4 18 M2656 Spindle orientation from stop PLC PLC 4 106 0 Orientation with M03 1 Orientation with M04 Wm M2657 4 139 M2688 4 83 M2689 4 83 M2690 4 83 M2691 4 83 M2692 4 83 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 6 7 H Marker Function _ Set Reset Page M2704 M2705 M2706 M2707 M2708 M2712 M2713 M2716 M2717 M2719 M2720 M2800 to M2808 M2809 M2813 M2814 M2815 M2816 M2817 M2818 M2819 M2824 M2826 M2827 Activate PLC positioning X axis Activate PLC positioning axis 5 Activate PLC positioning for spindle orientation Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the Q Parameter defined in W516 Strobe marker for datum correction Geometry of the tool from W264 Deactivate the TNC 355 mode Activate deactivate function Free rotation of rotary axis Key code Activate the numerical value transfer from PLC to NC Activate the key from W516 Activation of gear range and rpm via PLC Flashing PLC error message Select range Select range Q Number msb Activate datum correction Activation of the selected range M2816 M281 7 Suppress handwheel pulses Suppress EMERGENCY STOP open the control loop stop NC 4 35 4 35 4 35 4 35 4 35 4 106 P 4 221 4 228 7 175 4 136 7 7 178 4 165 4 101 4 142 PLC 4 17 PLC 4 17 7 178 7 178 4 18 4 197 PLC 4 92 4 120 M2830 Stop NC and o
83. 4 PLC Modules A number of PLC modules are available for PLC functions that cannot be executed or which are very complicated to execute with PLC commands The error status is displayed after execution of the module in Marker 3171 4 1 Marker Byte Word Doubleword 4 1 1 Copy in Marker or Word Range Module 9000 9001 Modules 9000 Marker and 9001 Byte Word Double copy a block with a certain number of markers or bytes beginning from the start address to the specified target address For module 9001 the length should always be defined in bytes Constraints Copying is sequential starting with the first memory cell This means that the function is not guaranteed when the source and destination blocks overlap and the source block begins at a lower address than the destination block In this case the overlapping part of the source block is overwritten before copying takes place Possible errors A block of the defined length cannot be read from the defined address in the marker or word RAM address is too high or block is too long A block of the defined length cannot be written to the defined address in the marker or word RAM address is too high or block is too long Call PS B AW D K lt Number 1st marker source block PS B W D K lt Number 1st marker destination block gt PS B IW D K lt Length of block in markers gt CM 9000 Transfer in marker range or PS B W D K Number 1st byte source block gt PS B W D K
84. 40 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 L Request external directory If the soft key Show ext directory is operated the TNC outputs a header without a program name The peripheral then starts to output the files to the TNC but after the first file block has been sent the TNC immediately requests the next file Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC lt SOH gt lt N gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt Id lt ACK gt lt STX gt Name 1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt ACK gt M lt SOH gt lt N gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt ACK gt lt STX gt Name 2 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt STX gt Last name lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt ACK gt M lt SOH gt lt N gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt The program names read in are displayed in the TNC In FE1 mode the following Escape sequence is sent to request the external directory lt DC3 gt lt ESC gt lt DC1 gt lt 0 gt lt SP gt lt D gt lt CR gt lt LF gt The TNC expects the following input to this request The first four lines each ending in lt CR gt lt LF gt are ignored In subsequent lines ending with lt CR gt lt LF gt only the program name and after any number of blank characters the number of occupied sectors are stored XXXxXxx Name Sectors xxxxxx lt CR gt lt LF gt If the character combination FREE is detected only a nu
85. 5 5 RTS 6 6 6 GY PK 6 6 DSR 7 7 7 BK 7 7 DTR 8 8 8 RD 8 8 GND Signal 9 9 9 PK 9 9 RXD 10 10 10 BN 10 1 10 CTS 11 11 11 T 11 111 TXD 12 12 12 BN GN 12 12 RTS 13 13 13 RD BL 13 13 DSR 14 14 14 D J 14 14 DTR 15 15 15 15 15 The pin assignment is the same at both ends of the connecting cable In the RS 422 adapter the pins of the female connectors are connected one to one The pin assignment in the cable adapter is therefore the same as in the X22 connector in the logic unit The following cable type must be used for the connection to the peripheral unit LIYCY 7x2x0 14 Cu For the cable connection HEIDENHAIN offers a 15 pin D subminiature connector Id Nr 243 971 ZY 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Data interface 3 41 e 3 42 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Data interface 01 98 i 10 Handwheel input The following handwheels can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls 1 integral handwheel HR 130 or 3 integral handwheels HR 150 using handwheel adapter HRA 110 or 1 portable handwheel HR 330 or 1 portable handwheel HR 332 10 1 Pin assignment X23 Handwheel input D subminiature
86. 5 RTS Request to send DSR 6 6 iT RD 6 6 6 6 RD 6 6 DTR Data terminal ready GND 7 7 7 Uri 7 7 7 7 GND Signal ground 8 8 T L 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 g 9 9 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 13 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 14 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 15 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 16 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 17 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 18 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 19 9 BN 9 9 9 9 BL 9 9 DTR 20 20 U D 20 20 20 20 U J 20 20 DSR Data set ready If your peripheral unit has a connector layout that differs from the above the HEIDENHAIN connecting cable cannot be used 3 40 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Data interface 01 98 e 9 2 RS 422 V 11 data interface If used correctly the RS 422 V 11 serial data interface will ensure error free data transmission up to a distance of 1000 m between logic unit and peripheral unit The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the operating console or the control cabinet See also under the heading Mounting dimensions The cable adapter is connected to the logic unit with a HEIDENHAIN connecting cable RS 422 Adapter Block max 1000 m Lt X22 Data interface RS 422 V 11 Id Nr 249 819 01 Id Nr 289 208 gt 1 TI 1 1 m BL tex 1 1 GND Chassis 2 2 2 GY 2 2 RXD 3 3 3 WH 3 21 CTS 4 A 4 GN 4 Ai TXD 5 5 5 WH GN
87. 7 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 01 98 E 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 7 13 i 7 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 01 98 i 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 7 15 i 2 Program creation The PLC program can be created directly on the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls For this the PLC Editor must be called with the code number 807 667 see section PLC functions HEIDENHAIN can supply the PLC EXE PLC development software for creating PLC programs on your personal computer Further particulars can be obtained from your HEIDENHAIN customer service 2 1 Program structure 2 1 1 Command A command is the smallest unit ina PLC program It consists of the operation portion and the Operand portion A 28 Comment Operation Operand Operand designation address A AN I O M T
88. 757 02 suited to BC 110 and TE 400 black MB 420 Id Nr 293 757 12 suited to BC 120 and TE 400 B gray Assignment of PLC inputs to the keys of the MB l C see i 128 148 133 149 L N IAM 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 12 Machine operating panel 3 65 o 12 1 Pin connections X46 Machine operating panel Flange socket with female connector insert 37 pin Pin number Assignment Key on MB 410 X Y Z 131 V Ve X Y Z 1136 V V FN1 FN2 FN3 FN4 FNS Spindle on Spindle off Coolant on off NC start NC stop Rapid traverse Black Black 151 152 3 CO CO N MPorj BR OO NM sf of 2f Al 5 COPN I Oyo R Ws NM fo NINININININININI gt NIOLA BR Os M fo o 01 28 02 29 o3 30 04 31 5 32 33 O7 34 35 0 V PLC 36 37 24 V PLC Housing External shield The PLC inputs 1128 to 1152 must be supplied with power only from pins 36 and 37 since this power supply is properly safeguarded 1 Externally available PLC reference potential for the outputs O0 O7 Externally available via fuse PLC supply voltage for the inputs 3 66 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 12 Machine operating panel 01 98 o 1 12 2 Connecting cable Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables HEIDENHAIN recommends that a 37 pin D subminiature connector should be mounted on the machine operating panel The machine operating
89. Accu Index Register gt Word Accumulator X Store Accu to Index Word Accumulator gt Index Register PSX Push Index Register Index Register gt Stack PLX Pull Index Register Stack gt Index Register INCX Increment Index Register DECX Decrement Index Register El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 113 e 3 14 Commands for STRING Execution STRING execution allows the creation and manipulation of any texts via the PLC program These texts may be displayed in the PLC window of the screen by the use of Module 9082 and or deleted again with Module 9080 refer to PLC modules A STRING Accumulator and four STRING memories are provided in the control for STRING execution A maximum of 128 characters may be loaded into this STRING accumulator 128 Characters 1 128 ee ae oe e SEIS STRING memory 128 Characters 1 e 128 GO De et 1 oe pee ee 2 ee S3 ee Example STRING Accumulator and STRING memory are volatile and so are again deleted upon powering off For STRING execution the new operand S has been introduced The operand S may be used with various arguments Explanation of the Operand The operand S is only used in STRING execution The following locations may be addressed with the various arguments STRING memory Should a STRING memory be addressed the number of the required memory SO S3 must be specified after the Operand Designation Part of a STRING If only part
90. C constant value B W D K s St Operand The operation describes the function which is to be performed It explains what is done with the Operands The Operand shows what is to be operated on It consists of the Operand abbreviation and a parameter Address Register and memory contents can be gated erased and loaded by using PLC commands Both Bit and Word processing are possible In Word processing it is possible to address memory contents with a length of 8 Bits Byte 16 Bits Word or 32 Bits Doubleword see section Commands 7 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 o 2 1 2 Module technique It is good practice to make the maintenance of the PLC programs easier by creating the program with the most transparent structure possible This can be best achieved by dividing the PLC program into individual modules structured programming Only the most important PLC functions should be programmed in the main routine Individual PLC functions such as spindle orientation and key simulation are programmed in their own modules 0 L M2719 1 SN M2719 Activate the strobes for Word processing 2 L M2497 3 SN M2497 Activate the edge evaluation 4 L M2496 5 SN M2496 Activate transfer of decoded M codes M1900 to M1999 20 L M1919 M Function M19 21 A M2045 Change signal for M function 22 AN M12 Spindle orientation already active 23 CMT 180 Spindle orientation 24 LM 2182 Disable
91. CALL during block scan Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or MP951 0 Axis X MP951 1 Axis Y MP951 2 Axis Z MP951 3 Ath axis MP951 4 5th axis MP7450 Calculate the tool change position from MP951 in block scan Entry Xxxxx Bit O Axis X 0 Calculate Bit 1 Axis Y 1 Do not calculate Bit 2 Axis Z Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Marker Function Set Reset M2018 Soft key Manual operation pressed NC NC M2019 Restore position is active NC NC M2612 No change in position number PLC PLC in central tool memory M2059 Block scan is active NC PLC NC PLC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 149 2 6 9 Files With the TNC it is possible to process different types of file with the file management The types of file are designated by an extension after the names H HEIDENHAIN program l DIN ISO program T Tool table D Datum table P Pallet table A Text file HLP Help file PNT Point table The file name can be up to 16 characters long letters and digits The maximum length of the file name is defined in MP7222 MP7222 Length of file names Entry 0 to 2 0 8 characters 1 12 characters 2 16 characters 6 9 1 File types disable and protect The individual types of file can be selectively disabled and protected Only file types which are not disabled are visible to the file management in the control If a file type is locked all files of this type are cleared The individ
92. CMT 31 es then call key simulation 1108 EM 1109 LBL 31 Key simulation 1110 L Mi Key simulation active 1111 R M2896 es then enable Positions transfer key 1112 SN M10 Otherwise set key simulation active 1113 CASE B200 Perform single step 1114 CM 130 Key Liline 1115 CM 131 Key X 1116 CM 132 Key Position transfer 1117 CM 133 Key Y 1118 CM 132 Key Position transfer 1119 CM 134 Key Z 1120 CM 132 Key Position transfer 1121 CM 135 Key END BLOCK 1122 CM 141 Reset key simulation 1123 ENDC 1124 EM 1125 LBL 130 Line 1126 L K60 Key code for L ine 1127 W102 1128 CM 136 Simulate key 1129 EM 1103 LBL 131 X 1131 L K109 Key code for X 1132 W102 1133 CM 136 Simulate key 1134 EM 1135 LBL 132 Position transfer 1136 L K100 Key code for Position transfer 1137 W102 1138 CM 136 Simulate key 1139 EM 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 4 171 L Ei 1140 LBL 133 S 1141 L K108 Key code for Y 1142 W 102 1143 CM 136 Simulate key 1144 EM 1145 LBL 134 Z 1146 L K107 Key code for Z 1147 W102 1148 CM 136 Simulate key 1149 EM 1150 LBL 135 END BLOCK 1151 L K119 Key code for END BLOCK 1152 W102 1153 CM 136 Simulate key 1154 EM 1155 LBL 136 Key simulation 1156 L M2813 Strobe key transfer from W516 1157 JPT 137 Still set then wait 1158 L B200 Case byte 1159 K 1 1160 B200 Increment case byte 11
93. DC average consumption consumption LE NC 24 Vdc 2 Lower limit LE 415 1 5A LE 415 36 W section 20 4 V LE 407 1 3 A LE 407 24 W PLC 24 Vdc 3 Lower limit 2A 48 W section 31V 1 when half of the when half of the inputs outputs inputs outputs are are switched on switched on simultaneously simultaneously PL 410B Digital 20A 480 W inputs out when half of the when half of the puts inputs outputs inputs outputs are switched on are switched on simultaneously simultaneously Analog 24 Vdc 2 24W inputs PA 110 2 4W 1 Voltage surges up to V for t lt 100 ms are permissible 2 VDE 0160 5 88 low voltage electrical separation 3 VDE 0160 Base insulation 4 1 1 NC power supply The NC section of the LE must not be supplied U from the machine control voltage supply It requires an individual external and separately 24V 1 5 Vpp generated supply voltage according to VDE 0160 5 88 recommendations for low voltage separation Use 24 V DC with a permissible AC component of 1 5 V recommended filter capacitor 10 000 uF 40 V DC X31 power supply for NC Connection terminals Pin Number Assignment 24V DC 3 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 4 Power supply 01 98 L 4 1 2 PLC power supply The PLC section PLC inputs and outputs of the LE and PL is run from the 24 V machine control voltage supply generated according to VDE 0160 base insulation Superimposed AC components such as those caused by a three
94. Eggi le EE 3 4 Logical Compartsons 7 119 Cogic diagrami EE 7 11 LOOK ANEAG vsctcctoxsentestseeihdetesens 2 3 2 20 4 82 EE 8 6 SNE ee acetone een ent sect ah cate 7 169 LSV 2 Protocols ea iari maraa 8 46 ESV 2 TOOL BOX usilinan relaie 8 46 Eelere EE 2 20 LUBFICATION e 4 19 LW LOAD WORD cc cceesteceteees 7 41 13 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 01 98 M Memory for part programs sssi 2 3 VE 8 18 Memory function for axis direction keys 4 174 Miane on ie toate aie tan 4 139 MeMOTY reet L 4 154 Ela 4 96 4 97 4 139 E Tele len 4 158 MOA sist fx ege eg 4 96 4 97 4 139 Mid program startup 2 16 Eege Wee tec Ee 4 96 4 97 4 139 Miscellaneous functions ccecce 4 158 E 4 161 MOD MODULO TN M a ariii ot ecient 4 139 MOD MODUOIN eee 7 86 ME e 4 139 Modal cycle call un 4 167 MIOS e e a dial cel hele aca ah les 4 161 Module JI 2 19 MITOS sei ata eer 4 162 Module OO00900T en 7 136 BEE EE 4 162 Module SO ZOOM IOLD eegen 7139 HEEN 4 81 Eer D91139 EE Sana te T tal a 4 81 E Eegenen Ce EE 4 81 EE E EE 4 82 Module enee eg EE EE 4 48 EE EE E E EE 4 82 NH Eeer era eg ek Beer 4 106 OOM ee 1148 MES asee eu 4 161 NEEN Geer Deise DEE EN 4 81 4 181 Module UR ZE E E 4 53 Module WU en 7 150 MIA E A 4 53 Module O0 en 4 141 7 151 Machine aXe S aa ini ate ies 4 6 Module 907 cesses eens 4 141 7 152 Machine datum 2 15 4 16 4 63 4 126 4 127 Module OO 4 141 7 114 7 152 Machine parameter overwrit
95. Fields conforms to the rules for jump labels Example L KF VALUESFIELD ACCESS TO VALUESFIELD WITH VALUESFIELD X X 0 TO 3 WO ONE OF THE CONSTANTS IS STORED EM KFIELD VALUESFIELD K 10 CONSTANT TO BE LOADED IF X 0 K 1 K ABC K 100000 CONSTANT TO BE LOADED IF X 3 ENDK Access to Constants Fields is checked in the same way as write access to indexed operands This is why X may only assume positive values from 0 to Length of Constants Field 1 3 18 Program Structures A program is split up into program sequences so as to make it clearer To do this the programmer uses Jump labels LBL and conditional and unconditional jumps When structured instructions are used the jump labels and jump commands are created by the Compiler Remember that internal jump labels are generated to implement these structured commands so the total number of available jump labels will be reduced accordingly Structured instructions can be nested to up to 16 levels but there must be no interleaving Right IFT Wrong IFT WHILEE WHILEE ENDW END ENDI ENDW Instructions IFT IFF WHILET WHILEF ENDW UNTILT and UNTILF require a valid gating result in the Logic Accumulator They terminate the gating chain Instructions ELSE ENDI and REPEAT require all gating chains to be terminated first 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 127 L Ei 3 18 1 IF ELSE ENDI Structure The IF ELSE ENDI structure permits the alternative proc
96. Gear code change signal L W256 Gear code for S analogue 015 Outputs 15 16 and 17 for gear change are activated EM Module end 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 103 f 4 1 5 Offset adjustment Spindle orientation is followed by automatic offset adjustment To give the spindle sufficient time to recover offset adjustment does not start until the spindle has been in position for at least two seconds Offset is then compensated cyclically by 0 152 mV at one second intervals 4 2 BCD coded output of spindle speed For coded output of the spindle speed an S code is entered in Word W258 by the NC At the same time strobe marker M2044 is set by the NC The signals are static The NC delays the continuation of program run until marker M2481 gives the acknowledgement that the new spindle speed has been activated On acknowledgement the strobe marker M2044 is reset The S code is not altered until the next S output A spindle speed is entered in the TOOL CALL block with a maximum of four figures in rpm if necessary rounded off by the NC to the nearest standard value Spindle speeds of O to 9 000 are possible The spindle speed which has been entered is put out by the control as S Code according to DIN 66025 as shown in the list of S Codes With MP3020 the minimum and maximum spindle speeds and the desired spindle speed steps can be defined The entry value is a 5 figure number derived as follows Minimum spindle spee
97. HR 332 4 198 10 3 1 Assignment of keys and LEDs to the PLC inputs and outputs 4 199 10 3 2 PLC program example 4 200 10 4 HR 410 portable handwheel 4 201 10 5 Integral handwheels HR 150 with handwheel adapter HRA 110 4 202 10 5 1 Assignment of switch positions to the PLC inputs 4 203 10 5 2 PLC program example 4 204 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 4 206 11 1 Analogue inputs 4 206 11 2 Analogue outputs 4 207 12 Increment positioning 4 209 13 Hirth coupling 4 212 13 1 Positioning in Manual or Electronic Handwheel mode 4 212 13 2 Positioning in controlled mode 4 212 13 3 Program example 4 213 14 Datum correction 4 221 4 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 15 Tool changer 4 223 15 1 Tool table Pocket table 4 223 15 1 1 Special Tools 4 226 15 1 2 Tool life replacement tool 4 227 15 2 Controlling the tool changer 4 228 15 2 1 Output of tool number fixed pocket coding 4 230 15 2 2 Output of pocket number variable pocket coding 4 231 15 3 PLC program example 4 246 15 3 1 Program module TOOL DEF 4 248 15 3 2 Program module TOOL CALL 4 249 15 3 3 Program module STANDBY 4 250 15 3 4 Program module STANDBY BACK 4 250 15 3 5 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN 4 251 15 3 6 Program module MANUAL TOOL OUT 4 252 15 3 7 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN OUT 4 253 15 3 8 Program module CHANGE 4 254 15 3 9 Program module COMPARE P CODE WITH ISTREG 4 255 15 3 10 Program module COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG 4 256 15 3 11 Program module COMPUTE S
98. Index Register Abbreviation for the PLC Editor INCX Operation The contents of the index register increases by one 3 4 7 DECREMENT DEC DECREMENT Operand Abbreviation for the PLC Editor DEC Operands B W D Operation The contents of the addressed operand decreases by one INCREMENT Word Accumulator Abbreviation for the PLC Editor DECW Operation The contents of the word accumulator decreases by one INCREMENT Index Register Abbreviation for the PLC Editor DECX Operation The contents of the index register decreases by one 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 71 L El 7 72 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 5 Comparisons 3 5 1 EQUALTO Abbreviation for the PLC Editor EQUAL Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 1 0 to 1 2 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the addressed operand are compared If the Word Accumulator and the operand are equal the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If they are not equal the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 The comparison takes place over the numbe
99. K 1 read input if input Ixxx was not OV B3 JP 100 LBL 101 PS K 7670 Read lowest interpolation factor from PS K 0 MP7670 with PLC module 9032 CM 9032 PL B4 Result is in byte 4 L B3 Current switch position 0 to 7 plus B4 minimum interpolation factor from MP7670 B5 is new interpolation factor lt K 10 if this is greater than 10 then JPT 102 L K 10 the new interpolation factor is set B5 equal to 10 LBL 102 PS K 4 Transfer new interpolation factor PS B5 to all axis subdivision 4 204 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 01 98 L Ei CM 9036 factors PLC lt NC PL B6 Read error code L B6 if transfer fails gt KO then error message JPT 203 EM LBL 1032 Error message subprogram Example Switch position 4 Minimum interpolation factor MP7670 5 The results of the PLC example are as follows Inputs 1160 to 1162 and 1164 to 1167 are logic 1 Input 1163 is logic 0 Byte 1 11110111 Byte 2 00001000 Byte 3 3 Byte 4 5 Byte 5 8 Step switch S2 is configured as follows according to the above example Switch position Interpolation factor 1 left stop 5 2 3 4 5 9 6 7 8 right stop 10 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 4 205 o 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 11 1 Analogue inputs Eight analogue inputs are available on the input output extensions PL 410 PL 410B Id Nr 263 371 02 and PA 110 Of these four are analogue inputs for Pt
100. M2632 Limit switch 5 M2633 Limit switch 5 Example PLC program example of changing the traverse ranges The PLC input 110 is used as a condition for change 110 0 Traverse range 1 110 1 Traverse range 2 127 LN 110 Traverse range 1 128 AN M555 already done 129 R M2816 select traverse range 1 130 R M2817 select traverse range 1 131 S M2824 sactivate change 132 S M555 sedge recognition traverse range1 133 R M556 sreset edge recognition traverse range2 134 L 110 traverse range2 135 AN M556 already done 136 S M2816 select traverse range2 137 R M2817 select traverse range2 138 S M2824 activate change 139 S M556 sedge recognition traverse range2 R M555 sreset edge recognition traverse range 140 4 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o 110 M2816 M2817 M2824 ee ee M555 M556 1 5 Lubrication pulse The PLC can control the lubrication of the guideway according to the distance travelled on each axis In the machine parameter MP4060 X the distance after which lubrication should be performed is registered for each axis The entry is in units of 65 536 um Example Desired traversing distance 100 m _ _100 000 000 um Value entered 65 536 um 1526 If the stored path limit for an axis is exceeded the NC sets a marker M2012 to M2015 M2029 to S After carrying out the lubrication the PLC must reset the accumulated traverse distance M2548 to M2551 M2613
101. Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP6362 Feed rate reduction if stylus of the TM 110 is 4 191 deflected away from its path Entry O or 1 0 Feed rate reduction not active 1 Feed rate reduction active MP6390 Target window for contour line end point 4 191 Entry 0 1000 to 4 0000 mm 3 9 3 Tool calibration with TT 110 parameter via MP6500 Tool Calibration with TT 110 4 194 Entry O or 1 O Cycles for tool calibration inhibited 1 Cycles for tool calibration not inhibited MP6505 Probing direction for tool measurement 4 194 Entry 0 to 3 Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis Positive probing direction in the 90 axis Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis Negative probing direction in the 90 axis MP6507 Calculation of the probing feed rate 4 194 Entry 0 to 2 Calculation of the probing feed rate with constant tolerance Calculation of the probing feed rate with variable tolerance Constant probing feed rate MP6510 Max permissible measuring error for tool 4 194 measurement with rotating tool Entry 0 002 to 0 999 mm MP6520 Probing feed rate for tool measurement with non 4 194 rotating tool Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6530 Distance from tool lower edge to probe contract 4 194 upper edge for tool radius measurement Entry 0 001 to 99 9999 mm MP6531 MP6540 Safety zone around the probe contact TT 110 for 4 194 pre posi
102. New functions A PLC column was added to the tool table As in the pocket table relevant PLC data can be entered here This column is activated with machine parameter MP7266 17 A datum tool or pocket table can be searched for to certain values using Module 9092 The PLC can activate the geometry data of the tool from W264 with the new marker M2717 The elements Number of cutting edges Tolerance for tool length Tolerance for tool radius Cutting direction of the tool and PLC status were added to Modules 9093 and 9094 During feed pre control the positioning window is not evaluated until the current velocity is less than MP1525 In the previous software versions the positioning window was not evaluated until the velocity fell below 0 5 mm min Increasing the input value in MP1525 increases the block processing time Feed pre control can be activated for all modes of operation with machine parameter MP1391 This becomes necessary when stiction compensation is to be active in the manual modes of operation The maximum permissible positional difference between the two gantry axes is defined in MIP855 When this value is exceeded the blinking error message GROSS POSITIONING ERROR lt AXIS gt A appears The current positional deviation appears in the LAG display of the slave axis Module 9171 makes it possible to orient the spindle at a rotational speed defined by the PLC
103. O High Byte for W Highest Byte for D B1 Low Byte for W W2 B2 B3 Lowest Byte for D D4 W4 B4 B5 D1020 W1020 B1020 B1021 W1022 B1022 B1023 In Byte addressing every address from 0 to 1023 is accessible In Word addressing every second address from 0 to 1022 is accessible and in Doubleword addressing every fourth from 0 to 1020 The address parameter gives the High Byte for a Word Address VW or the Highest Byte for a Doubleword address D 7 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 o 1 Markers M1000 to M1999 and Bytes BO to B127 are non volatile i e the contents of this memory are maintained when the supply voltage is switched off After entry of the code number 531 210 the markers M1000 to M1999 and Bytes BO to B127 are erased BO to B127 Freely available not deleted with RESET B128 to B255 Freely available deleted with RESET B256 to B511 Data transfer NC PLC B512 to B767 Data transfer PLC NC B768 to B1023 Machine parameters 2 3 Data transfer NC PLC The information exchange between PLC and NC is conducted by markers Bytes Words and Doublewords The function of the individual markers Bytes Words and Doublewords is fixed Either numerical data or general data controlled by strobes can be transferred 2 3 1 Number transfer The Parameter function FN19 can be used to transfer two numbers to the PLC The transferred values are deposited in the Doublewords D280 and D2
104. O to 9 0 110 baud 5 2400 baud 1 150 baud 6 4800 baud 2 300 baud 7 9600 baud 3 600 baud 8 19 200 baud 4 1200 baud 9 38 400 baud El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Data transfer by PLC 8 47 o 5 Error messages 5 1 TNC error messages Listed below are the error messages for data transfer which are displayed at the TNC In most cases the messages are self explanatory General error messages BAUD RATE NOT POSSIBLE One interface is configured for 19 200 baud and the other for 38 400 baud INTERFACE ALREADY ASSIGNED Transfer is already taking place via interface or data transfer has not been completed PROGRAM INCOMPLETE A transfer has been interrupted or the file has not ended correctly no END character or END block EXT OUTPUT INPUT NOT READY Interface is not connected peripheral unit is switched off of faulty TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT X X can assume the values A to H K or L error codes Error codes E During data transfer with Block Check Character BCC a lt NAK gt has been received three times in sequence AtoH The receiving component has detected an error with one of the following causes except Same baud rate not set at TNC and peripheral unit E Parity bit wrong Incorrect data frame e g no stop bit Receiving component of interface faulty K During the transmission of an error to the TNC the lt 1 gt character was not transmitted after the lt ESC gt
105. Ou Uu GN GN 5 5 9 9 rigger signal YL 6 6 YL 10 10 Trigger signal Ka VY 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 max 50 m 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 3 37 o 8 2 2 TS 511 The TS 511 touch probe system can only function together with a transmitter receiver unit SE 510 and interface electronics APE 510 3m max 7m max 30 m SE Big Id Nr 274 540 APE 510 Id Nr 274 539 X12 gt SE 510 gt ee ae A A de 4 l WHEN 4 WH GY DV BN 1 1 YL 1 7 Gy 2 2 Up 2 2 RD 2 APE 5 21 ey 3 3 ay 3 510 3 T all a Flash signal 4 4 4 2 5 5 GN 5 5 5 6 ge el 6 IR signal 6 6 6 1 7 7 Internal wey V UO wall P Pea U 7 4 Hr WH oli 8 screen OV p BK K all 9 N 10 10 bel ia MS 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 Touch probe input Internal screen OV Standby Start 15V 10 UP Battery warning OV UN Trigger signal The signals may be inverted by changing the switch positions S1 to S4 in the APE 510 See operating instructions TS 511 Please install the transmitter receiver unit SE 510 either insulated from or electrically connected to the machine as it must take up a definite potent
106. P1 P2 P3 M2008 m2009 IT mies JL maz PL 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 91 e 3 6 4 Open control loop After Marker M2830 is set the control loops of each axis and of the spindle are opened and an NC stop is performed This makes it possible for example for the control loops to be opened at the same time as the drives are switched off If Marker M2827 is set no external EMERGENCY STOP Input I3 Control is operational is sent to the NC instead the spindle and the position controllers are opened in all axes and an NC stop is carried out If after the execution of an NC block the control loop for a particular axis is opened and this axis is clamped then it is necessary to delay this opening to give the clamp sufficient time to operate The markers M2492 to M2495 and M2500 serve this purpose If one of these markers is set and the appropriate axis is in position then the next NC block will only then be processed when the Open control loop marker M2544 to M2547 M2507 has been set After the control loops are opened the markers M2000 to M2003 and M2016 are reset by the NC As soon as the Axis in position markers are reset the control loop must be closed again so that the axis can be moved Marker M2544 M2545 M2546 M2547 M2507 M2492 M2493 M2494 M2495 M2500 M2827 M2830 Function Open control loop X axis Open control loop Y axis Open control
107. PLC Editor A AND Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 2 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 7 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 4 4 4 6 Logic execution with the AND command Operands M O T C Operation This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program a At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an L command i e the logic state of the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 control which did not have the special L command In PLC programs for the TNC 407 TNC 415 a logic chain should always be started with a load command see L LN L b Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand M O T C are gated with AND The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator Example Input 14 and Input I5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2 Initial state Input 14 1 Input I5 0 Output 02 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 TETE 7 0 EECH E EC 1 LW o EC A elle e e e 2 AIS E 5 3 02 n MMR eM MOK KR RR RX Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 53 o Word execution with the AND Command Operands B W D
108. PLC modules for description see the section on Data Transfer by PLC in the PLC Programming Manual data can be transferred by the PLC via the RS 232 C V 24 or RS 422 V 11 data interfaces These modules for example permit communication between two logic units at PLC level via the interface One application of this type of data transfer is the positioning module which is described in detail in the Positioning Module Manual 4 1 Configuration of PLC data interface 4 1 1 General When data is transmitted by the PLC use of the interface is inhibited by the input output program of the user interface The user has the possibility of configuring the PLC interface according to the FE1 FE2 or ME mode already described from the RS 232 RS 422 setup or to configure it freely However the following limitation applies A configuration at 19 200 baud is impossible if the other interface is already configured at 38 400 baud regardless of whether this interface is assigned to the PLC or NC 4 1 2 Free configuration As with the interfaces EXT1 and EXT2 of the NC the EXT3 PLC interface is also freely configurable The appropriate control characters and the data format for EXT3 are set in the machine parameters MP5xxx 2 which are described in detail in section 2 6 2 Freely configurable interfaces In addition the baud rate for transfer can be selected via MP5040 MP5040 Data transfer rate in operating mode EXT3 data transfer via PLC Entry
109. PLC sections of the control The common data area contains the machine parameters and the PLC markers and words The machine parameters define the hardware configuration of the machine ranges of travel acceleration number of axes etc The PLC markers and words are used for the exchange of information between the NC and the PLC 2 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware concept 01 98 L 2 Technical data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 TNC 407 TNC 415B TNC 425 Axes 3 4 or 5 plus spindle eil NC axes and PLC axes can be defined as desired Program input In HEIDENHAIN Plain Language and to DIN ISO Memory for 6000 blocks approx 12000 blocks approx part program Positions Nominal positions in Cartesian or polar coordinates dimensions absolute and incremental Input and display to 1 um to 0 1 um resolution Interpolation Linear interpolation 3 of 5 axes 5 of 5 axes Circular interpolation 2 of 5 axes 3 of 5 axes Helix Yes Rigid Tapping Yes Block processing time 25 ms 4 ms Look Ahead e Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions e g 3D surfaces e Collision viewing with the SL cycle for open contours e Advance calculation of geometry for feed rate adjustment Free contour In HEIDENHAIN Plain Language with graphic support programming FK Coordinate Shift and or rotate coordinate system mirroring reduce and enlarge transformations also axis specific Tilting the Yes working plane Subpro
110. Parentheses must always be closed again 18 SC Label defined twice Alabel name imported from another module with EXTERN has been used again with an LBL or KFIELD instruction Aname reserved for internal modules 9000 9255 has been used with an LBL KFIELD or EXTERN instruction 19 SC No word assignment Aword gate has been executed but the result has not been assigned to any operand and a new gate has begun instead 20 SC No logic assignment Alogic gate has been executed but the result has not been assigned to any operand and a new gate has begun instead 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 31 2 21 SC Word accumulator not loaded Acommand has been programmed that gates assigns or manipulates the already loaded word accumulator even though the accumulator was not loaded before 22 SC Logic accumulator not loaded Acommand has been programmed that gates assigns or manipulates the already loaded logic accumulator even though the accumulator was not previously loaded 23 SC Accumulators not loaded with open parenthesis An open parenthesis command has been programmed even though neither a logic nor a word string was previously begun 24 SC Wrong type of parenthesis result Depending on the gate formed before a parenthesis and the parenthesis command used the system expects the string in the parenthesis to provide a result of the same type word logic With different types the gate required by the o
111. Program are disabled in machine parameter MP7224 then the system will not search for files of this type If a file of this type is explicitly defined in the pallet file then the routine will report an error NC program not found This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job The module was called while an NC program was being executed The control is not in the basic mode for executing NC programs full sequence or single block mode There is no pallet file in the NC memory that bears an M flag in the directory Aline number has been specified but is not in the selected Pallet file The NC program in the pallet file has an incorrect type designation or the point between filename and file extension is missing i e all extensions except l or H and more than 8 characters in the filename The NC program specified in the pallet file is not in the NC memory The NC program name specified in the pallet file is not clear It has no extension and the NC memory contains both an H program and an TI program with this name The datum table D specified in the pallet file is not in the NC memory 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 157 2 Call PS B W D K lt Line number in pallet file gt CM 9090 PL B W D lt Error condition gt Files were selected Call not from SUBMIT Job
112. T C Operation With the command B 8 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers Inputs Outputs Timers or Counters with ascending numbering Each bit corresponds to 1 operand The LSB in the Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address the LSB 1 to the designated address 1 and soon The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB 3 1 9 ASSIGN WORD W Abbreviation for the PLC Editor W ASSIGN WORD Execution time us 16 7 to 22 7 Number of bytes 14 Operands M O T C Operation With the command W 16 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers Inputs Outputs Timers or Counters with ascending numbering Each bit corresponds to 1 operand The LSB in the Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address the LSB 1 to the designated address 1 and so on The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB 3 1 10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD D Abbreviation for the PLC Editor D ASSIGN DOUBLE Execution time us 32 7 to 44 7 Number of bytes 14 Operands M O T C Operation With the command D 32 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers Inputs Outputs Timers or Counters with ascending numbering Each bit corresponds to 1 operand The LSB in the Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address the LSB 1 to the designated address 1 and soon The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB Example A bit pattern as defined in Word W 8 is to be
113. TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 01 98 E 1 3 Software The logic unit contains separate software for the NC section and the PLC section The software is identified by an 8 figure number After switching on the control the NC PLC and Software Options software numbers are displayed on the screen The software number can also be directly requested with the aid of the MOD function 3 1 NC Software 3 1 1 NC Software number The 8 figure NC software number identifies the type of control the dialog language language of the country and the version of the software 259 96 0 01 Software type National language 0 German 1 Czech 2 French 3 Italian 4 Spanish 6 Swedish 7 Danish 8 Finnish 9 Dutch Software version In addition to the above listed languages the TNC can always use English which may be selected via the machine parameter MP7230 3 1 2 Software types Due to restrictions on the export of the TNC 415 B HEIDENHAIN can also deliver a special export version This export version is differentiated from the standard control through the installed software type With this software type the control offers different features in respect of linear interpolation and the entry display resolutions Linear interpolation Entry Display Resolution TNC 415 B Standard 5 of 5 axes up to 0 1 um TNC 415 F Export 4 of 5 axes up to 1 um The TNC 407 does no
114. The PLC can use marker M2612 to tell the NC that the pocket number in the tool table should not be updated during Block scan The number of tools with a pocket number is defined in machine parameter MP7261 The input value for MP7261 matches the number of pockets in the tool magazine This means that more tools can be defined in the tool table than there is room for in the tool magazine MP7260 gt MP7261 If a tool number is programmed and no pocket is defined for it pocket number 255 W262 is transferred on TOOL CALL and marker M2402 is set Only the tool number and the pocket number are transferred when TOOL DEF is programmed A TOOL DEF for a manual tool has no relevance in the PLC A fixed pocket can be defined in the field E of the pocket table Tools for which a fixed pocket is defined are returned to the same pocket despite variable coding Marker Function Set Reset M2093 Another T code P code follows with TOOL CALL NC NC W Normal tool follows normal tool IN gt N or manual tool follows manual tool M M or special tool follows special tool S gt S when M2601 0 1 special tool follows manual tool M gt S or special tool follows special tool S gt S when M2601 1 or manual tool follows special tool S gt M or manual tool follows normal tool N gt M or normal tool follows manual tool M gt N or normal tool follows special tool S gt N see marker M2600 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 41
115. These signals perform the same functions as those on the RS 232 C V 24 interface The transmission protocol is absolutely identical for the RS 232 C V 24 and RS 422 V 11 interfaces In addition the protective earth connects the transmitter and receiver casings The signal GND represents the differential voltage reference conductor 2 3 4 Pin layouts On the TNC 407 415 the following pin layout is adopted at the logic unit and adapter block see the Installation and Electrical Connection Manual Kl P OM V 11 Adapter Block RS 422 Adapter block LE A D d 1 1 1 sw bl BL 1 1 GND Chassis 2 2 gers arti Zi 2 Rb 3 3 3 gr aH Si 3 CTS 4 All 4 ws at Al 4 TxD 5 5 5 gn 5 5 RTS s gn WH G 6 6 6 EE el el DSR H SS a ae 7 il 7 DTR 8 8 8 2w T ali ol GND Signal 9 all 9 rt Ge ail al RXD 10 10 10 S a der 10 CTS 11 01 vu a 440 10 TXD 12 12 12 ban ENGN 12 12 RTS 13 13 1 48 aa Abe 13 13 DSR 14 14 14 H 14 14 DTR 15 15 15 15 15 2 4 Data interface functions The data interfaces on the TNC can be used to save data and files and read them back in again to output programs to external devices e g printers to read in programs and simultaneously execute them and to carry out data transfer communication between TNCs 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC da
116. aaue a 4 196 Feed release cccceccceceeeeeeeeeseseeeeeees 4 174 Hancdhwheels ccecceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeetees 3 84 FILE NAME NOT PROGRAM NAME 8 50 Hardware Cormponents s sessseiiireereeen 3 4 RIGLOULDUU ee diss ates Anca 7 10 Hardware Concept 2 2 File type disable gett Eed 4 150 Hardware handshaking ss sssssseiinneereen 8 9 File type Droierct 4 150 Heat generation ses nieeseeeiieeeeeeerneseereeea 3 9 ele 2 15 Help UE 2 20 4 156 8 18 File managemenrt cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 8 PIGS srein rennes i ae A atts e 4 150 ellen Be aler WEE 4 212 Filter CAPACICOF irri aa 3 16 el EE 4 150 FAR 1 SO TEE 3 44 3 84 4 196 Fine interpolation c cc ceeeeseseseseeeeseeeeeeeees 11 2 FAIRS U5 Or ieas 3 49 3 87 4 196 4 202 Eise eelere testi Montene 2 3 al RE 3 43 3 88 4 196 Plat Cable eege ue eege Tee 3 68 Il RE 3 89 4 196 4 198 FNL SPRING 2 gees ee ceri tet 2 14 HRAT oct ds ce ota de ees 3 46 3 90 4 201 ENTREE eebe 4 221 7 19 el 4 196 4 202 Free contour programming Ek 2 3 elle ale EE 3 10 Free rotation cccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 136 G Gantry EE eeg eet eer 4 49 EE E 4 101 Gear Change ee Eege 4 100 Lea TaN gE erotessa anessin iran 2 15 4 96 Gear code change signal 0 4 101 GLOBAL Instruction 7 132 Global Q parameters sssisssiiseseiseeinerenee 9 4 Graduation Period etigini 3 24 Graduation period
117. all keys evaluated by NC 2 HR 130 or HR 330 3 HR 330 and rapid traverse keys evaluated by PLC 4 HR 332 all keys evaluated by PLC 5 up to three HR 150 via HRA 110 6 HR 410 MP7641 Entry of interpolation factor Entry 0 or 1 0 entry at TNC control panel 1 entry via PLC module 9036 MP7645 Initializing parameters for handwheel Entry 0 to 255 MP7645 0 to MP7645 7 currently evaluated only by HR 332 HR 410 or HRA 110 see following description MP7650 Count direction for handwheel Entry O or 1 0 negative count direction 1 positive count direction MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel Entry range 0 to 65 535 increments MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel Entry range 0 to 10 MP7670 0 Interpolation factor for low speed MP7670 1 Interpolation factor for medium speed HR 410 only MP7670 2 Interpolation factor for high speed HR 410 only Marker Function Set Reset M2826 Suppress handwheel pulses PLC PLC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 4 197 e 10 1 Integral handwheel HR 130 MP7640 2 When the axis keys are activated the corresponding highlight and the on screen handwheel symbol move together 10 2 Portable handwheel HR 330 MP7640 1 HR 330 all keys evaluated by NC The axis keys on the keyboard are used to move the highlight for actual value transfer or for setting datum point The axis keys on the HR are used to move the ha
118. an offset which corresponds to the position of the byte to be read in a binary block read by Module 9106 i e half the offset in the ASCII string The contents of the receive buffer are retained and can be read by Modules 9104 or 9106 Constraints The interface must be assigned to the PLC and initialized by Module 9100 before Module 9106 is called Module 9106 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job The system does not check whether characters of the received string are still at the place in the receive buffer indicated by the offset If this is not the case then an undefined value is read Possible errors The call parameters are outside the permitted range 0 1 for the interface 0 63 for the offset in the binary block The interface is not assigned to the PLC The module was not called from a Submit Job The receive buffer contains no data The characters in the receive buffer cannot be interpreted as ASCII coded hexadecimal values 0 9 A F 7 168 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Call PS BMW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt PS BMW D K lt Offset of byte to be read in binary block gt CM 9107 PL B AW D lt read binary value gt Error status after call M3171 0 Binary value was read 1 Error condition see above 4 8 9 Transmit a Message by LSV 2 Module 9110 With Module 9110 a message binary data or string can be transmitted to a host computer connec
119. and MP716 as MP712 MP715 Height of reversal peaks in circular movements M105 Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm MP715 0 X axis MP715 1 Y axis MP715 2 Z axis MP715 3 4th axis MP715 4 5th axis MP716 Compensation value per control loop cycle time M105 Entry 0 000000 to 99 999999 mm MP716 0 X axis MP716 1 Y axis MP716 2 Z axis MP716 3 4th axis MP716 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 25 e 1 6 3 Linear axis error compensation One linear axis error can be compensated per axis The axis error is entered with the correct sign in machine parameter MP720 The error is positive if the table travel is too long and negative if the travel is too short MP730 set the axis error compensation to linear or non linear Linear axis error compensation is not active for rotary axes A Error Imm 0 02 0 01 0 a 0 01 Ref mark 500 1000 Encoder 0 02 D MP720 Linear axis error compensation Entry 1 000 to 1 000 mm m or 1 1000 MP720 0 X axis MP720 1 Y axis MP720 2 Z axis MP720 3 Ath axis MP720 4 5th axis MP730 Selection of linear or non linear axis error compensation Input xxxxx Bit O Axis X 0 Linear axis error compensation Bit 1 Axis Y 1 Non linear axis error compensation Bit 2 Axis Z Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 4 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o 1 6 4 Non linear axis error compensation Depending on the design of the
120. assigned to Outputs O5 to O20 Initial state Word W8 36 FF hex 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 45 e Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 15 87 0 EE EE 1 L8 00001711011 0 1 111111 1 0011011011111111 O20 sen ue O5 2 W 05 0000110110111111 1 00110110 11111111 Line 1 The contents of Word W8 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator are assigned to the Outputs O5 to O20 The Commands B and D are processed in the same way except that 8 or 32 bits are used accordingly 3 1 11 ASSIGN NOT N Abbreviation for the PLC Editor N STORE NOT Logic processing Operands M I O T C Operation An ASSIGN NOT in conjunction with a logic operand M 1 0O T C copies the one s complement of the contents of the logic accumulator to the addressed operand For example see ASSIGN command Word processing Operands B W D Operation An ASSIGN NOT in conjunction with a word operand B W D copies the one s complement of the contents of the word accumulator to the addressed operand For example see ASSIGN command 3 1 12 ASSIGN TWO S COMPLEMENT Abbreviation for the PLC Editor STORE MINUS Operands B W D Operation An ASSIGN TWO S COMPLEMENT copies the two s complement of the contents of the word accumulator to the addressed operand For example see ASSIGN command 7 46 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands
121. called tool M2046 0 M2483 0 M2093 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No 255 W264 Tool No new M 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 237 1 N M Manual tool follows Normal tool With this tool change sequence two pocket numbers or tool numbers must be transferred in succession M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe M2046 follows Irrespective of flag M2600 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle After acknowledging with M2483 pocket number 255 and the tool number of the called tool are transferred Pocket number 255 tells the PLC that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool M2046 0 M2483 0 M2093 0 M2600 M2401 0 M2402 0 M2403 M2601 W262 Pocket No N Pocket No 255 W264 Tool No 0 Tool No M 4 238 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 L S M Manual tool follows Special tool With this tool change sequence two pocket numbers or tool numbers must be transferred in succession M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe M2046 follows Irrespective of flag M2600 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle After acknowledging with M2483 pocket number 255 and the tool number of the called
122. chain should always be started with a load command see L LN L Di Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand M O T C are gated with OR The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator Example Input 14 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Output O2 Initial state Input IW 0 Input Ib 1 Output O2 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 SE 7 0 n x xx xx x x x x x x x x x 1 L 14 an xxxxxxlO0lxxxxxxx 0 2 015 02 Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 3 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 57 e Word execution with the OR command Operands B W D K Operation The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand B W D K are gated with OR In accordance with the different sizes of operand B 8 bit W 16 bit D K 32 bit 8 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator Thus Bit O in the Accumulator is gated with bit O in the operand Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator Example The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Word W8 Initial state
123. completed or not The marker range C96 to C127 is used to start the counter counter release pulse Example Logic diagram for counter C1 Contents of machine parameter MP4120 1 10 PLC cycles CO C48 C96 MP4120 0 C1 C49 C97 MP4120 1 C2 C50 C98 MP4120 2 C3 C51 c99 MP4120 3 C4 C52 C100 MP4120 4 C5 C53 C101 MP4120 5 C6 C54 C102 MP4120 6 C7 C55 C103 MP4120 7 C8 C56 C104 MP4120 8 c9 C57 C105 MP4120 9 C10 C58 C106 MP4120 10 C11 C59 C107 MP4120 11 C12 C60 C108 MP4120 12 C13 C61 C109 MP4120 13 C14 C62 C110 MP4120 14 C15 C63 C111 MP4120 15 C16 C64 C112 MP4120 16 C17 C65 C113 MP4120 17 C18 C66 C114 MP4120 18 C19 C67 C115 MP4120 19 C20 C68 C116 MP4120 20 C21 C69 C117 MP4120 21 C22 C70 C118 MP4120 22 C23 C71 C119 MP4120 23 C24 C72 C120 MP4120 24 C25 C73 C121 MP4120 25 C26 C74 C122 MP4120 26 C27 C75 C123 MP4120 27 C28 C76 C124 MP4120 28 C29 C77 C125 MP4120 29 C30 C78 C126 MP4120 30 C31 C79 C127 MP4120 31 7 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 2 El MP4120 0 Preset value for counters CO to C31 to MP4120 31 Entry range 0 to 65 535 PLC cycles 2 5 Edge evaluation of the PLC inputs The edge evaluation for the PLC inputs can be activated by marker M2497 An automatic edge evaluation cannot be activated for the PLC inputs 1192 to 1254 on the second PLC I O expansion board Edge evaluation means that if the signal at the PLC input changes a certain marker will be set for he duration of a PLC run If m
124. connection max 20 m E X 47 a T LE Id Nr 289 111 max 3 m max 20 m SN n a e SEH PA 110 ip ooh nn qo LE Id Nr 275 478 Id Nr 250 481 max 20 m 3 62 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 01 98 L 11 5 5 Connection to analogue inputs Connecting cable 2 x 0 14 mm screened 50 m max 11 5 6 Connection to inputs for thermistors The Pt 100 thermistors must be connected in four wire mode 4 gt Measuring input U Measuring input U V V Pt100 Customer s cable 4x 0 14 mm screened max 50 m 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs f 3 63 2 12 Machine operating panel A separate 37 pin female connector X46 is mounted on the logic unit for the connection to the machine operating panel This connector includes the PLC inputs 1128 to 1152 the PLC outputs O0 to O7 as well as the 0 V and 24 V of the PLC power supply The PLC inputs 1128 to 1152 may be connected only with the power supply from pins 36 and 37 since this power supply is internally secured as required HEIDENHAIN now offers a machine operating panel It is installed beneath the TNC keyboard The dimension drawings show the standard set of keys Four additional black keys are supplied with the panel The machine tool builder to use them replace unneeded axis keys for example Keys with other symbols are also available upon request MB 410 Id Nr 293
125. converter to give 65 536 divisions As a result the smallest potential step is 0 15 mV In the TNC 407 the 10 V analogue po divisions The resulting smallest pote Potential steps per um 0 1 um posit As described above moving with the ential is produced by a 14 Bit A D converter giving 16 384 ntial step is 0 6 mV ional deviation rapid traverse MP1010 results in a certain lag distance s The rapid traverse rate is reached at a definite voltage MP1050 So one can calculate a definite potential AU per um of positional dev AU MP1050 mV Sg uml iation lag If AU is divided by the smallest voltage step which can be produced 0 15 mV for TNC 415 or 0 6 mV for TNC 407 the result is the number of voltage steps which are produced per um or 0 1 um positional deviation for TNC 415 for TNC 407 Ge AU mV Fes AU mV 0 15 mV 0 6 mV Example k 2 amin rapid traverse 5 000 mm min U 9 V s 5000 mm min L 2 500 um v 2 m min mm 9 000 mV AU 2 500 lum eal 3 6 mV um 3 6 MV mm S SCH z e 24 steps um positional deviation NTNC 415 0 15 MV ps um positi viati NTNC 407 28m mml 6 steps um positional deviation 0 6 mV 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 71 2 Ei Kink point For machines with high rapid traverse rates it is usually not possible to raise ek factor enough to give an optimal loop characteristic over the entire range o
126. data transfer Strobes 2 4 Timers and counters 2 4 1 Timers 2 4 2 Counters 2 5 Edge evaluation of the PLC inputs 2 6 EPROM creation 2 7 Error messages 3 Commands 3 1 Load and Assign Commands 3 1 1 LOAD L LOAD NOT LN LOAD TWO S COMPLEMENT L LOAD BYTE LB LOAD WORD LW LOAD DOUBLEWORD LD ASSIGN ASSIGN BYTE B 1 9 ASSIGN WORD W 1 10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD D 1 11 ASSIGN NOT N ol Aloioi a n gt 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 10 7 10 7 11 7 11 7 11 7 12 7 12 7 16 7 16 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 19 7 19 7 23 7 24 7 24 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 30 7 36 7 36 7 36 7 38 7 40 7 41 7 41 7 41 7 43 7 45 7 45 7 45 7 46 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 1 12 ASSIGN TWO S COMPLEMENT 7 46 3 2 Set Commands 7 48 3 2 1 SET S 7 48 3 2 2 RESET R 7 49 3 2 3 SET NOT SN 7 50 3 2 4 RESET NOT RN 7 51 3 3 Logic Gates 7 53 3 3 1 AND A 7 53 3 3 2 AND NOT AN 7 55 3 3 3 OR O 7 57 3 3 4 ORNOT ON 7 59 3 3 5 EXCLUSIVE OR XO 7 61 3 3 6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT GON 7 63 3 4 Arithmetic Commands 7 66 3 4 1 ADDITION 7 66 3 4 2 SUBTRACTION 7 67 3 4 3 MULTIPLICATION x 7 68 3 4 4 DIVISION 7 69 3 4 5 REMAINDER MOD 7 70 3 4 6 INCREMENT INC 7 71 3 4 7 DECREMENT DEC 7 71 3 5 Comparisons 7 73 3 5 1 EQUALTO 7 73 3 5 2 LESS THAN lt 7 74 3 5 3 GREATER THAN gt 7 75 3 5 4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt 7 76 3 5 5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt 7 77 3 5 6 UNEQUAL
127. eoo l of 1 M2048 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 113 1 If the tapping cycle is called marker M2048 is set by the NC After switching on the spindle with M03 and successful acknowledgement marker M2482 the set spindle speed should have been reached when the feed commences Upon switch on the spindle follows the ramp from MP3410 0 on switching off it follows the ramp from MP3410 2 Switch off is initiated by the NC with MO5 The M functions that are output must be acknowledged However if the feed ramp is flatter than the spindle ramp then the spindle follows the flatter feed ramp Switch off can be delayed by MP7120 2 Example If spindle speed s 1000 rpm 1 8 V and the thread ramp is 0 05 V ms then 1 8 V 0 05 V ms 36 ms The spindle is decelerated 36 ms before reaching the total hole depth If the spindle deceleration is delayed by the spindle slow down time then it is only possible to delay up to 30 ms before reaching the total hole depth Any greater delay will be ignored In this example a maximum slow down time of 6 ms is in effect The restarting of the Spindle with M04 can be delayed by MP7120 0 The ramp follows MP3410 2 again The restarting of the feed can be delayed with the dwell time which is programmed in the cycle The dwell times permit an optimal adjustment of the floating tap holder The switch off of the spindle is again performed by the NC with MO5
128. female connector 9 pin Pin number Assignment OV 12 V 0 6 V Uv DTR TxD RxD DSR 3 5 Do not use gt lo lolxjo n 10 2 Portable handwheel HR 330 The HR 330 is a portable handwheel with keys for the 5 axes rapid traverse direction of traverse and EMERGENCY STOP The HR 330 is connected to the logic unit by means of the cable adapter Id Nr 249 889 See also under the heading Mounting dimensions The HEIDENHAIN extension cable Id Nr 281 429 may be used to increase the connection distance The HR 330 is available in 2 versions HR 330 helical cable stretched length 2 2 m Id Nr 251 534 11 HR 330 001 normal cable max 6 m Id Nr 251 534 12 Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id Nr 271 958 02 El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 3 43 e HR 330 001 max 6 m HR 330 max 2 2 m max 48 m max 49 m HR Le feed D X23 Electronic handwheel Id Nr 251 534 Id Nr 249 889 Id Nr 281 429 EMERGENCY OFF 2 BL max 24V 1 BL 4 L REI d uc gc WH 2 2 WH 2 2 lov a ria Si 3 3 ge 313 HR 330 CIE 44 4 4 412V 0 6V Uv GN a 3 3 A 5 5 5 5 T alla YL 6 6 YL 6 6 DTR 5 5 7 7 717 WH GN GN Ge 6 6 HH 8 8 H LH 8 8 RXD a Lo aa SUE 9 9 gt a max 50 m gt
129. for the NC axes may be found in the section machine axes The PLC functions which are described in the following sections are only effective for controlled axes 3 6 1 Axis enable feed rate enable After switching on the control voltage the Axis enable markers are automatically set by the NC so that the machine axes can be held in closed position loops by the control The axis enable markers can be reset by the NC if the control loop is opened by the PLC see section Open control loop Marker Function Set Reset M2000 Axis enable X NC NC M2001 Axis enable Y M2002 Axis enable Z M2003 Axis enable 4 M2016 Axis enable 5 The feed rate enable must be specified for all axes by M2451 and complement marker M2467 or hrough byte B520 before the axes can be moved If the feed rate enable is removed the analogue voltage is output as O V and the axes immediately stop moving The letter F is then highlighted in he status display 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 89 o Marker Function Set Reset M2451 Feed rate enable for all axes PLC PLC M2467 Complement feed rate enable Address Function B520 Axis specific feed rate enable Bit O 1 Feed rate enable Axis X 0 No Feed rate enable Axis X Bit 1 2 Feed rate enable Axis Y 0 No Feed rate enable Axis Y Bit 2 4 Feed rate enable Axis Z 0 No Feed rate enable Axis Z Bit 3 8 Feed rate enable 4th axis 0 No Feed rate enable 4th ax
130. for the electronic handwheel is entered in machine parameter MP7660 Traversing with the handwheel is disabled by setting marker M2826 i e handwheel pulses are suppressed A interpolation factor can be selected in the Handwheel operating mode This interpolation factor determines the traverse distance per turn In order to ensure that the rapid traverse rate fixed by the machine parameter MP1010 x is not exceeded the NC determines the minimum entry value for the interpolation factor The NC control goes by the smallest value which was entered Le according to the slowest axis MP7641 defines whether the interpolation factor can be entered direct at the TNC control panel or via PLC module 9036 see also Chapter 7 section PLC Modules Interpolation factor Traverse distance per turn Effective from rapid traverse rate mm MP1010 x mm min 0 20 12 000 1 10 6 000 2 5 3 000 3 2 5 1 500 4 1 25 750 5 0 625 80 6 0 312 80 7 0 156 80 8 0 078 80 9 0 039 80 10 0 019 80 Machine parameter MP7670 can be used to select a higher limit than that calculated by the NC Initializing parameters for the handwheel are defined in machine parameters MP7645 x These initializing parameters are currently only evaluated by HR 332 and HRA 110 The functions are described in the corresponding sections 4 196 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 01 98 L 1 MP7640 Handwheel Entry 0 to 6 0 no handwheel 1 HR 330
131. from CYCL DEF 13 3 Same as 0 but with angle from CYCL DEF 13 4 Same as 1 but with angle from CYCL DEF 13 CM 9150 Error status after call M3171 0 Spindle is being oriented M2712 1 M3171 1 See above error conditions 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 177 e 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 The marker ranges for the TNC 355 have also been used for the TNC 407 and TNC 415 to enable PLC routines created for the TNC 355 to be run on the TNC 407 and TNC 415 as well However there are many functions that can be programmed much more simply with PLC words with the TNC 407 and TNC 415 PLC marker M2719 must be set to activate the strobes for word processing Marker Function Set Reset M2719 Deactivate the TNC 355 modules PLC PLC 0 Activate strobes for marker range 1 Activate strobes for word processing M2719 1 M2719 0 Meaning Data Start PLC Pos X M2560 to M2564 Start PLC Pos Y M2565 to M2569 Start PLC Pos Z M2570 to M2574 Start PLC Pos IV M2575 to M2579 Read out strobe for 2713 D528 2809 M2560 to M2576 values in Q parameter Q100 to Q107 Read out strobe 2599 M2560 to M2567 tool number M2112 to M2119 Read in strobe tool H 2598 M2560 to M2567 number M2572 to M2579 Strobe datum 2716 D528 to D540 2819 MP4210 32 to correction MP4210 46 Spindle orientation 2712 D592 2527 M2585 to M2589 HEIDENHAIN recommend programming the PLC functions over the word range only This makes the PLC p
132. function not active 1 function active 5 42 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 Machine parameter MP7450 MP7460 MP7475 MP7480 0 Function and input Page via Calculate the tool change position from MP951 in PLC RUN 4 149 block scan Entry Xxxxx Bit O Axis X 0 Do not calculate Bit 1 Axis Y 1 Calculate Bit 2 Axis Z Bit 3 Ath axi Bit 4 5th axi Constant feed rate in corners PLC RUN 4 81 Entry 0 0001 to 179 9999 Datum in datum table PLC RUN 4 151 Entry O or 1 CN 123 0 Datum point is workpiece datum 1 Datum point is machine datum Output of tool number or pocket number with PLC RUN 4 229 TOOL CALL block Entry 0 to 6 0 No output 1 Output of tool number only when tool number changes W262 Output of tool number with every TOOL CALL block W262 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 only when tool number changes Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 with every TOOL CALL block Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 only when tool number changes Pocket table does not change Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 with every TOOL CALL block Pocket table does not change 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 43 L El Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7480 1 Output of tool number or pocket number with PLC RUN 4 229 TOOL DEF b
133. functions The PLC files are then transferred to the PC in the Motorola EXORMAX S3 format With the MEGA PROMMER these data can be read in the MOX format and the EPROM programmed Please contact the HEIDENHAIN customer service if you have further questions 7 28 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 29 o m 2 7 Error messages Creating the instruction list and testing the program is supported by the display of error messages In the PLC Editor or when compiling the program in the PLC programming mode errors are displayed by the message INPUT ERROR ni The flashing message ERROR IN PLC Program n is displayed when compiling the program after switching on the control system or when a timing error occurs After resetting the error can be located by calling the PLC Editor Basically when an error is displayed in the PLC Editor the relevant file is opened and the cursor is on the error line With timing error 53 maximum PLC cycle time has timed out the cursor is on the last jump instruction to be executed Error classification The system indicates when every error was detected The following abbreviations are used E Detected while editing the line is
134. i grating period Signal period FU interpolation factor For linear measurement by rotary encoder and ballscrew 1 interpolation factor Signal period TU ballscrew pitch mm e 1000 mm mm line count The TNC always does a 4 fold evaluation of the signals at the square wave inputs If a counting step lt 1 um or is desired the signal period FU must not be greater than 4 um or Only on the TNC 407 is it possible in MP340 to enter the interpolation factor of the external electronics EXE at the encoder input X5 or X6 The TNC needs this information in order to be able to determine the absolute position when encoders with distance coded reference marks are used The interpolation factor is entered individually for each axis Angular measurement For angular measurement systems the signal period is calculated as follows signal period oo 1000 or 360 1 line count interpolation factor 1099 signal period TU If the angular measurement is made by gearing up or down this must be taken into account when calculating the signal period MP330 Signal period Entry range 0 1 to 100 in um or 5 MP330 0 X axis MP330 1 Y axis MP330 2 Z axis MP330 3 4th axis MP330 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 7 1 MP340 Interpolation factor of the EXE at X5 X6 only TNC 407 Input 0 1 5 0 No encoder at X5 X6 or EXE without interpolation 1 EXE without Interpo
135. in certain high priority program sequences Operands jump address LBL Operation A CMT command is a conditional Call Module If the Logic Accumulator is 1 the Module with the specified jump address Label is processed If the Logic Accumulator is 0 the main program continues without a Call Module This command interrupts a logic sequence 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 107 e 3 12 6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator 0 CMF Abbreviation for PLC Editor CMF CALL MODULE IF FALSE Jump processed Jump not processed Execution time ps 1 5 to 2 5 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 26 24 Special Library Call Execution time ps 2 0 to 2 4 0 4 to 0 5 Number of bytes 28 Byte information in brackets A shorter command is employed in certain high priority program sequences Operands jump address LBL Operation A CMF command is a conditional Call Module If the Logic Accumulator is 0 the Module with the specified jump address Label is processed If the Logic Accumulator is 1 the main program continues without a Call Module This command interrupts a logic sequence Example for the commands CM CMT CMF A certain Module is to be called depending on Input I5 Initial state Input I5 0 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 go 7 0 n XX XX xX _X X x xX xX xX xX x _X 1 LIS n XX x x x x O x x x x x x x 0 2 CMF 10 aw XX x x x xfOlx x x x x x x 3 L M100 n XX xX x x X 1
136. include several possibilities for compensating for an offset voltage which would cause the axes to drift The maximum permissible offset voltage in the control is 100 mV If this voltage is reached or exceeded then the error message GROSS POSITIONING ERROR E lt AXIS gt will appear The automatic cyclical offset adjustment and the adjustment via integral factor must not be active simultaneously 3 3 1 Offset adjustment by code number An automatic offset adjustment can be activated with the code number 75 368 After entering the code number the control shows the offset values for the axes X Y Z 4 5 in the dialogue line The values indicate the voltage in 0 15 mV units Thus a display of 10 means 10 x 0 15 mV 1 5 mV The display 0 means no offset On pressing the ENT key or the CONTINUE soft key the offset values are automatically compensated The control puts out an appropriate compensating voltage In the TNC 407 compensation only takes place if the offset voltage is gt 0 6 mV To switch off the automatic offset adjustment enter the code number and press the NO ENT key or the QUIT soft key If the code number has been entered but no changes are desired press the END soft key The offset values are stored in the control and are non volatile If the control is exchanged the code number must be entered to reactivate the offset adjustment 3 3 2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment The machine parameter MP1220 can be use
137. increased The probing for can also be adjusted with the deflection depth approx 4 N per mm deflection After the Meander or Contour line cycle has been started the probe moves at the feed rate defined in MP6361 to the clearance height and then in the working plain to the point above the starting point It then moves at the feed rate defined in MP6350 to the MIN point If no touch point is reached the probe moves to the first touch point in the direction defined in the cycle at the feed rate given in MP6350 MP6360 probing feed rate and MP6361 rapid traverse in the probe cycle are effective in the standard touch cycles Chapter 9 1 MP6362 makes it possible to automatically reduce the probing feed rate if the ball tip moves too far rom the path During contour line scanning the probe sometimes ends the contour line at a point located near but not exactly at the starting point MP6390 defines a target window within which the probe is considered to have returned to the starting point The target window is a square The entry value is half the length of one side of the square MP6200 Selection of triggering of measuring touch probe Entry O or 1 0 Triggering touch probe e g TS 120 1 Measuring touch probe e g TM 110 MP6310 Stylus deflection depth measuring touch probe Entry 0 1000 to 2 0000 mm MP6320 Counting direction of the measuring system signals measuring touch probe Entry xxx BitO Xaxis 0 Posit
138. initiated with the L key but directly with the orange axis direction key For reasons of compatibility this function has been retained for point and straight cut controls Example X 20 R Dialogue programming G07 X 20 G49 DIN ISO programming Paraxially corrected positioning blocks R R and radius corrected positioning blocks RR RL must not be entered one after another To avoid erroneous entries MP7246 can be used to disable the input of paraxial positioning blocks MP7246 Disable paraxial positioning blocks Entry 0 or 1 0 paraxial positioning blocks enabled 1 paraxial positioning blocks disabled 6 19 POWER INTERRUPTED Message When the control voltage is disconnected the TNC issues the message POWER INTERRUPTED The PLC is not active until this message is reset with the CE key The POWER INTERRUPTED message does not appear if MP7212 is set to 1 MP7212 POWER INTERRUPTED Entry 0 or 1 0 Reset POWER INTERRUPTED message with CE key 1 No POWER INTERRUPTED message 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 155 o 6 20 Help files If files of the HLP type are stored in either the PLC EPROM or the NC memory the HELP soft key will appear after the MOD key is activated The machine tool manufacturer creates the HELP file in the PLC Programming mode Help texts information or machine commands can be edited in the HELP file With machine commands a numerical value in the fo
139. is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204 Voltage varies with distance M201 V The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of the traversed distance The TNC increases or decreases the voltage linearly from the active voltage to the value programmed behind M201 V Entry 0 to 9 999 V Duration M201 V is effective unit a new voltage is output through M200 to M204 Voltage varies with the velocity M202 FNR The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of the velocity With machine parameters MP3013 x and MP3014 x up to 3 characteristic curves are defined in a table In the table certain analogue voltages are assigned to certain feed rates M202 FNR selects the characteristic curve in which the TNC finds the voltage to be output Entry 1 to3 Duration M202 FNR is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204 You can enter in the table up to four kink points per characteristic curve The output values are interpolated linearly between the kink points The first kink point must have the value 0 The entry values of the following kink points must increase in sequence The TNC recognizes the beginning of a new characteristic curve from the entry value 0 Example Velocity Voltage MP3013 0 o MP3014 0 o Characteristic 1 MP3013 1 25 MP3014 1_ jo MP3013 2 MP3013 3 MP3013 4 Jo MP3014 4 0 Characteristic 2 MP3013 5 MP3013 6 o MP3014 6 9 Characteristic 3 MP3013 7 i MP3
140. is smaller or equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 The comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand i e B 8 bit W 16 bit and D K 32 bit Example A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8 The result is then assigned to Marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 Doubleword D8 15 000 The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K16000 16 000 Bit 31 See 7 0 1 lt 08 re oon 2 M500 5 Line 1 The constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared Accumulator lt Operand As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 Line 3 The contents of the Logic Accumulator The result of the comparison are assigned to Marker M500 7 74 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 5 3 GREATER THAN gt Abbreviation for the PLC Editor gt GREATER THAN Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 1 0 to 1 2 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs The contents of the Word Accumulator are compared with the contents of the addressed operand If the Word Accumulator is greate
141. key The axis sequence is determined by machine parameter MP1340 X automatic passing of the reference marks e pressing the external axis direction keys The sequence is determined by the operator Only after passing over the reference mark e can the software limits be activated e can the most recently set datum point be reproduced e is PLC positioning and positioning with the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 possible e is the counter value set to zero for non controlled axes For distance coded measuring systems the machine datum MP960 x is reference to the Zero Reference mark In linear measurement systems the Zero Reference mark is the first reference mark after the start of the measuring length in angular measurement systems the Zero Reference mark is marked The direction of traverse and the velocity on passing the reference marks is defined by machine parameters MP1320 MP1330 X The functional sequence for passing the reference marks can be fixed specifically for the axes by machine parameters MP1350 X The operating condition PASS OVER REFERENCE MARKS is sent to the PLC by the NC W272 If the operating mode is changed before all reference marks have been passed the Soft key PASS OVER REFERENCE will appear The markers M2136 to M2140 inform the PLC for which axes the reference marks have not yet been crossed In order to avoid exceeding the traverse range when passing over the reference marks a trip dog
142. keypad that can be evaluated by the PLC see Handwheel section in the chapter entitled Machine Integration There are different models of the handwheel with different key labelling please contact HEIDENHAIN for further details HR 332 is connected to a cable adapter on the panel by means of a 5 m plug in connecting cable The connecting cable is available with or without metal armouring Maximum cable length between HR and LE is 50 m Connecting cable to HR 332 Id Nr 272 291 Connecting cable to HR 332 with metal armouring Id Nr 272 292 Cable adapter HR 332 LE Id Nr 274 556 Extension cable for cable adapter Id Nr 281 429 Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id Nr 271 958 01 Handwheel holder Id Nr 268 268 03 HR 332 Id Nr 266 064 21 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 3 45 2 Adapter T Id Nr 272 292 1d Nr 274 556 Id Nr 281 429 Id Nr 272 291 z black 2 viole 1 red 2 white 1 White HR 332 e E EM STOP 1 Blue nl LE EM STOP 2 Hink i 2 2 X23 red Permiss E r EIS b St Perm com 4 F violet H 4 4 di Ile ali Permiss 5H i black H Bil white i 9 9 white i 91 2 ov SUN 6l 6s eae EMA TXD EE Ge EC 4 q brown ii
143. length The chart comprises a rectangular grid with the maximum length and height of the ASCII characters A scale graduation is shown at the top after every 10 units The bar starts from the left hand edge of the grid The unused part of the grid is filled in with the background color Constraints The height of the bar chart varies according to the size of the screen window i e the current operating mode and cannot be modified 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 155 2 The specified color refers to one of the machine parameters MP735x and can be seen from the following table Color 0 MP736x 0 depending on the displayed graphics Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 or 8 or 9 P7354 0 P7356 0 P7352 0 P7353 0 P7357 0 P7352 1 P7353 1 P7350 P7357 1 ZS E E E E E E E or 10 MP7354 1 or 11 MP7356 2 or 12 MP7356 1 or 13 MP7354 2 or 14 MP7352 2 or 15 MP7351 Color 2 is the background color for the screen window and can be used for margin and scale graduations if these are not to be displayed If no screen window is currently shown for the PLC status display window is not opened or in background the module will cycle normally and the bar chart will not be displayed until the corresponding screen window reappears and provided the chart is not overwritten by a repeat call of Module 9083 in the meantime Module 9081 ca
144. line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt 5th line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt M lt DC3 gt lt DC1 gt 6th line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt M Last line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt 4 Output all files The procedure is similar to the protocol described in paragraph 3 1 2 Outputting a selected file The TNC arranges all the programs in order and transmits them No control character is sent between the individual files Output file with acknowledgement The programs are transmitted in the same way as described in section 3 1 3 Outputting all files However an acknowledgement is expected from the user between the transmission of individual programs Read in selected file If a file is read in from a peripheral unit e g a PC the corresponding name must be indicated in the TNC and the TNC be started first i e the TNC outputs the character lt DC1 gt Transmission of the file concerned is then initiated at the peripheral unit When the entire file has been transferred the TNC sends character lt EOT gt 1 8 32 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 L Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC lt DC1 gt Id lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt gt Last line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ETX gt gt i lt EOT gt h In this transfer method the TNC can sto
145. load to data stack CM 390 absolute amount PLW distance to right grid point lt D776 positioning window from MP4210 2 for Hirth positioning Ol L DO distance to left grid point lt D776 M2 axis in grid position EM LBL 370 check nominal value grid spacing PS K 0 target address PS K 4 distance to go CM 9041 upload coordinates PS D12 save distance to go to stack PS K 8 target address PS K 3 trailing error CM 9041 upload coordinates PS K 0 target address PS K 2 ref value CM 9041 calculate new nominal value PLW distance to go D12 ref value axis D20 trailing error MOD D28 Hirth grid PSW enter data in stack memory for absolute amount CM 390 absolute amount PLW read absolute amount DO L D28 Hirth grid axis 4 DO absolute amount D4 L DO D4 JPT 371 L DO D4 EM 4 218 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 01 98 2 LBL 371 L D4 gt D780 MP4210 3 programming accuracy axis 4 for Hirth M4 1 scale graduation cannot be approached EM LBL 390 convert to absolute amount PLW load ACCU PSW load to data stack BT K 31 write bit 31 to L accu bit test JPF 391 0 positive jump if accu 0 PLW load ACCU x K 1 sign PSW write data to data stack EM LBL 391 Jump label EM 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 4 219 e
146. longer in production and external devices with appropriate data interfaces computers printers readers punches can be connected via either RS 232 C V 24 or RS 422 V 11 interfaces The two interfaces of the TNC can also be operated in parallel for example a program can be read in via the RS 232 C V 24 interface and simultaneously executed while a data file could be read in via the RS 422 V 11 interface However an external interface for level conversion must be used when connecting a floppy disk unit and magnetic tape unit to the RS 422 V 11 interface Two transmission protocols are available for data transfer Standard data transmission protocol Data transfer with Block Check Character BCC The data format and control characters concerned are freely configurable within the framework of these protocols 2 2 RS 232 C V 24 interface RS 232 C is the designation of a serial interface based on the EIA standard of the same name and can be used for transmission rates up to 19 200 bits sec Data transfer is executed asynchronously with a start bit before each character and one or two stop bits after each character The interface is designed for transmission distances of up to 30 metres The RS 232 C interface has been adopted with slight modifications and has been introduced into Europe as the V 24 interface The relevant German standard is DIN 66020 2 2 1 Hardware The physical connection between two RS 232 C V 24 interfa
147. loop Z axis Open control loop 4th axis Open control loop 5th axis Await open control loop X axis Await open control loop Y axis Await open control loop Z axis Await open control loop 4th axis Await open control loop 5th axis Suppress EMERGENCY STOP open the control loop NC stop NC stop and open the control loop 3 6 5 Actual nominal value transfer If the markers M2552 to M2555 and M2505 are set then the actual positional value will be transferred to the nominal value Set PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC Reset PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PEG PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC Actual value transfer is only possible in the Manual and Electronic handwheel modes of operation Marker Function Set Reset M2552 Actual nominal value transfer X axis PLC PLG M2553 Actual nominal value transfer Y axis PLC PLC M2554 Actual nominal value transfer Z axis PLC PLC M2555 Actual nominal value transfer 4th axis PLC PLC M2505 Actual nominal value transfer 5th axis PLC PLC 4 92 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 i 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 93 i 4 Main Spindle The spindle is controlled by the PLC The sp
148. machine or external factors e g temperature a non linear axis error can occur Such an axis error is usually determined by a comparator measuring instrument e g HEIDENHAIN Ma ag E T For example the lead screw pitch error for the Z axis Z F Z or the sag as a function of the Y axis Z F Y could be determined The TNC can compensate ballscrew pitch error and sag at the same time A correction table file extension COM is created for each axis in the PLC Programming mode code number 80 76 67 A number of dependencies can be entered in a correction table The number of possible compensations is limited to ten dependencies and a total of 640 points 256 points per dependency The following items must be defined in the table headline Filename Dimensions Datum Compensation Dependencies inmm point distance The datum is the distance from the machine datum MP960 X The distance of the compensation points is entered as an exponent to the base 2 e g enter 16 2 6 5536 mm Maximum input value is 279 The datum and the selected distance of the compensation points must be allowed for when plotting the error curve Only enter the kinks on the error curve The controller performs automatic linear interpolation between the kinks 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 27 2 Each
149. of servo amplifier of X axis y Enter following values for position monitoring MP1410 0 5 MP1420 30 Enter following program in PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode LBL 1 X 1001 RO F MAX xX 0 ROF MAX CALL LBL 1 REP 100 100 y Increase MP1060 Acceleration progressively y Press machine START button in the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating mode machine runs Does control stop machine with error message POSITIONING RROR Yes Enter acceleration from MP1060 0 in MP 1060 1 to 1060 4 Traverse axes Y Z IV and V with the acceleration value found Reduce values as required Enter 0 7 to 0 9 times the computed values as acceleration in MP1060 1 Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure El 4 269 E Optimize transient response MP1520 defines the transient response when accelerating and braking The approach behaviour is optimized to the target position Tacho voltage _MP15380 correct MP1530 too high See MP1530 too low t ms Since MP1520 is effective for all axes the worst axis determines the entry value No axis should show an overshoot If MP1520 is set too low then the positioning times to the target position will increase substantially Optimize MP1520 with great care 4 270 TNC 407 TN
150. open control loop if lock not released 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 4 215 2 Positioning on grid L M2051 manual operation mode O M2052 electronic handwheel mode AN M2 axis 4 not in grid spacing A M2011 axis 4 in position AN M2707 axis 4 PLC positioning not active CMT 340 start PLC positioning axis on grid spacing Grid not reached L M5 controlled operation mode AN M2 axis 4 not in grid spacing AN M2011 axis 4 not in position S M3023 PLC error message error on Automatic mode A M2 axis 4 in grid A M2011 axis 4 not in position R M3023 PLC error message reset EM LBL 330 Adjacent grid spacing relate to nominal axis position PS K 8 target address PS K 3 trailing error CM 9041 upload coordinate value PS K 0 target address PS K 2 REF value CM 9041 upload coordinate value Calculate left and right grid L D12 REF value axis A D20 trailing error axis 4 D44 snominal grid value Left grid L D44 PSW load to stack lt K 0 CMT 331 decrement by Hirth grid PLW load to ACCU D28 x D28 suppress residual spacing D36 left grid point Right grid L D36 D28 8 D40 sright grid point Save direction of traverse L M2163 direction of traverse axis V M3 save to buffered marker EM 4 216 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 01 98 2 LBL PLW PSW EM 331 D28 PLC Positioning to adjacent g
151. or 0 001 5 0 0005 mm or 0 0005 TNC 415 B only 6 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 TNC 415 B only MP7290 0 X axis MP 7290 1 Y axis MP 7290 2 Z axis MP 7290 3 4th axis MP 7290 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 37 L Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7295 Inhibit datum setting PLC RUN 4 127 Entry Xxxxx CN 123 BitO X axisO not disabled Bit 1 Y axis1 disabled Bit 2 Zaxis Bit3 4th axis Bit 4 5th axis MP7296 Set datum with axis keys PLC RUN 4 128 Entry 0 or 1 CN 123 0 datum can be set with axis keys and soft key 1 datum can be set with soft key only MP7300 Cancel Status display and Q parameters PLC RUN 4 140 Entry 0 to 7 CN 123 Cancel status display and Q parameters and tool data when program is selected Cancel status display Q parameters and tool data with M02 M30 END PGM and when program is sele Cancel status display and tool data when program is selected Cancel status display and tool data when program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM Cancel status display and O parameters when program is selected Cancel status display and O parameters when program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM Cancel status display when program is selected Cancel status display when program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 5 38 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o Machine Functi
152. or equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 119 e 1 3 15 3 GREATER THAN gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor gt GREATER THAN Execution time ps lt 100 Number of bytes STRING memory 12 Immediate STRING 20 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 26 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command a direct transition from STRING to logic execution takes place The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument If the STRING Accumulator is greater than the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the STRING Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 3 15 4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt LESS EQUAL Execution time ps lt 100 Number of bytes STRING memory 12 Immediate STRING 20 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 26 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command a direct transition from STRING to logic execution takes place The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument If the STRING Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the STRING Accumulator is greater than the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 3 15 5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor g
153. outle di o SE Pal i Bai i a a tee ee a A E y 100 ics Measuring point for ambient temperature Free space for air circulation Free space for servicing Illustration of max swivel range The minimum angle of swivel for exchange of subassembly should be at least 90 3 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Assembly hints fal 01 98 2 2 5 2 Visual display unit VDU When mounting the VDU it must be remembered that this unit is very sensitive to magnetic pick up The picture position and geometry can be disturbed by stray magnetic fields Alternating fields cause periodic movement or distortion of the picture For this reason keep a minimum distance of 0 5 m between the VDU casing and the source of any disturbance e g permanent magnets motors transformers etc 415 400 330 E EFG E 6 8 ES EISEN 25 KR x Measuring point for ambient temperature 7 Free space for air circulation 2 6 Degree of protection When mounted the visual display unit and the keyboard unit provide class IP54 protection against dust and splashwater 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 3 13 e 3 Summary of connections 3 1 TNC 415 Control loop board colour code X1 Measuring system 1 X2 Measuring system 2 X3 Measuring system 3 X4 Measuring syste
154. panel can be connected to the logic unit with the standard HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id Nr 263 954 max 40 m Les Id Nr 263 954 If the machine operating panel does not have a 37 pin D subminiature connector the HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id Nr 244 005 may be used max 40 m Sg Id Nr 244 005 For the assignments of the multi core conductors see PLC inputs outputs If for any reason the manufacturers of the machine have to produce their own cable a 37 pin connector is available from HEIDENHAIN d Nr 243 937 ZY 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 12 Machine operating panel 3 67 L 13 TNC keyboard The TNC keyboard TE 400 is connected to the logic unit by a connecting cable Additionally the Soft keys for the VDU BC 110 are connected to the TNC keyboard by a flat cable The flat cable is one of the items supplied with the VDU 13 1 Pin connections On the logic unit X45 TNC keyboard TE 400 D sub female connector 37 pin Pin Number Assignment 1 RLO 2 RL1 3 RL2 4 RL3 5 RL4 6 RL5 7 RL6 8 RL7 9 RL8 10 RL9 11 RL10 12 RL11 13 RL12 14 RL13 15 RL14 16 RL15 17 RL16 18 RL17 19 RL18 20 SLO 21 SL1 22 SL2 23 SL3 24 SL4 25 SL5 26 SL6 27 SL7 28 RL19 29 RL20 30 Do not use 31 RL21 32 RL22 33 RL23 34 Spindle override wiper 35 Feed override wiper 36 5 V override potentiometer 37 0 V override potentiometer Housing External screen
155. phase bridge rectifier without smoothing are permissible up to a ripple factor of 5 see DIN 40110 10 75 Section 1 2 The 0 V line of the PLC power supply must be grounded with an earth lead gt 6 mm to the main frame ground of the machine The earth lead at the frame of the PL 410 must be directly connected to protective earth with an earth lead z 6mm To prevent ground loops the measured voltage at the analog inputs must not be grounded X44 power supply for the PLC Connection terminals Pin Number Assignment 1 24 V DC switched off by EMERGENCY STOP 2 24 V DC not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP 3 OV Power supply for the PL 400 Terminal Assignment X13 24 V DC switched off by EMERGENCY STOP X12 OV X3 Pin 12 24 V DC not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP Power supply for the PL 410 Terminal Assignment PL 1 or PL 2 x9 X10 24 V logic supply and for Control ready X11 064 071 X12 072 079 X13 080 087 X14 088 094 The routing and connection of the thermistors and analog inputs must be shockproof to VDE 0160 Section 5 5 1 If this cannot be guaranteed then both the PLC and the PL 410 must be supplied with voltage in accordance with VDE 0160 5 88 recommendations for low voltage electrical separation 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 4 Power supply 3 17 EN Power supply for the PL 410 B Connections as on the PL 410 plus power supply at X23 in accordance with VDE 0160 5 88 low voltag
156. rate is entered in mm min The programmed feed rate dictates the acceleration after the ramp Time resolution The recording time ranges from 2 4576 sec to 24 576 sec set time x4096 The time set between 0 6 and 6 ms is the cycle time for recording curves The recording time is overlaid beneath the grid The beginning and end of the image are also displayed relative to the trigger point cursor line T1 Channels 1 to 4 A total of 4 channels can be selected for recording The axes can be randomly assigned to the channels this is done using the ENT key after selecting the entry position For each channel a characteristic curve is selected from the following variables Feed rate V ACTUAL Actual value mm min V NOMINAL Nominal value mm min Speed S ACTUAL Actual value mm S NOMINAL Nominal value mm Speed controller N INT Nominal actual difference for speed controller mm min Position N ACTUAL Actual value mm min N NOMINAL Nominal value mm min Trailing error D DIFF Trailing error for speed control mm Analogue voltage U ANALOGUE output analogue voltage mV Channel OFF Channel is displayed SAVED Channel is saved Recording is activated with START soft key This calls a soft key row in which the sole option is STOP Recording can be interrupted at will Saved channels cannot be displayed at the same time as recording is in progress because synchronization between the saved channels and the channels currently rec
157. read in again complete with a Block Check Character BCC If the file is stored in an external computer using HEIDENHAIN s TNC EXE data transfer software a new file extension is generated This extension consists of the code and the letters NC Example If a pallet table is stored it is given the file extension LNC 8 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 E When outputting the file the error messages dialogs and text files are all output as ASCII files with the code A Consequently if they are sent on an external data carrier these files must have different file names so that they are not overwritten by files with similar names If the files are read in again they are first of all stored as ASCII files and have to be converted back to the original file type by the user The menu functions Read all files Read files with acknowledgement and Show ext directory only work with files which contain the name concerned at the start of the file NC programs and tables The remaining files PLC error dialog and ASCII files have to be read in individually 2 4 2 Output to external devices Any external device e g computers printers readers and punches can be addressed via either of the two interfaces For this purpose the TNC has three freely configurable interface modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 which within certain limits permit any setting of the data format and control characters of the required data
158. selection addressing of the corresponding bit is derived from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant In the bit numbering bit O corresponds to the LSB and bit 31 the MSB For operand contents larger than 32 the operand value Modulo 32 is used i e the integer remainder from the division operand value 32 Example Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator set bit O of the Accumulator to 0 and store the result in Doubleword D12 Initial state Doubleword D8 3E 81 hex Doubleword D12 Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content XX XX XX XX 1 LD8 2 BC K 0 00 00 3E 80 3 D12 00 00 E 80 UU 00 3E 80 Line 1 Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator Line 2 The bit specified in the operand is set to 0 Line 3 The result is stored in Doubleword D12 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 97 e f 3 10 3 BIT TEST BT Abbreviation for PLC Editor BT BIT TEST Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 6 to 1 1 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 0 Operands B W D K Operation With this command the status of each individual bit in the Accumulator may be interrogated With BT commands a direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place The BIT TEST tests the status of a bit from the Word Accumulator and then acts correspondingly on the Logic Accumulator If the tested bit is 1 then the Logic Accumula
159. speed gear range 5 MP3515 5 Maximum spindle speed gear range 6 MP3515 6 Maximum spindle speed gear range 7 MP3515 7 Maximum spindle speed gear range 8 MP3210 S analogue voltage for gear range Entry 0 to 9 999 V MP3210 0 S analogue voltage gear range 1 MP3210 1 S analogue voltage gear range 2 MP3210 2 S analogue voltage gear range 3 MP3210 3 S analogue voltage gear range 4 MP3210 4 S analogue voltage gear range 5 MP3210 5 S analogue voltage gear range 6 MP3210 6 S analogue voltage gear range 7 MP3210 7 S analogue voltage gear range 8 MP3240 1 Minimum S analogue voltage output Entry 0 to 9 999 V MP3120 Zero spindle speed permitted Entry value 0 S 0 permitted Entry value 1 S 0 not permitted MP3410 0 Ramp slope for spindle for M03 M04 M05 Entry 0 to 1 9999 V ms Marker Function Set Reset M2004 S analogue voltage not on the ramp NC NC M2005 S analogue voltage 0 V NC NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 97 2 Ei 4 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 i 4 1 3 S Override The spindle speed can be altered within certain limits by the S override potentiometer These limits are fixed by machine parameter MP3310 However the upper spindle speed limit from MP3515 cannot be exceeded by
160. ss isssssseiireerrenen 2 3 BIOCK SCA Mics eS aon a be 2 16 4 149 Block Dranstet 27 dsm Zeie eege 8 19 Boltshole circles cringe tithes n 9 9 BS BISE Win testa tale ens 7 96 Bi BUD TEST iz cee a Oe saiees 7 98 B ffet Dattenyeirsszees eleng AR 3 18 EU 7 16 7 18 13 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 01 98 eege 7 26 Ca bleada pter Saa A 3 81 Cable OVervieW cccccccccccccccsstesceeessseeeeeees 3 72 Calibrating EE 4 178 Call Module CM 7 107 RRE 9 3 CAN CANCEL 8 adversities Sen Segg es aseene 7 124 Cancel status display 0 c eeeee 4 140 Cancellable error message 4 120 Cascade controls nis dsle vetlel 4 65 CASE GASE EE Eet Bek Gattis 7 129 CASE Branio dees dee ege 7 129 Centre Off Sls Aessen gege dteieest eg A9 4 178 Change direction of spindle rotation 4 96 Character frame niione nents 8 6 CM CALL MODULE cee 7 107 CMF CALL MODULE IF FALSE 7 108 CMT CALL MODULE IF TRUE 7 107 E KEE 5 4 Code for M fUnction 0 eeeeeeeeees 4 159 COS length see ensani 7 7 Code number 2 15 4 31 4 77 5 4 7 6 Code NUMMDL iai aa a neh 4 258 Coded output BCD rtan 4 104 lee li 4 152 Colour adjUStMent cccccsecececceeeeees 4 130 Command aia a a N 7 16 Commandes 20 0 ceceecescceccecessseeececcensseaeeeees 7 36 EENEG his Ali Sunes Een 5 3 COMMENTS Eege EE 7 6 Cormmissionimg a i 4 258 COMPALISONS dee Ee 7 73 Compensation A
161. table display that is set to modulo 360 the M function M 126 positions the table by the shortest path M 127 positions the table as before by the path that does not cross over the 0 position The function for automatic tool measurement was expanded with the TT 110 The new fields L OFFS R OFFS LBREAK and RBREAK were introduced to the tool table MP7266 19 to MP7266 21 In addition in Cycle 31 the radius is no longer entered and the fields L OFFS R OFFS LBREAK and RBREAK were added to the modules 9092 9093 and 9094 The new marker M2393 is set whenever the break tolerance is exceeded 2 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 e TNC 415 B TNC 425 280 54x 05 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 280 56x 05 TNC 407 280 58x 05 Release 3 96 Improvements The Polish dialog language was added Id Nr 280 590 xx 280 550 xx and 280 570 xx Contour Pocket cycle cycle 6 15 16 21 22 23 24 MP7420 Bit 4 0 After the contour pocket is machined the TNC moves to the position that was last approached before the cycle was called Bit 4 1 After the contour pocket is machined the TNC moves the tool to clearance height Module 9036 Limiting jog increment Transferred value 0 to 50 mm Limiting jog increment 1 lt 2 or gt 50 Jog increment limit is canceled and the last increment entered is activated 2 Jog increment limit is canceled and the minimum from the last increment entered and the last limit
162. the jump address LBL Simultaneously the allocated number is written to the Word Accumulator If there are already programs transferred into the Submit queue the addressed program will not be processed until the program immediately prior to it is finished A submission to the queue may only take place from a PLC program a SUBM command in a Submit program is not possible If no location is free in the queue or if the SUBM command is programmed in a Submit program nesting a 0 will be returned to the Word Accumulator 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 123 e 1 3 16 2 Status Interrogation of a Submit Program RPLY Abbreviation for PLC Editor RPLY REPLY Execution time us lt 5 Number of bytes 10 Operands B W D Operation With the RPLY command the Status of the Submit program is interrogated with the specified Identifier This Identifier must already be stored in a Byte Word or Doubleword prior to the calling up of the Submit program With the RPLY command and the memory address specified above which contains the Identifier one of the following messages about the status is transferred to the Word Accumulator Word Accumulator 0 Program complete not in the queue Word Accumulator 1 Program running Word Accumulator 2 Program in the queue 3 16 3 Cancellation of a Submit Program CAN Abbreviation for PLC Editor CAN CANCEL Execution time us lt 40 Number of bytes 10 Operands B W D Op
163. the lubrication should only be activated when the axis is at rest then this must be taken into account in the PLC program MP4060 0 1 000 approx 65 m MP4110 0 100 approx 2 sec 45 L M2012 lubrication pulse X axis 46 T0 start timer for duration of lubrication 47 M2548 reset accumulated distance 48 L T48 duration of lubrication for X axis 49 024 set output for lubrication M2012 M2548 TO T48 024 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 21 2 4 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 i 1 6 Axis error compensation he HEIDENHAIN contouring control can compensate for mechanical defects in the machine The following axis error compensation is possible backlash compensation compensation of reversal errors in circular motion linear axis error compensation non linear axis error compensation compensation of thermal expansion Either the linear or the non linear axis error compensation can be activated The other types of compensation can always be activated in parallel 1 6 1 Backlash compensation If linear traverse is measured by ballscrew and rotary encoder a small amount of play between the movement of the table and that of the rotary enc
164. the number of possible places after the decimal Example to set MP910 0 to 100 12 mm write 1001200 four places after the decimal lead to a multiplication by 10000 Only the value in the run time memory is modified the value in the editable machine parameter list does not change This means that the old value is valid again after editing and escaping from the machine parameter list Zero must be given as the index for non indexed machine parameters Once the NC program has started the module only operates during the output of M G S T T2 O strobes Not every MP can be modified by the PLC The machine parameters that can be modified by the PLC are marked PLC in the chapter Machine Parameters Possible errors The machine parameter specified by the MP number and index does not exist The specified MP cannot be modified by the PLC or not once the NC program has started The module was not called from a Submit Job The module was called after the NC program started without a strobe marker being active Call PS B W D K lt MP Number gt PS B W D K lt MP Index gt PS B W D lt MP Value gt CM 9031 PL B W D lt Error Code gt 0 No error 1 MP does not exist not modifiable not modifiable once PC PGM has started 2 MP value out of range 3 Error when saving Fatal Error 4 Call was not from SUBMIT Job 5 Call once PGM started without strobe Error status after call M3171 0 MP was written 1 Error condition s
165. the positive direction Digitizing continues as soon as the touch probe is cleared Machine parameter MP6260 defines whether an M90 is appended to each NC block in the output digitized data see also Constant contour speed at corners with M90 Machine parameter MP6270 defines the output format of the digitized data i e the number of decimal places to which the coordinates are output MP6210 Number of oscillations in normal direction per second Input range 0 to 65 535 1 s MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction Input range O to 1000 mm min MP6240 Maximum stylus deflection Input range O to 10 000 mm MP6260 Output of M90 for NC blocks with digitized data Input value 0 no M90 output 1 M90 output in each NC block MP6270 Rounding decimal places Input value O output 0 001 mm steps um 1 output 0 01 mm steps 10 um 2 output 0 0001 mm steps 0 1 um 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 181 e 9 2 1 Scanning cycles Direct access to the position control loop of the TNC controller allows the rapid recording of measured values 3 to 5 values per second With a programmed probe point interval of 1 mm this produces a scanning feed rate of 180 to 300 mm min Three scanning cycles are used for digitizing Range Meander and Contour Lines The Range cycle defines the cuboid scanning range and the file where the digitized data are stored The Meander cycle digitizes a 3 D form The C
166. the user must press the EXT key The HEIDENHAIN service department is at your disposal for further information about creating EPROMs A table could look like this IDENT 123 456 99 LOAD PLCOCODE PLC LOAD PLCOCODE ER1 LOAD PLCOCODE ERE LOAD PLCOCODE DI1 LOAD PLCOCODE THE LOAD 999 999 69 H OEM cycle If the PLC program is to be transferred to a 2MB EPROM the command SIZE 2MB must be entered in the table as of software 280 58 280 54 280 56 The PLC main program is designated with JM Help files HLP and machine parameters lists MP can also be transferred into the EPROM 1 7 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 01 98 E 1 6 Test functions for the PLC program 1 6 1 TRACE functions The TRACE function makes it possible to check the logical states of the markers inputs outputs timers and counters as well as to test the contents of Byte Word and Doubleword These functions are available from the Main menu by using the soft key TRACE The list of instructions for the compiled program will then be displayed In addition the contents of the Operand and Accumulator for each line of the program are shown in HEX or decimal code Every active command in the LIST is identified with a The cursor keys or the GOTO function can be used to display the required portion of the program The soft keys now have the following meaning SELECT LOGIC FIND E e START STOP Hieft DIAGRAM TRACE TRACE kel DISPLAY HE
167. their respective reference marks The default setting can be modified with MP960 machine datum In this mode any offset between the two axes is compensated in the slave axis at the speed from MP1330 after both reference marks are traversed and synchronization does not activate until compensation is completed The way in which the reference marks are traversed MP1350 must be set the same for both axes The master axis must be defined before the slave axis in the sequence for approaching the reference marks MP1340 Where rotary encoders are used for linear measurement MP1350 2 only one end position switch should be used for both axes because the reference end position marker for the slave axis is only used to evaluate the reference mark and not to evaluate the direction of traverse when controlling the sequence The direction of traverse is defined by the value of the reference end position marker for the master axis Traversing the reference mark is completed when one reference mark has been evaluated for both axes see also section Reference marks MP855 Synchronization monitoring Entry 0 to 100 0000 mm 0 Monitoring inactive MP855 0 X axis MP855 1 Y axis MP855 2 Z axis MP855 3 Ath axis MP855 4 5th axis MP860 Datum for synchronization control Entry 0 or 1 0 Datum at position upon switch on 1 Datum at reference marks machine datum MP860 0 X axis MP860 1 Y axis MP860 2 Z axis MP860 3 Ath axis MP8
168. therefore equipped with one or more reference marks On passing a reference mark a signal is generated which identifies the particular position as a reference point By passing over the reference marks after a power interruption the relationships between the axis positions and positional values and at the same time the fixed machine relationships which were most recently determined by the datum point setting are re established Workpiece datum 0 Ce e Machine table lt p gt Position encoder Reference mark Machine datum Since it is often inconvenient to re establish the reference points by traversing large distances after switching on HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of measuring systems with distance coded reference marks With this kind of measuring system the absolute position is available after crossing two reference marks The scale graduation consists of the line grating and a reference mark track which runs parallel to it The distances between any two consecutive reference marks are defined differently so that the absolute position of the machine slide can be determined from this distance Scale with one reference mark Scale with distance coded reference marks 4 52 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 L 2 1 Passing over the reference marks The reference marks for axes must be passed after switching on the control This can be achieved by e pressing the external START
169. these pockets are locked by the L field Variable pocket coding can be restricted by the EI field fixed pocket For special tools variable pocket coding can also be restricted with marker M2601 If marker M2601 is set then all special tools are returned to their original pocket despite variable pocket coding being selected This function can also be defined for specific normal tools in the F field Marker Function Set Reset M2601 Special tool to original pocket despite variable pocket coding PLC PLC In software types 243 05 259 91 259 96 259 97 243 07 and 243 02 the special tools are identified by S in the tool table The number of reserved pockets has been defined in machine parameter MP7264 MP7264 is no longer available MP7264 Number of reserved pockets next to special tool Entry 0 to 3 4 226 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 o 15 1 2 Tool life replacement tool The operator is able to specify two different tool lives TIME1 and TIME2 and a replacement tool RT for every tool in the tool table If on TOOL CALL the current tool life CUR TIME is greater than TIME2 the pocket number or tool number MP7480 of the replacement tool is automatically downloaded If TIME2 is greater than zero and no replacement tool is defined a TOOL CALL for the replacement tool provokes the error message MAX TOOL
170. tool Interruption of PLC positioning Fast PLC input Arc end point tolerance Locking of file types D596 rapid traverse from PLC D276 code number Axis specific monitoring functions Compensation of tool length in the position display PLC module 7031 module 9032 module 9083 module 9093 module 9094 TNC 415 A 259 96x 02 TNC 415 E 259 97x 02 TNC 407 243 02x 02 Release 1 92 New functions If MP7490 0 the datum is effective for all traverse ranges Non linear characteristic curve for override potentiometer New process for traversing reference marks MP1350 x 3 TNC 415 A 259 96x 03 TNC 415 E 259 97x 03 TNC 407 243 02x 03 Release 3 92 New functions ROT display in the status window PLC error messages if more than one of the markers M2485 to M2487 is set MP4070 has been added Handwheel symbol on screen for selected axis MP7640 machine with handwheel has new input values MP340 has been added only for TNC 407 Module 9041 has been introduced only for TNC 415 A Dialog texts in Czech 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 15 e TNC 415 A 259 96x 04 TNC 415 E 259 97x 04 TNC 407 243 02x 04 Release 5 92 New functions Multipoint axis error compensation the maximum distance between compensation points was increased to 228 The maximum input range for position values was increased to 99 999 9999 mm to
171. tool are transferred Pocket number 255 tells the PLC that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool M2046 M2483 M2093 M2600 M2401 M2402 M2403 M2601 W262 W264 Pocket No S Pocket No 255 Tool No 0 Too No m 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer El 4 239 e S S Special tool follows Special tool Flag 2601 or field F in the pocket table can be used to set whether the special tool is to be returned to its original pocket despite variable pocket coding The same logic diagram applies to single and double changing arms M2600 0 and 1 with variable pocket coding for special tools M2601 0 M2046 0 M2483 Jl M2093 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No new S W264 Tool No new S If the special tool is to return to its original pocket despite variable pocket coding M2601 1 there is a different pocket number transfer sequence for single and double changing arms M2600 4 240 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 L Ei S gt S Single Changing Arm M2600 0 The pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number O tells the PLC to clear the spindle After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred M2046 0 1 M2483 0 1 M2093 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402
172. tool length RBREAK Breakage tolerance for tool radius 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 223 e The elements in the tables and the sequence in which they appear are defined in machine parameters MP7266 x and MP7264 x SE TOOL NUMBER TOOL NAME TOOL NUMBER FILE TOOL_P ll DR2 TL RT LIMET TIME CUR TIME DOC NAME E E HUE EE o 0 o a o o mm o0000000 1 0 01 2 1800 1400 256 ROUGH 1 TOOL 1 1 sr 21011011 2 0 01 1500 1400 ROUGH 2 TOOL2 F L 100011200 3 8 H H H 3 3 F 11100111 4 0 L 2500 2400 2455 TOOL3 4 4 s F 01111111 5 8 H H H 5 D S 11080000 6 0 1 500 490 10 D D E 11180110 H 0 1 500 490 H 8 0 H H H 3 40 10 150 140 25 PECKING 1 TOOL4 55 9624 Y 232 3492 10 0 120 140 o PECKING 2 2 7 8668 B 331 0088 1140 D D D C 12 5000 12 0 a D a Bik a M 5 9 BEGIN END PAGE PAGE NEXT BEGIN END PARE T RESE EDIT NEXT TOOL TABLE TABLE JL T LINE TABLE E L Tel OFF JO LINE TABLE Left side of the tool table Right side of the sa table The tollowing fields can be edited in the pocket table T Tool number ST Special tool F i Fixed pocket L Locked pocket PLC Additional information for PLC module 9093 PROGRAMM ING AND EDITING EDIT TOOL TABLE TOOL NUMBER FILE TOOL_P P Tost rt PLC o m 0000006 1 1 Sr 10110111 2 L 10001100 3 3 F 11100111 4 4 sr 01111111 5 5 s 11000060 6 6 11100110
173. tool radius RTOL P7266 16 Cutting direction of the tool DIRECT P7266 17 PLC status PLC P7266 18 Tool length offset TT L OFFS P7266 19 Tool radius offset TT R OFFS P7266 20 Breakage tolerance for tool length LBREAK P7266 21 Breakage tolerance for tool radius RBREAK 5 36 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o 1 Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7267 Items in pocket table CN 123 4 226 Entry 0 to 99 0 No display 1 to 99 Position in pocket table MP7267 0 Tool number T MP7267 1 Special tool ST MP7267 2 Fixed pocket F MP7267 3 Locked pocket L MP7267 4 PLC status PLC MP7270 Display of the feed rates in manual operating PLC RUN 4 138 modes Manual operation Electronic handwheel CN 123 Entry 0 or 1 Display of the axis feed rate only when an axis direction key is pressed axis specific feed from MP1020 X Display of the axis feed rate before operating an axis direction key smallest value from MP1020 X for all axes MP7280 Decimal sign PLC RUN 4 154 Entry 0 or 1 CN 123 0 Decimal comma 1 Decimal point MP7285 Calculation of the tool length in the position display PLC RUN 4 134 of the tool axis CN 123 Entry 0 or 1 0 tool length ignored 1 tool length taken into account MP7290 Position display step PLC RUN 4 134 Entry 0 to 6 CN 123 0 0 1 mm or 0 1 1 0 05 mm or 0 05 2 0 01 mm or 0 01 3 0 005 mm or 0 005 4 0 001 mm
174. transmission protocol The setting selected at the external devices must of course match the TNC On printers this is done by setting the DIP switches or adjusting the transmission parameters If data transfer to a computer is desired appropriate data transfer software must be installed To help in this HEIDENHAIN offer their TNC EXE data transfer software which permits transfer between TNC and a PC using a fixed transmission protocol 2 4 3 Reading in and simultaneously executing programs DNC operation In RUN PROGRAM mode with Block transfer machine programs can be transmitted from an external memory or the FE floppy disk unit via serial data interfaces and be executed simultaneously DNC operation This allows machine programs which exceed the storage capacity of the control unit to be executed After the program has started executed blocks are erased and further blocks are continuously called from the external memory The minimum and maximum memory requirement for the drip feed mode is defined with machine parameters MP7228 0 and MP7228 1 respectively The maximum memory requirement can also be set to leave enough spare for parallel programming during execution The error message Program Memory Overflow is output if the minimum storage is not enough If the program blocks are read into the TNC faster than they can be executed the entire NC memory is initially fully loaded up to the maximum memory limit MP7288 1 If it i
175. value as with Module 9092 Error numbers 0 No error element was read 1 Call was not from SUBMIT Job 2 No such file type 3 No file of specified type with M status found 4 Line number not in file 5 Wrong element number Module 9094 Write data to a Tool and Datum Table With Module 9094 the contents of a line can be overwritten in a table with M status set selected for execution The module must be told the identifier of the desired table the line number tool number for T vector number for Dor pocket number for TCH the number of the element to be written and the new value Running the module 9094 results in a new initialization of the geometry Constraints The module can only run within a SUBMIT Job The values must be entered as integers shifted by the number of definable places after the decimal point Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job There is no file of the specified type that has M status The specified line number is not in the file The specified file type does not exist The specified element does not exist The specified value is outside the permitted range Call PS BMW D K lt File type gt PS B W D K lt Line number gt PS B W D K lt Element number gt PS B W D K lt Element value gt CM 9094 PL B W D lt Error status gt Error status after call M3171 0 Element was written 1 Error condition see above Entry values as for Module 9092
176. voltage range 170 to 264 V Fuse rating F3 15A Frequency range 50 to 60 Hz Power consumption Connection L1 Assignment Live BK Neutral BL Protective earth GN YL X4 DC connections only for BC 110 Id Nr 254 740 01 Pin Number Assignment Power supply for integral fan The power supply for the fan must be connected separately to the BC 110 Id Nr 254 740 01 The connection to the 24 V machine control voltage must be according to VDE 0550 Permissible voltage range 18 to 28 V power consumption 5 W at 24 VDC The power supply for the fan is taken internally from X3 in the BC 110 B Id Nr 260 520 01 There X4 is a DC output for test purposes please do not connect 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 4 Power supply 3 19 2 4 3 Earthing plan Machine Encoders 1 2 3 4 5 6 a dl A Jil A dc X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 A anh ddi Ae dds gg LE Power supply VDE 0551 L stab supply T ov 4 voltages o i A A A A Power supply Measuring voltage n S Selectable connection NY X131 gt xaa 2 vuam X2 x9 f 1 d to 2nd PL Emergency stop controlled LA A A EE EE 24V 24V OV PLC Power a 4 4 supply DELCE VDE 0550 Fihi i a In order to avoid an earth circuit the measuring voltage should not be grounded I
177. without error If the two BCCs are not identical then the receiver transmits the lt NAK gt character negative checkback i e the data block was not transmitted correctly and must be re transmitted This process is repeated three times then the error message TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT E XE TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT E is output and the transfer is aborted If the header is acknowledged with lt ACK gt however the first file block can be transmitted lt STX gt 0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt The beginning of a data block is always identified by the control character lt STX gt The other control characters in this block are identical with the control characters in the header If the block is acknowledged by lt ACK gt then the next program block is transmitted with lt NAK gt the same block has to be re transmitted etc Once the last program block has transferred successfully acknowledged by lt AC gt the transmission is terminated by the characters lt ETX gt end of text and lt EOT gt end of transmission 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 37 L Table of control characters Character Name Description SOH Start of Header SOH identifies the beginning of the data transfer header This is a character string that contains the program number and information about the type of program and the transfer mode STX Start of Text STX identifies the beginning of a program block
178. 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No old S Pocket No new S W264 Tool No 0 Tool No new S 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 241 i S gt S Double Changing Arm M2600 1 The pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred first After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle M2046 0 1 M2483 0 1 M2093 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No new S Pocket No old S w264 Tool No new S Tool No 0 4 242 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 2 NS Special tool follows Normal tool With this tool change sequence two pocket numbers or tool numbers must be transferred in succession M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe M2046 follows There is a different pocket number transfer sequence depending on M2600 single double changing arm M2601 is not relevant N gt S Single Changing Arm M2600 0 The pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number O tells the PLC to clear the spindle After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred M2046 0 M2483 d M2093 0 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 w262 Pocket No N Pocket No S w264 ToolNo 0 Too
179. 0 3 Binary 0 1020 divisible by 4 Call PS BMW D K Data type gt 0 Binary data doubleword 1 String PS B W D K lt Target address gt For binary number of doubleword 0 1020 For string number of string 0 3 CM 9111 PL B W D lt Error code gt 0 Message was read 1 No connection to host 2 No message of this type in receive buffer 3 Wrong data type not 0 or 1 4 Wrong target address Error status after call M3171 0 Message uploaded 1 Error condition see above 7 170 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 9 PLC Axes 4 9 1 Start PLC Axis Module 9120 Axis positioning is started by defining a target position in the reference system a feed rate and a flag register The axis is positioned totally independently of other control sequences specifically there is no contour interpolation with other axes Constraints The specified axis must be activated by MP10 and declared by MP60 as a PLC axis The values for rapid traverse analogue voltage for rapid traverse acceleration etc must be set correctly in the machine parameters For axes with automatic reduction modulo value in MP810 x the axis always traverses to the target position in the direction of the shorter traverse path unless the target position has been specified as an incremental value The system does not check for limit switch overshoot The axis must be stationary Any ongoing positioning must first be aborted with M
180. 0 7 163 4 8 2 Enable Data Interface Module 9101 7 163 4 8 3 Status of Data Interface Module 9102 7 164 4 8 4 Transmit String across Data Interface Module 9103 7 165 4 8 5 Receive String across Data Interface Module 9104 7 165 4 8 6 Transmit Binary Data across Data Interface Module 9105 7 167 4 8 7 Receive Binary Data across Data Interface Module 9106 7 167 4 8 8 Read from Receive Buffer Module 9107 7 168 4 8 9 Transmit a Message by LSV 2 Module 9110 7 169 4 8 10 Read a Message by LSV 2 Module 9111 7 170 4 9 PLC Axes 7 171 4 9 1 Start PLC Axis Module 9120 7 171 4 9 2 Stop PLC Axis Module 9121 7 172 4 9 3 Status PLC Axis Module 9122 7 172 4 9 4 Traverse Reference Marks for PLC Axis Module 9123 7 173 4 9 5 Override for PLC axis Module 9124 7 174 4 10 Analogue voltage output Module 9130 7 176 4 11 Inserting an NC block Module 9150 7 177 4 12 Spindle orientation Module 9171 7 178 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7 179 5 1 PLC Program Conversion 7 180 5 2 Compatibility Markers 7 181 5 3 Incompatibility 7 183 5 3 1 PLC Macros 7 183 5 3 2 PLC Error Messages 7 185 5 3 3 Mode Code 7 185 5 3 4 Non Implemented Markers 7 186 5 3 5 PLC Cycle Time 7 187 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 5 i 1 PLC functions The integrated PLC in the TNC contains its own Text Editor for creating the list of instructions for the PLC program Commands and comments are entered via the ASCII keyboard on the control panel see section Programm
181. 0 MP 7531 11 MP 7532 395 4 MP 7540 jactivate function 7X coordinates of centre tilting table dimension XR absolute Y coordinates of centre tilting table dimension YR absolute Z coordinates of centre tilting table dimension ZR absolute free swivel axis C of rotation of C axis value of rotation of C axis value of rotation of C axis value MP 7541 01 tilting table MP 7542 0 variable dimension MP 7550 000010 shift in Y axis MP 7551 01 tilting table MP 7552 2 7 dimension Y1 MP 7560 000100 shift in Z axis MP 7561 01 tilting table MP 7562 331 3 dimension Z1 MP 7570 001000 free swivel axis A MP 7571 01 tilting table MP 7572 0 variable dimension MP 7580 000100 shift in Z axis MP 7581 01 tilting table MP 7582 4 125 9 dimension Z2 MP 7590 010000 free swivel axis B MP 7591 01 tilting table MP 7592 0 variable dimension 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes El 4 47 2 1 9 2 Five axis NC programs with swivel axes The miscellaneous function M114 activates a function that automatically compensates tool lengths when running five axis NC programs incorporating the machine geometry values from MP7510 ff This means that the TNC automatically compensates the offset that results from positioning swivel axes The tool tip is always on the programmed nomina
182. 0 4 ky factor 5th axis MP1815 Ky factor for operation with lag active after M105 Entry 0 100 to 20 000 IDN mm MP1815 0 X axis MP1815 1 Y axis MP1815 2 Z axis MP1815 3 Ath axis MP1815 4 5th axis MP1010 Rapid traverse Entry 10 to 300 000 mm min MP1010 0 X axis MP1010 1 Y axis MP1010 2 Z axis MP1010 3 Ath axis MP1010 4 5th axis MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid traverse Entry 1 000 to 9 000 V MP1050 0 X axis MP1050 1 Y axis MP1050 2 Z axis MP1050 3 Ath axis MP1050 4 5th axis MP1020 Manual feed Entry 10 to 300 000 mm min MP1020 0 Manual feed X axis MP1020 1 Manual feed Y axis MP1020 2 Manual feed Z axis MP1020 3 Manual feed 4th axis MP1020 4 Manual feed 5th axis Address Function D596 Rapid traverse from PLC 4 70 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes El 01 98 2 Servo resolution The internal calculating resolution of the control is always 0 1 um However the display step can be set with MP7290 The rounding up or Normally a servo resolution of 1 um i one voltage step per 1 um positional step must be generated per 0 1 um down is only in display see section Display and operation s sufficient i e the control must be able to generate at least deviation For 0 1 um servo resolution at least one potential Calculation of the smallest voltage step The controls produce an analogue vo age 0 to 10 V This 10 V is divided by the TNC 415 with a 16 Bit A D
183. 0 Value from MP4210 8 D804 Value from MP4210 9 D808 Value from MP4210 10 D812 Value from MP4210 11 D816 Value from MP4210 12 D820 Value from MP4210 13 D824 Value from MP4210 14 D828 Value from MP4210 15 D832 Value from MP4210 16 D836 Value from MP4210 17 D840 Value from MP4210 18 D844 Value from MP4210 19 D848 Value from MP4210 20 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 21 o Address Function D852 Value from MP4210 21 D856 Value from MP4210 22 D860 Value from MP4210 23 D864 Value from MP4210 24 D868 Value from MP4210 25 D872 Value from MP4210 26 D876 Value from MP4210 27 D880 Value from MP4210 28 D884 Value from MP4210 29 D888 Value from MP4210 30 D892 Value from MP4210 31 D896 Value from MP4210 32 D900 Value from MP4210 33 D904 Value from MP4210 34 D908 Value from MP4210 35 D912 Value from MP4210 36 D916 Value from MP4210 37 D920 Value from MP4210 38 D924 Value from MP4210 39 D928 Value from MP4210 40 D932 Value from MP4210 41 D936 Value from MP4210 42 D940 Value from MP4210 43 D944 Value from MP4210 44 D948 Value from MP4210 45 D952 Value from MP4210 46 D956 Value from MP4210 47 W960 Value from MP 4220 0 W962 Value from MP 4220 1 W964 Value from MP 4220 2 W966 Value from MP 4220 3 W968 Value from MP 4220 4 W976 Value from MP 4310 0 W978 Value from MP 4310 1 W980 Value from MP 4310 2 W982 Value from MP 4310 3 W984 Value from MP 4310 4 W986 Value from MP 4310 5 W988 Value from MP 4310
184. 0 to 11 Bit 3 Characteristic curve for linear or non linear override 0 Override linear in 1 steps 8 Override non linear Address Function W494 factor feed rate override NC PLC W766 factor feed rate override PLC NC Marker Function Set Reset M2151 Rapid traverse programmed FMAX NC NC El 4 138 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o Feed rate for rotary axes The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate for a rotary axis in degrees min The contour feed rate is therefore governed by the distance of the tool centre from the centre of rotation of the rotary axis When M function M116 is activated the contour feed rate is interpreted in mm min i e the feed rate is now independent of the distance of the tool centre from the centre of rotation of the rotary axis M116 is automatically cancelled by PGM END M116 is only active when the centre of rotation of a rotary axis is defined in machine parameters MP7510 ff 6 4 4 Display of the M functions The miscellaneous functions for control of the spindle M03 M04 M05 and the coolant M08 MOO are displayed in the status window The display of these M functions is controlled by the PLC i e the manufacturer of the machine must take this into account when creating the PLC program The markers M2485 and M2486 also change the polarity of the analogue voltage for the spindle M2608 switches off the analogue output for the Spindle The programmed spin
185. 0 to 9 999 9999 0 display 99 999 9999 software limit switches active 0 modulo value for display software limit switches not active Axis X Axis Y Axis Z Ath axis 5th axis Contrary to the above the following applies for software types 259 36 259 97 243 02 and 243 03 259 93 259 94 up to version 08 MP810 is not available but MP7470 is with the following meaning MP7470 Position display and software limit switches for rotary axes Entry O or 1 0 0 to 359 9999 no software limit switches 1 30 000 0000 to 30 000 0000 software limit switches active 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 135 e Free rotation A free rotation of the rotary axis can be activated by the PLC Free rotation means that the axis of rotation can be turned as often as required with a display of 0 to 360 without being affected by software limit switches The free rotation function is a PLC function i e the PLC program must be created by the manufacturer of the machine in the proper form The function could for example be activated by M functions The choice of axes and the direction of traverse are made by specific bytes The feed for free rotation is the same as the feed for PLC positioning of the axes 4 and 5 W566 and W568 The max feed is 300 000 min The feed is not displayed in the status window The feed can be continuously varied by the PLC with an override p
186. 00 to 100 000 MP1830 0 MP1830 1 MP1830 2 MP1830 3 MP1830 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis p B p E i i D Page 4 84 4 70 4 70 4 72 4 72 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 19 E 3 5 Digital speed control only TNC 425 Machine Function and input Change parameter via MP1900 Select axes with digital soeed controller Entry XXXXX MP1910 Speed controller monitoring Entry 1 to 16 777 215 MP1910 0 Xaxis MP1910 1 Y axis MP1910 2 Zaxis MP1910 3 4th axis MP1910 4 5th axis MP1920 Integral component for speed controller Entry 0 to 65 535 MP1920 0 Xaxis MP1920 1 Y axis MP1920 2 Zaxis MP1920 3 4th axis MP1920 4 5th axis MP1925 Limiting the integral component for speed controller Entry 0 000 to 65 535 s Suggested value 0 1 to 2 s MP1925 0 Xaxis MP1925 1 Y axis MP1925 2 Zaxis MP1925 3 4th axis MP1925 4 5th axis MP1940 Proportional component for speed controller Entry 0 to 65 535 MP1940 0 Xaxis MP1940 1 Y axis MP1940 2 Zaxis MP1940 3 4th axis MP1940 4 5th axis MP1945 Factor for acceleration precontrol of the rotational speed controller Entry 0 000 to 9 999 V m s2 MP1945 0 Xaxis MP1945 1 Y axis MP1945 2 Zaxis MP1945 3 4th axis MP1945 4 5th axis 5 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters Machine parameter MP1950 MP1951 MP1955 Polarity for torque signal Entry Xxxxx 0 positive 1 negative
187. 001 7 136 4 1 2 Read in Word Range Module 9010 901 1 9012 7 137 4 1 3 Write in Word Range Module 9020 902 1 9022 7 138 4 2 Machine Parameters 7 139 4 2 1 Overwrite Machine Parameter Module 9031 7 139 4 2 2 Read Machine Parameter Module 9032 7 140 4 2 3 Select Machine Parameter File Module 9033 7 140 4 3 Status and Coordinates 7 141 4 3 1 Read Status Information Module 9035 7 141 4 3 2 Write Status Information Module 9036 7 144 4 3 3 Read Coordinates Module 9040 9041 9042 7 145 4 4 Number Conversion 7 147 4 4 1 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII Module 9050 7 147 4 4 2 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII Module 9051 7 148 4 4 3 Number Conversion ASCII to Binary Module 9052 7 149 4 4 4 Conversion Binary to ASCII Hexadecimal Module 9053 7 150 4 4 5 Conversion ASCII Hexadecimal to Binary Module 9054 7 150 4 5 String Processing 7 151 4 5 1 Copying a Number from a String Module 9070 7 151 4 5 2 Compute String Length Module 9071 7 152 4 6 PLC Window 7 152 4 6 1 Delete PLC Window Module 9080 7 152 4 6 2 Interrogate PLC Window Module 9081 7 153 4 6 3 Display String Module 9082 7 153 4 6 4 Display Bar Chart Module 9083 7 155 7 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 01 98 4 7 Files 7 157 4 7 1 Executing a Pallet Program Module 9090 7 157 4 7 2 Tool and Datum Table Module 9092 9093 9094 7 158 4 7 3 Non linear Axis Error Compensation Module 9095 7 161 4 8 Data Interface 7 162 4 8 1 Assign Data Interface Module 910
188. 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 47 i 3 2 Set Commands 3 2 1 SET S Abbreviation for the PLC Editor S SET Operand changed Operand unchanged Execution time ps 0 1 to 0 8 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 6 Byte value in parentheses With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened Operands M O T C Operation The function of the command depends on the contents of the Logic Accumulator If the Logic Accumulator 1 the addressed operand is set to 1 otherwise the operand remains unchanged An S command is used at the end of a logic chain so that the gating result may influence the operand The command may be used several times in succession see example Example Input 14 and input 15 should be gated with OR If the gating result is 1 output O2 and marker M500 should be set Initial state Input 14 1 Input I5 0 Output 02 i Marker M500 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 7 0 XX XX XX xX _X XX X X 1 LW EE H EE 2 O16 eC ROM Ke RN eR SOE ee 3 S 02 xxxxxxlilxxxxxxx 4 S M500 n MRR XIX KR RK RX Line 1 The contents of the operand are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 a
189. 011 can define another function for this analogue output The input values in MP3011 show an effect only if the value in MP3010 is less than 3 MP3011 Function of analogue output S if MP3010 lt 3 Entry 0 to 3 0 No special function 1 Voltage proportional to current contour feed rate depending on MP3012 2 Voltage as defined by PLC module 9130 3 Voltage is defined via M function M200 to M204 17 1 1 Voltage proportional to feed rate MP3011 1 A voltage proportional to the current contour feed rate is output The feed rate achieved when 10 V is output is entered in MP3012 MP3012 Feed rate for output of an analogue voltage of 10 V MP3011 1 Entry 0 to 300 000 min 17 1 2 Voltage from the PLC MP3011 2 The voltage defined through the PLC module 9130 is output See also chapter PLC Programming 17 1 3 Definition of the voltage via M function MP3011 3 The analogue voltage output can be defined in the positioning block with the miscellaneous functions M200 to M204 These M functions are available only if the value 3 is entered in MP3011 The M functions are executed synchronously to the positioning blocks and are effective at the beginning of the block 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 4 275 e Direct output of the programmed voltage M200 V The TNC outputs the value programmed behind M200 V as a voltage Entry 0 to 9 999 V Duration M200 V
190. 013 8 MP3013 9 MP3013 10 0 MP3014 10 0 Not used MP3013 11 0 MP3014 11 O here 4 276 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 01 98 L 1 MP3013 0 to Characteristic kink points for analogue voltage output with M202 MP3013 11 Entry 10 to 300 000 mm min MP3014 0 to Characteristic kink points for analogue voltage output with M202 MP3014 11 Entry 0 000 to 9 999 V Voltage varies with the time time voltage ramp M203 V TIME The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of the time It increases or decreases the voltage linearly in the time programmed behind TIME from the current voltage to the voltage value programmed behind V Entry Voltage V 0 to 9 999 V TIME 0 to 1 999 sec Duration M203 V TIME is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204 Voltage for a specific time time pulse M204 V TIME The TNC outputs the voltage programmed behind V as a pulse The duration of the pulse is entered with TIME Entry Voltage V 0 to 9 999 V TIME 0 to 1 999 sec Duration M204 V TIME is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 4 277 e 1 17 2 Graphic simulation without TOOL CALL Graphic simulation is also available on machines that operate without tool definition e g water jet and laser cutters The tool radius for graphic
191. 04 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 6 1 i Marker Function sd Set Reset Page M2045 4 159 M2046 4 229 M2047 4 229 M2048 H 4 114 M2051 NC 7177 M2052 NC 7177 M2053 NC 7177 M2054 NC _ 7177 M2055 NG 7177 M2057 NC 7177 M2059 Block scan mid program startup is active NC NC 4 148 Ee Pe M2061 4 154 M2064 S Code Istbit lsb ll LIZ M2065 _ S Code 2ndbit S S S a M2066 _ S Code 3rd bit ll a M2067 _ S Code Apr ll a M2068 _ S Code 5th bit ll a M2069 S Code 6th bit ll a M2070 S Code 7th bit ll a M2071 _ S Code 8th bit msb ll da M2072 _ M Code 1st bit lsb ll a M2073_ M Code _2ndbit ll a M2074 M Code 3rd bit ll a M2075 M Code mn ll a M2076 _ M Code 5th bit ll a M2077 _ M Code bn ll da M2078 _ M Code 7thbit ll a M2079 M Code 8thbit msh ll a M2080 Minimum rpm from MP3020 1stbit lsb 77 M2081 Minimum rpm from MP3020 2ndbit_ LI 177 M2082 _ Minimum rpm from MP3020 3rdbit LI 77 M2083_ Minimum rom from MP3020 Abt LI LL M2084 Minimum rpm from MP3020 5th bit LI 77 M2085 Minimum rpm from MP3020 6thbit LI 77 M2086 Minimum rpm from MP3020 7thbit LL 177 M2087 _ Minimum rpm from MP3020 8th bit msb LI I 77 M2088 Increment from MP3020 1st bit lsb LI Li M2089 _ Increment from MP3020 2ndbit LL 77 M2090 Increment from MP3020 3rd bit Il 77 M2091 Increment from MP3020 4th bit msb LI Od 177 M2092 4 102 M2093 4 231 M2094 4 227 M2095 4
192. 07 Standard version TNC 415A Export version TNC 415 E NC Software Version Release NC Software Version Release 243 05x 02 2 90 259 91x 08 11 90 243 05x 03 4 90 259 91x 10 2 91 243 05x 04 5 90 259 91x 11 4 91 243 05x 05 8 90 259 91x 12 5 91 243 05x 08 9 90 259 91x 13 6 91 243 05x 10 2 91 259 91x 14 11 91 243 05x 11 4 91 259 91x 15 3 92 243 05x 12 5 91 259 91x 16 7 93 243 05x 13 6 91 243 05x 14 11 91 243 05x 15 3 92 243 05x 16 7 93 TNC 407 243 07x 03 7 90 243 07x 05 10 90 243 07x 07 2 91 243 07x 08 4 91 New releases of these software types will be 243 07x 09 5 91 made only to correct errors 243 07x 10 6 91 243 07x 11 11 91 243 07x 12 3 92 243 07x 13 7 93 3 5 2 Software types 259 96 259 97 and 243 02 TNC 415 A 259 96x 01 TNC 415 E 259 97x 01 TNC 407 243 02x 01 Release 8 91 New functions Digitising with TS 120 Rigid tapping Input resolution and display step 0 0001 mm for TNC 415A Re approaching the contour Compensation of reversal spikes in circular movements New format for PLC EPROM Machine parameter editor FN15 PRINT New machine parameter for setting screen colours El 2 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 Thermal expansion compensation Machine datum Free rotation Changing the gear range through the PLC RPM upper limit per gear range Change in the organisation of PLC error messages Marker for special
193. 07 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o Rapid traverse m min A 2 4 6 8 10 12 s mm The maximum feed rate stored in machine parameter MP1010 can be reduced by the PLC If the PLC enters a feed value in Doubleword D596 which is lower than that in machine parameter MP1010 then the value in D596 is effective If the value which is entered is higher then MP1010 remains effective After switching on the control or an interruption of the running of the PLC the Doubleword D596 is pre loaded with the value 300000 The rapid traverse maximum traversing speed must be adjusted by the desired analogue voltage e g 9 V on the servo amplifier see section Commissioning and start up procedure For each axis specific rapid traverse there is an analogue voltage which is stored in the machine parameter MP1050 The resulting lag error s thus depends on the analogue voltage UIV 10 ky 1 Rapid traverse 10 m min t d t d d E 2 4 6 8 10 12 Sa mm A special feed rate for manual operation Manual feed is stored in machine parameter MP1020 In general it is significantly lower than the rapid traverse 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 69 o 1 MP1810 K factor for operation with lag Entry 0 100 to 20 000 OI mm MP1810 0 ky factor X axis MP1810 1 ky factor Y axis MP1810 2 ky factor Z axis MP1810 3 ky factor 4th axis MP181
194. 1 2 Asynchronous data format In order for communication to be established between two devices involved in data interchange they have to use a common language In the field of computer engineering this language consists of digital coding of letters figures and control characters One of the most common codes is the ASCII code American Standard Code for Information Interchange which codes all characters with seven bits In all it is possible to code 2 128 characters According to the ASCII code the control character Line Feed or lt LF gt is coded with the following combination of bits 0001010 10dec 0A hex MSB LSB The letter z is represented by the following combination of bits 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 8 5 i 1111010 122dec 7A hex MSB LSB i e when the letter z is transmitted via a serial interface the appropriate bits are sent one after the other The ASCII code is shown in full in the Appendix Proper data transmission requires the device concerned to interpret incoming data correctly and in particular to determine the start of a transmission For this purpose there is a synchronization process which ensures that the receiver detects the first bit of a character correctly With an asynchronous data format a start bit is sent before each data word and the word is then ended by one or two stop bits One feature of this data format is that starting from a quiescent state transmis
195. 1 4 Software Hardware Various hardware versions of the logic units LE 407 and LE 415 have until now been delivered please refer to the chapter 3 Mounting and electrical installation section 1 The new software types are not compatible with all hardware versions The valid combinations are shown in the following tables TNC 415A TNC 415E Id Nr LE 251 481 78 251 481 79 251 481 88 251 481 89 251 481 98 251 481 99 258 993 78 258 993 79 258 993 88 258 993 89 258 993 98 258 993 99 264 429 78 264 429 79 264 429 98 264 429 99 TNC 415B TNC 415F Id Nr 267 223 xy X y Software Type 243 05 259 91 259 96 259 97 lt I XJ X x lt zl TNC 425 TNC 425E Id Nr 267 214 xy Identifier for hardware change Version Export version with software module Digitizing with TS Standard version with software module Digitizing with 1 120 S 120 Standard version with software module Digitizing with 1 Export version without option Standard version without option S 120 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software TNC 407 Software Type Id Nr of the LE 243 07 243 02 243 03 280 58 256 113 99 po XT NEEN 256 444 79 BEE ee ee ee ee x 256 444 89 x 255 444 99 x 261 092 79 ee ee ee ee x 261 092 89 x 261 092 99 x 264 430 24 x 264 430 29 x 264 430 79 ee ee EE ee ee x 264 430 99 x 2 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 E 3 2 PLC Software The PLC software is pr
196. 10 000 11 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o 1 Axis sequence when approaching 1340 x reference marks Select axes with digital speed controller 1900 BitO 4 Monitor speed controller 1910 x 310 000 Integral component for speed controller 1920 x 5 Cis Proportional component for speed 1940 x controller Polarity for torque signal 1950 BitO 4 Motion monitor for position and speed 1970 5 1 Select encoder for position control 1951 1 BitO A 0 gt inactive Delayed shutdown of position controller 1980 C Checking polarity of nominal voltage Cancel override and start axes with direction keys for a short period Watch drive response modify polarity while turning qt The monitor via MP1910 is in effect error message GROSS POSITIONING ERROR 3F if polarity is wrong Optimizing The following curves should be displayed in the oscilloscope for each axis mm i e Nominal speed Gs ei NNomINAL mm e Actual speed min gt Nactuat e Output analogue voltage MV Vanatocue A step function is output for optimizing see Oscilloscope later in this chapter The feed rate must be selected such that the analogue voltage is lt 8 V It is now only necessary to press the appropriate axis direction keys to output a step function to the servo amplifier Proportional component MP1940 x MP1940 x is increased until the step response actual speed shows large control fluctuations This
197. 100 thermistors range 0 to 100 C resolution 0 5 and four are analogue inputs for 10 V DC resolution 100 mV The analogue values are converted to digital values in the PL or PA and transferred to PLC words The content of the words can be further processed in the PLC for a variety of purposes e g compensating for thermal expansion see section Thermal compensation The word addresses in the PLC depend on whether the analogue inputs are on the first or second extension Machine parameter 4410 defines the extension on which the analogue inputs are found On the PL 410 the analogue inputs must be activated by a DIL switch See chapter Installation and electrical connection section PLC Inputs Outputs MP4410 Activate analogue input Entry xx BtO 0 No analogue inputs on extension 1 1 Analogue inputs on extension 1 Bitl 0 No analogue inputs on extension 2 1 Analogue inputs on extension 2 Assignment of word addresses to the analogue inputs Input Input First Second Function Set PA PL extension extension X2 Voltage input 0 X3 Voltage input 1 X4 Voltage input 2 X5 Voltage input 3 X7 Temperature input 0 X8 Temperature input 1 x9 Temperature input 2 X10 Temperature input 3 Reset Internal value range Voltage input 100 to 100 10V to 10V Temperature input 0 to 200 0 C to 100 C 4 206 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 01 98 2 11 2 Analogue
198. 10111 11111101 01110111 Line 1 The contents of Word W6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with OR NOT Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Word W8 7 60 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f 3 3 5 EXCLUSIVE OR XO Abbreviation for the PLC Editor XO EXCLUSIVE OR Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 7 0 5 to 0 7 0 5 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 6 6 8 Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command Operands M O T C Operation This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program a At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an L command i e the logic state of the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 control which did not have the special L command In PLC programs for the TNC 407 TNC 415 a logic chain should always be started with a load command see L LN L Di Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand M O T C are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator Example Input 14 and Input I5 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned to Output O2 Initial state Input 4 1 Input 5 1 Output O2 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 0 1 L 14 n xxxxxxlI xxxxxx
199. 112 D LE 1 PL 410 P4108 184 O SB LE 2 PL 410 PL 4108 176 Oh A ER ETH 168 lh LE 2 PL 410 PL 410B 120 LB 4 4 Er PL 410 PA 110 112 EE LE 1 PL 410 PA 110 56 LE PA 110 PL 410 PL 410 PL410B PL410B Id Nr 263 371 12 Id Nr 263 37102 PA 110 PL 400 PLC inputs PLC outputs Analogue inputs Inputs for thermistors Control is operational output The analogue inputs of the PL 410 PL 410 B they must be activated by a DIL switch on the PL and a machine parameter in the TNC When the analogue inputs are active two outputs 061 062 or 093 094 on PL 2 and eight inputs 1120 to 1127 or 1248 to 1255 on PL 2 of the PLC cannot be used d One PLC extension can be mounted on the logic unit The second PLC extension must be installed next to the logic unit in the switch cabinet It is not possible to combine the PL 410B with the PL 410 or PA 110 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 3 51 2 11 1 Technical data 11 1 1 PLC Inputs Logic Unit PL 410 PL 410B PL 400 Voltage ranges 1 signal Ui 13 V to 30 2 V 16 5 V to 30 V O signal Ui 20 V to 3 2 V 20 V to 4 V Current ranges 1 signal li 3 8 mA to 8 9 mA 2 5 mA to 6 mA 6 2 mA to 12 6 mA O signal li 1 0 mA at Ui 3 2 V 0 65 mA at Ui 3 2 V 1 6 mA at Ui 4 V 11 1 2 PLC Outputs Transistor outputs with current limiter Logic Unit PL 400 PL 410 PL 410B Min output voltage for 1 sign
200. 1175 1173 1174 1175 All keys except for the functions keys A B and All keys are evaluated by the PLC Module C are evaluated by the NC MP7670 x defines 9036 sets the handwheel s axis and the interpolation factor for the slow medium interpolation With W766 you can influence and fast settings MP7671 x defines the speed the feed rate by pressing the direction keys for the slow medium and fast settings The speed is entered as a percentage of the manual feed rate MP1020 x MP7645 Initializing parameters for handwheel When an HR 410 is installed MP7645 0 has the following meaning MP7645 0 Evaluation of HR 410 handwheel keypad Input O Keys evaluated by NC T Keys evaluated by PLC MP7645 1 to MP7645 7 are without function MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel Input 0 to 10 MP7670 0 Interpolation factor for low speed MP7670 1 Interpolation factor for medium speed only HR 410 MP7670 2 Interpolation factor for high speed only HR 410 MP7671 Manual feed rate in handwheel mode with HR 410 Input 0 to 1000 of MP1020 MP7671 0 Low speed MP7671 1 Medium speed MP7671 2 High speed 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 4 201 10 5 Integral handwheels HR 150 with handwheel adapter HRA 110 MP7640 5 If the step switch is used for the selection of the interpolation factor S1 then inputs 1160 to 1167 must be evaluated in the PLC and the result must be displayed with the aid of PLC module 9036
201. 118 M2096 4 135 M2097 4 135 M2098 4 135 M2099 4 135 M2100 NC 4 14 6 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 01 98 i Marker M2101 M2102 M2103 M2104 M2105 M2106 M2112 M2113 M2114 M2115 M2116 M2117 M2118 M2119 M2127 M2128 M2129 M2130 M2131 M2132 M2136 M2137 M2138 M2139 M2140 M2148 M2149 M2150 M2151 M2160 M2161 M2162 M2163 M2164 M2176 M2177 M2178 M2179 M2180 M2182 M2183 M2184 M2185 M2186 M2187 Function o Set Reset Pager NC 414 NC 414 NC 414 G Code S analogue _1stbit lsb do 7 G Code S analogue 2ndbit LE G Code S analogue 3rd bit msb 77 Number P Number _1st decade lsb 777 Number P Number _1stdecade LE Number P Number Istdecade 77 Number P Number Let decade msb 777 T Number P Number 2nd decade Ish 77 Number P Number 2nd decade 178 Number P Number 2nd decade 77 Number P Number 2nd decade msb _ 77 Spindle in motion NC NC 4 109 4 177 4 198 4 91 4 91 4 91 4 91 4 91 4 63 4 63 4 63 4 63 4 63 4 135 7 19 Dimensional unit for transfer with FN19 NC 7 19 0 mm 1 inch 4 138 X axis direction of traverse 0 positive 1 negative 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 9 Code Operating mode et 218 Code Operating mode _ _ _ _ LL Code Operating mode _ _ _ _ LL Code Operatingmode msb _ _ _ LL S 4 165 Control operational display f
202. 15 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job Aline less than 0 or greater than 1 was specified Acolumn less than 0 or greater than 37 was specified The number of the string is outside the permitted range 0 3 No end of string was found The last character s in the string cannot be displayed in the screen window The string is not displayed on screen in any of these error modes Call PS K B W D Line number 0 1 PS K B W D Column number 0 37 PS K B W D Color number 0 15 PS K BAW D String number 0 3 CM 9082 Error status after call M3171 0 String displayed when screen window for PLC status is displayed 1 No display error condition see above 4 6 4 Display Bar Chart Module 9083 Displays a bar chart in the screen window for the PLC status display on the specified line with the specified lengths and in the specified colors A bar chart can be displayed in the left half of each line in the PLC status window In this mode the ASCII text only appears in the right half of every line 19 characters max Line O Line 1 Column 0 150 0 19 The operator must specify the line maximum length 0 150 current length lt maximum length and the colors of the bars or the margin and scale graduation 0 15 If the maximum length exceeds 150 it is limited to 150 If current length exceeds maximum length then it is limited to the maximum
203. 2 Traverse reference mark are called more than once for the same axis during a PLC cycle then only the last activated command is executed Any Positioning error status that is set in this axis is cancelled Positioning stops as soon as the reference point is reached Depending on the braking distance of the axis the latter will be slightly beyond the reference point in the direction of motion Possible errors Anon existent axis has been specified An axis has been specified that is not declared as a PLC axis by MP10 and MP60 The axis is already positioning El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 173 Call PS BMW D K lt Axis gt 0 4 for X Y Z 4 5 PS B W D K Feed rate gt mm min PS B W D K lt Flag register gt Bit 0 1 negative traverse direction CM 9123 PL B W D lt Error code gt 0 Positioning has started 1 Non existent axis specified 2 Axis not configured as PLC axis 3 Axis is already positioning Error status after call M3171 0 Positioning has started 1 Non existent axis specified 4 9 5 Override for PLC axis Module 9124 The traversing speed of a PLC axis can be influenced by setting an override value Constraints The axis must be activated through MP10 and be declared as a PLC axis in MP60 The override value can lie between 0 and 100 00 resolution 0 01 and must be transmitted as an integer 0 10000 The last transmitted override value is accounted f
204. 20 ms e linear axis error compensation e non linear axis error compensation e compensation of reversal spikes in circular movements e compensation of thermal expansion e backlash compensation e stiction compensation e offset compensation HEIDENHAIN incremental linear and angle encoders preferably with distance coded reference marks also HEIDENHAIN incremental rotary encoders Following a power interruption automatic reference value input if reference marks are traversed 100000 mm 300 m min 0 to 150 with two potentiometers at the control panel 1 x HR 330 Portable handwheel 1 x HR 130 Integral handwheel up to 3 x HR 150 Integral handwheel with adapter HRA 110 FE 401 TS 120 TS 511 TM 110 TT 110 PL 410 B Active analog inputs reduce the number of PLC inputs by 8 and the number of PLC outputs by 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 2 5 i TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Digitizing e With TS 120 touch trigger 3D probe with optional software e With TM 110 measuring touch probe module in TNC Export versions TNC 415F TNC 425E Linear interpolation 4 of 5 axes input display resolution 1 um Power consumption NC 24 W approx 36 W approx PLC 6 W approx PL 410B 25 W approx BC 110B 70 W max Ambient temperature Operation 0 to 45 C Storage 30 to 70 C Weights Logic unit 8 0 kg 10 0 kg TE 400 24kg BC 110B 11 0 kg PL 410B 3 1 kg 2 6
205. 206 W466 4 206 W468 Analogue input 2 2nd I O ex ension 4 206 W470 4 206 W472 Thermistor input 0 2nd I O ex ension 4 206 W474 4 206 W476 4 206 W478 4 206 W492 4 99 W494 4 138 W496 T input O 1st I O Ze on 4 206 W498 Analogue input 1 1st I O extension 4 206 W500 Analogue input 2 1st I O extension 4 206 W502 Analogue input 3 1st I O extension 4 206 W504 Thermistor input 0 1st I O extension 4 206 W506 Thermistor input 1 1st I O extension 4 206 W508 Thermistor input 2 1st I O extension 4 206 W510 Thermistor input 3 1st I O extension 4 206 6 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 List of words 01 98 i Word with multiple function Key code for simulating TNC keys activated by M2813 Number of the O parameter to be overwritten Q100 to Q107 0 to 7 0 Free rotation function cancelled 8 Free rotation function for axis 4 16 Free rotation function for axis 5 B519 Definition of the direction of traverse 4 136 B520 Axis specific feed rate release 1 Feed rate enable in the X axis 0 eed rate enable X in the axis 2 d rate enable in the Y axis 0 eed rate enable in the Y axis 4 d rate enable in the Z axis 0 eed rate enable in the Z axis 8 d rate enable in the 4th axis 0 eed rate enable in the 4th axis 16 d rate enable in the 5th axis 0 eed rate enable in the 5th axis W522 Monitoring functions suppressed if PLC 4 83 input from MP4130 is activated D528 Value to be transferred to the O pa
206. 209 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range 0 to 127 MP5210 Control character for End of Transmission EOT MP5210 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5210 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5210 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range O to 127 When selecting ASCII characters it must be ensured that the control characters are not arbitrarily mixed and that no figures or letters which occur in the transferred text are used Example The control character for Start of Text MP5200 x must not be assigned to lt DC3 gt otherwise transmission will stop when software handshaking is set on the peripheral 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 25 o 1 For the file type when transferring with Block Check Characters see paragraph 2 4 1 Saving reading files an ASCII character must be entered for the file which is being output or input With an input value of nought the TNC automatically enters the correct type of file in the file header MP5202 ASCII character for file type for data input MP5202 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5202 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5202 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range O to 127 MP5204 ASCII character for file type for data output MP5204 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5204 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5204 2 In mode EXT 3 Input range O to 127 Example If a DIN ISO program is to be output in operating mode EXT2 MP5204 1 68 D must be set or MP5204 1 0 The ASCII characters for input and output identification can also be freely defined If t
207. 259 94x 11 This version was supplied from 4 94 only TNC 407 243 03x 11 when expressly requested by the customer New functions The PLC module 9036 was expanded The handwheel assignment can now be switched through the PLC to any desired axis the assignment is indicated in the status window by the position of the handwheel symbol After activation of Cycle 19 Working plane the offset is corrected only in the axis that is moved Previously the offset was corrected simultaneously in all axes during execution of the first block With M112 it is now possible to enter a limit angle A in addition to the tolerance T TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 12 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 259 94x 12 TNC 407 243 03x 12 Release 5 94 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 21 e Ki 2 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 i 3 5 4 Software types 280 54 280 56 and 280 58 TNC 415 B TNC 425 280 54x 01 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 280 56x 01 TNC 407 280 58x 01 Release 6 94 New functions Digitizing with TM 110 Program structuring Tool measuring with TT 110 Complete NC block with Actual Position Capture key M124 new TNC 415 B TNC 425 280 54x 02 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 280 56x 02 TNC 407 280 58x 02 Release 11 94
208. 26 the ASCII characters E A 8 1 etc are transmitted consecutively across the interface Since each byte contains two ASCII characters when transferring binary data the transmit and receive buffers are 63 bytes long With the help of Module 9107 when transferring binary data each byte two ASCII characters can be read from the receive buffer without the buffer being erased 7 162 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 8 1 Assign Data Interface Module 9100 Module 9100 assigns one of the serial interfaces to the PLC and configures the transfer parameters The interface is also initialized and any errors are reset The interface is switched to receive mode Once assigned to the PLC the interface is disabled for use by the Input Output program of the user interface Constraints The assignment of an interface to the PLC is cancelled when the PLC program is recompiled Configuration for 19200 baud is not possible when the other interface is already configured for 38400 baud and vice versa irrespective of whether this interface is assigned to the PLC or the NC Module 9100 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job Possible errors The interface is already assigned elsewhere by the Input Output program of the NC user interface The call parameters contain no valid values 0 1 for selecting the interface and defining the transfer parameters The required baud rate is not possible ow
209. 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 Line 4 The gating result is assigned to Output O5 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 43 2 El Word execution with the ASSIGN command Operands B W D Operation ASSIGN in conjunction with the Word Operands B W D copies the contents of the Word Accumulator to the addressed operand In contrast to bit processing the command can also be used within a word gating chain The command can be used several times in succession see example Example A Constant K and the contents of Byte B5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8 and Byte B10 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Constant 54 36 hex Byte B8 Byte B10 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 16 7 0 7 0 rue OOOOOOOODOOOTIOIID 2 ABS TOTOOOOOOOOOOT OOOO eg 3 Be TOTOOOOOOOOOOT OOOO eg a B10 TODOOOOOOOOOOT OOOO eg 5 B10 TOTTOOOOOOOOTOTOOOD Era Line 1 The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator is stored in B8 Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Byte B8 Line 4 The gating result is assigned to Byte B10 7 44 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 1 8 ASSIGN BYTE B Abbreviation for the PLC Editor B ASSIGN BYTE Execution time us 8 7 to 11 7 Number of bytes 14 Operands M O
210. 3 delete status display and tool data with M02 M30 END PGM and selecting a program 4 delete status display and Q parameter when selecting a program 5 delete status display and Q parameter with M02 M30 END PGM and selecting a program 6 delete status display when selecting a program 7 delete status display with M02 M30 END PGM and selecting a program 2 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 E 1 TNC 407 243 03x 05 Release 11 92 New functions All functions as for TNC 415 B except Working Plane cycle and three dimensional tool compensation TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 06 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 259 94x 06 TNC 407 243 03x 06 Release 12 92 New functions MP7411 is used to select whether to use the tool data length radius axis from the last TOOL CALL block or from the calibrated data of the probe system in a touch probe block MP7411 Tool data in touch probe block Entry O or 1 O In the touch probe block the current tool data are overwritten with the calibrated data of the probe system 1 Current tool data are retained even with a touch probe block The displayable area for FK graphics has been restricted to 30 000 mm to 30 000 mm The maximum edge length is 30 000 mm TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93X 07 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 25994X 07 TNC 407 243 03X 07 Release 3 93 New functions PLC module 9033 has been introduced This module allows the user to select a particular machine paramete
211. 31 3 gn YL 3 al XD RTS Al 4 All 4 E GY ai 4 re cts s5 5 5 5 PK sl sl RTS psr 6 6 4 ell 6 r BL ell ei DTR Signal GND 71 7 717 rt Jan 7 7 GND Signal all e 8 8 al 8 all 9 all 9 all 9 10 10 0 10 10 10 UR 11 11 12 12 2 l 12 12 12 13 113 3 13 13 13 14 14 4 14 14 14 15 15 5 15 15 15 16 16 6 16 16 16 17 17 Sir 2 a7 17 18 18 8 18 18 18 19 19 9 19 7 i 19 19 DTR 20 20 20 20 201 20 DSR VY aed A 9 pin plug on a PC should have the following pin layout Pin Allocation Not in use RxD TxD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI Ring Indicator 8 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o 2 3 RS 422 V 11 interface Due to the limited capabilities of the RS 232 C V 24 interface the RS 422 V 11 interface was developed This interface is also standardized and works symmetrically The RS 422 V 11 interface is suitable for data transfer speeds up to 10 Mbit sec Since the interface module of the TNC can only cope with a rate of up to 38 400 baud a transfer rate of 38 400 baud must also be set at the RS 422 V 11 interface However at this baud rate it is possible to transmit over a cable one kilometre long 2 3 1 Hardware The standard RS 422 V 11 works with differential voltages The advantage of this method is that on the transmission path radiated inter
212. 320 x Trip dog Reference end position is closed before reference mark is passed over Reference mark is passed over Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Yes Machine moves to No software limit switch Machine stops 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4 59 e 2 1 3 Linear measurement via rotary encoder Machine parameter MP1350 x 2 For linear measurement using a rotary encoder a reference pulse is produced on each revolution of the encoder It must be ensured that after switching on the machine always the same reference pulse is evaluated This can also be achieved by using the trip dog Reference end position Measuring length Reference pulse Desired reference pulse Trip dog Closed ees ee Reference end position Open Traverse direction MP1320 x 4 60 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 o Sequence Automatic passing over reference marks Press the external START key MP1350 X 2 Press the external START key Trip dog Reference end position closed Machine traverse in direction from MP1320 x with velocity from MP1330 x to the trip dog Reference end positon Machine traverse in inverted direction from MP1320 x and with reduced velocity from MP1331 x The first reference pulse after opening of the trip dog Reference end position is evaluated mach
213. 4 4 412V20 6V Uv RXD 8 SeY EE eiS pe i 5 15 Screen al aff alt yellow g g f vellow__ 6 6 DTR DSR 10 elow 10 f10 H SE ZS EAEA al 7 oxo Ou A white SA reen i i g g pareen t g el pp 12V 12 p Orown H12 112 H 9 19 9 19 P max 50 m gt The adapter has a cable with a 9 pin plug for connection to the logic unit two terminals for the 24 V of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit of the control max load 1 2 A and 3 terminals for the enable circuit The enable buttons are N O contacts 24 V 1 2 A HR 410 The HR 410 is a portable electronic handwheel with Five axis selection keys Traverse direction keys Three keys with predefined traverse speeds slow medium fast Actual position capture key Three keys for machine functions to be determined by the machine tool builder Two permissive buttons EMERGENCY STOP button Holding magnets Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id Nr 271 958 03 In order to be able to mount the HR 410 you will need a TNC with at least software version 280 540 03 280 560 03 Or 280 580 03 The adapter includes plug in terminal strips for the contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button and permissive button maximum load 1 2 A 3 46 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 01 98 2 1 Extension Cable Id Nr 281 429 Adapter Cable Id Nr 296 466 Connecting Cable HR 410 Id Nr 296 467 05 Id Nr 296 469 01 D sub D sub D sub connec Connector
214. 4 ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM 005 4 209 Error in PLC program 10 4 95 Error message 00 4 9 4 18 4 77 4 84 Ee 4 85 4 86 4 87 4 102 4 120 4 174 Error messages 8 48 ERROR NUMBER tone eaten 8 29 ERRORS hii ee E er 9 5 ErrOrMeSSage sive deg EES 7 30 EXCLUSIVE OR XO sses a 7 61 EXCLUSIVE OR XO J 7 81 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT GON 7 63 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT XONI J aesae 7 81 EXE ercssset corm desamanetuteats eia a beads tans 4 7 Executable program 7 7 Export VEIrSlOM EE 2 7 3 4 EXPOM VEISIONSS E 2 6 EXT OUTPUT INPUT NOT READY 8 48 EST TS 8 19 EXTERN Instruction 7 133 External EMERGENCY STOP 4 120 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 01 98 F H Fast PLC mput 2 15 4 83 e WEE 8 18 REA ee r a T EN 8 28 Harndshakihg i e n 8 9 EE AAR eea 8 28 Handuwheel 2 16 4 196 Feed STE gaus tauren ees 4 62 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 3 49 3 91 4 202 Feed rate display 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 138 Handwheel HR 231 3 45 Feed rate enable ereen 4 89 Handwheel input 00 cceccceseeeeeeseeeeeee 3 43 Feed rate in the normal direction 4 181 Handwheel overlapping ssssisssseseseeeses 2 20 Feed rate reduction 0 ccceeeeeseeeeeees 4 191 Handwheel ovrmbol 2 15 Feedforward contra 4 74 4 268 Handwheel mteoral 4 198 Feed overde in en dea eet aN 4 136 Handwheel poortable 4 198 Feed override when tappimg 4 114 liebe d
215. 415 B are explained in the following sections 2 1 Hardware The TNC 425 consists of the following hardware components LE 425 TE 400 PL 410 The following Identification Numbers have been allocated for the LE 425 so far ID Number 267 214 19 267 214 24 267 214 28 267 214 38 267 214 39 267 214 44 267 214 47 267 214 48 267 214 49 267 214 54 267 214 57 267 214 58 267 214 59 Identification number for software module Digitizing with TS 120 246 051 01 BC 110 B logic unit TNC control panel VDU max 2 PLC I O units as option Logic Unit LE 425 LE 425 LE 425 E LE 425 E E 425 E 425 E 425 LE 425 E LE 425 LE 425 LE 425 LE 425 E LE 425 E Modification with Digitise TS 120 module Export Standard with Digitise TS 120 module with Digitise TM 110 module Export Standard with Digitise TS 120 module with Digitise TM 110 module Export Standard 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 11 3 2 Ei 2 2 Summary of connections Control loop board X1 Encoder 1 X2 Encoder 2 X3 Encoder 3 X4 Encoder 4 X5 Encoder 5 X6 Encoder S _ X8 Nominal value output 1 2 3 4 5 S X12 Triggering touch probe system X14 Measuring touch probe system X15 Encoder speed X16 Encoder speed X17 Encoder speed X18 Encoder speed X19 Encoder speed X20 Spare B Operational ground PLC and Gr
216. 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 49 e 3 2 3 SET NOT SN Abbreviation for the PLC Editor SN SET NOT Operand changed Operand unchanged Execution time ps 0 1 to 0 8 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 6 Byte value in parentheses With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened Operands M O T C Operation The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator If the Logic Accumulator 0 then the addressed operand is set to 1 otherwise the operand remains unchanged An SN command is used at the end of a logic chain in order that a gating result may influence the operand The command may be used several times in succession see example Example Input 14 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR If the gating result 0 Output O2 and Marker M500 are set Initial state Input 14 0 Input I5 0 Output 02 Marker M500 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 f 7 0 1 LM 2 om 3 SN 02 4 SN M500 Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR Line 3 The gating result 0 Output O2 is set Line 4 The gating result 0 Marker 500 is set El el el 7 50 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 2 4 RESET NOT RN Abbreviation for the PLC Editor RN RESET NOT Operand changed Operand unchanged Execution time ps 0 1 to 0 8 0 2
217. 425 4 PLC Modules 7 151 e Example Beispiel 1 11 SO S1 STACK Error status after call M3171 0 Number was transferred 1 Error condition see above 4 5 2 Compute String Length Module 9071 Computes the length of the string with the specified number in the string buffer Possible errors The number of the source string is outside the valid range 0 3 The source string has been searched without an end of string lt NUL gt being found Call PS K BAWV D lt Number of source string gt CM 9071 PL B W D lt Length of string gt Error status after call M3171 0 String length was computed 1 Error conditions see above 4 6 PLC Window 4 6 1 Delete PLC Window Module 9080 Deletes the screen window for the PLC status display The background color of the window is defined in machine parameter MP7320 2 or MP7356 0 Constraints This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job The module is also active when the currently selected screen shows no PLC status window e g large graphic displays or when the screen with PLC status window is in the background Possible errors The module has not been called from a SUBMIT Job 7 152 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Call CM 9080 Error status after call M3171 0 Screen window was deleted 1 Error condition see above 4 6 2 Interrogate PLC Window Module 9081 Interrogat
218. 5 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 267 i 16 3 7 Optimizing the control with feedforward control MP1390 0 The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the control characteristics Machine parameter Function Provisional entry value MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid 9V traverse MP1060 Acceleration As measured on the machine see Preparation of the machine MP1510 ky factor 1 MP1520 Position approach 0 5 m min These values can usually be further optimized Optimize k factor Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer of the servo amplifier of the X axis Enter following program in PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode LBL 1 X 100 RO F MAX X OQ ROF MAX CALL LBL 1 REP 100 100 Press machine START button in the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK operating mode Machine runs ky factor MP1510 Increase entry value until position loop oscillates U t ms ky factor MP1510 Reduce entry value until no oscillations can be detected U E t ms 1 Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible 4 268 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 L fl Optimize acceleration If the maximum acceleration of the servo loop cannot be determined with the battery supply the acceleration can be optimized as follows Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer
219. 5 2 Freely configurable interfaces External programming Interfacing with other equipment 3 Data transmission protocols 3 1 Standard transmission protocol 3 1 1 General 3 1 2 Protocols 8 3 8 4 8 4 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 9 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 14 8 15 8 15 8 16 8 16 8 17 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 21 8 21 8 27 8 27 8 28 8 28 8 28 8 30 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 3 2 Data Transfer with Block Check Character BCC 8 36 3 2 1 General 8 36 3 2 2 Protocols 8 40 3 3 LSV 2 Protocol 8 46 4 Data transfer by PLC 8 47 4 1 Configuration of PLC data interface 8 47 4 1 1 General 8 47 4 1 2 Free configuration 8 47 5 Error messages 8 48 5 1 TNC error messages 8 48 5 2 HEIDENHAIN peripherals error codes 8 49 5 3 Data transmission software error messages 8 50 8 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 01 98 2 f 1 Introduction When operating a computer system PC Controller a wide variety of peripherals such as printers external memories floppy disk drives hard disks or other computer systems can be installed in addition the Central Processing Unit CPU Communication between the CPU and the peripherals is made possible by using a data interface Communication requires facilities for transferring data to the peripherals and of course physical connection via a transmission line Peripheral device control and communication via the interface is
220. 5 4 3 IDRO Vicia atapnadeatannetaste eessen 4 41 5 BINO EE 4 152 4 258 7 19 6 OSS ee TAS A E ticthes lndesiesincdenatsane 4 152 K 4 77 4 152 4 258 8 BOL OG Tha eeneg 4 152 4 258 BOSS eege EEN 4 152 9 O5 TAS sninn banaenissaa 4 152 4 258 5 4 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 13 1 i er 8 18 Ae WAND enger een 7 53 ALT AND terest eege ebe 7 80 Acceleraton 4 68 4 74 4 260 Acceleration pre control ccccccccceee 11 10 AGCESSOMES else n ugeriet 2 5 Acknowledgement of M function 4 159 Activation of a gear range 4 101 ACTIVE AXES 02 ececeecceeceeeeeeeceeteeteeeeeeeeteeaees 4 6 Actual nominal value transfer 4 92 Actual spindle speed 4 95 ADD AE tat i ooh eegen 7 115 ADD EI ALD n eae 7 85 ADDINON Hrnce 7 66 Address allocation 0 ccccseeeeseeetees 7 18 Address range eeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeees 7 18 Alphabetic keyboard ccecccee 4 164 Amplitude of the measuring El Ee EE 4 10 AN WANDNOT 7 55 ANT AND NOT cee 7 80 Analogue Impute 3 53 3 60 4 206 Analogue inputs mari ei 3 18 Analogue OUtpUt eee eee 4 95 4 275 Analogue outpute sssseiiiseeeeeiiis erreen 4 207 Analogue voltage ssssiiseseseiiresreeerrenee 4 70 AND Eeer Seat 7 53 ANDEI AL tate eae i idee E 7 80 AND NOT AAN egenen Age Suede 7 55 AND NOT ANI Joe 7 80 Angle encoderg 3 27 Angular measurermment 4 7 Angular measuring SYSteMS
221. 5 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 231 L Marker M2600 M2401 M2402 M2403 M2404 M2601 M2612 Function Set Transfer sequence of tool numbers or pocket numbers PLC M2093 1 O first number for old tool then number for new tool single changing arm 1 first number of new tool then number of old tool double changing arm Tool programmed with pocket number NC active only when MP7480 3 or 4 and TOOL CALL Tool programmed without pocket number NC active only when MP7480 3 or 4 and TOOL CALL Special tool called TOOL CALL NC TOOL CALL at end of tool life NC Q programmed TOOL CALL 1 TOOL CALL at end of tool life Special tool to original pocket despite variable pocket coding PLC Do not update pocket number in pocket table PLC Reset PLC NC NC NC NC PLC PLC A variety of tool types can be called from the machining program The following definitions are used in the examples that follow N M by hand Manual Special tool defined in tool table Tool for which a pocket number is defined in the tool table Normal Tool for which no pocket number is defined in the tool table These tools must be changed Nine different combinations of tool change sequence are therefore possible For many tool change sequences for the tool magazine to be controlled two pocket numbers tool numbers must be output in succession for one TOOL CALL This is reported to the PLC by markers M2093 and
222. 576 M2812 Data format of a numerical value in M2560 to M2576 M2820 Update the central tool file M2821 Strobe for updating the central tool file M2822 Strobe for factor for spindle voltage M2823 Select ramp pairs for S analogue 5 3 5 PLC Cycle Time The contouring controls of the TNC 355 TNC 407 and TNC 415 have different PLC cycle times This must be remembered when using the timers and counters Contouring Control PLC Cycle Time TNC 355 without 20 ms extended memory TNC 355 with 22 ms extended memory TNC 407 24 ms TNC 415 20 ms 7 186 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 01 98 2 Data Interface Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 Principles of data transfer 1 2 1 1 1 Serial parallel 1 1 2 Asynchronous data format 1 1 3 Checking data 1 1 4 Data transfer rate Handshaking 1 2 1 Hardware handshaking 1 2 2 Software handshaking 2 TNC data interfaces 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 General RS 232 C V 24 interface 2 2 1 Hardware 2 2 2 Signal levels 2 2 3 Signal designations 2 2 4 Pin layouts RS 422 V 11 interface 2 3 1 Hardware 2 3 2 Signal levels 2 3 3 Signal designations 2 3 4 Pin layouts Data interface functions 2 4 1 Saving reading files 2 4 2 Output to external devices 2 4 3 Reading in and simultaneously executing programs DNC operation 2 4 4 Communication between TNCs Configuration of interfaces 2 5 1 Selection of interfaces 2
223. 6 7 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 L El MP4210 0 to MP4210 47 MP 4220 MP4220 0 X axis MP4220 1 Y axis MP4220 2 Z axis MP4220 3 axis 4 MP4220 4 axis 5 MP4310 0 o MP4310 6 MP4230 0 o MP4230 31 MP4231 0 MP 4231 31 CO Set a number in the PLC Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Machine parameter with multiple function Entry 80 to 30 000 Set a number in the PLC In Word range W960 to W968 Feed rate for re approaching the contour Set a number in the PLC in the Word range W976 to W988 Entry 0 to 65 535 Set a number in the PLC Module 9032 Entry 99 999 0000 to 99 999 9999 Set a number in the PLC Module 9032 Entry 99 999 0000 to 99 999 9999 2 3 2 General data transfer Strobes Example The NC transfers general data to the PLC e g M functions S word T word G code The transfer is controlled by strobes When an M function is output the NC sets the strobe signal M2045 After evaluating the M function the PLC sets the acknowledge marker M2482 The PLC must reset M2482 otherwise no further strobes can be transferred by the NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 23 1 2 4 Timers and counters 2 4 1 Timers 48 timers are available in the PLC These 48 timers are controlled by special markers with the abbreviation symbol T The time period for the timer is defined in the machine parameter MP4110 X The time unit corres
224. 6 L0 E 135 542 402 0 5 3 08 17 95 08 132 542 10 M3 Einschraublange max 3 ole 5 2 08 alte g 4 M3 LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT 12 SES e A ee ee ae e SE AE Se E gt re jj HH Befestigungsmdglichkeit E I AU PL 400 MOUNTING POSSIBILITY T T Wk DE PL 400 ale i Th a a Si i al P Hm SIs SE S 82 Le UU Aj i il col tore ee sle etiji E eee e BUL es SS SE os a 4 D y RE 392 15 43 g LOv 31 LOL SUOISUBUWIG 94L 86 10 Gv ONL GLY ONL LOv ONL SUOISUBUIG QL DE 326 0 5 12 83 02 47645 gt l 18 7 2 45642 17 95 08 16542 M3 Einschraublange max 3 Esto CH M3 LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT 12 a 9 I s SC rae IIe eegene o es a QIN ii Befestigungsm glichkeit Eer ili PL 400 l d H li MOUNTING POSSIBILITY PL 400 S T d ae fale II il 0 se SF pegli H ei ii Gel O l gt 4 Ar H oo P SLp Al
225. 60 4 5th axis 4 50 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o 1 10 2 Conventions The slave axis cannot be moved independently The nominal value displayed for the slave axis indicates the nominal value of the master axis The PLC program must ensure that the master axis does not move until the slave axis is ready locking feed rate enable The markers for direction of traverse M2160 ff and axis in motion M2128 ff for the slave axis are not set An axis cannot be master and slave at the same time Master and slave must be linear axes Axis error compensation both linear and non linear must be entered separately for both axes The values for rapid traverse acceleration software limit switches feed rate for passing over reference marks and manual feed rate are confirmed from the input values of the master axis In servo lag mode the k factor for master and slave axis should be the same Both axes must be either analogue or digital TNC 425 controlled 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 51 e 2 Reference marks By setting a datum point a definite positional value coordinate is assigned to each axis position for the machining of the workpiece Since the actual position value is established incrementally by the measuring system this correlation between axis positions and positional values must be re established after every power interruption The HEIDENHAIN linear measurement systems are
226. 60 M code 904 CMO 905 CM1 906 CM2 907 CM3 930 ENDC 931 EM 1170 LBL 3 M function M03 1171 L M1 1172 S M2485 Status display M03 sign of S analogue 1173 R M2486 Reset status display M04 M05 1174 R M2487 1175 S 010 Spindle ON 1176 L 110 Acknowledgement of M function 1177 S M2482 Acknowledgement of M function 1178 EM M2045 M2485 010 110 M2482 4 160 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 M functions 01 98 E 7 1 Program run interruption with M functions Normally when an M function is produced the program run in the operating modes Program run full sequence and Program run single block is interrupted until the PLC acknowledges that the M function has been performed For some applications this can be disadvantageous e g laser cutting machines DNC operation In such applications the program should be executed continuously and not wait for the acknowledgement of the M function This function can be selected by machine parameter MP7440 Bit 2 If this function is selected then PLC positioning datum correction spindle orientation or limit switch range change are all not permitted during the output of the M Function att This function must not be used with milling machines or boring machines 7 2 Program run interruption with M06 According to ISO 6983 the M Function M06 means a tool change Machine parameter MP7440 Bit O can be used to select whether on transferring MO6 to the PLC the program should halt
227. 61 L W102 Buffered key code 1162 W516 To NC 1163 LN M2813 1164 S M2813 Set strobe activate simulation 1165 EM 1166 LBL 137 Return marker 1167 EM 1168 LBL 141 End key simulation 1169 L M2813 Simulation performed 1170 JPT 137 No then wait 1171 L K 0 1172 B200 Reset step counter 1173 L M10 1174 R M10 Reset flag Key simulation active 1175 R M2182 Reset marker Disabled key operated 1176 EM 4 172 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 01 98 2 f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 4 173 i 8 2 Machine control panel A manufacturer s specific machine control panel can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls See under Assembly and electrical installation 25 PLC inputs 128 to 152 and 8 PLC outputs O 0 to O 7 are available on the female connector X46 for the evaluation of the keys on the machine control panel The evaluation of the signals from the machine control panel must be performed in the PLC program The appropriate markers will be set thereby For safety reasons a complement marker must be reset when some functions are activated This is especially so for keys with several contacts If the complement marker is not properly set or reset the flashing error me
228. 64 PLC 4 174 M2465 PLC 4 174 M2466 PLC 4 174 M2467 4 90 M2468 7 178 M2469 7 178 M2470 7 178 M2471 7 178 M2472 Complement manual traverse X PLC 4 174 M2473 Complement manual traverse X PLC PLC 4 174 M2474 PLC 4 174 M2475 PLC 4 174 M2476 4 175 M2477 Complement manual traverse Z 4 175 M2478 Complement manual traverse 4 4 175 M2479 Complement manual traverse 4 4 175 M2480 Acknowledgement Gear change completed 4 101 M2481 4 104 M2482 4 159 M2483 4 229 M2484 4 229 M2485 4 96 M2486 4 96 M2487 PLC 4 96 M2488 PLC 4 174 M2489 4 96 M2490 4 101 M2491 Spindle rotation right for gear change 4 101 M2492 4 92 M2493 4 92 M2494 4 92 M2495 4 92 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers Marker Function Set Reset Page M2496 Enable marker for the decoded M code transfer in Markers PLC PLC 4 159 M1900 to M1999 es M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs PLC PLC 7 27 Rising edge marker M1500 to M1659 Falling edge marker M1700 to M1859 IT M2498 4 209 4 118 M2500 4 92 M2501 Activates spindle speed MP3520 0 and direction of rotation PLC PLC 4 109 biel M2502 4 178 M2503 4 178 M2505 4 92 M2506 4 63 M2507 4 92 M2508 4 139 M2512 Jog positioning axis X 4 203 M2513 4 209 M2514 Jog positioning axis Y 4 209 M2515 4 209 M2516 4 209 M2517 4 209 M2518 4 209 M2519 Jog positioning axis 4 4 209 M2520
229. 68 MM 1 DLG DEF 0 2 8 100 15 END PGM 99999968 MM Using machine parameter MP7240 it is possible to inhibit program input for Program name OEM cycles number If MP7240 has a value 0 no program with the program name of an OEM cycle which is held in the EPROM can be input or read into the NC program memory If MP7240 has a value 1 the program name range of the OEM cycles can also be used when the OEM cycles are held in the PLC EPROM If a OEM cycles is generated in the NC program memory and if at the same time there is a OEM cycles with the same number in the PLC EPROM then the OEM cycles in the NC program memory will be executed at a cycle call 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Creating OEM cycles 9 3 1 In the NC program when defining the OEM cycles created with dialog support Q parameters are assigned specified input values The O parameter numbers are automatically generated by the TNC In order to prevent the same Q parameter numbers being generated for DLG DEF cycles and DLG CALL cycles the difference between Q parameter numbers can be specified for DLG CALL and DLG DEF blocks In the case of a DLG CALL block the input values of the OEM cycles are assigned in ascending order of magnitude to the Q parameters Q1 to Q14 For the DLG DEF block the input values are assigned to Q parameters OI MP7250 to O 14 MP7250 Example for MP7250 30 Parameter number in OEM cycle with DLG CALL DLG DEF Cycle param
230. 7 E 697 Su 12 lt gt 472 6 Le 70 236 2 756 22 866 10 H7 Frontplatte 2 DIA 3937 0006 a FRONT PANEL 079 3 86 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 L Ei 16 7 2 HR 150 7102 JA 7 008 A ei Selz 36 1 5 vw l 203 JC aa SW 5 5 IDIA 0121C 32 HEX FLATS OoOO 7 88 14 3 e Cl CH E K A E a 6 Di a N O N Q lt A LES ss Oo q B IO N ol o Di lt Si 1 DIA 236 0 2 B ER e a DIA 008 B 768 04 1 10 d a 394 l T Cor Els Qe lt gt _ 2 2 047 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 87 e 88 azy ONL SLY ONL ZLOv ONL SUOISUBUIG QL 86 L0 Y D NIVHN3GISH WA 4 1 al Kabell nge gestreckt 2195 CABL 87 LENGTH AN FULLY EXTENDED NW HR 330 001 Kabel ungewendelt Kabellange 6m CABLE NON HELIX CABLE LENGTH 17 2 FT EE YH P94Mpuey sjqeywod E Z 9L 16 7 4 Portable handwheel HR 332 93 3 66
231. 8 7 121 TE AOQ fo iene edie 3 4 3 76 4 164 User Parameters eissu niiata eian 5 2 Technical data EE 2 3 LUserpararmeierg 4 152 Temperature 2 6 USES Instruction 7 131 TESEAURCTONS Mee ee 7 11 T st gtaphicSsisiz25 aa es tabs eee 4 36 Vv RR de te TEEN 7 10 EENEG 3 18 E KEE 8 15 Text file 4 150 V 24 shee ect Meat eet Seel d st 8 10 Thermal expansion pt os eg Pte ts Wa 4 32 AVAT OJEE hO EE 3 10 eS EE EE et SEA Visual display unt 3 4 3 13 3 70 Ee eis Voltage step 4 71 Thermistors 00008 3 53 3 60 3 63 4 206 Threshold sensitivity s n1neeseeae1eeee 4 196 Blat 7 18 7 24 W E KEEN 3 36 3 39 W ASSIGN WOP 7 45 RN EE WE EEN 4 176 VUEN 4 275 KR et Bee a eet aa Ng 3 4 Weights E 2 6 IR de 11 2 WHILE ENDW Structure Eege 7 129 TNC keyboard 3 4 3 68 WO di e oad AEA 7 16 7 18 TNG REMOVE ce oes haces eer eee hia 8 46 Ve TEE 6 11 TNC keyboard A0 scsctelec et scsstsavectes athens 4 164 Working plange 2 18 2 20 2 21 4 41 Toolaxis EE 4 14 Workpiece datum ceeeeeee 4 126 4 127 Tool calbration u 4 192 VY Des WORE ee E ET 7 138 Tool compensation 2 4 WRONG OPERATING MODE 8 48 8 49 Tool compensations n se 4 36 WRONG PROGRAM DATA 8 48 8 49 FOOM ENG teen a 2 15 4 134 MN FEIDT ees ege EES 4 102 TOO TAD ee E ER A 7 158 8 18 Heel 4 150 TOUCH rel 4 176 Touch probe AXES cee eeececccccecceececeeeeeees 4 191 Touch probe CONNECTION ccceeeeeeeee
232. 8 o 3 18 3 WHILE ENDW Structure The WHILE ENDW structure repeats a program sequence if a condition is fulfilled Under no circumstances must this structure wait for an external event in the cyclical PLC program to happen The following commands are available e WHILET While True Execute sequence if Logic Accumulator 1 e WHILEF While False Execute sequence if Logic Accumulator 0 e ENDW End While End of program sequence go back to beginning AWHILE ENDW loop is only run when the WHILE condition is fulfilled at the beginning The execution condition must be repeated before the ENDW instruction The condition can also be repeated differently than before the WHILE instruction Example L M100 Create condition for 1st WHILE scan WHILET execute following code if Logic Accumulator 1 EROE code to be executed L M101 Create condition for repeat processing A M102 next condition ENDW return to WHILE scan Two internal jump labels are generated for the WHILE ENDW structure 3 18 4 CASE Branch Indexed Module Call CASE Abbreviation for PLC Editor CASE CASE OF Byte Word Execution time us 3 3 to 3 8 3 3 to 3 8 Number of bytes 46 44 4 bytes must be added to the length for each entry in the jump table CM Operands B W Operation The CASE command is used to select a defined subprogram from a list of module calls CM These CM commands come directly after the CASE command and are numbered inter
233. 819 01 SE i LE 425 D A 208 C GE 760 20m lt Included with FE DH D A EN SE oooo FE 401B 0000 251 02901 20m TIL RS 232 C Adapter block Connection box 284 574 KA 12pin 15pin 251 249 01 267 268 50m Rotary encoder TT 110 for spindle orientation 288 949 KA VB VB 274 543 290 109 244 005 som s E TS 120 VB VB 265 348 Ge 372 290 110 263 954 g j j i E E VB APE 510 227 590 01 SE 510 274 539 APE 511 275 759 01 230 473 01 20m 40m max 30 m KA 15 pin male connector i LI 37 pin male connector maxkam ee KX Rotary encoder 267 268 243 971 ZY 243 937 ZY E eg TS 511 for speed control 274540 265 349 Nominal value PLC 1 0 i 40m output TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Cable overview 11 21 Appendix Contents 1 7 Bit ASCII code 12 2 2 Powers of 2 12 5 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 12 1 1 1 7 Bit ASCII code Character IDETTE IHER V CO CH a CH CH oo df DC1 X ON DC2 DC3 X OFF 0 1 012 013 014 015 016 7 8 1 01 01 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 12 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 7 Bit ASCII code NNN 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 A B C D E G H J K L M O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
234. 84 During the transfer the marker M2149 is set by the NC The transfer must be confirmed by the PLC by setting marker M2611 Marker M2150 determines whether dimensions are in mm or inches The transferred value is deposited as an integer number in units of 1 10 000 Marker Function Set Reset M2149 Transfer with FN19 active NC NC M2611 Confirm the transfer with FN19 PLC PLC M2150 Dimensional unit for transfer with FN19 NC NC 0 mm 1 inch Address Function D 280 1st Number value from FN 19 D 284 2nd Number value from FN 19 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 19 o Example NC program PLC program 0 BEGIN PGM 5 MM 11 FN19 PLC 20 25 100 33 END PGM 5 MM LN M2149 R M2611 L M2149 CMT 199 LBL 199 L D280 D120 L D284 D124 L M2149 S M2611 Strobe signal Transfer Acknowledgement Strobe signal Transfer 1st value from FN19 Internal buffer 1st value 2nd value from FN19 Internal buffer 2nd value Change signal for transfer Acknowledgement After the program has been performed the following data will be in the Doublewords D120 and D124 D120 202 500 D124 1 000 000 M2150 0 since program no 5 was programmed in mm 7 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 e The number transfer from the PLC to the machining program is carried out by the Q parameters Q100 to Q107 i e the Q Parameters Q100 to Q107 can be overwritt
235. 8400 baud The time taken to transmit one bit tg can be calculated from the baud rate 1 Baud el For example a baud rate of 19 200 baud will have a bit duration of tg 52 083 s The number of characters transmitted can be calculated from the baud rate and the transmission format Baud ae Characters per second Number of bits per character Example With a transmission format of seven data bits one start bit two stop bits and a data transfer rate of exactly 300 baud 300 Baud 10bits 7 30 characters per second will be transmitted f 8 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 01 98 2 1 2 Handshaking A handshake procedure is often used in connection with interfaces This means that two devices are as it were working hand in hand in order to control data transfer A distinction is drawn between software handshaking and hardware handshaking Either hardware or software handshaking can be chosen for communication between two units 1 2 1 Hardware handshaking With this procedure control of data transfer is executed by electrical signals Important information such as Clear To send CTS Clear to receive Start transmission and Stop transmission is signalled by the hardware For example when a computer character is to be transmitted the CTS signal line see Section 2 2 RS 232 C V 24 interface is checked to see whether it is active ON If it is the character is transmitted Otherw
236. 9 Data interface The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 407 and TNC 415 have two data interfaces one RS 232 C V 24 data interface and one RS 422 V 11 data interface Both interfaces may be utilised The operator decides which of the two interfaces he wishes to use See also chapter Data interface 9 1 RS 232 C V 24 data interface HEIDENHAIN guarantees that if properly connected the serial data interface RS 232 C V 24 will transmit data correctly up to a distance of 20 m between the logic unit and the peripheral unit The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the operating console or the control cabinet See also under the heading Mounting dimensions This cable adapter d Nr 239 758 01 is connected to the logic unit with the HEIDENHAIN cable Id Nr 239 760 For connection to the peripheral unit HEIDENHAIN offers a standard connecting cable Id Nr 274 545 01 length 3 m RS 232 C Adapter Block 3m max 17m GC lt Bag F X21 Data interface RS 232 C V 24 Id Nr 274 545 01 Id Nr 239 758 01 Id Nr 239 760 m gt a mm H WH B WH BN WH B WH BN GND 1 1 G J 1 1 pu 1 1 h LT 1 1 GND Chassis TXD 2 2 9 YL 2 2 m 2 Gh f 2 2 RXD Receive data RXD 3 3 GY 3 3 3 3 PK 3 3 TXD Transmit data RTS 4 4 PK 4 4 A 4 GY 4 4 CTS Clear to send CTS 5 5 BL 5 5 5 5 BN 5
237. 99 Operation with feed precontrol 1700 to 1999 Operation with servo lag 3000 to 3999 Spindle 4000 to 4999 Integral PLC 5000 to 5999 Setting the data interface 6000 to 6199 Measuring with a 3D touch probe 6200 to 6299 Digitizing with TS 120 7100 to 7199 Tapping 7200 to 7399 Display and programming 7400 to 7599 Machining and program run 7600 to 7699 Hardware If there is more than one input value for a single function Leg a separate input for each axis the parameter number is provided with indices Example MP330 Grating period MP330 0 Grating period for axis X MP330 1 Grating period for axis Y MP330 2 Grating period for axis Z MP330 3 Grating period for axis 4 MP330 4 Grating period for axis 5 The indices are assigned to the corresponding axes according to a fixed pattern For example if an entry is possible only in axes 4 and 5 then only the indices 3 and 4 will appear 1 1 User parameters The MOD function User Parameters permits the control operator to easily access and change certain machine parameters The machine tool builder can define up to 16 different machine parameters as user parameters through MP7330 see chapter Machine Adjustment section Display and operation 1 5 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 What is a machine parameter 01 98 2 Input output of machine parameters If the machine parameters have not yet been entered in a HEIDENHAIN contouring control eg during commissioning the T
238. ACK with GRE1 set software relevance only Module GRE1 to zero and return arm Unload GRE1 Swap over GRE1 and GRE2 registers STANDBY BACK Module TOOL CALL feedback Bring old tool to magazine Move axes to man change position Prompt user to load tool and press OK key Strobe set again Load T code to SPIREG f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 251 e 15 3 6 Program module MANUAL TOOL OUT M gt N or M gt S Normal or Special tool follows Manual tool The operator is prompted to unload the spindle manually as there is no pocket for the current tool in the magazine The called tool is loaded automatically Move axes to Tool in GRE1 manual change position Prompt user to unload tool and press OK key Yes Unload GRE1 STANDBY BACK Module STANDBY Fetch tool to Module GRE1 Load zero in SPIREG spindle empty CHANGE Module TOOL CALL feedback TOOL CALL strobe set again 4 252 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 e 15 3 7 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN OUT M gt M Manual tool follows Manual tool The operator is prompted to unload the spindle and load the new tool manually as there is no pocket for these tools in the magazine Move axis to manual change position Prompt user to unload old and load new tool Press OK key Load T code to SPIREG 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 253 L 15 3 8 Prog
239. C 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 2 Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer of servo amplifier of X axis LU Enter following program in PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode LBL 1 X 100 RO F MAX X 0 ROF MAX CALL LBL 1 REP 100 100 S E Press machine START button in the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK operating mode Machine runs MP1520 Increase entry value until overshoot occurs U LA gt t ms MP1520 Reduce entry value until overshoot stops U 7 t ms Check axes Y Z IV and V and correct MP1520 if necessary 1 Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible 7 95 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 271 e 16 3 8 Optimize the integral factor MP7290 4 display step 1 um Machine stands in position under servo control MP1080 integral factor for X axis raise entry value 1 until the Servo positioning becomes noticeably unstable observe the actual value display MP1080 reduce the entry value in small steps until the servo positioning is steady again 2 Repeat adjustment for Y axis Z IV and V Whether or not an integral factor is possible in connection with the automatic offset adjustment with MP 1220 can only be judged when observing the complete machine The optimum solution must be found during the commissioning procedure 1 First
240. C 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 35 L 3 2 Data Transfer with Block Check Character BCC 3 2 1 General This protocol is specific to HEIDENHAIN and operates with different control characters and an additional data check feature when transferring The protocol is set with the following operating modes FE1 mode FE2 mode EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 mode selectable The data transfer protocol is fully identical for all these modes except for the FE1 mode in which a command sequence is automatically output at the beginning to request the contents directory from the peripheral unit a In the freely configurable modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 the following control characters lt SOH gt lt ETB gt lt STX gt lt ACK gt lt NAK gt lt ETX gt lt EOT gt can be defined at will as ASCII characters see section Freely configurable interfaces When a file is transferred the first block the so called Header is transmitted consisting of the following characters lt SOH gt H Name M lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt SOH gt Start of Header This character identifies the beginning of the header The header contains the identifier H of the program see section Saving reading files the program name Name and the transfer mode M E Input A Output The header terminates with the character lt ETB gt which ends a data transfer block The next character BCC provides an additional data check As well as checking the parity of the
241. C 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 75 o The fine control of the precontrolled speed set value is influenced by the Ky factor for feedforward control MP1510 The transient response when accelerating is defined separately by MP1530 in software types 243 05 259 96 243 07 and 243 02 U V t ms If the Ky factor is too large the system will oscillate about the precontrolled speed set value The size of the Ky factor is normally the same as the Ky factor for operation with lag distance Depending on the dynamic characteristics of the machine it may also be higher see Commissioning and start up procedure A second set of k factors can be defined in machine parameter MP1515 x and selected with M function M105 see section Display and operation MP1530 Damping factor for transient response Only with software types 243 05 259 96 243 07 243 02 Entry 0 010 to 0 999 MP1520 Transient response Entry value 0 100 to 10 000 MP1510 Ky factor for feedforward control M105 f m min Entry 0 100 to 20 000 Frim MP1510 0 X axis MP1510 1 Y axis MP1510 2 Z axis MP1510 3 4th axis MP1510 4 5th axis MP1515 Ky factor for feedforward control active after M105 m min Entry 0 100 to 20 000 Eeer d MP1515 0 X axis MP1515 1 Y axis MP1515 2 Z axis MP1515 3 4th axis MP1515 4 5th axis 4 76 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o 1 3 3 Offset adjustment he TNC 407 TNC 415 controls
242. C 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Call PS BMW D K lt Axis gt 0 4 for X Y Z 4 5 CM 9122 PL BAD lt Status gt Bit 0 1 Axis is PLC axis Bit 1 1 Axis already over reference point Bit 2 1 Axis positioning Bit 3 1 Direction of motion is negative Bit 4 1 Positioning error Error status after call M3171 0 Status is reported 1 Error condition see above 4 9 4 Traverse Reference Marks for PLC Axis Module 9123 The module starts positioning in a defined direction and continues until a reference mark is found or positioning is aborted by Module 9121 Owing to the possible problems with locating a target position during the reference traverse motion reversal etc stopping after locating the reference point will be unavoidable Constraints The specified axis must be activated by MP10 and declared by MP60 as a PLC axis The values for rapid traverse analogue voltage for rapid traverse acceleration etc must be set correctly in the machine parameters The system does not check for limit switch overshoot The axis must be stationary Any ongoing positioning must first be aborted with Module 9121 There is no feed rate override The Search Reference Point mode is set for the axis An existing reference point on this axis is cancelled but not the numerical value of the axis This is not re initialized until the reference point is located If Modules 9120 Start PLC Axis 9121 Stop PLC Axis and 912
243. C I O unit 4 analog inputs for 10 V DC 4 analog inputs for Pt100 thermistors 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware components 3 5 i 1 1 Changes in the ID number If development or manufacturing requirements make it necessary to alter any of the hardware components HEIDENHAIN will change the ID numbers of the hardware components ID Numbers assigned to date VDU Id Nr 254 740 01 BC 110 Separate power until 5 91 supply for fan Id Nr 260 520 01 BC 110 B Power supply for since 11 90 fan taken from VDU supply PLC I O board Id Nr 252 855 01 PL 400 since 2 90 Id Nr 263 371 01 PL 410 since 10 92 Id Nr 263 371 02 PL 410 B with analog inputs 5 V interface since 10 94 Id Nr 263 371 12 PL 410 B without analog inputs 5 V interface since 10 94 TNC keyboard Id Nr 250 517 01 TE 400 since 2 90 Id Nr 250 517 03 TE 400 with APPR DEP key since 9 92 3 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware components 01 98 o Logic unit LE 415 Id Nr Logic unit Change 251 481 99 LE 415 until 12 90 251 481 89 LE 415 Colour graphics chip since 9 91 Expansion slot for software module since 9 91 251 481 88 LE 415 E Export version of the Id Nr 251 481 89 251 481 79 LE 415 Like Id Nr 251 481 89 but with since 9 91 software module 251 481 78 LE 415 E Export version of the Id Nr 251 481 79 since 9 91 258 993 99 LE 415 Changed power supply and since 11 90 graphics chip 258 993 98 LE 415 E E
244. COL 16 3 TE 400 388 0 2 15 276 008 FRONT PANEL OPENING S 380 0 5 14 96 02 Frontplattenausschnitt 371 14 6 SO CVC CORGLE OL gol Dia S DE g 800 F 9E 7 1800 F GLE OL E A ZOO S O E z SO ss Ed 3S e 15 276 400 OOO LIE OOOO ugod OOOO 6 0 2 236 008 3 76 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 86 10 Gv ONL GLY ONL ZOv ONL SUOISUBUIG QL LCE 400 375 14 1 Le blis lig a 15 75 E 14 76 ES 04 6 0 2 Jr 112 0 2 276 0 2 3880 2 105 2 236 008 rend 10 866 008 15 275 008 4 13 08 2 0 5 fF CN 08 02 0 N als O Lee ZS Hz ll 7 x I em IS O Lo 63 2 lt NENI Ny No SE Die GOAR A N2 a JS k L O ET Mla CO ojo HI gt Gil ol N Si Z N S J y E o 9 x y 45 NIN Frontplattenausschnitt le 365 A FRONT PANEL OPENING 14 37 ip SL 16 1 19 Ansicht A 31 oF 63 75 VIEW A 372 2 i gt i 5 14 65 08 2 o M5 00 et QRS
245. CY STOP 11 2 3 PL connection X47 PLC I O Board D sub 37 pin male connection Pin number Assignment Pin number Assignment 1 2 3 DV 13 Screen 4 Serial IN 2 14 15 16 12 V from PL 5 6 17 18 Donot use 19 Serial IN 1 7 RESET 20 EMERGENCY STOP 8 WRITE EXTERN 21 Serial OUT 9 WRITE EXTERN 22 Serial OUT 10 Ap 23 A4 11 A3 24 A2 12 Al 25 AO 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 3 55 e 11 3 Connector assignment on the PL Power supply see section PLC power supply 11 3 1 Connection to LE or PL 1 X1 to PL 410 PL 410B X10 to PL 400 D sub 25 pin female connector Pin number Assignment Pin number 1 2 3 OV 13 4 Serial IN 2 14 15 5 6 17 18 Donot use 16 7 RESET 19 8 WRITE EXTERN 20 9 WRITE EXTERN 21 10 A5 22 11 A3 23 12 M 24 25 Housing 11 3 2 Connection of PL 2 X2 at the PL 410 PL 410 B D sub 25 pin male connector X11 at the PL 400 D sub 25 pin female connector Pin number Assignment Pin number 1 2 3 DV 13 4 6 14 18 Do not use 19 7 RESET 20 8 WRITE EXTERN 21 9 WRITE EXTERN 22 10 A5 23 11 A3 24 12 M 25 Assignment Screen 12 V from PL PL identification Serial IN 1 EMERGENCY STOP Serial OUT Serial OUT A4 A2 AO External shield Assignment Screen Serial IN 1 EMERGENCY STOP Serial OUT Serial OUT AA 3 56 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 01 98 2 f 11 3 3 PLC inputs outputs on the PL 400 The PLC inp
246. Coupling on mount connec connec female tor tor female male ing base female 18 pin 9 pin 9 pin Set C E o e fep e WH BN 2 WH YL act 2 left Permissive button WH GN act 1 right WH BL act 1 WH RD act1 EMERGENCY STOP YL BK act 2 WH BK act 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input El 3 47 L Internal wiring of the permissive button and EMERGENCY STOP contacts of the HR 410 Permissive button 1 Permissive button 2 EMERGENCY STOP Contact 2 Contact 1 Cable adapter Contact 2 Contact 1 X2 Contact 1 Contact 2 Contact 1 2 Contact2 X1 Contact 1 3 48 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 01 98 2 10 5 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 he HRA 110 can be used to connect 2 or 3 handwheels HR 150 to one LE The first two handwheels are dedicated to axes X and Y The third handwheel can be assigned to axes X Y Z IV or V using a step switch optional or machine parameters See Handwheel section in chapter Machine integration HR 150 HRA 110 X31 Achswahl Option AXIS SELECTION OPTIONAL Unterteilungsfaktorwahl Option INTERPOLATION FACTOR OPTIONAL D Za gt X23 LE Id Nr 270 909 DE xs X23 4 max 20 m lt 4 max 50 m A second step switch optional can be used to select the interpolation factor for th
247. D K Operation With this command a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs The content of the Word Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand If the Word Accumulator is greater than or equal to the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the Word Accumulator is smaller than the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 The comparison takes place over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i e B 8 bit W 16 bit and D K 32 bit Example A constant is to be compared with the content of Doubleword D8 The result is then assigned to marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 Doubleword D8 15 000 Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation The ten position Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content 1 L K16000 16 000 Bit 31 Se ee 7 0 1 gt D8 re ooo 2 M500 Line 1 The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the following criteria Word Accumulator gt Operand As this condition is fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 Line 3 The content of the Logic Accumulator result of the comparison is assigned to marker M500 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 77 L 3 5 6 UNEQUAL lt gt Abbreviation for PLC Edito
248. Entry Xxxx Bit O Channel Milling direction for W Anti clockwise channel milling of the pocket contours clockwise for islands 1 Clockwise channel milling of the pocket contours anti clockwise for islands Bit 1 Sequence for 0 First channel milling then clear out pocket clearing out and 1 First clear out pocket then channel milling channel milling Bit 2 Merge programmed 0 Contours merged only if the contours tool centre paths intersect 4 Contours merged if the programmed contours overlap Bit 3 Clearing out and channel W Clearing out and channel milling performed in milling to pocket one operation for all depths depth or for each Ze For each peck first perform channel milling infeed depth and then clearing out depending on Bit 1 before next peck Bit 4 Position after cycle has 0 Move tool to position that was approached been executed before cycle was called Le TNC moves tool to clearance height 6 7 4 Scaling factor Machine parameters can be used to decide whether Cycle 11 Scaling factor only operates in the machining plane or also parallel to the tool axis MP7410 Scaling factor cycle in two or three axes Entry 0 or 1 0 Cycle Scaling factor operates in all three principal axes 1 Cycle Scaling factor only operates in the machining plane 6 7 5 Cylinder interpolation A contour can be machined on a cylindrical surface with Cycle 27 Cylinder surface see User s Manual This requires the centre of
249. Entry 0 to 16777 215 us MP1511 0 X axis MP1511 1 Y axis MP1511 2 Z axis MP1511 3 4th axis MP1511 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 33 L MP1512 Limit of extent of stiction compensation Entry 0 to 16 777 215 counting steps MP1512 0 X axis MP1512 1 Y axis MP1512 2 Z axis MP1512 3 Ath axis MP1512 4 5th axis MP1513 Feed rate limit for stiction compensation Entry 0 to 300 000 mm min MP1513 0 X axis MP1513 1 Y axis MP1513 2 Z axis MP1513 3 Ath axis MP1513 4 5th axis MP1391 Feed precontrol in all operating modes Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 Feed precontrol in the Positioning with MDI Bit 1 Y axis Program run single block and Program run full Bit 2 Z axis sequence operating modes Bit 3 Ath axis T Feed precontrol in all operating modes Bit 4 5th axis 4 34 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L 1 7 PLC positioning The five axes of the control can also be positioned by the PLC The spindle too can be positioned with the aid of the PLC see under Main spindle The positions of the individual axes must be stored as Doublewords D528 to D544 before activating the positioning The feed for positioning the individual axes is stored in W560 to W568 The transfer of the positions and the feed to the PLC is carried out for example by O parameters or machine parameters MP4210 X MP4220 X Five of 5 axes 3 of 5 axes on
250. HORTEST PATH 4 257 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 258 16 1 Code numbers for commissioning 4 258 16 2 Preparation of the machine 4 258 16 3 Commissioning the control 4 262 16 3 1 Entry of the provisional and pre defined machine parameters 4 262 16 3 2 Entry of the PLC program 4 262 16 3 3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 262 16 3 4 Testing the direction of traverse 4 263 16 3 5 Fixing the software limit switch ranges 4 264 16 3 6 Optimizing the control with lag MP1390 1 4 264 16 3 7 Optimizing the control with feed pre control MP1390 0 4 268 16 3 8 Optimize the integral factor 4 272 16 3 9 Adjust the offset 4 273 16 3 10 Adjustment of the monitoring functions 4 273 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 4 275 17 1 Analogue voltage output 4 275 17 1 1 Voltage proportional to feed rate MP3011 1 4 275 17 1 2 Voltage from the PLC MP3011 2 4 275 17 1 3 Definition of the voltage via M function MP3011 3 4 275 17 2 Graphic simulation without TOOL CALL 4 278 17 3 Program stop with M functions 4 278 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 5 1 Machine axes The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 407 TNC 415 permit the control of up to five machine axes and the main spindle see also under Servo positioning The machine parameter MP10 can be set to determine which axes should be operational on the machine If necessary MP10 can be used to select all the axes functions control display pass ove
251. IC 2 IC 5 IC 6 NC 4 MB INC 4MB ele e NC IM NC 1MB Set jumper to 4M Sockets on CLP board IC 9 Boot ICS SW Modul 2 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 e El 3 3 3 TNC 407 Sockets on processor board IC 5 PLC 1MB IC 4 IC 3 Language 1MB Language 1MB IC 2 IC 1 NC 2MB 2MB ICS SW Module 3 4 Software replacement Before replacing the software on a TNC the data of all file types the machine parameter list the non linear axis error compensation table and the PLC program if in the RAM must be backed up You can use the TNC BACKUP routine to do this In the Machine Parameter Editor mode code number 95 148 press the MOD key to display the menu for configuring the data interface The BACKUP DATA and RESTORE DATA soft keys will be offered Use BACKUP DATA to transmit all operating parameters and the data of all file types across the data interface and store them in the BACKUP ANC file When software replacement is complete use RESTORE DATA to download the data to the TNC again 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 13 2 El 3 5 Releases New NC software versions are released by HEIDENHAIN at irregular intervals 3 5 1 Software types 243 05 259 91 and 243
252. If the control is set so that a program run interruption occurs on MO6 then the program must be restarted after the tool change This can also be carried out directly by the PLC 7 3 Modal cycle call M89 The M Function M89 can be used for the modal cycle call The possibilities for calling a cycle are With the NC block CYCL CALL With the miscellaneous function M99 M99 is only effective for a single block and must be reprogrammed for each execution With the miscellaneous function M89 depending on the machine parameter M39 as a cycle call is modally effective i e for every following positioning block there will be a call of the last orogrammed machining cycle M89 is cancelled by M99 or a CYCL CALL block If M89 is not defined as a modal Cycle call by machine parameters then M89 will be transferred to the PLC as a normal M function at the beginning of the block 7 4 Reduced feed rate of tool axis with M103 The entry M103 F can be used to reduce the contour feed rate for movements of the tool axis in the negative direction The feed rate element of the tool axis is limited to a value that the TNC computes from the last programmed feed rate F max Farag Es Fmax Maximum feed rate in negative direction of tool axis Forog Last programmed feed rate Fy Programmed factor after M103 in M103 F is cancelled by a new entry for M103 without a factor The function M103 F is enabled by MP7440 Bit 4
253. Jog positioning axis 5 4 209 M2521 Jog positioning axis 5 4 209 M2522 7 178 M2524 4 175 M2525 4 175 M2527 7 178 M2528 4 209 M2529 4 209 M2530 Complement Jog positioning Axis Y 4 209 M2531 Complement Jog positioning Axis Y 4 209 M2532 Complement Jog positioning Axis Z 4 209 M2533 Complement Jog positioning Axis Z 4 209 M2534 Complement Jog positioning Axis 4 4 209 M2535 4 209 M2536 4 209 M2537 4 209 M2538 7 178 M2540 4 175 M2541 4 175 M2643 7 178 M2544 4 92 M2545 4 92 M2546 4 92 M2547 4 92 M2548 4 20 6 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 01 98 i Marker Function L et Reset Page M2549 4 20 M2550 4 20 M2551 4 20 M2552 Actual nominal value transfer X axis 4 92 M2553 4 92 M2554 4 92 M2555 Actual nominal value transfer 4 axis 4 92 M2556 4 63 M2557 4 63 M2558 4 63 M2559 4 63 M2560 BCD numerical values for PLC positioning tool number spindle PLC PLC 7 178 to orientation and O parameters Ehl M2597 Tool number output mode PLC PLC 7 178 normal tool M2601 Return special tool to its original pocket in spite of flexible PLC PLC 4 226 0V M2609 4 139 M2610 M2611 PLC 7 19 4 232 M2613 4 20 M2614 Read in inhibited after acknowledgement of the M S T Q PLC PLC strobes the subsequent NC blocks are not executed M2615 4 108 M2624 Limit switch X 4 18 M2625 4 18 M2626 4 18 M2627 4 18 M2628 4 18 M2629 4 18 M2630 4 18 M2631
254. K Operation The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand B W D K are gated with AND In accordance with the different sizes of operand B 8 bit W 16 bit D K 32 bit 8 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator Thus Bit O of the Accumulator is gated with bit O of the operand Bit 1 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 of the operand and so on The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator Example The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 36 hex Byte B8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 15 87 0 XX XX XXX XX x x x XXX xxx 1 L Pe 0000000000 0 0110110 00110110 2 A D 0000000000 0 0100010 00101010 3 D 0000000000f0 0100010 00100010 Line 1 The contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Byte B8 7 54 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 3 2 AND NOT AN Abbreviation for the PLC Editor AN AND NOT Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 9 0 5 to 0 9 0 5 to 0 9 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 8 8 10 Logic execution with the AND NOT command Operands M O T C Operation This command functions in different ways according to its position in the pr
255. LAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING 10 Recognize the control voltage on X42 4 and switch off of the control is ready signal on X41 34 by the third microprocessor t lt 66 ms 4 122 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 01 98 E 1 11 Maximum time during which the acknowledgement of control readiness on X42 4 must go to 0 t lt 114 ms If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE 12 Recognize the acknowledgement and set X41 34 t lt 20 ms 13 Wait for control voltage RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING 14 Normal control operation Output and control is ready acknowledgement signals are high 15 Control voltage is switched off externally EMERGENCY STOP 16 After switching on the control voltage again the error message can be cancelled followed by normal control operation 17 The control switches off the control is ready output Flashing error X41 34 after recognizing a fault message f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 123 2 5 2 2 TNC 407 X21 34 X22 4 1 Wait for control voltage 2 Recognize the control voltage on X42 4 and reset the control is ready output on X41 34 t lt 70 ms 3 Maximum time during which the control is ready on X42 4 must go to 0 t lt 146 ms If exceeded 4 Recognize the acknowledgement and set output X41 34 t lt 24 ms 5 Wait for control voltage 6 Normal control operation Output and control is ready acknowledgement signal
256. LC axes The controlled axes can be assigned to the PLC individually On a machine with four NC axes for example the 5th axis could be used to position the tool changer independently of the four NC axes Machine parameter MP60 defines the axes to be controlled by the PLC In the PLC program the positioning of the PLC axes is controlled by modules Module 9120 Start positioning a PLC axis Module 9121 Stop positioning a PLC axis Module 9122 Interrogate status of a PLC axis Module 9123 Traverse the reference marks of a PLC axis These modules are described in the chapter PLC Programming PLC axes are always traversed in the servo lag mode Several PLC axes can be started simultaneously They are not interpolated together however A modulo value for the counting mode of the axes can be entered in MP810 see section Display and operation MP60 PLC auxiliary axes Input xxxxx Bit O Axis X 0 NC axis Bit 1 Axis Y 1 PLC axis Bit 2 Axis Z Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Example A tool sequence is to be pre positioned with TOOL DEF The tool sequence is driven by a controlled axis The acknowledgement for the TOOL DEF block is given when positioning starts The feed rate for positioning with TOOL DEF is filed in MP 4210 0 and the feed rate for reference traversing the tool sequence is filed in MP 4210 1 Machine parameters P 10 S1XXXX jactivate 5th axis P 60 S1XXXX declare 5th axis P 410 4 S 2 declare 5
257. LE Insulated against housing UUODUDDU ee Leads are provided f with end sleeves 1234567 8 9101112131415 16 Goooooooooeooooe EEEEEEEEEEEELEK o 5 able screens are led onto 0 14 mm I insulated strands via crimp eyelets on on on no on DU Y Wy X Z S SERVO Pin number Assignment 1 Nominal value outpu X axis 2 Nominal value output OV X axis 3 Nominal value outpu Y axis 4 Nominal value output OV Y axis 5 Nominal value outpu Z axis 6 Nominal value output OV Z axis 7 Nominal value output IV axis 8 Nominal value output OV IV axis 9 Nominal value outpu V axis 10 Nominal value output OV V axis 11 Nominal value output S axis 12 Nominal value output OV S axis 13 Screen connection 14 Screen connection 15 Screen connection 16 Screen connection HEIDENHAIN recommends that the logic unit and the connection box be connected by HEIDENHAIN cable Id Nr 290 109 If the manufacturers want to use their own cable HEIDENHAIN offers a 15 pin Sub D connector with solderable leads d Nr 243 971 ZY 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Nominal value output 3 33 L 3 34 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Nominal value output 01 98 i 7 Reference pulse inhibit
258. LIFE EXPIRED when this time elapses If the current tool life is greater than TIME1 the NC sets flag M2094 Further action can be defined by the machine tool manufacturer e g output a PLC error message With the M function M101 the tool can be replaced automatically after a certain service life TIME 1 or TIME 2 The replacement tool is not installed exactly when tool life ends but can vary by several NC blocks depending on processor capacity A T strobe M2046 is sent to the PLC and marker M2404 is set With automatic replacement tool installation M101 the same radius must be defined or the replacement tool as for the original tool in standard NC programs NC blocks with RR RL or RO No radius correction is defined in NC blocks with surface normal vectors A delta value DR DL for length and radius can be defined for each tool in the tool table The TNC uses these delta values in C programs with surface normal vectors If the radius of the replacement tool differs from that of he original tool then this must be defined in the DR field in the tool table The delta value must always be negative If a positive delta value is defined then the error message Tool radius too large will appear This error message can be reset by M function M107 M107 is reset by M108 MP7680 can define whether the oversize for the tool radius DR2 is considered when calculating tool length for NC blocks with surface normal vectors The current tool lif
259. Load Data PS eee 7 100 SCO EE 4 104 Stack Pull ELL eent 7 102 S code minimum spindle speed 4 104 stack PUll PEW d Metre eetaradirestes 7 102 S code acknowledgement i i 4 104 Stack PulliData Pl ecco tee ees ation 7 101 S code change sonal 4 104 Standard data transmission protocol 8 10 ele 4 105 Standard transmission Drotoco 8 28 BEER lettre Eegen 3 38 Standstill MONITOFING secs tte ee 4 87 SEARCH FEATURE NOT ALLOWED 8 50 large Eege Ge ue 8 6 Secondary linear aale 4 13 Status Interrogation DL VI 7 124 EE ee assets ee ee 8 4 Status Tee 7 141 Servo lag 4 68 4 75 Status WIG E OA D A AE E ET 7 144 Servo lag control wi 4 66 Status window SE 4 134 Servo POSITIONING sisisi 4 65 Step SWI eege E aaa N 3 49 Servo reSOlUtION a 4 71 SUCTION ebe ge 4 33 SEM AS cicctenestucchsctss tea diegbeg mees fett edesdr 7 48 Stiction compensation 2 18 4 33 SET NOT SN es seis cetera uetinge dane 7 50 e RTE 8 6 Shift Commande 7 93 Storing a STRING Lol 7 116 SHIFT LEFT besch Seege SE 7 93 STRING accumulator s is 7 114 SHIFT RIGHT Ti 7 94 STRING Exvecution eens 7 114 Shifting the datum 4 221 STRING mmemonm tsetse eee teeete 7 114 Shifting the reference points 4 63 String ProGeSSING cssseonssercerneeievan tele 7 151 Signal designations 8 12 SOD 7 5 ek cessed Hart cate e aa 7 23 Signal Eege 208 4 6 Strobe signal for Miumcnon 4 159 e EEIEROET a ches Bake hnas 7 50 KEE 4 195 EEN
260. Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 7 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 4 6 Operands B W D K Operation With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator 32 bits Then the contents of the operand are subtracted from the contents of the Word Accumulator The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further Example A stored value in Word W6 is to be subtracted from a Constant The result is then stored in Doubleword D8 Initial state Constant 100000 dec Word W6 200 dec Doubleword D8 In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K100000 100 000 2 W6 9 9 8 0 0 200 3 D8 9 9 8 0 0 9 9 8 0 0 Line 1 The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of Word W6 are subtracted from the Accumulator Line 3 The result is assigned to Doubleword D8 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 67 e 3 4 3 MULTIPLICATION x Abbreviation for the PLC Editor x MULTIPLY Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 3 5 to 4 3 3 2 to 3 8 3 0 to 3 8 Number of bytes 14 10 14 Operands B W D K Operation With arithmetic functions t
261. M 110 The TM 110 measuring touch probe permits high digitising speeds up to 3 m min 1181 ipm The stylus deflection is measured in every direction directly by integral measuring systems and evaluated in the TNC Technical prerequisites Interfaced TM 110 touch probe Digitising with TM 110 software protection module TNC 415 or TNC 425 as of software version 280 54 or 280 56 PC for saving the surface data The machine must be prepared for the use of the TM 110 measuring touch probe The ballscrew must be mechanically clamped and it must be ensured that the spindle drive cannot be started while the probe is in use The TM 110 must be at right angles to the machine axes use a dial gauge if necessary The square cover on the TM 110 can be used as a datum surface The Digitising with TM 110 software module also enables digitising with the TS 120 touch trigger probe The machine parameters for digitising with the TM 110 and TS 120 become available when the software module has been installed 9 3 1 Interfacing the TM 110 MP6200 defines whether the measuring or the triggering touch probe is to be used W Danger of breakage If you wish to use both the triggering and the measuring touch probe you must make quite sure that the type of touch probe in use is entered in MP6200 The counting direction of the measuring system signals must match the counting direction of the measuring systems for the machine tool axes MP210 In the Posit
262. M of the PLC to one of the two serial interfaces The transfer is in the form of ASCII coded hexadecimal values so every byte in the source block makes 2 ASCII characters at the serial interface Constraints The interface must be assigned to the PLC and initialized by Module 9100 before Module 9105 is called Module 9105 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job Possible errors The call parameters are outside the permitted range 0 1 for the interface 0 1023 for the start of the binary block 0 63 for the length of the binary block The interface is not assigned to the PLC The module was not called from a Submit Job The transmit buffer is not empty Because of its length the binary block cannot be read from the specified address start length gt 1024 A transmit error was detected when the transmission was initialized Call PS BMW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt PS K BAW D Number of 1st byte in binary block 0 1023 gt PS K BAW D lt Length of binary block 0 63 gt CM 9105 Error status after call M3171 0 Hexadecimal string is transmitted 1 Error condition see above 4 8 7 Receive Binary Data across Data Interface Module 9106 Module 9106 reads a block of binary values from one of the two serial interfaces to the Word RAM of the PLC The transfer is in the form of ASCII coded hexadecimal values so every 2 ASCII characters from the serial interface make 1 byte in the bin
263. M04 negative voltage M03 negative voltage M04 positive voltage M03 and M04 positive voltage M03 and M04 negative voltage Count direction of the measuring system signals PLC RUN 4 96 for the spindle Entry 0 or 1 0 positive count direction with M03 1 negative count direction with M03 Entry 0 to 9 999 V Entry 0 to 9 999 V Jog voltage for gear change Si 4 101 Entry 0 to 9 999 V Limit with S override maximum IS RE 4 99 Entry 0 to 150 Limit with S override minimum pel 4 99 Entry 0 to 150 Spindle ramp gradient for M03 M04 M05 janie 4 97 Entry 0 to 1 9999 V ms Spindle ramp gradient for spindle orientation 4 106 Entry 0 to 1 9999 V ms Spindle ramp gradient for tapping eee onl 4 114 Entry 0 to 1 9999 V ms Spindle ramp gradient for rigid tapping Pe 4 118 Entry 0 to 1 9999 V ms 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 23 o Machine parameter MP3420 MP3430 Positioning window for spindle Entry 0 to 65 535 increments 1 increment is equivalent to about 0 088 degree 360 degrees 1024 lines x quadruple evaluation Reference mark deviation from the desired position Spindle pre set Entry O to 360 MP3440 0 7 kv factor for spindle orientation 1000 min Entry 0 1 to 10 s MP3510 0 7 Spi En En ndle speed for each gear range ry 0 to 99 999 999 rom MP3515 0 7 Maximum spindle speed in each gear range ry
264. M2813 A fixed code has been introduced for certain soft key functions As with key simulation this function is executed by entering the required code in W516 and activating with M2813 The appropriate soft key function must be displayed in the foreground or background mode for this With the trailing edge of M2813 the PLC is told whether the function was properly executed Address Function Set Reset W272 Operating mode NC NC 1 Manual operation 2 Electronic handwheel 3 Positioning with manual entry 4 Program run single block 5 Program run full sequence 7 Pass over reference point W274 Key code for the operated inhibited key NC NC Signal via M2182 W516 Word with multiple function PLC PLC Key code for simulating TNC key activated by M2813 4 164 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 01 98 2 f Marker Function S R M2182 Inhibited key was operated NC PLC M2187 Soft key function not executed NC NC M2813 Activate the key from W516 PLC NC M2876 Inhibit the alpha keyboard PLC PEC M2877 Inhibit the soft key row below the screen PLC PLC M2878 Inhibit the changeover keys at right of screen PLC PLC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 4 165 e IS fee fe Soa M2867 a inh 4 166 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 01 98 2 f M2871 inhibi M2872 inhibi 2873 Si inhibi 2875 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 4 167 1
265. MP1710 0 Axis X MP1710 1 Axis Y MP1710 2 Axis Z MP1710 3 Ath axis MP1710 4 5th axis MP1720 Position monitoring for operation with lag EMERGENCY STOP Entry 0 0000 to 300 0000 mm MP1720 0 Axis X MP1720 1 Axis Y MP1720 2 Axis Z MP1720 3 Ath axis MP1720 4 5th axis 4 84 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o 3 5 2 Position monitoring for operation with feedforward control In operation with feedforward control the ranges for continuous position monitoring are determined by MP1410 and MP1420 lag monitoring The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under the control of the position control loop If the limits of MP1410 are exceeded the error message Position error will appear which can be cancelled with the CE key If the limit of parameter MP1420 is exceeded the flashing error message Gross positioning error A appears This error can only be cancelled by switching off the control If clamped axes cause the error message Position error a residual voltage can remain at the nominal value output since the machine axes can no longer be traversed MP1150 can be used to program a time after which the residual voltage becomes zero After this period a nominal actual value transfer is carried out If the error message is cancelled by CE before the time has elapsed the nominal actual value transfer is carried out and the residual voltage is switched off The machine paramete
266. MP5204 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 MP5205 ASCII character for output identification A PLC RUN 8 26 MP5205 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5205 1 in operating mode EXT 2 MP5205 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 MP5206 ASCII characters for start of heading SOH PLC RUN 8 25 MP5206 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5206 1 in operating mode EXT 2 MP5206 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 27 e Machine parameter MP5207 MP5207 0 MP5207 1 MP5207 2 MP5208 MP5208 0 MP5208 1 MP5208 2 MP5209 MP5209 0 MP5209 1 MP5209 2 MP5210 MP5210 0 MP5210 1 MP5210 2 via ASCII characters for end of transmission block PLC RUN 8 25 ETB CN 123 in operating mode EXT 1 in operating mode EXT 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 ASCII characters for acknowledgement ACK PLC RUN 8 25 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 in operating mode EXT 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 ASCII negative acknowledgement characters NAK PLC RUN 8 25 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 in operating mode EXT 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 Control characters for end of transmission EOT PLC RUN 8 25 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 in operating mode EXT 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 5 28 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o 3 9 Measuring wi
267. Modules 9040 and 9041 make it possible to read coordinates referenced to a shifted coordinate system The Jog increment can now be limited with Module 9036 With the new marker M2827 an EMERGENCY STOP control is ready PLC input signal can be suppressed and instead all control loops opened and an NC stop executed The new marker M2830 opens all control loops and stops the NC Ina digitized data file that has been produced with the TM 110 touch probe the BLK FORM is enlarged in the working plane by double the value of the deflection depth MP6310 The radius compensation in the working plane is now also effective in NC blocks with 5 axis interpolation The NC block can contain besides the three non parallel linear axes also two rotary axes Tool measurement with the TT 110 is possible only on machines with controlled spindle Spindle orientation 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 23 2 1 TNC 415 B TNC 425 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E TNC 407 New functions 280 54x 03 280 56x 03 280 58x 03 280 54x 04 280 56x 04 280 58x 04 This version was never released Release 3 95 To make changes to the tool table it is no longer necessary to transfer the entire tool table It now suffices to transfer only those tool data that have changed These partial data can be transferred in the Program Run mode of operation Fora rotary
268. N if you have not yet received this CD ROM 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 Update Information No 20 1 1 i Introduction Contents 1 Hardware concept 2 2 2 Technical data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 2 3 3 Software 2 7 3 1 NC Software 2 7 3 1 1 NC Software number 2 7 3 1 2 Software types 2 7 3 1 3 Software option 2 8 3 1 4 Software Hardware 2 9 3 2 PLC Software 2 11 3 3 EPROM sockets 2 11 3 3 1 TNC 415 A TNC 415 E 2 11 3 3 2 TNC 415 B TNC 415 F and TNC 425 A TNC 425 E 2 12 3 3 3 TNC 407 2 13 3 4 Software replacement 2 13 3 5 Releases 2 14 3 5 1 Software types 243 05 259 91 and 243 07 2 14 3 5 2 Software types 259 96 259 97 and 243 02 2 14 3 5 3 Software types 259 93 259 94 and 243 03 2 18 3 5 4 Software types 280 54 280 56 and 280 58 2 23 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware concept The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 407 and TNC 415 are designed for use with drilling and milling machines The HEIDENHAIN TNCs consist of several units The principal subassembly is the logic unit The logic unit is joined to the other units and the TNC accessories by connecting cables Noml value outputs Encoders PLC 1 0 unit Hu i Visual display unit lt gt TNC keyboard unit lt gt lt gt Machine operating panel data area Touch probe lt gt NC Common PLC inputs Electronic handwheel lt gt CH e PLC outputs Data interfaces The logic unit contains the electronics for both the NC and the
269. NC In all modes if the stylus is deflected and marker M2502 is set the controller stops the machine If M2502 is not set the controller only detects stylus deflection if the probing function has started This is why HEIDENHAIN recommend setting marker M2502 as soon as the touch probe Is in the spindle This recommendation does not apply to the TS 511 however since a stylus deflection is only recognised when the system is not in standby mode If M2502 is set then the maximum feed rate is limited by MP6150 in addition to MP 1010 and MP1020 MP7411 selects whether the tool data length radius axis from the last TOOL CALL block or from the calibrated data of the probe system are used in a touch probe block The centre offset of the probe system can be determined when calibrating This centre offset is then automatically corrected in all probing operations see User s Manual MP6160 defines whether spindle orientation for a rotation by 180 will be performed directly by the NC or through the PLC If the NC orients the spindle directly the PLC need only reset Marker M2499 If the PLC orients the spindle the number of the M function will be entered in MP6560 For the triggering touch probe the rotation is activated by pressing a soft key For the measuring touch probe the rotation is automatically activated during calibration This can be deselected with MP6321 During every spindle orientation the Marker M2127 is set MP6010 Select touch probe
270. NC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 3 6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT XON Abbreviation for the PLC Editor XON EXCLUSIVE OR NOT Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 9 0 5 to 0 9 0 5 to 0 9 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 8 8 10 Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command Operands M O T C Operation This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program a At the start of a logic chain this command functions as a LN command i e the complement of the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 control which did not have the special LN command In PLC programs for the TNC 407 TNC 415 a logic chain should always be started with a load command see L LN L Di Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand M O T C are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator Example Input 14 and Marker M500 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result assigned to Output O2 Initial state Input 14 0 Marker M500 0 Output 02 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 7 0 1 L M500 E 2 XON 14 H 3 02 Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and the Input 14 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT Line 3 The gating result is assigne
271. NC presents the list of machine parameters after the memory test Now the input values must be entered either by hand on the keyboard or through the data interface The data interface is activated by pressing the EXT key It is pre set to RS 232 C format and FE1 mode This default setting can be changed through the MOD functions see chapter Data Interface 2 1 Entry format A number is entered for each machine parameter This value can be for example the acceleration in mm s2 of an individual axis or the analogue voltage in volts In the TNC 415B and TNC 425 values are entered and stored to exactly 0 0001 mm or With the TNC 407 TNC 415F and TNC 425E you can enter to 0 0001 mm or but the entry value is rounded to 0 001 mm or You can add a written comment to your entry by placing a semicolon behind the numerical entry followed by your comment The input values can be entered in decimal binary or hexadecimal format There are machine parameters with which individual functions are activated bit coded Binary entry is recommended for these machine parameters The hexadecimal format may be advisable for other machine parameters Example Disabling file types with machine parameter MP7224 0 Bit O HEIDENHAIN programs 0 not disabled 1 disabled Bit 1 DIN ISO programs Bit 2 Tool tables Bit 3 Datum tables Bit 4 Pallet tables Bit 5 Text files The datum tables pallet tables and text fi
272. NG memory SO S3 are valid here Refer also to operand explanation 3 14 4 Overwriting of a STRING OVWR Abbreviation for PLC Editor OVWR_ OVERWRITE Execution time us lt 80 Number of bytes STRING memory 10 Immediate STRING STRING from error message or dialogue files Operands S lt arg gt Operation With the OVWR command a STRING from the STRING Accumulator is stored in a STRING memory This command functions in a similar manner to the command with the difference that the character STRING End is not transferred alongside By this means the beginning of a STRING which is already in the STRING memory can be overwritten The selection of the memory into which the STRING should be copied proceeds using the Argument lt arg gt after the operand designation Whereby only the Arguments 0 3 which address a STRING memory SO S3 are valid here Refer also to operand explanation 7 116 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei Example of STRING execution A STRING from the STRING memory SO is to be added to an Immediate STRING This STRING must overwrite the contents STRING memory S1 Initial condition Immediate STRING HYDRAULICS STRING memory SO OIL STRING memory S1 NO COOLANT 128 SO OI SH S1 NJOI ICJOJOILIAINI T Crit S2 S3 LAL ANA ttt tt pt tp
273. P1320 x 4 56 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 1 Sequence Automatic passing over reference marks press the external START key MP1350 x 0 Press external START key Trip dog Reference end position closed Invert traverse direction from MP1320 x Traverse direction from MP1320 x Pass over two consecutive reference marks Is the machine outside the software limit switch range Yes Machine moves to No software limit switch range y Machine stops If during automatic pass over the trip dog is not closed until it is in the Reference end position range the contouring control will ignore the signal It is therefore necessary that there be at least two reference marks in the range of the Reference end position 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4 57 2 2 1 2 Measuring systems with one reference mark Machine parameter MP1350 x 1 Reference marks Trip dog Closed Open a O Reference end position lt _ Traverse direction MP1320 x 4 58 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 i Sequence Automatic passing over reference marks press the external START key MP1350 X 1 Press the external START key Trip dog Reference end position closed Yes Machine traverse in direction from MP1320 x Machine traverses in inverted direction from MP1
274. QUENCE NUMBER OF TOOLS IN SEQUENCE POCKET NUMBER POSITION AXIS POSITION FEED RATE ABSOLUTE START LOG ONE TOOL DEF ACKNOWLEDG POSITIONING GI 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 39 2 READ MACHINE LBL RPLY JPF SUBM EM LBL PS PS CM PL PS PS CM PL EM 41 B238 K 0 11 45 B238 45 K 810 K 4 9032 D232 K 7261 K 0 9032 W230 PARAMETERS POLL ALRI td T ri e READ MP ND OF MODULE EADY RUNNING STORE ID ENTIFIE R MODULO VALUE E QUENCE L ENGTH NUMBER ET NUMBER OF 1 MODULE TOOLS WITH NUMBER OF POCKET NUMBER F TOOLS E APPROACH REFERENCE MARKS FOR PLC AXIS LBL 42 PS K 4 PLC AXIS PS D772 FEED RATE PS K 0 POSITIVE TRAVERSE DIRECTION CM 9123 STAR REF TRAVERSE L M599 LOG ONE R M544 REE RAVERSE OF PLC AXIS EM 4 40 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 2 1 9 Swivel axes This function is not available in TNC 407 Swivelling heads and or swivelling tables are used for multi faced machining on milling machines The NC programs are either generated by a CAD system or are created direct on the TNC using the Tilt working plane functi
275. R Not YL St WA A HEIDENHAIN standard cable ref 242 869 is recommended qt The TNC reacts both to hardware and software handshakes regardless of the setting in MP5020 x If no transmission stop is set in the MP5020 x the TNC stops the peripheral unit with the software handshake If transmission stop by both RTS and by DC3 is active the TNC stops transfer with the hardware handshake 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 23 L Character parity Bits 4 and 5 determine the type of parity check see paragraph 1 1 3 Checking data Stop bits Bits 6 and 7 determine the number of stop bits sent at the end of a character MP 5020 0 Operating mode EXT1 MP 5020 1 Operating mode EXT2 MP 5020 2 Operating mode EXT3 PLC Entry XXXXXXXX Bi Bi 07 or 8 data bits 0 7 data bits 1 8 data bits 1Block check character 0 any BCC 1 BCC not control character 2Transmission stop by RTS 0 not active 1 active 3Transmission stop by DC30 not active 1 active ACharacter parity 0 even odd 5Character parity 0 not desired desired 6 7 Stop bits Bit 6 Bit 7 1 1 2 stop bits Bit 0 0 2 stop bits Bit 1 0 1 stop bit Bit 0 1 1 stop bit Bit 1 1 For operating modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 MP5030 defines the transmission protocol MP5030 0 Operating mode EXT1 MP5030 1 Operating mode EXT2 MP5030 2 Operati
276. S Con 1 l 3 L K1000 1 000 l l 4 D36 10 1 0 0 l 5 15 010 6 D100 15 010 15 070 l Program stack l Line 1 The content of Doubleword D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 Open parentheses buffer the Accumulator content in the Program Stack Line 3 A constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 4 The content of the Word Accumulator is divided by the content of Doubleword D12 Line 5 Close parentheses Accumulator content is gated corresponding to the command x with the content of the Program Stack Line 6 The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Doubleword D100 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 87 2 7 88 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 8 Parentheses with comparison Commands Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the open parenthesis and the corresponding close parenthesis commands 3 8 1 EQUAL TO Abbreviation for PLC Editor EQUAL Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 8 Number of bytes 6 Operands none 3 8 2 LESS THAN lt Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt LESS THAN Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 8 Number of bytes 6 Op
277. S override The factor which is adjusted by S override is kept in Word W492 and W764 However W764 be changed by the PLC As soon as a different value is entered here it will be adopted by the NC In this way the factor can be influenced by the PLC If W764 is not changed by the PLC the normal override function remains active MP7620 bit 3 determines whether the override is effective in 1 steps or according to a non linear characteristic curve In the non linear characteristic the lower range changes in 0 01 steps and in the range over 2 5 the step is 0 75 The range of override values in W492 and W764 lies between 1 and 150 in 1 steps for the linear characteristic and between 0 and 15000 for the non linear characteristic MP3310 0 Limit with S override maximum Entry 0 to 150 MP3310 1 Limit with S override minimum Entry 0 to 150 Word Function Set Reset W492 factor spindle override NC NC NC gt PLC W764 factor spindle override NC PLC NC PLC PLC NC MP7620 Feed rate and spindle override Entry xx0x Bit 3 Override in 1 steps or non linear 0 1 steps 1 non linear 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 99 e El The following diagram explains the relationships UM A gt O 250 750 1500 1875 3000 3375 min 7 MP3510 0 MP3510 1 MP3515 1 I Il ka Dec eg Gear range 1500 rom at 6V MP3510 0 MP3210 0 Gear ran
278. SHORTEST PATH The program determines the direction in which the tool magazine must move in order to reach the search pocket number by the shortest path The path is filed in marker M3042 M3042 0 reverse M3042 1 forward Fetch search pocket from data stack to NOMREG Divide number of mag pockets by two and save to MAGREG Save absolute value from ISTREG NOMREG difference to ABSREG Magazine reverse Magazine forward M3042 1 M3042 0 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 257 e Ei 16 Commissioning and start up procedure This section describes the commissioning procedure for the controls step by step The precise descriptions of the functions may be found by referring to the appropriate sections 16 1 Code numbers for commissioning Certain operating conditions and functions for the commissioning procedure must be selected by code numbers see section Display and operation Code number Function 95 148 List of machine parameters see Machine parameters 807 667 PLC operation see PLC programming 531 210 Cancel markers M1000 to M2000 and BO to B127 75 368 Automatic offset adjustment see section Servo positioning 105 296 Compensation table see section Non linear axis error correction 688 379 Oscilloscope 16 2 Preparation of the machine The machine is prepared without a control being connected Follow the sequence below to commission the drive amplif
279. T Job 6 Call once PGM started without strobe Error status after call M3171 0 File was already selected 1 Error condition see above 4 3 Status and Coordinates 4 3 1 Read Status Information Module 9035 Status information can be read with module 9035 A number is specified that identifies the desired information The following status information is available Specified number Values read 0 Main mode Editor 0 Edit 1 Test run 1 Main mode 0 Approach reference points Machine 1 Manual mode 2 Electronic handwheel 3 Positioning with manual input 4 Program run single block 5 Program run full sequence 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 141 e Overlaid Editor mode Overlaid Machine mode Displayed screen window Selected file in edit test run 0 None main mode active 1 Mode active 2 Directory Ext screen active 3 MP Editor active 4 PLC Editor active 0 None main mode active 1 Mode active 2 Directory Ext screen active 3 Tool Editor active Bit coded Bit 0 7 Editing screen 0 1 Editing screen displayed 1 1 Window mode active 2 1 Block display program select setup window active 3 1 Position display active 4 1 PLC status window active 5 1 Status Graphics window active 6 7 spare Bit 8 4 15 Machine screen 8 1 Machine screen displayed 9 1 Mode window active 10 1 Block display program select setup win
280. TNC 407 can be traversed simultaneously simultaneous activation of all the strobe markers M2704 to M2708 I The PLC positioning can be interrupted by resetting the strobe marker M2704 to M2708 The NC resets the strobe markers M2704 to 2708 if the axes have reached the given position there is an NC STOP in the manual or handwheel mode NC STOP and internal stop in the automatic operating modes EMERGENCY STOP is output an error message is released that results in a stop Strobe markers M2704 to M2708 may only be set when no program has started or when an M S T strobe is present In Manual mode the strobe markers may only be set when no axis direction key has been pressed The Doublewords D528 to D544 have a multiple usage They have the following meaning for the PLC positioning Address Function D528 Position X axis 1 10000 mm D532 Position Y axis D536 Position Z axis D540 Position 4th axis D544 Position 5th axis Feed for PLC positioning W560 Feed X axis mm min W562 Feed Y axis W564 Feed Z axis W566 Feed 4th axis W568 Feed 5th axis Marker Function Set Reset M2704 Activate PLC positioning X axis PLC NC PLC M2705 Activate PLC positioning Y axis M2706 Activate PLC positioning Z axis M2707 Activate PLC positioning 4th axis M2708 Activate PLC positioning 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 35 o Note The positions which are given are relative to the machin
281. TOP TRACE or when the trigger event takes place During recording of the logical states the message PCTR will blink in the status window The blinking will stop when the recording is finished The cursor keys can be used to select the desired range in the TRACE buffer After operating the soft keys SELECT M I O T C the soft keys will have the following meaning TRACE LOGIC START STOP IN CODE DIAGRAM TRACE TRACE Return to Display logic Start TRACE Stop TRACE Return to main instruction list diagrams of recording recording menu display with the selected operands and operands accumulator content 1 6 3 TABLE function The table of markers inputs outputs timers and counters can be dynamically displayed on the VDU screen by using the soft key TABLE from within the Main menu The selection as well as the set and reset of the markers inputs outputs timers and counters is performed by soft keys The cursor keys or the GOTO key are used to select the positions within the table Return to the Main menu by pressing the END key 1 6 4 COMPILE function A PLC program is only transferred to the executable memory when it is compiled see PLC Main menu After pressing the soft key COMPILE a directory of the available PLC programs is displayed The program which is to be compiled must be chosen with SELECT During compilation error messages may be displayed which result from programming errors see section Program creation f
282. TS 511 touch probe with its infrared signal transmission can be continuously operated for up to 8 hours on one battery charge Technical Requirements Digitizing with TS 120 is possible with TNC 415 using software types 259 96 and 259 97 and with TNC 407 using type 243 02 see also the section Software in the chapter headed Introduction Installing the software module Digitizing with the TS 120 The ID number of the logic unit indicates whether the software module is already installed see the section EPROM Locations in the chapter headed Introduction and the section Hardware Components in the chapter Installation and Electrical Connection f the module is already installed the software number of the option will appear beneath the NC and PLC software number when the system is switched on or when the MOD key is pressed Interfaced touch probe TS 120 The machine must be optimized for Trailing error operation The digitizing sequence is optimized by the machine parameters Machine parameter MP6210 is the value for the oscillations executed by the touch probe as it scans the form It is governed by the dynamic response of the machine The dynamic response is in turn determined by the Kv factor trailing error operation The greater the Kv factor the greater the number of oscillations Machine parameter MP6210 determines the maximum probing feed rate in conjunction with the programmed probe point
283. The switch off ramp follows MP3410 0 After this the spindle is switched on again with M03 The feed override can only be effective within limits when tapping otherwise the floating tap holder may be damaged MP7110 was introduced for this limit MP3410 2 Ramp slope of the spindle for tapping Entry 0 0000 to 1 9999 V ms MP7120 0 Dwell time for change of direction of spindle rotation Entry 0 0000 to 65 535 s MP 7120 2 Spindle run on time after reaching total hole depth Entry 0 0000 to 65 535 s MP7110 0 Minimum for feed override when tapping Entry O to 150 MP7110 1 Maximum for feed override when tapping Entry 0 to 150 Marker Function Set Reset M2048 Tapping cycle called NC NC 4 114 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 e 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 115 i 4 4 2 Tapping with floating tap holder and BCD coded spindle speed output The following diagram shows the sequence of events in the cycle A F 0 lt gt Dwell time from CYCL DEF 2 3 Pe MP7120 1 MP7120 0 M04 Acknow ledgement of M code M2048 Cycle End of start cycle Since with BCD coded spindle speed output the spindle and f
284. The third handwheel can be assigned to any desired axis MP7645 2 defines whether the axis for he third handwheel is selected with the axis selector switch switch S2 see MP7645 0 or is permanently assigned in machine parameter MP7645 1 MP7645 Initializing parameters for handwheel MP7645 0 to MP7645 2 have the following meaning when an HRA 110 is connected MP7645 0 Third handwheel assigned by axis selector switch Entry 0 to 255 Entry Switch position Handwheel 3 0 1 left stop Z axis 2 Ath axis 3 Axis 5 1 1 left stop X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis 4 Ath axis 5 Axis 5 2 3 Z axis 4 4th axis 5 Axis 5 If no axis selector switch is connected see also MP7645 2 the third handwheel is assigned an axis according to the input value of MP7645 1 MP7645 1 Handwheel 3 assigned by machine parameter Entry 0 to 255 1 X axis 2 Y axis 4 Z axis 8 4th axis 16 Axis 5 MP7645 2 Handwheel 3 assigned by axis selector switch or MP7645 1 Entry 0 to 255 0 Assigned by axis selector switch according to MP7645 0 1 Assigned by MP7645 1 The axis selector switch only transmits data to PLC inputs 1168 to 1175 The axis selector switch can therefore be used for other functions MP7645 3 to MP7645 7 are not assigned 4 202 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 01 98 L 10 5 1 Assignment of switch positions to the PLC inputs The tables below give the assignment of the switch positions of S1 and S2 to PLC inputs 1160
285. Word Accumulator are compared with the contents of the addressed operand If the Word Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the Word Accumulator is greater than the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 The comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand i e B 8 bit W 16 bit and D K 32 bit Example A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8 The result is then assigned to Marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 Doubleword D8 15 000 The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K16000 16 000 Bit 31 Se ee 7 0 1 lt 8 re oo 2 M500 5 Line 1 The constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared Accumulator lt Operand As this condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 Line 3 The contents of the Logic Accumulator The result of the comparison are assigned to Marker M500 7 76 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 5 5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor gt GREATER EQUAL Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 1 0 to 1 2 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W
286. X gt DECIMAL The contents of the Operands and the Accumulators can be displayed either in decimal or HEX code The soft key can be used to toggle the display START STOP DISPLAY The dynamic display of the Operands and the Accumulators can be frozen with STOP DISPLAY On operating START DISPLAY they will again be continuously updated Further soft key functions are described in the next section 1 6 2 Logic diagram The logical states of up to 16 Operands M I O T C can be shown graphically and simultaneously on the VDU screen 1 024 PLC runs can be recorded The selection is made by soft key SELECT M I O T C which makes it possible to create a table with the required Operands The individual positions in the table are determined by dialogue Wrong entries can be erased with the DEL key For each Operand a trigger condition can be entered 512 states are recorded before and 512 after a trigger event The following trigger conditions are possible 1 gt Record when Operand is logical 1 Triggering on positive edge 0 gt Record when Operand is logical 0 Triggering on negative edge If no trigger condition is wanted then confirm with NO ENT If no trigger condition is entered for any of the Operands then the Operand states will be continuously recorded and the last 1024 remain in memory 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 7 11 2 A recording commences with START TRACE and is ended either with S
287. XX XX XX X 000000000001100111 000000000001100111 Line 2 The Accumulator Contents are assigned to Byte 8 Operand Contents 10 I3 7 0 The Commands LW and LD are processed in the same way except that 16 or 32 operands are used accordingly 7 42 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f 3 1 7 ASSIGN Abbreviation for the PLC Editor ASSIGN Logic Byte Word Execution time ys 0 2 to 0 5 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 4 4 Logic execution with the ASSIGN command Operands M O T C Operation Double 0 2 to 0 5 4 Constant ASSIGN in conjunction with the Logic Operands M O T C copies the contents of the Logic Accumulator to the addressed operand The command is only used at the end of a logic chain in order that a gating result is available The command may be used several times in Succession see example Example Input 14 and Input I5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Outputs O2 and O5 Initial state Input 4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Output O5 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Bit 31 Operand Contents we X X X X X XIXLX X X X X X X le el el I oe xxxxxxlijlxxxxxxx o 2 A I5 a XXXXXX 3 02 n xxxxxxlolxxxxxxx 4 05 m xxxxx Oe OE ee xX X X X X X X x EI Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND Line
288. able as an analogue DC voltage of 0 to 10 V on connector X8 of the logic unit In addition gear change signals can be assigned to any PLC outputs by the PLC program For S analogue the value 991 must be entered in the machine parameter MP3020 If the control is operating with S analogue marker M2042 is set The programmed spindle speed is stored in D356 in 1 1 000 rpm The nominal spindle speed is stored in Word W320 in rpm The actual spindle speed is stored in Word W322 in rpm Marker Function Set Reset M2042 Analogue output of the spindle speed NC NC D356 Programmed spindle speed NC NC W320 Nominal spindle speed NC NC W322 Actual spindle speed NC NC 4 1 1 Direction of spindle rotation The polarity of the S analogue voltage is defined by machine parameter MP3130 The count direction of the measuring system signals for the spindle is defined in MP3140 The direction of spindle rotation can be reversed by setting marker M2489 i e polarity is inverted This can become necessary for example when shifting spindle transmission between horizontal and vertical The S analogue voltage appears at the output as soon as the marker M2485 for M03 or M2486 for M04 is set At the same time the miscellaneous function is displayed in the status window of the control see section Display and operation Marker M2487 turns off the analogue voltage and displays M05 If more than one of the markers M2485 to M2487 is set at the same time this will
289. ace RS 232 C V 24 inhibited 2 interface RS 422 V 11 inhibited If neither of the two interfaces is inhibited the following settings can be selected with the appropriate data format and the data transmission protocol In addition to the three freely configurable operating modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 for PLC only see Section 5 Data transfer by PLC there are three fixed modes ME FE1 FE2 The FE1 and FE2 modes have to be set if the HEIDENHAIN floppy disk unit or an external computer using the TNC EXE transmission software is connected In both these modes the transmission protocol with Block Check Character is rigidly defined for the difference between FE1 and FE2 operation see Section 4 Data transfer with block Check Character BCC The ME operating mode matches the HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape unit and must be selected if this is to be connected In this mode the standard transmission protocol is set However there is one important difference The character lt EOT gt is never sent because this character cannot be processed by the magnetic tape unit 2 5 2 Freely configurable interfaces The three operating modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 PLC are freely configurable via the machine parameters The data format and the type of handshake are set in the MP 5020 Data bits Bit O can be set to determine whether transmission is to be with 7 or 8 data bits Transmission with 7 bits is normally used but 8 bits are needed especially f
290. after the linear encoder for the position controller is activated with MP1951 The position controller is matched to the machine coordinate system with the following machine parameters MP1040 Polarity of nominal speed value in positive direction of traverse If the counting direction of the axis is correct but motion is wrong then MP210 counting direction must be modified Start axes with direction keys for a short period and correct the input values for polarity or counting direction if necessary Optimizing Kv factors for the position controller With digital drive control the limits and or ideal values are more dependent on the drives and the machine s mechanical systems than with previous control systems In terms of the control principle it is possible to work with high Kv factors and very small trailing errors It is important to remember that the mechanical load on the machine will be greater Additional selectable Kv factors have been introduced for this reason and they are stored in machine parameters MP1515 x and MP1815 x Reduced Kv factors can be used for general milling work without great demands on accuracy at higher feed rates Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP Because the speed controller is integrated in the control system the controlled axis runs down when the torque signal is turned off For this reason the control system continues to be active for a certain time MP1980 in an EMERGENCY STOP co
291. age for the spindle can only be output when MP3010 lt 3 and MP3011 2 The voltage must be transferred in 1mV format Voltages are limited to a value between 10 V and 10 V Possible errors The indicated analogue output does not exist The indicated analogue output is not available for the PLC Call PS B W D K Number of the analogue output gt 0 Analogue output for spindle PS B AW D K lt Analogue voltage in millivolts gt CM 9130 Error condition after call M3171 0 Analogue voltage is output 1 See above error conditions 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 175 e 4 11 Inserting an NC block Module 9150 With Module 9150 is it possible to define an NC block during an active M S T G O output from the NC to the PLC or also when no program has been started The defined NC block is executed after the acknowledgement of the M S T G O strobe immediately if no PGM is started before the control continues with the execution the NC program Constraints If there are several commands during a strobe output only the last one is executed If there are several commands when the spindle is stationary it is not defined which command is recognized Erroneous parameters e g incorrect tool number non existent file result in a abortion of the NC program with the corresponding error message If the error occurs while the spindle is stationary there is no error message Possible errors The c
292. al Nominal operating current per output 3 V under supply voltage Permitted load resistive load inductive load only with quenching diode parallel to inductance Not more than one output may be shorted on the logic unit at any one time One shorted output causes no overload No more than half of the PLC outputs may be driven at once usage factor 0 5 3 52 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 01 98 L Ei 11 1 3 Analogue inputs The PA 110 the PL 410 and the PL 410 B Id Nr 263 371 02 have 4 analogue inputs 10 V and 4 inputs for Pt 100 thermistors These inputs must be activated by a DIL switch on the PL 410 PL 410B and a machine parameter in the TNC When the analogue inputs are active two outputs 061 062 or 093 094 on PL 2 and eight inputs 1120 to 1127 or 1248 to 1255 on PL 2 of the PLC cannot be used See chapter Machine integration section Analogue inputs Voltage range 10 V to 10 V Input resistance gt 250kQ Resolution 100 mV Internal value range 100 to 100 11 1 4 Inputs for Pt 100 Thermistors See chapter Machine integration section Analogue inputs Constant current 5 mA Temperature range 0 C to 100 C Resolution 0 5 C Internal value range 0 to 200 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs f 3 53 2 11 2 Connector assignment Power supply see section PLC power supply 11 2 1 PLC inputs The PLC inputs 10 to 131 are on connector X42 PLC in
293. al factor 4th axis MP1080 4 Integral factor 5th axis 4 78 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 79 e 3 4 Contour behaviour 3 4 1 Radial acceleration As well as the normal acceleration MP1060 there is also a machine parameter for radial acceleration MP1070 The machine parameter limits the feed for circular movements according to the following formula v yr Im MP1070 m s v feed rate for circular movements m s r radius m cutter mid point contour It is recommended that a value should be entered which is between the half of and the same as that in MP1060 Acceleration If the programmed feed is lower than that above then the programmed feed will be used MP1070 is effective for operation with lag and with feedforward control MP1070 Radial acceleration Entry 0 001 to 5 000 m s2 3 4 2 Constant feed rate in corners Machine parameter MP7460 defines the angle which can still be traversed with constant surface speed This machine parameter is effective for corners without a radius compensation for internal corners it is also effective with a radius compensation MP7460 This machine parameter is effecti
294. al traverse 5 M2540 Complement manua M2525 Manual traverse 5 M2541 Complement manua Marker for spind Example NC start key with two contacts 128 and 129 traverse Z traverse Z traverse 4 traverse 4 traverse 5 traverse e control see section Main spindle axis direction key X with one contact 130 Error Set message 1M PLC 1N 10 1P 2M 2N LI Reset PLC 71 128 First contact NC start key 72 M2448 NC start 73 LN 1129 Second contact NC start key 74 M2464 Complement NC start 100 L 1130 Axis direction key X 101 M2456 Manual traverse X 102 LN 1130 103 M2472 Complement manual traverse X 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 4 175 e 9 Touch probe The following 3D touch probes can be connected The triggering touch probes TS 120 with cable transmission and integrated interface electronics TS 511 with infrared transmission of the switch signal and connected by a separate interface electronics unit APE TT 110 for tool calibration The TNC 415 425 also supports the TM 110 measuring touch probe The chapter Mounting and Electrical Installation contains instructions for connecting the touch probes Machine parameters MP6010 MP6200 and MP6500 determine which touch probes are connected The machine tool builder must ensure that the spindle locks as soon as the touch probe has been inserted 9 1 Standard t
295. al velocity value for the machine is varied by a machine parameter control element of the nominal velocity Together with the velocity element which is calculated from the lag servo controlled element of the nominal velocity this gives the final nominal velocity value The lag is very small with this method Operation with feedforward control has the advantage that contours can be followed very accurately at a high speed Normally work will be carried out using feedforward control MP1390 switches feedforward control on in the Positioning with manual data input Program run single block and Program run full sequence modes MP1391 has the same effect for the Manual and Handwheel modes Operation with feedforward control for the X axis can be shown in a simplified form in the following block diagram All machine parameters which influence the servo characteristic are shown here Acceleration MP1060 Transient response MP1520 sl MP1520 ky factor for feed precontrol mi MP1510 Servo VX E amplifier l l l l sx Integral factor MP1080 4 74 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 e When operating with feedforward control the set velocity value the analogue potential for the drive amplifier is formed from three components feedforward control servo lag integral component The feedforward control value which is adjusted to the dynamic characteri
296. all was made during a running NC program without active M S T G O strobe The call was made with an unknown command code Call PS B W D K lt Command code gt 0 TOOL CALL PS BAMW D K lt Address of the Parameter gt Number of the first Double of the parameter block or number of the string CM 9150 PL BAD lt Error code gt 0 NC block was inserted 1 Running NC PGM and no strobe 2 Unknown error message Parameter TOOL CALL B lt Adr gt active elements bit coded Bit 0 1 Transfer tool number otherwise modal Bit 1 1 Transfer tool axis otherwise modal Bit 2 1 Transfer spindle speed otherwise modal Bit 3 1 Transfer length oversize otherwise 0 Bit 4 1 Transfer radius oversize otherwise 0 B lt Adr 1 gt Tool axis 0 4 X V W lt Adr 2 gt Tool number D lt Adr 4 gt Spindle speed Format 0 001 1 min D lt Adr 8 gt Length oversize Format 0 0001 mm D lt Adr 12 gt Radius oversize Format 0 0001 mm Error status after call M3171 0 NC block was inserted 1 See above error conditions 7 176 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 12 Spindle orientation Module 9171 Module 9171 makes it possible to define the velocity angle and the direction of rotation for spindle orientation Marker M2712 is set as long as the spindle is being oriented Constraints If Marker M2712 and Module 9171 are set in the same scan the tool is oriented with the parameters from the module call If the module is called s
297. ameter the movement monitoring becomes inactive It is not possible to operate the machine safely without movement monitoring MP1140 Movement monitoring Entry 0 030 to 10 000 V MP1140 0 Axis X MP1140 1 Axis Y MP1140 2 Axis Z MP1140 3 Ath axis MP1140 4 5th axis Ei 4 86 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o 3 5 5 Standstill monitoring The Standstill monitoring operates with feedforward control and with lag The monitoring begins when the axes have reached the positioning window The range in which the axes may move is defined in MP1110 As soon as position deviation is greater than the value which is stored in MP1110 the flashing error message GROSS POSITIONING ERROR D is displayed The message also appears if on running in to a position an overshoot occurs which is larger than the value in MP1110 or if the axis moves in the opposite direction on beginning a positioning movement MP1110 Standstill monitoring Entry 0 0010 to 30 0000 mm MP1110 0 X axis MP1110 1 Y axis MP1110 2 Z axis MP1110 3 Ath axis MP1110 4 5th axis 3 5 6 Positioning window The positioning window defines the limits within which the control considers that a position has been reached After reaching the position the control starts the execution of the next block The size of the positioning window is defined in machine parameter MP1030 During feedforward control the positioning window is not eva
298. aphics Board X41 PLC outputs X42 PLC inputs X43 Visual display unit BC 110 X44 24 V supply for PLC X45 TNC keyboard TE X46 Machine control panel X47 PLC HO unit PL Processor Board X21 RS 232 C V 24 data interface X22 RS 422 V 11 data interface X23 Handwheel X31 24 V DC supply for NC 11 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 01 98 L Ei 2 2 1 Pin assignment Logic unit LE 425 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Encoder 1 2 3 4 5 sine wave signal input Sub D connector X6 measuring system S square wave signal input Sub D connector 15 pin female insert 1 2 3 A 5 9 pin female insert 6 7 8 9 C hassis 14 5 6 7 8 15 Chassis X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 1 Measuring system Speed 2 sinus signal input 1 Vop 3 4 7 Sub D connector 15 pin female insert 9 14 5 6 8 13 15 Chassis ie screen Assignment Colour Brown White Green Gray Brown Green Black Green White Pink Blue Violet Red Outer screen device chassis Assignment Colour Brown White Green Gray Brown Green IP Black a Green White EE Blue Violet Red Outer screen device chassis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 11 5 i 2 3 1 Connection of linear encoders The LE 425 can process up to five encoders with sinusoidal output signals 7 to 16 pA Max input frequency 50 kHz pp Cable ad
299. apter complete Max 60 m Coupling female 9 pin D sub connector male 9 pin Id Nr 267 269 or Connecting cable with one connector Max 60 m D sub connector male 9 pin Id Nr 268 371 2 3 2 Connection of rotary encoders for speed control To measure ballscrew speed the TNC requires HEIDENHAIN rotary encoders with 1 Vpp output signals and a 5 V power supply The signal is interpolated by a factor of 256 in the control When selecting the line count remember that the input frequency must no exceed the limit of 200 kHz at the LE The line count should be selected so that the number of grating periods for speed control is at least 5 times that for position control Talk with your drive supplier and HEIDENHAIN about possible mounting configurations For various types of motors HEIDENHAIN offers the ERN 281 modular rotary encoder with a special assembly kit that enables the machine tool builder to install the rotary encoder on the motor The mounting procedure is quite simple the motor housing is extended by the length of the spacer in the assembly kit and the lid is then re fitted A straightforward solution with a standard encoder from the ROD series can be applied to modify the first machine when using a drive type for which no assembly kit is yet available Max input frequency 200 kHz Cable adapter complete Max 60 m Connector female 12 pin D sub connector pin 15 pin Id Nr 267 268 or Cable adapter comple
300. argument for the coordinate type is outside the permitted range The specified target address is not a doubleword address i e not divisible by 4 5 doublewords cannot be written at the specified target address target address too big Call PS K BMWV D lt Target address Dxxx gt PS K BMWV D lt Coordinate type gt 0 Actual value 1 Nominal value 2 Actual value in reference system 3 Trailing error 4 Distance to go 5 Deflection measuring touch probe 6 Actual values in the shifted datum system datum shift CM 9040 Error status after call M3171 0 Data was read 1 Faulty call data Module 9041 PLC reads axis coordinates Format 0 0001 mm Module 9041 downloads axis coordinates for all NC axes from the control loop The values are filed in 5 doublewords in the format 1 10000 mm starting with the specified target address Constraints The values for all axes are always downloaded irrespective of whether individual axes are disabled by machine parameter MP10 The values for disabled axes are undefined Before the reference point is traversed on an axis the coordinate value of that axis is undefined 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 145 2 Possible errors The argument for the coordinate type is outside the permitted range The specified target address is not a doubleword address i e not divisible by 4 5 doublewords cannot be written at the specified target addre
301. arker M2497 is set the following markers will be set if the signals change at the PLC inputs Marker for rising edges at the PLC inputs Marker PLC inputs M1500 to M1531 0 to 131 M1564 to M1626 64 to 1126 first extension board M1628 to M1652 128 to 1152 Marker for falling edges at the PLC inputs Marker PLC inputs M1700 to M1731 0 to 131 M1764 to M1826 164 to 1126 first extension board M1828 to M1852 128 to 1152 Marker Function Set Reset M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs PLC PLC Rising edge marker M1500 to M1652 Falling edge marker M1700 to M1852 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 27 o 2 6 EPROM creation Machine parameter MP4010 selects whether the PLC program is run from the RAM area of the control or the EPROM area During the creation and test of the PLC program the control should operate from the RAM area HEIDENHAIN recommends that an EPROM is created for the PLC program before delivering the machine to the customer see also chapter Introduction MP4010 PLC program from RAM or from EPROM Entry 0 EPROM operation 1 RAM operation A PC and the MEGA PROMMER Software Version 2 12 or later are necessary for programming the PLC EPROMS The PLC files from the RAM area in the control can be transferred to the PC via the data interface see chapter Data interface The output is initiated from the control with the soft key BINARY OUTPUT see section PLC
302. art PLC Axis or Module 9123 Traverse reference marks can be aborted anywhere with Module 9121 Constraints The specified axis must be activated by MP10 and declared by MP60 as a PLC axis If Modules 9120 Start PLC Axis 9121 Stop PLC Axis and 9122 Traverse reference mark are called more than once for the same axis during a PLC cycle then only the last activated command is executed Possible errors Anon existent axis has been specified An axis has been specified that is not declared as a PLC axis by MP10 and MP60 The specified axis is already stationary Call PS BMW D K lt Axis gt 0 4 for X Y Z 4 5 CM 9121 PL B W D lt Error code gt 0 Position is aborted 1 Non existent axis specified 2 Axis not configured as PLC axis 3 Axis was already stationary Error status after call M3171 0 Positioning was stopped 1 Error condition see above 4 9 3 Status PLC Axis Module 9122 A bit coded status word is specified for a certain axis and provides information about the current operating mode of that axis Constraints Status changes as a result of commands sent by the PLC to the controller of the PLC axes Modules 9120 9121 9123 are not detected until the next PLC cycle After power up Bit 1 axis over ref is cancelled It is also possible to traverse the axis without first approaching the reference point Possible errors Anon existent axis has been specified 7 172 TNC 407 TNC 415 TN
303. ary block The length of the read binary block is returned as the initial variable Constraints The interface must be assigned to the PLC and initialized by Module 9100 before Module 9106 is called Module 9106 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 167 2 Ei Possible errors The call parameters are outside the permitted range 0 1 for the interface 0 1023 for the start of the binary block The interface is not assigned to the PLC The module was not called from a Submit Job The receive buffer contains no data The string in the receive buffer is longer than 128 characters The string in the receive buffer contains an uneven number of characters Because of its length the binary block cannot be written to the specified address start length gt 1024 The string in the receive buffer contains characters that cannot be interpreted as ASCII coded hexadecimal values 0 9 A F Call PS BAW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt PS K BMWV D Number of 1st byte in binary block 0 1023 gt CM 9106 PL B W D lt Length of binary block in bytes gt Error status after call M3171 0 Binary block was read 1 Error condition see above 4 8 8 Read from Receive Buffer Module 9107 Module 9107 reads 2 ASCII characters from the receive buffer to one of the two serial interfaces and encodes them to a binary value It is possible to specify
304. asons It can only be deactivated by entering 0 while approach behaviour is being trimmed if the Gross positioning error C message appears despite the maximum value of 1 mm being entered MP1980 Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP Entry 0 to 1 9999 seconds In the event of a fault braking resistors in the servo amplifier are required to stop the axes as quickly as possible to prevent danger from axes running down uncontrolled This braking time can be reduced by delaying the shutdown of the TNC speed controller in MP1980 At the same time the controller outputs a braking torque which immediately brings the machine to a stop 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11 11 e 3 2 Optimizing the speed controller The rotary and position encoders are trimmed in sequence The new integrated oscilloscope makes it possible to program a step function as the output signal The speed controller can be trimmed with this function and with the oscilloscope without the need for any additional equipment The position controller is automatically inactive when starting with the step function The axes can only be traversed manually The controller can be trimmed in the sequence described Provisional input values and input values for monitoring are empirical values that can vary depending on the type and size of the machine as well as on the drives and it is therefore difficult to recommend suitable values The
305. assing over the reference marks 2 1 1 Measuring systems with distance coded reference marks 2 1 2 Measuring systems with one reference mark 2 1 3 Linear measurement via rotary encoder 2 2 Machine datum 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 3 1 The position control loop of an NC machine 3 2 Servo positioning in TNC controls 3 2 1 Control with servo lag 3 2 2 Control with feed precontrol 3 3 Offset adjustment 3 3 1 Offset adjustment by code number 3 3 2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment 4 6 4 6 4 8 4 9 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 14 4 16 4 19 4 23 4 23 4 24 4 26 4 27 4 32 4 33 4 35 4 38 4 41 4 41 4 48 4 49 4 50 4 51 4 52 4 53 4 54 4 58 4 60 4 63 4 65 4 65 4 66 4 66 4 74 4 77 4 77 4 77 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 3 3 3 Offset adjustment with integral factor 4 78 3 4 Contour behaviour 4 80 3 4 1 Radial acceleration 4 80 3 4 2 Constant feed rate in corners 4 80 3 4 3 Constant feed rate in corners with M90 4 81 3 4 4 Contour speed related to tool cutting edge 4 81 3 4 5 Preset tolerance at corners 4 82 3 5 Monitoring functions 4 83 3 5 1 Position monitoring for operation with lag 4 84 3 5 2 Position monitoring for operation with feed precontrol 4 85 3 5 3 Monitoring the analogue voltage 4 86 3 5 4 Movement monitoring 4 86 3 5 5 Standstill monitoring 4 87 3 5 6 Positioning window 4 87 3 6 Controlled axes 4 89 3 6 1 Axis enable feed rate enable 4 89 3 6 2 Axes in position 4 90 3 6 3 Axes in
306. ate STRING SPINDLE 1 ee s EEE ee ee ee Line Instruction STRING Accumulator 1 128 1 L S SPINDLE 1 se ti Ille 1 ss 2 lt gt S0 slelilvelclel 2 at 3 CMT 50 bit 31 7 0 XXXKXX 1 XXXXXX Line 1 Load the Immediate STRING into the STRING Accumulator Line 2 The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the content of the STRING memory S0 according to the command Line 3 Since the result of the comparison is true the Logic Accumulator is set and the Call Module is processed 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 121 L El 7 122 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 16 Submit Programs Submit programs are subprograms which the PLC submits to the NC for processing This allows tasks to be performed which are very processor intensive require program loops or must wait for external results It is assumed however that these programs are not bound by a particular time frame Depending on processor loading each Submit program is allocated a certain computing power but always at least 5 of the total power Submit programs are started from the PLC program and can access all the same data memories M B W D as can the main program This can lead to problems in ce
307. ation Deviation of the reference mark from the desired position spindle preset Entry 0 to 360 degrees k Factor for spindle orientation Entry 0 1 aoe k Factor 1st gear range k Factor 2nd gear range k Factor 3rd gear range k Factor 4th gear range k Factor 5th gear range k Factor 6th gear range k Factor 7th gear range k Factor 8th gear range Spindle speed activated by Marker M2501 Entry 0 000 to 99 999 999 rpm Spindle speed for spindle orientation Entry 0 to 99 999 999 rpm 4 108 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle f 01 98 2 Marker M2007 M2127 M2408 M2499 M2501 M2615 M2656 M2712 D592 Example of a PLC program for spindle orientation with M19 M20 Function Spindle in Positi on Spindle in motion controlled spindle Cycle 13 is bein Open the spind Activates spindl and direction of Re evaluation o g executed e control loop e speed MP3520 0 rotation from Marker M2656 the reference marks for spindle orientation Spindle orientat 0 Orientation 1 Orientation ion from stop with M03 with M04 Activate PLC positioning for spindle orientation Nominal position for spindle orientation Strobe M2712 Program description Using the M Function M19 to activate a spindle orientation to the value which is determined by the spindle orientation cycle Set Reset NC NC NC NC NC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC NC PLC PLC NC PLC NC Using t
308. ation 4 157 i 7 M functions Up to 100 miscellaneous functions controls The code for these M functi functions can be programmed in HEIDENHAIN contouring ons is transferred to the PLC either before or after execution of the NC block A number of these M functions have a fixed meaning for the NC These M functions are marked with in the fol Effective at Beginn End of ing of block Effective at Beginn End of ing of block block owing table The other M functions are freely available Effective at Beginn End of ing of block block 89 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 00 CO 0 N Kal Oli E oO 99 Mm Mm Mm Mos Mu Mos Mm MI Mm Mm Mio Mii M2 Miz Mmi Mis Mis Mi7_ Mis Mig M20 M23 M22 o M23 e M24 M25 M26 M27 MS M29 e M33 Ce M3 M32 e Mss 1 Function is dependent on machine parameter M7440 4 158 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 M functions 01 98 2 f The evaluation of the M function must be programmed in the PLC When transferring an M Function to the PLC the code for the M function is stored in Word W260 and the strobe marker M2045 is set The execution of the M function must be signalled to the NC
309. atum correction spindle orientation or change of limit switch range may be performed during the S code output MP3030 Axis halt on TOOL CALL with only a spindle speed output 1 No axis halt on TOOL CALL O Axis halt on TOOL CALL If anon permissible spindle speed is programmed the marker M2092 will be set by the NC and simultaneously the error message Wrong spindle speed is displayed Marker Function Set Reset M2092 Prohibited spindle speed NC NC 4 102 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 2 f PLC example for gear change and jog voltage output M2043 Gear code change signal for S analogue CMT 50 Module call output gear code L M2043 Gear code change signal for S analogue AN M968 Buffer marker for T13 AN T13 AN T14 AN T61 Timer 13 for spindle left running AN T62 Timer 14 for spindle right running T13 Set timer 13 value from MP4110 13 S M968 Set buffer marker for T13 L M2043 AN M969 Buffer marker for T14 AN T13 AN T14 AN T61 AN T62 T14 Set timer 14 value from MP4110 14 S M969 Set buffer marker for T14 L T61 Timer 13 running M2490 Spindle left for gear change L T62 Timer 14 running M2491 Spindle right for gear change LN T13 AN T61 R M968 Reset buffer marker LN T14 AN T61 R M968 Reset buffer marker L M2043 A I5 Input for acknowledgement signal S M2480 Acknowledgement gear changed EM End main program LBL50 Module start L M2043
310. axis is assigned a correction table COM in the CMA file A number of lines with different assignments can be entered in this file Only one line can be active at any one time The active line is selected by soft key or with PLC module 9095 Non linear axis error compensation is not active until the function is activated by MP730 and there is a valid file of the CMA type Example Machine with leadscrew pitch error in Z Z F Z and Y Y F Y Also sag as a function of Y Z F Y There is no compensation on the X axis Traverse range Z 800 mm Traverse range Y 500 mm required distance of compensation points 7 mm possible power of two 216 6 5536 mm o 500 mm Number of compensation points in Y 6 5536 mm Gi EE 800 mm Number of compensation points in Z 6 5536 mm 123 Datum in Y 90 Datum in Z 200 A Error in Z oa Mm 0 04 0 03 0 02 Datum 0 01 Machine datum 0 90 76 8928 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 63 7856 50 6784 37 5712 Y mm i p 24 464 11 3568 1 7504 4 28 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 2 The sag error Z F Y and the leadscrew pitch error Y F Y are both entered in file AXIS Y COM Sierck COMPENSATION VALUE TABLE COMPENSATION VALUE FILE ACHSE MM DATUM 90 DIST3iG X 2U BE 0 02 0 025 0 025 0 02 0 02 0 025 0 035 17 12 gt 11 BEGIN END PAGE
311. be changed if no program is being executed on the machine PLC RUN means that the machine parameter can be changed even while a program is being executed 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Input output of machine parameters 5 5 i 3 List of machine parameters 3 1 Measuring systems and machines Machine Function and input Change Reaction parameter via i i i MP10 Active axes Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis MP30 Checking the absolute position of the distance coded reference marks Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis MP31 Checking the amplitude of the measuring system signals Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Bit 5 S axis MP32 Checking the edge separation of the measuring system signals Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Bit 5 S axis i 7 Page 46 48 4 10 4 10 5 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 f Machine i Function and input as Reaction Page parameter MP40 VDU display Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 ntry XXXXX X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis MP50 Controlled axes Entry XXXXX Bit 0 Bit 1 Bi
312. be reset and the contents of the O parameters erased All the programmed values in the status display e g tool number tool length tool radius scaling factor datum shift feed rate etc will then be reset The O parameters will all be set to 0 MP7300 Cancel Status display and O Parameters Entry 0 to 7 O Cancel status display and Q parameters and tool data when program is selected 1 Cancel status display Q parameters and tool data with M02 M30 END PGM and when program is selected 2 Cancel status display and tool data when program is selected 3 Cancel status display and tool data when program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 4 Cancel status display and Q parameters when program is selected 5 Cancel status display and Q parameters when program is selected and with M02 MO END PGM 6 Cancel status display when program is selected 7 Cancel status display when program is selected and with M02 M30 END PGM 4 140 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 6 5 PLC Window The displays in the PLC Window are formatted by the PLC Any ASCll text can be displayed in two lines of 38 characters In the left half of the line a bar chart can also be displayed Text and bar chart can be mixed The display in the PLC Window is activated by PLC modules These modules are explained under PLC description PLC module 9070 String address PLC module 9071 String length PLC module 9080 Cance
313. ble size 6 9 4 Datum point for values in datum table 6 10 User parameters 6 11 Code numbers 6 12 Programming station 6 13 Dialogue language 6 13 1 Decimal sign 6 14 Memory test 6 15 End of program 6 16 Overwrite O parameters 6 17 Arc end point tolerance 6 18 Radius compensation R R 6 19 POWER INTERRUPTED Message 6 20 Help files 4 132 4 132 4 132 4 132 4 134 4 134 4 135 4 138 4 139 4 140 4 140 4 141 4 142 4 144 4 144 4 145 4 146 4 147 4 147 4 148 4 150 4 150 4 151 4 151 4 151 4 152 4 152 4 153 4 153 4 154 4 154 4 154 4 154 4 155 4 155 4 155 4 156 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 7 M functions 4 158 7 1 Program halt on M functions 4 161 7 2 Program halt on MOG 4 161 7 3 Modal cycle call M89 4 161 7 4 Reduced feed rate of tool axis with M103 4 161 7 5 Selecting Kv factors with M105 M106 4 162 8 Key simulation 4 164 8 1 TNC keyboard TE 400 4 164 8 2 Machine control panel 4 174 9 Touch probe 4 176 9 1 Standard touch probe cycles 4 176 9 2 Digitizing with TS 120 4 180 9 2 1 Scanning cycles 4 182 9 2 2 Response of the digitizing sequence at corners 4 183 9 2 3 Optimizing the digitizing sequence 4 185 9 3 Digitising with the TM 110 4 189 9 3 1 Interfacing the TM 110 4 189 9 4 Tool calibration with the TT 110 4 192 9 4 1 Interfacing the TT 110 4 192 10 Electronic handwheel 4 196 10 1 Integral handwheel HR 130 4 198 10 2 Portable handwheel HR 330 4 198 10 3 Portable handwheel
314. by setting the markers M2482 The next NC block is only processed when the signal is acknowledged and the marker M2045 strobe signal for M function is reset by the NC The M functions MOO to M99 can also be decoded and transferred to the markers M1900 to M1999 This function is activated by the marker M2496 The decoded output is retained for reasons of compatibility However HEIDENHAIN recommends M code evaluation using Word W260 Address W260 Marker M2045 M2482 M2496 M1900 M1901 M1902 M1999 Function Code for M function Function Strobe signal for M function Acknowledgement of M function Enable marker for the decoded M code transfer to markers M1900 to M1999 Miscellaneous function MOO Miscellaneous function M01 Miscellaneous function M02 Miscellaneous function M99 Set NC Set NC PLC PLC NC NC NC NC Reset Reset NC PLC PLC NC NC NC NC All M functions over 99 are not transferred to the PLC but have a specific significance for the NC to activate functions see User s Manual 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 M functions f 4 159 e Example Evaluation of the miscellaneous function MO3 in the PLC PLC output 010 Spindle ON OFF PLC input 110 Acknowledgement of M function 199 L M2045 Change signal for M function 200 RN M2482 Reset acknowledgement of M function 201 CMT 77 Evaluation of M function 901 EM 902 LBL 77 903 CASE W2
315. c Accumulator is set or reset depending on the result of the comparison Line 6 The result of the complete logical process is assigned to output 015 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 91 o 7 92 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 9 Shift Commands 3 9 1 SHIFT LEFT lt lt Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt lt SHIFT LEFT Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 7 to 1 0 0 5 to 0 6 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation Since the sign bit MSB is included with this command it is grouped in with arithmetic commands For this reason and out of time considerations this command should not be used for the isolation of bits A SHIFT LEFT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be multiplied by two For this purpose the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the left The result must lie in the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 otherwise the Accumulator contains an undefined value The number of shift events is defined by the operand The Accumulator is filled on the right side with nulls Initial state DoublewordD8 3E80 hex Doubleword D12 The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation and the operand content in hexa
316. c functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator 32 bits Then the contents of the Word Accumulator are divided by the contents of the operand The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further If the division is not correctly executed the Marker M3169 is set otherwise it is reset Example A Constant is to be divided by the value stored in Word W6 The result is then assigned to Doubleword D8 Initial state Constant 100 dec Word W6 20 dec Doubleword D8 In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K100 100 2 W 3 D I Line 1 The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the contents of Word W6 Line 3 The result is assigned to Doubleword D8 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 69 L Ei 3 4 5 REMAINDER MOD Abbreviation for the PLC Editor MOD MODULO Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 6 6 to 8 0 6 6 to 7 3 6 3 to 7 8 Number of bytes 18 16 12 An error condition Divisor 0 results in an execution time of 1 0 to 1 8 us Operands B W D K Operation With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the s
317. cable Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables 11 5 1 Connection of PLC inputs outputs on the LE HEIDENHAIN recommends the installation of a transfer unit with a terminal strip in the switch cabinet max 40 m ee Id Nr 263 954 If a transfer unit is not required use HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id Nr 244 005 Assignment 1 green red 14 green blue 27 yellow black 2 brown black 15 yellow 28 white yellow 3 white black 16 red 29 grey blue 4 green black 17 grey 30 pink blue 5 brown red 18 blue 31 pink red 6 white red 19 pink 32 brown blue max 25m 7 white green 20 white grey 33 pink green 8 red blue 21 yellow grey 34 brown Le 9 yellow red 22 green red 35 yellow pink 10 grey pink 23 white pink 36 violet Id Nr 244 005 11 black 24 grey green 37 white 12 pink brown 25 yellow brown 13 yellow blue 26 grey brown If the connector is to be mounted at the customer s facility HEIDENHAIN can provide a 37 pin solderable connector d Nr 243 937 ZY 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs f 3 61 2 11 5 2 PL 400 connection max 3 m max 20 m X10 X11 X10 PL400h C gt j qPL400h CN Tid X47 Id Nr 222 661 Id Nr 250 481 lt 4 max 20 m 11 5 3 PL 410 PL 410B connection max 20 m ef PL 410 PL 410 LE is f Id Nr 289 111 Id Nr 289 111 max 20 m 11 5 4 PA 110
318. can be used again locally in file B In all 1000 jump labels can be defined globally by all modules 7 132 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei 3 19 3 EXTERN Instruction For a jump label to be able to access in one file modules which other files have declared as GLOBAL it must be declared as EXTERN The EXTERN instruction must be written at the beginning of the file The commands CM CMT and CMF can then jump to this label in the program code The instructions JP JPT JPF access to a Constants Field and linking with CM to a CASE Branch are not possible with external jump labels The name of the jump label cannot be assigned again in this file for a local jump label Every external jump label reduces the number of available local jump labels Syntax EXTERN Jump label the Jump Label Module can now be called from another file with the CM instruction 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 133 e 7 134 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 73 Commands 7 135 i
319. ces is an asymmetrical line i e the common ground connection between transmitter and receiver is used as a return wire 8 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o Physical connections Sender Empfanger Transmitter Receiver Ubertragungsstrecke Transmission path 2 2 2 Signal levels The RS 232 C V 24 interface must differentiate between two different signal lines and their levels Data lines The data signals are defined as being logic 1 MARK over the range 3V to 15V and as logic 0 SPACE over the range 3V to 15V Control and signal lines These signals are defined as being ON High over the range 3V to 15V and as OFF Low over the range from 3V to 15V For all of the signals the voltage range from 3V to 3V is not defined as a logic level and can therefore not be evaluated UM Datensignale Steuer und Meldesignal Data signals Control and message signal 15 Toy HIGH SPACE ON 3 0 3 mq LOW MARK OFF 15 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 11 e 2 2 3 Signal designations The RS 232 C V 24 interface distinguishes between data lines control signal lines and the earth conductor Data lines TxD Transmitted data RxD Received data Control signal lines DCD Data Carrier Detect Received signal level The DCD signal indicates to the transmitter that the information received at the receiver lies wi
320. character L An incorrect error number was received after the lt ESC gt lt 1 gt error sequence error numbers 0 to 7 are permitted N An expected lt ACK gt or lt NAK gt acknowledgement was not transmitted within a certain time M For data transmission with BCC lt NAK gt was transmitted three times in sequence Error codes K and L are displayed only for transfer with standard data transmission protocol Error messages occurring only in ME mode WRONG OPERATING MODE TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT WRONG PROGRAM DATA ME TAPE END DATA MEDIUM MISSING DATA MEDIUM EMPTY DATA MEDIUM WRITE PROTECTED 8 48 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Error messages 01 98 2 El 5 2 HEIDENHAIN peripherals error codes These error messages refer to the FE401 floppy disk unit and to magnetic tape unit ME 101 ME 102 With the floppy disk unit FE 401 connected one of the following error codes could be outputted by the TNC Error code ERR 001 ERR 002 ERR 003 ERR 004 ERR 010 ERR 011 ERR 012 ERR 013 ERR 014 ERR 100 ERR 101 ERR 102 ERR 103 ERR 104 ERR 105 ERR 106 ERR 107 ERR 108 Meaning Wrong instruction code Illegal program name Def ective data transmission Program incomplete Program not on floppy disk Program protected against erasure Program storage in progress Program directory full Floppy disk full Floppy disk not formatted Sector number too large Drive not ready Floppy
321. characteristic curves will also vary from one type of machine to another Basic trimming procedure e Assign the smallest possible value to the integral component of the speed controller MP1920 x 0 Increase monitoring of the speed controller MP1910 x Trim the proportional component of the speed controller MP1940 x as described below Trim the integral component of the speed controller The speed can be trimmed with or without first evaluating the reference marks For traversing reference marks the highest possible values must be entered in machine parameters MP1920 x MP1940 x and MP1910 x to prevent the speed controller monitor responding MP1920 x 200 MP1940 x 200 MP1910 x 300 000 Pre setting machine parameters for the digitally controlled axes Before trimming commences provisional values must be entered for the corresponding machine parameters of the speed controller The integral component MP1920 x should be as low as possible so the P component can be trimmed without being unduly affected by the component Since the input value for monitoring the speed controller is calculated as follows error message Gross positioning error 3F Vlimit MP1910 x vuan 9 7 pV a greater value for the monitor must be set when entering a low integral component MP1920 x Given an ideal setting of 5 for the component MP1920 x and a limit voltage of 15 V the input value for MP1920 x is approximately 3
322. cope function 2 18 O tp t resen aa dess ai iu 7 18 OUTPUT BINARY CODE 0001 7 10 Output format digitized data 4 181 Eierlech eneee E E EARE A Aa 7 123 erla iin ne aa a A 4 145 ENEE en aar Anarai 2 15 2 16 4 138 Overwriting of a STRING OVWR 7 116 OVWR OVERWRITEI 7 116 13 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 01 98 P E ee eebe E ateacevas 8 18 PAST Ose racer ities ate teas 3 5 3 18 3 80 4 32 PAST TS eA tel Ae dad tht cae on Meade 7 157 Pallet tablets Pentel Aber 8 18 Pallet table suran anna aa 4 150 EU EE T EEG 8 4 Parallel Operation cceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 Parentheses with arithmetic commands 7 85 Parentheses with comparison commands 7 89 Parentheses with logical gating 7 80 Kart tege ee EU 8 6 Panty check iara deeg eege EA 8 7 PASS OVER REFERENCE o n 4 53 Path dependent lubrication sssssessees 4 19 le Deel red 3 13 Picture deturbance eee 3 13 NETGEN 7 101 PL A RE 3 4 3 17 3 57 3 78 PLEA Od ebe erte eg cote 3 59 3 79 PL e 2 18 2 20 4 38 7 171 PLC data interface configuration 8 47 PLC dialogues noen ase een h aae 4 152 PLO ED Meee A a t 5 5 7 6 7 7 PLC error message nn ie a 4 142 PLC error messages 2 15 PEC INpUtS erena EE 3 54 PLC inputs technical data 3 52 PLC Inp ts 0Utp tS ena Een 3 51 PLG ees ee A 3 55 PLC outputs technical data 3 52 PLC oosmtonimg 2 15 4 35 4 53 PEC el
323. creen window 03F3F3F MP7361 4 Cursor selected channel 03F0000 MP7362 Additional status display in graphics window MP7362 0 Background graphics window 0080400 MP7362 1 Background status display 00C0800 MP7362 2 Status symbols 038240C MP7362 3 Status values 03F2C18 MP7363 FK graphics MP7363 0 Background 0000000 MP7363 1 Resolved contour 03F3F3F MP7363 2 Subprograms and frame for zoom 0003F00 MP7363 3 Alternative solutions 0003F00 MP7363 4_ Unresolved contour 03F0000 5 40 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o 3 12 Machining and program run Machine parameter MP7410 Scaling factor cycle in two or three axes Entry 0 or 1 0 Cycle Scaling factor operates in all three principal axes 1 Cycle Scaling factor only operates in the machining plane MP7411 Tool data in touch probe block Entry 0 or 1 O With the touch probe block the current tool data are overwritten with the calibrated data of the probe system The current tool data are retained even with a touch probe block MP7420 Cycles for milling pockets with free programmed contours Entry Xxxxx BitO Slot Milling direction O _ Anti clockwise slot milling of the pocket contours clockwise for islands Clockwise slot milling of the pocket contours anti clockwise for islands Te Sequence for clearing out and slot milling 0 First slot milling then clear out pocket First clear out poc
324. crement positioning is usually combined with the axis direction keys see following PLC example The jog increment can be limited with Module 9036 Marker Function and entry Error Set Reset message M2498 Enable increment positioning PLC PLC M2512 Start increment positioning X 2A PLC PLC M2528 Complement increment positioning X M2513 Start increment positioning X 2B M2529 Complement increment positioning X M2514 Start increment positioning Y 2C M2530 Complement increment positioning Y M2515 Start increment positioning Y 2D M2531 Complement increment positioning Y M2516 Start increment positioning Z 2E M2532 Complement increment positioning Z M2517 Start increment positioning Z 2F M2533 Complement increment positioning Z M2518 Start increment positioning 4th axis 2G M2534 Complement increment positioning 4 M2519 Start increment positioning 4 2H M2535 Complement increment positioning 4 M2520 Start increment positioning 5 2 M2536 Complement increment positioning axis 5 M2521 Start increment positioning 5 2J M2537 Complement increment positioning axis 5 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 12 Increment positioning 4 209 e El PLC example Axis direction key X with one contact 1138 Axis direction key X with one contact 1133 L M2052 Interrogate mode CMT 10 Electronic handwheel EM Main program end LBL 10 Increment positioning L M2052 S M2498 Enable i
325. cycle can be called and hence activated either via CYCL CALL or M99 Example 0 BEGIN PGM 1000 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Definition of blank 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 For test program run graphics 3 TOOL DEF 1 L 0R 2 Tool definition 4 TOOL CALL 1 ZS1000 Tool call 5 LZ 2 RO FMAX M3 Approach safety clearance 6 CYCL DEF 68 0 Bolt hole circle Definition of cycle 68 Bolt hole circle 7 CYCL DEF 68 1 01 8 Q2 40 Q3 60 8 CYCL DEF 68 2 04 50 O5 2 O6 20 9 CYCL DEF 68 3 07 100 10 CYCL CALL Call cycle 11 END PGM 1000 MM 9 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 OEM cycles in NC programs 01 98 L 5 2 Calls in a DIN ISO program In a DIN ISO program OEM cycles are not defined via a G function but via key D The desired OEM cycle is entered by inputting its number e g 68 and ENT The individual parameters are input via the digital keyboard and entered with ENT The definition of the OEM cycles ends with END In the case of a DEF active OEM cycle the cycle is effective immediately after definition Once defined a CALL active OEM cycle can be called and hence activated either via G79 or M99 Example 1000 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 Definition of blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 For test program run graphics N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 Tool definition N40 T1 G17 S1000 Tool call N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 2 M3 Safety clearance N60 D68 P1 8 P2 40 P3 60 Definition of cycle 68 Bolt hole c
326. d Nr 285 289 o 2 3 Ql ols a Qe lt Q a a a 3 82 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 1 Adapter Block RS 232 C V 24 3 071 008 9 60 1 2 36 s 04 i 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 83 1 16 7 Handwheels 16 7 1 HR 130 integral handwheel G0 2 z Befestigungsgewinde M3 x 5 DIA 008 FIXING HOLE M3 x 197 36 1 5 3x do oO ECH So N E COOC CH FF See SI a a N COIN LO lz i O Adio Ss SS l e R of ise Di lt a DIA 173 19 5 1 gt e 768 04 10 ra 2041 3 84 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 o Knob small M3 3x max 10 10 MAX 394 HR DIA 394 061 DIA 2 402 Frontplatte 2 Ai FRONT PANEL 079 Knob large max 15 5 MAX 610 SW 1 5 709 709 SW 5 5 27 1 063 MT naan 48 1 89 Frontplatte 2 Kill FRONT PANEL 079 0011 DIA 3937 0005 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3 85 2 Knob ergonomic 12 472 LO LO 17
327. d 00 to 99 see S code table Maximum spindle speed 00 to 99 see S code table Spindle speed step 1to9 Example The minimum spindle speed is to be 1 rom S code 20 the maximum spindle speed is to be 1000 rpm S code 80 Only every second spindle speed should be programmable This gives an entry value of 20802 for MP3020 An entry value of 991 would mean no limit The S code is stored in the PLC in Word W258 The minimum spindle speed from MP3020 is stored in Word W1008 Marker Function Set Reset M2044 S code change signal NC NC M2481 S code acknowledgement PLC PLC W258 S code NC NC W1008 S code for minimum spindle speed NC MP3020 Definition of the spindle speed range Entry 1 to 99 999 4 104 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 2 S code table S function S function code code 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 105 1 4 3 Spindle orientation In order to use the TNC on machines with automatic tool changers an orientation of the main spindle S axis is necessary This requires a controllable spindle The orientation is carried out by a miscellaneous function M19 or another M function and must be initiated by the PLC program The spindle orientation functions asynchronously to the NC positioning movements The PLC must not acknowledge the oriented stop until M2007 is set MP3010 determines whether the control operates with or without spindle orientation see Section 4 Main spindle T
328. d digitizing electronics and the logic unit must be limited see the following diagram El 3 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 01 98 o Spindle orientation Extension cable Id Nr 262 011 1024 lines max 20 m Angle encoders X5 ROD 271 C Extension cable gt LE 407 RON 275 C Id Nr 262 011 aS 9 max 20 m or i i ROD 250 c Extension cable Extension cable x5 RON 255 Se ROD 700 C gt LE 407 RON 705 C Id Nr 262 006 Id Nr 262 004 max 30 m max 10 m or ROD 250 c Extension cable F RON 255 ROD 700 C ie Z 80 RON 705 C Id Nr 262 006 Id Nr 233 764 5 fold max 30 m max 50 m If necessary linear measuring systems can also be connected to the X5 connector on the LE 407 via interpolation and digitizing electronics 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 3 27 e 5 5 Measuring system connections Please observe the directions in the assembly instructions for the particular measuring system which is being employed Measuring system cables must be laid without any intermediate clamping Please use only the HEIDENHAIN connectors and couplings for making connections Coupling 5 Pin number Cable S I CG LN for PUR cable 7 pole SS 6mm 237 524 20 8mm 237 524 24 Oo 6mm 237 525 11 ee mm 23752421 9 pole E 6mm 237 524 03 K
329. d execution comes into question The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses The open parentheses command loads the content of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack Then the Accumulator is available for the calculation of intermediate results The close parentheses instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack with the content of the Word Accumulator The result is again loaded into the Accumulator The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses Marker M3170 is set if an error occurs Example for the commands ADD IL SUBTRACT MULTIPLY DIVIDE DIVISION REMAINDER The following example demonstrates how parentheses influence the result of the operation Initial state Constant 1000 decimal DoublewordD12 15000 decimal DoublewordD36 100 decimal DoublewordD100 The specification of Accumulator and operand contents is given in decimal notation The ten place Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of 2 147 483 647 7 86 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei Command sequence without parentheses Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content 1 L D12 15 000 15 000 2 K1000 1 6 000 2 D36 4 D100 160 100 Command sequence with parentheses Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents x xX X X xX X X xX X X 1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 15 000 2 l Ir C
330. d key operated 25 CMT 31 Yes then call key simulation 150 EM End main program 151 LBL 31 Key simulation 200 EM 201 LBL 180 Spindle orientation 259 EM Error conditions in the machine should be interrogated in the PLC program and a plain language error message should be displayed on the VDU screen See chapter Machine integration section Display and operation and chapter PLC programming section Modules 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 17 o 2 2 Address allocation 2 2 1 Operand directory Operand Abbreviation Address range Marker M Marker 0 to 3023 Input Input 10 to 131 1128 to 1152 164 to 1126 first extension board 1192 to 1254 second extension board Output O Output O0 to O30 032 to O62 first extension board 064 to O94 second extension board Counter C Counter Set counter CO to C31 Counter contents C48 to C79 Release count pulse C96 to C127 Timer T Timer Timer start TO to T47 Timer running T48 to T95 Byte B Byte 0 to 1023 8 Bit Word W Word 0 to 1022 16 Bit Doubleword D Doubleword 0 to 1020 32 Bit Constant K 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 2 2 2 Addressing the memory The memory for the Operands B 8 Bit W 16 Bit D 32 Bit is only 8 Bit wide Since the Operands can be 8 16 or 32 Bit wide an overlap of the memory areas will occur which must be taken into account in addressing the memory 8 bit gt DO WO BO 7
331. d mode Mo Create logic zero R MO LN M1 Create logic one S M1 Activate initializing after switch on Module 290 L M2180 first PLC cycle after switch on O M2185 first PLC cycle after interruption CMT 290 read MP420 3 L M301 Hirth function active A M304 Submit 1 terminated CMT 292 read Hirth grid MP430 3 L M2011 axis 4 in position A M305 Submit 2 terminated S M302 Switch on delay terminated Interrogate operating mode L M2053 positioning with manual input O M2054 program run single block O M2055 full sequence M5 controlled mode 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 4 213 e Check nominal position LN N MT oP Fr OG S M2011 M300 M305 M5 370 M4 M5 M2011 M3018 Activate Hirth module axis 4 not in position nominal value in grid spacing 1 not in grid controlled mode axis 4 not in position error message Nominal position not attainable in controlled mode LN M2011 axis 4 not in position A M301 Hirth status 1 activated A M302 switch on delay terminated A M305 S M300 set marker for memory L M300 reset by subprogram 300 AN M3018 nominal position not attainable in controlled mode CMT 300 Hirth positioning EM LBL 290 interrogate Submit RPLY B128 lt gt K 0 EMT SUBM 291 B128 EM LBL 291 read MP420 3 PS K 420 MP420 PS K 3 Index 3 CM 9032 PLW value 1 10 000 lt gt K 0
332. d to Output O2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 63 o Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command Operands B W D K Operation The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand B W D K are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT In accordance with the different sizes of operand B 8 bit W 16 bit D K 32 bit 8 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator Thus Bit O in the Accumulator is gated with bit O in the operand Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator Example The contents of Word W4 and Word W 6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result assigned to Word W8 Initial state Word W4 36 AA hex Word W6 3C 36 hex Word W8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit Sts 15 7 0 15 87 0 OX KX XXX XXX x x x xxx xxx 1 L W6 00001 1110000110110 00111100 00110110 2 XON W4 111111010101 100011 00110110 10101010 3 W8 11111101010110 0011 11110101 01100011 Line 1 The contents of Word W6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Word W8 7 64 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei
333. d to program a time interval after which an offset adjustment will be performed cyclically An automatic adjustment will be carried out when the predetermined time has elapsed and the following conditions are fulfilled all axes are stopped the spindle is not switched on the axes are not clamped For each adjustment cycle there will be a 1 mV correction if the offset voltage is larger than 1 mV If the offset voltage is smaller than 1 mV then in the TNC 415 compensation steps of 0 15 mV will be used in the TNC 407 in steps of 0 6 mV MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment Entry 0 to 65 536 s 0 no automatic adjustment 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 77 e 1 3 3 3 Offset adjustment with integral factor The integral factor MP1080 also results in an automatic offset adjustment It is only effective in the stop condition see block diagram of control loop According to the size of the factor the offset voltage will be reduced quickly or slowly Even a small amount of play in the drives can lead to instability in the control loop An integral factor of 0 is entered in this case Transformer MP1080 s 1000 steps TNC 415 0 15 mV MP1080 s 500 10 MP1080 s 150 1 2 3 4 t s MP1080 Integral factor Entry 0 to 65 535 MP1080 0 Integral factor X axis MP1080 1 Integral factor Y axis MP1080 2 Integral factor Z axis MP1080 3 Integr
334. decimal notation Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content 1 LD8 0000 E a 2 lt lt K 1 3 lt lt K 1 00000000 00000000 11111010 00000000 4 lt lt K 1 00000000 00000001 11110100 00000000 5 lt lt Kel 6 D12 00000000 00000011 11101000 00000000 oo 03 E8 00 Line 1 Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator Line 2to 5 The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the left by the number of bits specified in the operand The complete operation can also be undertaken with the command lt lt K 4 Line 6 The result is stored in the Doubleword D12 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 93 1 3 9 2 SHIFT RIGHT gt gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor gt gt SHIFT RIGHT Byte Word Double Constant Execution time us 0 6 to 0 9 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation Since the sign bit MSB is included with this command it is grouped in with arithmetic commands For this reason and out of time considerations this command should not be used for the isolation of bits A SHIFT RIGHT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be divided by two For this purpose the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the right The number of the shift operations is determined via the operand Thus the set bits which are shifted beyond the Accumulator to the right are lost the Accumulator is filled according to the sign from the left hand side With ope
335. desired list into the TNC when needed The desired list can be selected in the machine parameter editor by pressing the PGM NAME key and the SELECT soft key The parameter list which is active when you exit the machine parameter editor goes into effect 2 3 Changing the entry values After a machine parameter list has been created it can be changed either through the machine parameter editor or directly through the PLC 2 3 1 Manual input Call the machine parameter editor through the MOD function code number Enter the code number 95 148 to access the complete list of machine parameters Entering the code number 123 opens a partial list of machine parameters These are the machine parameters that may be changed by the control user see User s Manual for TNC 407 TNC 415 The machine parameters which can be changed with the code number 123 are marked in the following list with CN 123 Exit the machine parameter editor by pressing the END O key 1 5 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Input output of machine parameters 01 98 o 2 3 2 Changing the entry values via PLC The entry values of the active machine parameter list can be changed with the module 9031 see chapter PLC Programming section PLC modules These changes are then erased when the TNC is switched off The machine parameters which can by changed through the PLC are marked in the following list with PLC EDIT or PLC RUN PLC EDIT means that the machine parameters can only
336. dinates were read 1 Faulty call data 7 146 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 4 Number Conversion 4 4 1 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII Module 9050 Converts a binary numerical value consisting of mantissa and exponent to the base 10 to an ASCII coded decimal number The number specified as mantissa and exponent is converted to a decimal number and stored at the specified address as a string The exponent relates to the lowest value place in the number A negative number is detected when the mantissa corresponds to a negative number in the notation as a two s complement A sign is only set in front of negative numbers Trailing zeroes after the decimal point or leading zeroes before the decimal point are not converted the string is written left justified starting from the specified target address in the string buffer Constraints The decimal sign is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a decimal comma MP7280 0 or a decimal point MP7280 1 Possible errors The number of the target string is outside the permitted range 0 3 The conversion would result in more than 10 places after the decimal point The conversion would result in more than 10 places before the decimal point Call PS K BAV D lt Mantissa of numerical value to be converted gt PS K BMV D lt Exponent to base 10 of the value gt PS K BMV D Number of target string gt CM 9050 Error status after call M3171 0 Nu
337. ding on machine parameters MP7230 dialog language and MP4010 PLC program from RAM or EPROM See PLC Programming Register Chapter 1 3 This means that to select the appropriate error message It is no longer necessary to interrogate the dialog language with PLC marker M2041 as was the case with the TNC 355 PLC marker M2041 has no function in the TNC 407 or TNC 415 5 3 3 Mode Code The code for the Programming amp Editing and Test Run modes is no longer displayed because a foreground and a background mode can be active in the TNC 407 and TNC 415 at the same time M2176 to M2179 and W272 7 184 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 01 98 2 5 3 4 Non lmplemented Markers Marker Function Spindle speed under ranged M2021 Nominal actual speed difference over ranged M2024 Touch probe ready M2049 Mode Background Programming M2050 Mode Programming amp Editing M2056 Mode Test program M2060 DIN ISO Programming M2062 Code number dialog M2063 Central tool file M2188 Checksum error for non volatile Q parameters M2288 X axis was moving when program aborted M2289 Y axis was moving when program aborted M2290 Z axis was moving when program aborted M2291 Axis 4 was moving when program aborted M2292 Axis 5 was moving when program aborted M2504 Axis clamping after constant contour transition M2509 Activate a factor for feed rate over ride M2510 Deactivate spi
338. disk write protected Data on floppy disk defective Sectors not found Check sum defective Disk controller faulty DM A faulty If a magnetic tape unit is connected the following error codes could be sent to the TNC and an appropriate error message outputted Error code lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 3 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 4 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 6 gt lt ESC gt lt 1 gt lt 7 gt Error message TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT WR WR DAT DATA CARRIER MISSING DATA CARRIER WRITE PROTECTED ONG OPERATING MODE ONG PROGRAM DATA TA CARRIER EMPTY PROGRAM INCOMPLETE ME END OF TAPE A detailed description of these peripherals can be found in the appropriate operating manual 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Error messages 8 49 o 5 3 Data transmission software error messages If data is transferred using the HEIDENHAIN TNC EXE data transmission program then the following error messages might be displayed at the TNC TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT Attempts to transmit block to control unit has failed four times SEARCH FEATURE NOT ALLOWED Search feature not included in number of acceptable characters INSTRUCTION NOT ALLOWED Request instruction issued by control unit is not allowed PROGRAM NOT PRESENT File requested by control unit does not exist in currently configured access path
339. dle speed is however still displayed see section Main spindle The display of other M functions can be achieved in the PLC window see chapter PLC description section Modules Marker Function Set Reset M2485 Status display and sign of S analogue for M03 PLG PLC M2486 Status display and sign of S analogue for M04 M2487 Status display for MO5 and spindle stop M2608 Status display M03 M04 M05 inverse and S analogue output OV M2508 M2657 Display 0 0 Mog 0 1 M07 1 0 M08 1 1 MK M2609 Status display M07 M08 MOO inverse 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 139 o 6 4 5 Control is in operation If the control is in operation i e a positioning or M function is performed the status window displays a large asterisk If a current NC program is interrupted with the external stop key the will flash in the status display This information is transmitted to the PLC through the markers M2183 and M2184 M2183 and M2184 are effective in the operating modes Positioning with MDI Program run single block and Program run full sequence Marker Function Set Reset M2183 Program interruption display Control operational NC NC flashes M2184 Control operational display Control operational on or flashes 6 4 6 Cancel status display A machine parameter can be used to decide whether with the M functions M02 and M30 as well as with NC block END PGM the status display should
340. dow active 11 1 Position display active 12 1 PLC status window active 13 1 Status Graphics window active 14 15 spare 0 No file 1 H plain language NC PGM 2 1 ISO NC PGM 3 T TOOL table 4 D Datum table 5 P Pallet table G A ASCII file 7 S Compensation table Selected file 0 No file in single block full 1 H plain language NC PGM sequence 2 ISO NC PGM Selected axis 0 X axis Editor for actual 1 Y axis value transfer 2 Zaxis 3 4th axis 4 5th axis Selected axis See above Machine for actual value transfer TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 9 Handwheel axis 1 None or several 0 X axis 1 Y axis 2 Z axis 3 4th axis 4 5th axis 10 Handwheel axes Bit 0 1 X axis controlled by handwheel bit coded Bit 1 1 Y axis controlled by handwheel Bit 2 1 Z axis controlled by handwheel Bit 3 1 4th axis controlled by handwheel Bit 4 1 5th axis controlled by handwheel 11 Handwheel 0 10 subdivision factor X axis 12 Handwheel 0 10 subdivision factor Y axis 13 Handwheel 0 10 subdivision factor Z axis 14 Handwheel 0 10 subdivision factor 4th axis 15 Handwheel 0 10 subdivision factor 5th axis 16 Input format of MDI 0 H file 1 l file file 17 Display units 0 MM 1 INCH 18 Working plane Dm 1 Tilting is active Bit1 1 Tilting is selected for manual operation Bit2 1 Tilting selected for program run P
341. e electrical separation for analog inputs the NC power supply can be used X23 Power supply for analog inputs Connection terminals Pin Number Assignment 24V DC 24 VDC Not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP The power for the PA 110 can be supplied according to VDE 0550 provided that the analog inputs and connections for the Pt 100 are shockproof according to VDE 0160 Section 5 5 1 If this is not possible the entire PLC power supply and the power for the PA 110 must be provided according to VDE 0551 4 1 3 Buffer battery The buffer battery is the potential source for the RAM memory for NC programs PLC programs and machine parameters when the control is switched off If the EXCHANGE BUFFER BATTERY message appears the batteries must be exchanged The 3 batteries may be found behind a screw cap in the power supply section of the logic unit As well as the batteries the logic unit contains an additional energy store mounted on the processor board for buffering the memory contents This means that the mains can be switched off when replacing the batteries The energy store will ensure that the memory is retained while the batteries are exchanged s Type of batteries Three AA size batteries leak proof IEC Designation LR6 3 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Power supply 01 98 2 4 2 Visual display unit VDU X3 Mains supply connection Mains supply 220 V voltage Supply
342. e spindle orientation A display of the spindle position is activated with MP40 The spindle position is displayed only if neither MO3 nor M04 is active It is displayed as a value below 360 degrees Orientation from rotation S A rom Prog rom MP3410 1 RPM for MP3410 1 orientation 0 t M19 Target position Distance to target position Orientation from standstill S A rpm Prog rpm MP3410 0 Stand still RPM for MP3410 1 orientation 0 Lk M05 M19 Target position 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 107 2 1 Spindle orientation through initiator with Marker M2501 The spindle can also be oriented through an initiator This requires that Marker M2501 be set by the PLC This marker activates a spindle rotation at the speed defined in machine parameter MP3520 0 and in the direction of rotation defined in Marker M2656 If Marker M2501 is reset by the PLC e g through initiator the spindle stops The position value is shown in the status window This method can also be used to a enable a jog mode spindle orientation MP3410 1 MP3420 MP3430 MP3440 MP3440 0 MP3440 1 MP3440 2 MP3440 3 MP3440 4 MP3440 5 MP3440 6 MP3440 7 MP3520 0 MP3520 1 Spindle ramp slope for spindle orientation Entry 0 0000 to 1 9999 V ms Positioning window for spindle Entry 0 to 65 535 Increments 1 Increment represents approx 0 088 degrees 360 degrees 1024 lines x fourfold evalu
343. e PLC by setting Bit 0 in Word W522 at If monitoring functions are switched off safe operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed Uncontrolled movements of the axes are not recognized MP4130 Fast PLC input to suppress the monitoring functions Entry 0 to 255 No of the PLC input MP4131 Activation condition for fast PLC input from MP4130 Entry O or 1 0 activation for Low level 1 activation for High level Address Function Set Reset W522 Bit 0 Monitoring functions suppressed PLC PLC if PLC input from MP 4130 is activated 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 83 o 3 5 1 Position monitoring for operation with lag The machine parameters MP1710 and MP1720 determine the ranges for the continuous position monitoring in the machine lag monitoring The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under the control of the position control loop If the limits of parameter MP1710 are exceeded the error message Positioning error will appear and the machine stops The error message can be cancelled by the CE key If the limit of parameter MP1720 is exceeded the flashing error message Gross positioning error A appears This error can only be cancelled by switching off the control An entry value of approx 1 to 1 4 times lag for rapid traverse is realistic MP1720 is larger than MP1710 MP1710 Position monitoring for operation with lag cancellable Entry 0 0000 to 300 0000 mm
344. e control reduces the feed rate at the discontinuous transitions in order to keep the tool exactly on path If you are working with servo lag depending on the feed rate the corners will be more or less rounded if M90 is entered or if MP7460 is set correspondingly Since feedforward control is intended to virtually eliminate servo lag working with feedforward control will result in sharp corners This is not desired however on 3D forms With the M function M112 you can enter a tolerance for the deviation from the programmed contour at corners and a limit angle for activation of the tolerance A rounding arc is inserted at corners The radius of the arc is a function of the entered tolerance T and the limit angle A Three radii are calculated H 2 oe fp x x tan b or T The tolerance entered with M112 If no tolerance was entered the tolerance is be considered to be infinite b Half of the angle of the adjacent line segments The shorter of the two adjacent line segments v Programmed feed rate x 1 5 Feed rate override 150 a Smaller value from the acceleration of the interpolated axes MP1060 and the radial acceleration MP1070 The smallest of the 3 radii is used r is included in the calculation only if the change in direction is greater than the given angle A As long as the limit angle A is not exceeded the size of the inserted arc is independent of the feed rate the largest possible arc is inserted If th
345. e datum MP960 x Software limit switches are not considered Tool compensations are not calculated The path compensation must be terminated before a PLC positioning PLC positioning is not displayed in the test graphics Example PLC positioning of the Z axis A PLC positioning in the Z axis is to be initiated with the M function M70 The target position is stored in the machine parameter MP4210 2 The feed for the PLC positioning is defined in machine parameter MP4220 2 67 L MO 68 ON MO 69 S M2496 decoded M code output M1900 to M1999 70 S M2719 Word processing incompatible with TNC 155 355 71 L M1970 M function M70 72 A M2045 Change signal M function 73 AN M4 edge marker 74 CMT 110 load position and feed 75 S M2706 activate PLC positioning Z axis 76 S M4 edge marker 77 L M1970 M function M70 78 A M2045 Change signal M function 79 AN M2706 PLC positioning Z axis done 80 S M2482 acknowledgement M function done 81 LN M2045 sno M function 82 R M2482 acknowledgement reset 83 R M4 edge marker reset 1210 EM main program end 1211 LBL 110 sload Z position and feed rate 1212 L D776 sload target position from MP4210 2 1213 D536 target position PLC positioning Z axis 1214 L W964 sload feed from MP4220 2 1215 W564 feed PLC positioning Z axis 1216 EM 4 36 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 37 1 1 8 P
346. e feed rate during program run too large for the calculated rounding arc the TNC automatically reduces the feed rate M112 is inactivated again by M113 M112 is effective in NC blocks without radius compensation both in operation with servo lag and with feedforward control M124 influences the point spacing for calculating the rounding arc Refer to your User s Manual for more information 4 82 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o 1 3 5 Monitoring functions The NC monitors the axis positions and the dynamic behaviour of the machine If the fixed values in the machine parameters are exceeded an error message is displayed and the machine is stopped If monitoring is not wanted it can be deactivated for the following using M2688 to M2692 e Position monitoring e Standstill monitoring e Movement monitoring e Monitoring of the analog voltage Marker Function Set Reset M2688 No monitoring X axis PLC PLC M2689 No monitoring Y axis M2690 No monitoring Z axis M2691 No monitoring 4th axis M2692 No monitoring 5th axis The monitoring can be reactivated by resetting the markers in the PLC The monitoring functions can also be switched off conditionally In the machine parameter MP4130 a PLC input is defined which is interrogated with the same cycle time as the control loop TNC 415 3 ms TNC 407 6 ms The condition for activating this input is stored in MP4131 This function must be activated from th
347. e handwheels The interpolation factor of the step switch must be evaluated in the PLC it is displayed on screen but cannot be altered with the keyboard However the interpolation factor can be set for specific axes without a step switch by using the keyboard as before Pin assignments Handwheel inputs X1 X2 X3 Pin number Assignment 1 IER 2 E 3 lot 4 l2 5 lot 6 lo 7 5V 8 OV 9 Inner screen Housing Outer screen 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 3 49 o f Handwheel adapter output X23 Pin assignment Pin number Assignment 1 RTS 2 OV 3 CTS A 12V 0 6 V Uv 5 Do not use 6 DSR 7 8 9 H RxD TxD DTR ousing Outer screen NC supply connection X31 Pin assignment Pin number Assignment 24V OV The 24 V power supply of the PLC must not be connected in the handwheel adapter since that would bridge the electrical separation of PLC inputs and outputs The handwheel adapter must be powered with the 24 V supply from the NC block of the LE VDE 0551 See chapter Power supply 3 50 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 01 98 2 11 PLC inputs outputs The following configurations of PLC inputs outputs are possible with the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls PLC PLC Analogue Thermistors Components Inputs Outputs Inputs 56 EC BECH e 119 LB LEET L 200 182 pS LE 2PL400 119 LE 1 PL 400 PA 110 120 e LE 1PL410 PL410B
348. e increment 4 FNO Q60 0 Start angle 5 CC X 03 Y 04 Centre of bolt hole circle 6 LBL 11 Jump label 7 LP PR 02 PA 060 RO FMAX Approach drilling position 8 LIZ 06 FQ7 Drilling with feed 9 L IZ O6 FMAX Clear 10 FN 1 Q60 060 050 Next angle 11 FN12 IF 060 LT 360 GOTO LBL 11 Last bore 12 END PGM 99999968 MM Dialogs for Bolt hole circle OEM cycle Dialog No DIALOG BOLT HOLE CIRCLE NUMBER OF HOLES RADIUS X COORDINATE CC Y COORDINATE CC SAFETY CLEARANCE TOTAL HOLE DEPTH IN FEED DEPTH NOOBRWN O 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Bolt hole circle OEM cycle example 5 OEM cycles in NC programs OEM cycles in the NC program memory or PLC EPROM can be defined called and executed both in HEIDENHAIN dialog programs and also in DIN ISO programs 5 1 Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialog program In the HEIDENHAIN dialog program OEM cycles are defined as standard cycles see Dialog Programming in the TNC 407 TNC 415 Operating Manual The dialog for cycle definition is initiated with the CYCL DEF key The desired cycle is selected either by skimming through the pages using the vertical arrow keys or by GOTO and input of the cycle number e g 68 The cycle is entered with the ENT key The individual parameters are input via the digital keyboard and entered with ENT In the case of a DEF active OEM cycle the cycle is effective immediately after definition Once defined a CALL active OEM
349. e is only counted from TOOL CALL to TOOL CALL in the automatic modes Program run Single block and Program run Full sequence It does not matter whether the spindle is turning or the machine is traversing The tool life counter does not stop until the program is interrupted with Internal Stop M02 M30 or END PGM The tool life counter does not run in the manual modes Manual Operation El Handwheel and Positioning with manual input The operator can reset the current tool life by entering zero Marker Function Set Reset M2094 Maximum tool life elapsed NC NC PLC TIME1 in tool table MP7680 Machine parameters with multiple function Entry XXXXXXX Bit6 Tool length for blocks with surface normal vector 0 Without DR2 from the tool table l With DR2 from the tool table 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 227 L Ei 15 2 Controlling the tool changer Controlling the tool changer i e positioning the changing arm and carousel and the complete tool change sequence is performed by the PLC The NC handles tool management i e tool life tool pocket assignment and evaluation of the TOOL DEF and TOOL CALL blocks NC and PLC communicate by markers and words When a TOOL CALL BLOCK is executed the tool geometry of the defined tool is taken from the tool table With Marker M2717 the PLC can activate the tool geometry of the tool defined in W264 M2717 can only be activated together with a strobe or when t
350. e o 7 139 Module 9081 4 141 7 1 53 Machine parameter read 7 140 Module OU 4 141 7 114 7 153 Machine parameters 2 18 2 1 9 5 2 8 18 Module og 2 1 5 4 141 7 155 Machine reference point SOR EYEL ra tree 4 127 Module 9090 eege ere ereeedee ee 7 157 Machine control panel 4 174 Module 9092 9093 9094 ss scien 7 158 Magnetic Helde 3 13 Module OU 2 15 Maltta ptt selbst ee 7 7 Module OU 2 15 Manual feed 4 70 Module OU 7 161 MANUAL OPERATION 4 148 4 149 Module Oo 7 163 Mark Chics ge 7 18 Module IT nee 7 163 Mark Sarna a n T 6 1 Module HI neen 7 164 Max current CONSUMPTION csscescesceseeeeee 3 16 Module SA OB recon ice size SES 7 165 Maximum measuring ANGE veces 4 177 Module O104 cceeeeeee sees ee aa 7 165 Maximum spindle speed De te dh ke eae 4 97 Module 9105 cccccccccseseeecceeeeeeseeeeeee 7 167 MaxiMUmM traAVelSe cecccccccccccccccccccecceceeeeececees 2 5 M d l 91 06 les on SA Oe teeth 7 167 Maximum traversing speed EE ere 2 5 Module 9107 a cco beaten eet 7 168 Dee 8 28 EE EE E MEY END OETIADE 8 49 Module o120 7 171 ME TADEEND 8 48 Module ITZI n r EE 7 172 Meander cycle ER 4 1 80 4 182 Module Q122 seenen 7 172 Measuring error permissible EEN 4 194 Module S123 viens Mata wer dies 7 173 Measuring TEE ebben ent geen E 3 24 Module ST SO wi Ae Ed des atte te 4 275 Measuring system lt axis gt defect 4 9 Module technioue 7 17 Measuring system connection
351. e strobe marker M2824 The software limit switches for axes of rotation are not active unless a value of 0 is entered in machine parameter MP810 see section Display and operation The MOD function Axis limit can be used to enter an additional limitation for each traverse range MP910 Traverse ranges MP920 Entry range MP911 Linear axis 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm MP921 Axis of rotation 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 MP912 Values relative to the machine datum MP922 Traverse range 1 Initial values after Power On Activated by PLC M2817 0 M2816 0 MP910 0 Software limit switch X MP910 1 Software limit switch Y MP910 2 Software limit switch Z MP910 3 Software limit switch 4 MP910 4 Software limit switch 5 MP920 0 Software limit switch X MP920 1 Software limit switch Y MP920 2 Software limit switch Z MP920 3 Software limit switch 4 MP920 4 Software limit switch 5 Traverse range 2 Activated by PLC M2817 0 M2816 1 MP911 0 Software limit switch X MP911 1 Software limit switch Y MP911 2 Software limit switch Z MP911 3 Software limit switch 4 MP911 4 Software limit switch 5 4 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o MP921 0 Software limit switch X MP921 1 Software limit switch Y MP921 2 Software limit switch Z MP921 3 Software limit switch 4 MP921 4 Software limit switch 5 Traverse range 3 Activated by PLC M2817 1 M2816 0
352. e table COM has more than 256 entries Permissible total number of compensation points exceeded Too many compensation value tables COM No such CMA file Call was not from SUBMIT Job Call after started PGM without Strobe ONnNo rwon o Error status after call M3171 0 Compensation was activated 1 Error condition see above 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 161 2 4 8 Data Interface The following modules enable the PLC to transfer data across the V 24 RS 232 C or V 11 RS 422 data interfaces For transfer parameters see chapter entitled Data Interface The PLC assigns and enables the interfaces with Modules 9100 and 9101 respectively the current status of the data interface can be interrogated with Module 9102 The transmit and receive buffers for the PLC are 128 characters long Since every STRING ends with an END character a STRING in the transmit or receive buffer can only be up to 127 characters long As well as transmitting and receiving a STRING from the STRING memory Modules 9103 and 9104 Modules 9105 and 9106 can be used to transfer a block of binary values bytes from the Word memory However ASCII characters are transmitted and received across the interface in both instances STRING and binary transmission Example Transferring a binary block gt B126 11111010 FA 10000001 81 When transferring binary data from the Word memory from address B1
353. ease 11 92 New functions Because it is run from standstill the spindle orientation at the beginning of the Rigid Tapping cycle is always executed in the direction of rotation that reaches the target by the shortest route Previously the direction of rotation with each spindle orientation was selected by marker M2656 TNC 415 A 259 96X 08 TNC 415 E 259 97X 08 TNC 407 243 02X 08 Release 1 93 New functions Ifthe PLC simultaneously issues two commands from memory areas PLC positioning M2704 to M2708 confirm Q parameter M2713 and PLC datum shift M2716 then the NC flashes the message Error in PLC program 1R as these commands use the same memory areas for data transfer PLC positioning in more than one axis counts as a single command If marker M2719 switch over from word processing to TNC 355 mode has the value 0 the same checks will be run with the corresponding TNC 355 strobes TNC 415 A 259 96X 09 TNC 415 E 259 97X 09 TNC 407 243 02X 09 Release 10 93 New functions Machine parameters MP951 x and MP7450 were introduced for calculating PLC positionings during block scan El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 17 e 3 5 3 Software types 259 93 259 94 and 243 03 TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 04 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 259 94x 04 Release 11 92 New functions New functions for programmed contour approach and withdraw Working Plane cycle for machines with swivel head Conto
354. ee 2 20 4 147 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 13 3 ASSIGN DOUBLE Damping factor TA CARRIER IS FULL TA CARRIER MISSING WRITE PROTECT TA MEDIUM MISSING a transfer NC PLC a transfer rate Dialog language ce ialogue language Dialogues for user parameters igital speed control izing with TS 120 ion of spindle rotation stance coded reference marks 3 24 4 52 99090000090 DNC operation Double swivel head DOUDIEWOFd shiidtisie narda 7 16 7 18 Dwell tiMe nsis ie Denes ee ak A ae fod 4 114 E Earthing Glen us Rae 3 20 Edge evaluation ccccccecccceeeseeeeeeeenees 7 27 Edge separation of the measuring Ee IT 4 10 Editor lte e IER 7 7 Electrical interference s 3 9 Electrical noise immunity 0e 3 9 EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 262 EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 120 End of Mod le neate ite eet des 7 110 End of Program deed dees 4 154 END ENDGASE enkei atia 7 130 ter OO enee EE ate 5 4 Entry formats iperen an detente 5 3 EPROM ainin tae ra aea A 2 11 EPROM Creation nissenana 7 10 EPROM sockets ssiissiiesiieeiierrrereeee 2 11 EPROM creatione seess s 7 28 EQUAL TO Meel eih nad 7 73 7 119 EQUAL TOLI SS0 lt eessen 7 89 ER Raer a ecrin a ae tior an E dances 8 49 Error COMPENSATION ssssseeeeiesseeeernesrereena 2 5 Error in PLC program bp 2 17 2 19 Error in PEC Progra Minen aa 4 17
355. ee above 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 139 2 4 2 2 Read Machine Parameter Module 9032 Reads the value of a machine parameter that is defined by its number and index from the editable machine parameter list Constraints The value of the machine parameter is returned as an integer with the decimal point being shifted by the number of possible places after the decimal Example MP910 0 100 12 mm is read as 1001200 four places after the decimal lead to a multiplication by 10000 Only the value from the editable machine parameter list is read not any value in the run time memory modified by PLC Module 9031 Zero must be given as the index for non indexed machine parameters Possible errors The machine parameter specified by the MP number and index does not exist The module was not called from a Submit Job Call PS BMW D K lt MP Number gt PS BMW D K lt MP Index gt CM 9032 PL B W D lt MP value gt lt Error Code gt 1 No such MP number 2 No separator 3 MP value out of range 4 MP not in file 5 No MP file found 6 Call was not from SUBMIT Job Error status after call M3171 0 MP was read 1 Error condition see above 4 2 3 Select Machine Parameter File Module 9033 The machine parameter file with the specified name is selected M status assigned and a control reset is executed if another file was previously selected Constraints The module can only be called f
356. eed ramps cannot be synchronized by the NC a machine parameter MP7120 1 was introduced to enable the spindle to be switched off early The machine parameter MP7120 0 dwell time for change of direction of rotation and the programmable dwell time are just as effective as for analogue spindle speed output MP7120 1 Pre cut out time for the spindle when tapping with BCD coded output Entry 0 0000 to 65 535 s 4 116 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 e 4 4 3 Rigid Tapping Cycle 17 During rigid tapping the spindle position control loop is open The machine tool operator defines rigid tapping with Cycle 17 in the NC part program CYCL DEF 17 While Cycle 17 is being run the TNC automatically switches to operation with velocity feedforward You define the dynamic behavior of the spindle and the tool axis in machine parameters The tool axis tracks the actual position of the spindle during tapping Before tapping begins the axes for example Z and S are synchronized by means of an oriented spindle stop This means the every Z position is assigned to a corresponding spindle position The NC carries out the oriented spindle stop M2127 is set by the NC and in the PLC the spindle position control loop must be closed M2499 Synchronization makes it possible to cut the same thread more than once The permanently assigned spindle position depends on the thread pitch entered in the cycle To save machining time you can deselect this
357. eeded by S override The voltage range can be restricted by machine parameter MP3240 1 MP3120 can determine whether zero spindle speed is permitted in spite of a minimum producable analogue output voltage If an S analogue voltage output 0 V is produced marker M2005 will be set This is also the case when the potential has been turned down to zero with the override potentiometer The ramp slope for the S analogue voltage on output of M03 M04 is stored in MP3410 0 If the spindle voltage is on a rising or falling ramp marker M2004 will be set This also happens when the spindle voltage is altered with the override potentiometer the voltage changes very quickly and the ramp of MP3410 0 cannot be followed 4 96 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 2 MP3510 Spindle speed for gear ranges Entry 0 to 99 999 999 rpm MP3510 0 Spindle speed for gear range 1 MP3510 1 Spindle speed for gear range 2 MP3510 2 Spindle speed for gear range 3 MP3510 3 Spindle speed for gear range 4 MP3510 4 Spindle speed for gear range 5 MP3510 5 Spindle speed for gear range 6 MP3510 6 Spindle speed for gear range 7 MP3510 7 Spindle speed for gear range 8 MP3515 Maximum spindle speed Entry 0 to 99 999 999 rpm MP3515 0 Maximum spindle speed gear range 1 MP3515 1 Maximum spindle speed gear range 2 MP3515 2 Maximum spindle speed gear range 3 MP3515 3 Maximum spindle speed gear range 4 MP3515 4 Maximum spindle
358. eee 3 37 Touch probe not reach 4 178 Touch probe system input ee 3 36 TRACE EE 7 11 TRACE IN CODE sais date mere e 7 12 Transfer e EE 3 61 TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRE GT see eet access 8 48 8 49 8 50 TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT X 8 48 Transient response siseseseeeeee 4 74 4 270 Transient response of spindle 4 118 Transmit receive unt 3 38 TRAV EE 4 183 Traverse ranges se ieseseereeereesrreerrreeee 4 16 Tigger ee ee uge 7 11 TS 212 EE 3 36 3 37 TS AZO EE 4 176 RE Lee nee Pa ore en eee 3 38 13 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 01 98
359. eel HR 332 are assigned to different PLC inputs and the 12 LEDs to different outputs depending on the input value of machine parameter MP7645 0 Pressing a key sets the corresponding PLC input The matching LED lights up when the PLC output is set When MP7645 0 0 the X Y Z IV and V keys and their LEDs are assigned to the NC The other keys are assigned to PLC inputs 1164 to 1170 The LEDs are assigned to the PLC outputs 0100 to 0106 fx fiv 100 164 fy fy lio 1166 a a 8 Z 0103 O104 1167 1168 al aa 0101 0105 0106 1165 1169 1170 When MP7645 0 1 all 12 keys are assigned to PLC inputs 1160 to 1171 and all LEDs to PLC outputs O96 to 0107 q a a O96 097 O98 1160 1161 1162 Ki a a 099 0100 O101 1163 1164 1165 a aa 0102 0103 0104 1166 1167 1168 a aa 0105 gel 0107 1169 1170 1171 MP7645 Initializing parameters for handwheel MP7645 0 has the following meaning when an HR 332 is connected MP7645 0 Assignment of HR 332 handwheel keypad Entry 0 to 255 0 all keys and LEDs are freely addressable with the PLC except for axis selection keys and their LEDs 1 all 12 keys and LEDs are freely addressable with the PLC MP7645 1 to MP7645 7 are not assigned f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 4 199 e 10 3 2 PLC program example In the following example t
360. ement by 1 B M3032 gt K 0 JPT 221 L B255 load number of mag pockets B M3032 as actual value LBL 221 EM Compare actual and nominal values of pocket number LBL230 M3267 TNC 355 LB M3032 read actual value from markers B250 actual value LB M3024 read nominal value from markers B252 nominal value LW M3200 read reduction and tool max W254 high byte reduc byte 254 low byte max T byte 255 L B250 B252 test actual nominal for parity M3040 actual nominal JPT 231 if actual nominal then end L B250 actual nominal gt B248 B252 B248 gt K 0 JPT 232 L B248 B248 B248 Abs actual nominal LBL232 Compute reduction L B255 B254 lt B248 Ol L B248 lt B254 M3041 Reduction reached Compute shortest path 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7 183 E L B255 Max tool s gt gt K 1 DIV 2 B255 Max tool s DIV 2 L B252 nominal value gt B250 actual value Al L B248 _ Abs actual nominal lt B255 Max tool s Div 2 Ol L B252 nominal value lt B250 actual value Al L B248 Abs actual nominal gt B255 Max tool s Div 2 M3042 direction marker LBL231 EM 5 3 2 PLC Error Messages The TNC 407 and TNC 415 contain dedicated files for error messages in the first dialog language and for English error messages File EE ER1 or file EEE ERE is accessed depen
361. en by the PLC The required numerical value is entered in doubleword D528 and the O parameter number 0 7 is defined in Word W516 The transfer is activated by the strobe marker M2713 The O parameter values are transferred with the next M S T strobe Marker Function Set Reset M2713 Activate the Q Parameter transfer to the NC PLC NC Data from D528 Q No from W516 Address Function D 528 Doubleword with multiple function in this instance data for transfer from the PLC to the NC 0 7 Q number from W516 strobe marker M2713 W516 Q number for numerical value transfer from PLC to NC transfer of the value from D528 strobe marker M2713 122 different machine parameters are reserved for data transfer in the PLC MP4210 x MP4220 x and MP4310 x are stored in PLC words The contents of MP4230 x and 4231 x must be called by module 9032 For example PLC positioning datum shifts feed rates for PLC positioning or coding for the release of certain PLC functions can be filed in these machine parameters These numerical values are evaluated in the PLC program Although the TNC 407 TNC 415F TNC 425E accept entry values to 0 0001 mm or the controls round these values to 0 001 mm or for their calculations Address Function D768 Value from MP4210 0 D772 Value from MP4210 1 D776 Value from MP4210 2 D780 Value from MP4210 3 D784 Value from MP4210 4 D788 Value from MP4210 5 D792 Value from MP4210 6 D796 Value from MP4210 7 D80
362. ended input range 0 1 to 2 s MP1925 0 Xaxis MP1925 1 Y axis MP1925 2 Zaxis MP1925 3 4th axis MP1925 4 5th axis MP1940 Proportional component for speed controller P component Entry 0 to 65 535 Recommended input range 50 to 200 MP1940 0 Xaxis MP1940 1 Y axis MP1940 2 Zaxis MP1940 3 4th axis MP1940 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11 9 e MP1945 MP1945 0 MP1945 1 MP1945 2 MP1945 3 MP1945 4 MP1950 Bit O Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Factor for acceleration pre control of the rotational speed controller Entry 0 000 to 9 999 V m s2 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Polarity for torque signal Entry XXXXX X axis 0 positive Y axis 1 negative Z axis 4th axis 5th axis The polarity of the nominal voltage can be modified with this MP W MP1040 is still active but for internal voltage between position and speed controller MP210 is only active for position encoders The counting direction for the rotary encoder is compensated with MP1950 MP1951 Bit O Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 MP1955 MP1955 0 MP1955 1 MP1955 2 MP1955 3 MP1955 4 Select measuring system for position control Entry XXXXX X axis 0 linear encoder for position control Y axis 1 motor rotary encoder for position control for trimming Z axis speed controller only 4th axis 5th axis Ratio of grating period LS to ROD Entry 0 1 to 100 X axis Y axis Z axis 4
363. entered for these parameters either the travel or the probe point interval are limited The travel is also responsible for geometrical accuracy at the corners The smaller the stroke the greater the accuracy of corner resolution If too small a stroke is defined however it may affect clearance at acute inside corners minimum travel 0 1 mm Outside Corners PP INT Contour ee 46 On outside corners having probed the last point the touch probe moves down the resultant straight line until it either makes workpiece contact again or hits one of the two limits TRAVEL or PP INT In the illustrated example TRAVEL is the limit and the touch probe returns to the contour in the inverse scanning direction The new scanning direction is defined by the probed points and 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 183 L 1 Inside Corners Maximum stylus deflection MP 6240 Contour On inside corners having probed the last point the touch probe continues to oscillate in the same scanning direction but changes direction because it cannot get clear It then moves down the resultant straight line until it either gets clear or hits one of the limits TRAVEL or PP INT The touch probe moves in inverse scanning direction to get clear If the programmed probe point interval PP INT is too small for the probe to clear it travels in negative direction by up to the value of MP6240 maximum sty
364. entering the code number or soft key PLC EDIT the following screen display will appear main menu PROCESSING TIME MAXIMUM XXX CURRENT XXX CODE LENGTH XX KBYTE RUNTIME PGM XXXX XXXX XXX EDITOR PGM XXXX XXXX XXX T QUTPUT SELECT MP EDIT TABLE TRACE COMP ILE BINARY DI1 ER1 CODE 0001 FILES EDIT Select edit Select table Select TRACE Compile PLC Binary output Activate Call machine Quit PLC mode M I O T C function program of PLC dialogue or parameter list Mode program error message file Processing time The PLC processing time time for a PLC run is given in of the maximum time of 10 ms whereby 10 ms is equivalent to 200 Processing time Maximum The longest occurring run time for the current executable program is displayed in If this time exceeds the absolute maximum of 10 ms then the flashing error message PLC program error 53 will be displayed Current processing time The time for the latest PLC run displayed in Code length This is the length of the compiled executable program in KB Executable program The last compiled PLC program is displayed here If you are working from the RAM MP4010 then the desired program can be selected using the PGM NAME and SELECT soft key and must be compiled with the COMPILE function soft key A program which was already selected as an executable program before switching on will be compiled automatically The PLC program is only active after compilation Edi
365. entry value 100 raise subsequent values in steps of 100 2 For drives which are not quite free of backlash the entry value should bei 4 272 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 o 1 16 3 9 Adjust the offset The rough offset adjustment has already been carried out on the servo amplifier A fine offset adjustment can be performed with the offset adjustment possibility described in the section Servo positioning 16 3 10 Adjustment of the monitoring functions The following entry values are recommended for the monitoring functions see section Servo positioning MP1710 MP1720 MP1410 MP1420 MP1140 MP1030 MP1110 Machine parameter Function Position monitoring Position monitoring EMERG Position monitoring Position monitoring EMERG Movement monitoring Positioning window Standstill monitoring ENCY S1 TOP ENCY S1 TOP Entry value 1 2 x lag in rapid traverse 1 4 x lag in rapid traverse 0 5 mm 10 mm 0 5 V 0 01 mm 0 2 mm If the drives of the machine permit narrower limits these may be entered 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 273 e 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines Special functions can be activated to interface the TNC to laser cutting machines and water jet machines 17 1 Analogue voltage output If the analogue output X8 pin 8 is not needed for the spindle MP3
366. erands none 3 8 3 GREATER THAN gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor gt GREATER THAN Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 8 Number of bytes 6 Operands none 3 8 4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt I Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt LESS EQUAL II Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 8 Number of bytes 6 Operands none 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 89 i 3 8 5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOLI gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor gt GREATER EQUAL Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 8 Number of bytes 6 Operands none 3 8 6 NOT EQUAL TO sl Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt gt NOT EQUAL Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 0 8 Number of bytes 6 Operands none Function of parentheses with comparison commands The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses The open parentheses command loads the contents of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack The Accumulator is now available for the calculation of intermediate results The close parentheses instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack with the content of the complete Word Accumulator The result is loaded again into the Accumulator The maximum nesting depth is 16 parentheses A direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place with comparison co
367. eration With the CAN command the Submit Program with the specified Identifier is cancelled during execution or removed from the queue This Identifier must already be stored in a Byte Word or Doubleword prior to the calling up of the Submit Program After the cancellation of the Program the next Submit program in the queue will immediately be processed The following PLC modules cannot be cancelled with CANCEL at any desired point PLC module for access to the screen 908X PLC module for reading NC files 909X In these cases the RPLY command must be used to check whether or not the CAN command may be used 7 124 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei Example of the use of the SUBM command Dependent on Input 110 the subprogram with the Label LBL 300 is handed over to the NC for processing In addition the execution of the subprogram is checked in the main program with the RPLY command and cancelled with the CAN command in conjunction with Input 111 Line Instruction Program Comments 1 L 110 Interrogate state of Input 110 2 JPF 100 Dependent on Input 110 skip Call Module 3 RPLY B128 _ Interrogate status of the Submit program 4 lt gt K 0 Submit program already transferred to the NC for processing 5 JPT 100 If program already transferred to the NC renewed program call skipped 6 SUBM 300 Call up Submit program 7 B128 Store Identifier in Byte 128 8 LBL 100 Jump address 9 L 111 I
368. ercentage W754 e g by copying W494 current feed override to W754 The free rotation function is activated and deactivated with marker M2720 If M2720 is set by PLC the NC takes the information from B518 and B519 and resets M2720 Marker Function Set Reset M 2720 Activate deactivate PLC NC Free rotation of rotary axis Address Function B518 0 Free rotation cancelled Free rotation for 4th axis 16 Free rotation for 5th axis B519 Definition of the direction of traverse z Entry value 4th and 5th axes 0 4th axis 8 5th axis 16 4th and 5th axes Ir 24 W754 Percentage for feed override free rotation 0 to 300 4 136 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 137 i 6 4 3 Feed rate display In the operating modes Program run single block and Program run full sequence the programmed contour feed rate is displayed when the feed potentiometer is in the 100 position The Feed Potentiometer can be used to vary this programmed feed rate from 0 to 150 If rapid traverse was programmed this is indicated in the display with FMAX and marker M2151 is set With machine parameter MP7620 you can set whether the feed rate override i
369. erenced to the machine datum in MP951 x and the offset must be activated for specific axes with MP7450 When using random selection in the central tool memory see section Tool change an alteration of the position numbers in the tool memory must be avoided during block scan This is transmitted from the PLC to the NC by marker M2612 Machine parameter MP7680 can be used to select whether the block scan may be interrupted by a programmed STOP or MO6 and whether the programmed dwell time should be taken into account during the block scan The feed for returning to the contour is specifically defined in machine parameter MP4220 X This machine parameter is also used to set a number in the PLC see PLC description MP4220 Feed for Return to the contour mm Entry 10 to 30000 an MP4220 0 X axis MP4220 1 Y axis MP4220 2 Z axis MP4220 3 Ath axis MP4220 4 5th axis 4 148 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function Entry XXXXXXX Bit 1 Return to the contour 0 Inactive 1 active Bit 2 Block scan 0 inactive 1 active Bit 3 Interruption in block scan on STOP 0 interruption or MOG 1 no interruption Bit4 Allow for the programmed 0 allow for dwell time dwell time during block scan 1 Ignore dwell time Bit 5 Start calculation for block scan 0 Start from cursor 1 Start from program start MP951 Simulated tool change position for TOOL
370. ers to one of the machine parameters MP735x or MP732x and can be seen from the following table 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 153 Color 1 MP7354 0 or MP7320 1 Color 2 MP7356 0 or MP7320 2 Color 3 MP7352 0 or MP732x 3 depending on the displayed graphics Color 4 MP7353 0 or MP732x 0 depending on the displayed graphics Color 5 MP7357 0 or MP732x 1 depending on the displayed graphics Color 6 MP7352 1 or MP732x 2 depending on the displayed graphics Color 7 MP7353 1 or MP732x 3 depending on the displayed graphics Color 8 MP7350 or MP7320 8 Color 9 MP7357 1 or MP7320 9 Color 10 MP7354 1 or MP7320 10 Color 11 MP7356 2 or MP7320 11 Color 12 MP7356 1 or MP7320 12 Color 13 MP7354 2 or MP7320 13 Color 14 MP7352 2 or MP7320 14 Color 15 MP7351 or MP7320 15 Colors 1 to 5 or 1 2 and 4 with NC software 24305 and 24307 are background colors and contrast poorly Color 2 in particular is the background color for the PLC window and so cannot be used as a foreground color in this window Colors 11 and 12 are the foreground colors that go with background color 2 depending on how the machine parameters are grouped and should therefore be given preference for displaying dialogues and status information The NC control uses color 15 to display error messages and is therefore recommended for displaying alarms and error conditions If color O is specified then the text appears in the same color as the last disp
371. ers with ascending numbering are loaded into the Word Accumulator Each operand occupies 1 bit in the Accumulator The designated operand address occupies the LSB in the Accumulator the designated address 1 the LSB 1 and so on In this way the last affected operand occupies the MSB If necessary the Accumulator is filled according to the sign bit 3 1 6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD LD Abbreviation for the PLC Editor LD LOAD DOUBLE WORD Execution time us 40 7 to 46 5 Number of bytes 16 Operands M O T C Operation With the command LD 32 Markers Inputs Outputs Timers or Counters with ascending numbering are loaded into the Word Accumulator Each operand occupies 1 bit in the Accumulator The designated operand address occupies the LSB in the Accumulator the designated address 1 the LSB 1 and so on In this way the last affected operand occupies the MSB If necessary the Accumulator is filled according to the sign bit 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 41 L 1 Example for the Commands LB LW and LD Via the Inputs 13 to 110 a binary coded value is to be read in and assigned to Byte B8 for further use Initial state Line Instruction Bit 1 LB I3 2 B8 Line 1 Inputs I3 to 110 are loaded into the Word Accumulator Bit O to Bit 7 SVa Input I3 1 Input I7 0 Input l4 1 Input I8 1 Input I5 1 Input I9 1 Input I6 0 Input 110 0 Accumulator Contents 15 7 0 XX XX XX XX XX X
372. es 2 4 Mechanical vibration Permissible vibration lt 0 5g 2 5 Mounting position Note the following fundamental points on mounting mechanical accessibility permissible environmental conditions electrical noise immunity the electrical regulations which are in force in your country El 3 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 01 98 e 2 5 1 Logic unit HEIDENHAIN recommends the following mounting position LE 407 le gt 577 gt 110 Minimum clearance 80 for servicing recommended approx 250mm pte vd eege z ge Air outlet K Maintain clearance for screwdriver Connecting cables must not hinder swivel movement s o of the control At C 4 2 Air inlet ff x C i 5 246 E EgEele Leit ge x Measuring point for ambient temperature Free space for air circulation Free space for servicing Illustration of max swivel range The minimum angle of swivel for exchange of subassembly should be at least 90 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 3 11 2 LE 415 Minimum clearance for servicing recommended approx 250 mm Maintain clearance for screwdriver Connecting cables must not hinder swivel movement of the control gt 577 e Lait gt 110 80 80 A0 40 1 poe be W CC e i ir
373. es the status of the screen window for the PLC status display The status is transferred bit coded to the stack Bit 0 is set when a window for PLC status display is on the selected screen This is not the case with a full page graphic display when a program is selected or in the MOD operating mode Bit 1 is set when the screen with the PLC status window is in the foreground All other bits are cancelled Call CM 9081 PL B W D lt Status of screen window gt Marker M3171 is not affected 4 6 3 Display String Module 9082 Displays a string in the screen window for the PLC status display at the specified position and in the specified color The string that is identified by the string number and which ends on the ASCII character lt NUL gt is displayed in the screen window for the PLC status display on line O top line or 1 bottom line and from column 0 left margin to 37 right margin in the specified color 1 to 15 Line O Line 1 Column 0 37 References to PLC dialogues or PLC error messages are deleted If the specified dialogue or error number is greater than the length of the corresponding file then ASCII character is displayed instead If the text contains a non displayable character except the string end then ASCII character A is displayed instead Constraints The character set that is used is determined by the size of the screen window i e the current operating mode and cannot be modified The color ref
374. eslonment ssaaeeeaaeaa 8 18 Compensation of reversal spikes 2 14 Compensation Iable 8 18 Compensation value toile 2 20 4 27 COMPIL Eanan telah Siete on e 7 12 COMPIEME Nt dronet 7 38 Complement markel 00 cceeeeeees 4 209 CONNECTION EE 3 32 Connections summary Of 3 14 Connector assignment XS 3 35 Connector assignment XI 3 36 Connector assignment A8 3 32 Connector assignments e e XI XA KS E TEE 3 25 Connector assignments X6 XI 3 26 EE 7 18 Constant feed rate 4 80 Constants Field KE sneri 7 127 Contour behaviour ou eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 4 80 Contour interpolation 0 cceeeeeeees 11 2 Contour lines cycle cce 4 180 4 182 Cont ur trainin eaa 2 18 Control and signal Ines 8 11 CONTROL OPERATIONAL PLE VO POrts iarere ii 4 120 Controlled steria n patel 4 89 ei lee BEE 3 9 Coordinate system 4 221 Coordinates read 7 145 Copy in Marker orreri 7 136 Correction table s 4 28 Correction value nanne ana ias 4 221 Count direction for handwheel 4 197 Count direction for spimndle 4 96 GOULET AALER Oe ce 7 18 7 26 Co nting Oe eege egener 4 8 4 189 COUNTINGESTE Dis d vies ed 4 7 Current tele EE 4 14 Cutting machines cece 4 275 Cycle LE eebe E due 9 2 GY CIENT Ae ee 4 117 Cycle TI 4s sscaiieeelabaiee AT 4 118 vele pes peter lee 4 144 Cycles Cylinder interpolation 0 cccc eee 4 41 Cylinder surface o oo ccceeeeeeeeeeee
375. essing of two program branches depending on the value in the Logic Accumulator The ELSE branch can be omitted The following commands are available e IFT If Logic Accu True Following code only if Logic Accumulator 1 e IEF If Logic Accu False Following code only if Logic Accumulator 0 e ELSE else Following code only if IF not fulfilled e ENDI End of IF Structure End of IF Structure Example L 10 IFT If Logic Accu 1 Se Program code for l0 1 ELSE f can be omitted sec Program code for IO 0 can be omitted ENDI end of conditional processing Internal jump labels are generated for the IF and ELSE instructions 3 18 2 REPEAT UNTIL Structure The REPEAT UNTIL structure repeats a program sequence until a condition is fulfilled Under no circumstances must this structure wait for an external event in the cyclical PLC program to happen The following commands are available e REPEAT Repeat Repeat program sequence from here e UNTILT Until True Repeat sequence until Logic Accumulator 1 e UNTILF Until False Repeat sequence until Logic Accumulator 0 A REPEAT UNTIL loop is always run at least once Example 8 M100 end of previous chain REPEAT repeat following code SE Code to be executed LX load Index Register gt K100 Check Index Register UNTILT repeat until X gt 100 An internal jump label is generated for the REPEAT UNTIL structure 7 128 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 9
376. etching and condensing is limited as follows Evaluated data Data Pixels smallest display 4096 8 1 max stretched display 64 1 8 The length of the displayed window and its beginning as an absolute position within the recording length of the data is displayed as a bar scroll bar in the status field 11 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o 01 98 BC 110B S 260 520 01 TE 400 4 Cable overview 250 517 02 TNC 425 o PL 410 B PL 410 B PA 110 o H H SE 263 371 x2 263 371 x2 262 651 01 E E BECH 20m Bees 293 757 01 o EEE H oco a VL Extension cable 40m o ooo0 ooo i i i i opp o ara o00 ge for separation points with connecting cable coo eo omen o ooo D o C 0000 000 L L d for extending existing connecting cable d VB Connecting cable between two components that do not have their own cable KA Cable adapter 30 03 95 C ti bl yp vB S 477 Ke 263 954 263 954 289 111 included with BC 110B Encoders for position control VB KA Accessories 60m 244 005 274 556 VL VL 272 291 HR 332 263 956 263 955i vB Je Ga Zeches 266 064 289 111 HR 130 254 040 h o000 HR 330 IE D I IJ 251534 VL om o 889 Cable assembly VB 289 111 KA 267 269 281 429 Gs 909 VB p HR 150 268 371 HRA 110 ani a ee ee 261 097 01 REN HH H H ES i S re IF arte lt RS 422 C Adapter block ee Step switch 249
377. etected when the transfer was initialized Call PS BMW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt PS K BMV D Number of source string in string buffer 0 3 gt CM 9103 Error status after call M3171 0 String is transmitted 1 Error condition see above 4 8 5 Receive String across Data Interface Module 9104 With Module 9104 a string can be read from the receive buffer of an serial interface to one of the 4 string buffers and the receive buffer reset Constraints The interface must be assigned to the PLC and initialized by Module 9100 before Module 9104 is called Module 9104 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job Possible errors The call parameters are outside the permitted range 0 1 for the interface 0 3 for the string number The interface is not assigned to the PLC The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job There is no complete string in the receive buffer The string in the receive buffer is longer than 127 characters 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 165 2 Call PS BMW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt PS K BMWV D Number of destination string in string buffer 0 3 gt CM 9104 Error status after call M3171 0 String was read 1 Error condition see above 7 166 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 8 6 Transmit Binary Data across Data Interface Module 9105 Module 9105 transmits a block of binary values from the Word RA
378. eter 1 Q1 Q31 Cycle parameter 2 Q2 Q32 Cycle parameter 14 Q14 044 MP7251 determines whether the values of the Q parameters which are changed in the OEM cycles by calculation or assignment are globally transferred to the called program e g in the case of nesting of OEM cycles With machine parameter MP7251 the range of Q parameters from Q 100 MP7251 to Q99 is defined as global The operation of global and local Q parameters may be shown by reference to following example MP7251 40 Q 100 40 Q60 gt Q60 to Q99 are global Q parameters and Q1 to O59 are local Q parameters MP7251 40 MP7251 lt 40 Q60 global Q60 local BEGIN PGM 100 MM FNO Q1 1 1 0 1 0 FNO O60 5 1 5 1 5 CYCL DEF 69 0 OEMCYCLE 1 1 5 1 5 CYCL DEF 69 1 Q1 2 2 5 2 5 BEGIN PGM 99999969 MM DLG DEF 0 32 ENT Q1 O1 10 12 5 12 5 FN1 Q60 O60 10 12 15 12 15 END PGM 99999969 MM STOP 2 15 2 5 END PGM 100 MM 9 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Creating OEM cycles 01 98 e MP7240 Inhibit program input for Program name OEM cycle number in EPROMI Input value O or 1 0 inhibit 1 not inhibit MP7250 Difference between O parameter number for DLG CALL and DLG DEF block in OEM cycles Input range O to 50 MP7251 Number of global Q parameters transferred from OEM cycle to calling program Input range O to 100 OEM cycles stored in the PLC EPROM can be inhibited in the PLC program via fla
379. ets with free programmed contours Cycles 6 14 15 16 can be changed by machine parameters The choices are Whether a channel should first be milled around the contour and the pocket cleared out afterwards or the pocket cleared out first and then a channel milled round the contour Whether the channel should be milled in a clockwise or anti clockwise direction Under which conditions programmed pockets should be merged The choice is between merging programmed pockets when the programmed contours overlap or when the tool centre paths intersect Whether the channel milling should be performed in one operation for all stepovers or whether for each peck depth channel milling and clearing out should be performed alternately Whether after the pocket has been machined the tool should be moved back to the initial position before the cycle was called or should merely be moved to setup clearance The programmed contours of two pockets have a small overlap MP7420 Bit 2 0 entry 0 The control clears out the pockets separately since the tool centre paths do not intersect Material will remain in inside corners MP7420 Bit 2 1 entry 4 The control clears out the pockets jointly since the programmed contours overlap No material will remain in inside corners 4 146 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 1 MP7420 Cycles for milling pockets with free programmed contours
380. everal times in the same scan the tool is oriented with the parameters of the last call Ifthe module is called while the tool is still being oriented from a previous PLC scan the call is ignored The module works only in the cyclic PLC program If the module is called while the spindle is turning the transferred direction is ignored The spindle is always oriented in the direction in which it is already turning When the values 2 to 4 are transferred it is possible to start an orientation to the angle last defined in CYCL DEF 13 The transferred angle is added to the value from CYCL DEF 13 An additional spindle preset therefore can be transferred from the PLC The nominal position during tool measurement with TT 110 is transferred exactly as with CYCL DEF 13 lf Ois transferred as the spindle speed the speed is taken from MP3520 1 The module can function only if M2719 1 word processing Possible errors The module was called from a SUBMIT Job The parameter for the direction is erroneous The spindle is already being oriented Anegative spindle speed was transferred Call PS B W D K lt Angle gt 1 10 000 or additional preset with value from CYCL DEF 13 PS BMW D K lt RPM gt 1 1 000 revolution per minute 0 value from MP3520 1 PS BMW D K lt Direction of rotation gt 1 Negative direction M04 0 Direction of the shortest path 1 Positive direction M03 2 Same as 1 but with angle
381. f it must be grounded ensure that the ground line is short and noise immune 3 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Power supply 01 98 i l X2 Triggering Measuring eo ro Adapter touch probe touch probe Va V 24 H ES X22 l eo Adapter RS 422 i i 1 X12 X14 1 ag X23 Ba Handwheel 1 ce X43 oo lt Display Ga Unit Li X45 8x24 Matrix es T Keyboard 2 Unit BS 4mm Z Machine i Op Panel Aa U ee Terminal box 1 Axis 1 2 3 4 5 2 Axis q__ Spindle 3 Axis DEDERE m 4 Axis Spin ji 5 Axis Spindle Motor control with nominal value difference input bk Spindle Test point e Fault voltg OV Motor control Test Point 2 A x housing Fault voltg with OV without nominal grounded nominal value difference value input input To prevent earth circuits the measuring E voltages should not be gruonded E If it must be grounded gt ensure that the line is short and noise E E immune 3 z KEN ES Pal ga i A grounded nominal input results in an earth circuit Therefore ensure that the OV and ground line are short and noise immune 6mm 2 6mm A 2 6mm 6mm 2 6mm 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Power supply 3 21 Is
382. f speeds stop machining feed rates rapid traverse In such cases one can introduce a kink point which gives the following advantages for lower rates a high K i e a larger voltage step per um of positional deviation for higher rates above the machining rates a lower Ky The position of the kink point is determined by machine parameter MP1830 In the higher range the Ky factor is multiplied by the factor from MP1820 UVI A 9 MP1810 MP1820 MP1830 MP1810 ky sa The kink point must lie above the range of machining feeds Under these conditions the lag can be calculated as follows ve Luc 100 MP1830 zl Y 100 MP1820 100 MP1820 Multiplication factor for the Ky factor Entry 0 001 to 1 000 MP1820 0 X axis MP1820 1 Y axis MP1820 2 Z axis MP1820 3 4th axis MP1820 4 5th axis MP1830 Kink point Entry 0 000 to 100 000 MP1830 0 Axis X MP1830 1 Axis Y MP1830 2 Axis Z MP1830 3 4th axis MP1830 4 5th axis 4 72 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes El 01 98 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 73 i 3 2 2 Feedforward control Control with feedforward control means that the nomin
383. ference acts simultaneously and by the same amount on both signal lines At the receiver only the differential voltage of the two signal lines is evaluated and therefore the radiated interference is unimportant Considerably longer lines can therefore be used and because of the suppression of interference the transfer speed can be considerably higher Physical connections Sender Empfanger Transmitter Receiver TxD gt gt RxD TxD Ubertragungsstrecke Transmission path 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 15 o Ei 2 3 2 Signal levels On a RS 422 V 11 interface the signals are both transmitted and received as differential voltage A positive differential voltage corresponds to logic 0 OFF and a negative differential voltage to logic 1 ON Differential voltages between Vamin 2V and Vadmax 5V are transmitted and the control unit detects the differential voltages between Vdmin 0 2V and Vgmax DV as a logically defined level Ug V Ausgang Eingang Output Input 6 5 0 Lou OFF OFF 2 2 1 H ON ON 5 6 2 3 3 Signal designations With a RS 422 V 11 interface the following signals are transmitted as differential signals Data signals TxD TxD RxD RxD Control and verification signals RTS RTS CTS CTS DSR DSR DTR DTR 8 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 2
384. fl J4 A o EE ca zo ale alt QI in J A A X1 x3 X2 d Amm g OLL 3d VOL 16 5 PLC expansion boards PL 400 360 1 gt l 14 2 04 8 9 Kei o 14 3 04 391 1 15 4 04 340 0 2 13 386 008 f 3 78 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01 98 L PL 410 282 lt TIT d 23 5 2350 2 of P 9 252 008 g 18 0 5 52 5 Tac o 07 io 3 6 PL Eingange 1 0 5 47 5 me 14 PL INPUTS 044 02 ei y T A 9 3 J gt DIA 37 NN ULT ULT RI CO SX a So J a8 Sg ge S Sjo NIS i e e ER IINIT A A i ejeje Se glel e E bai
385. for commissioning and stored either in EPROM or RAM see PLC programming Machine parameter MP4010 see section Display and operation selects whether the processing uses a PLC program from EPROM or from RAM The PLC program in RAM is used for commissioning purposes It only makes sense to create an EPROM when all functions are operating without error In case of doubt please contact HEIDENHAIN customer service 16 3 3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine Since the EMERGENCY STOP circuit is very important for the machine it is vital that it is tested Test the Function Control operational according to the section EMERGENCY STOP routine Test the EMERGENCY STOP circuit by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP keys and by traversing past the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches 1 4 262 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 o 16 3 4 Testing the direction of traverse Test the controls for the direction of traverse according to the following diagram effective machine parameters MP210 count direction of the measuring system signals MP1040 polarity of the nominal value voltage MP1320 direction of traverse on passing over the reference marks START Switch on line voltage Was gross positioning error or direction of traverse wrong or direction YES Modify traverse wrong when MP210 approaching MP1040 ref marks MP1320 A NO Switch Reset curre
386. fore continuing the program As soon as marker M2480 is set by the PLC the NC resets the strobe signal M2043 The marker M2480 may only be set in one PLC cycle Marker Function Set Reset M2043 Gear code change signal NC NC M2480 Acknowledgement PLC PLC Gear change completed M2814 Activation of a gear range and spindle speed PLC NC via PLC D356 Programmed spindle speed NC D756 Set spindle speed from the PLC NC PLC programmed spindle speed W256 G code for S analogue NC An alternating S analogue voltage can be produced for changing gear For this purpose the marker M2490 and the marker M2491 must be alternately set and reset by the PLC This may be achieved by interrogating a particular timer in the PLC program The markers M2490 and M2491 are reset to stop the spindle The output voltage is defined by MP3240 2 Marker Function Set Reset M2490 Spindle rotation left for gear change PLC PLC M2491 Spindle rotation right for gear change PLC PLC MP3240 2 Jog voltage for gear change Entry 0 000 to 9 999 V 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 101 2 Ki The direction of spindle rotation after the gear change is determined by the PLC program with the markers M2485 to M2487 see Direction of spindle rotation Machine parameter MP3030 can be used to determine whether an axis halt should occur on a TOOL CALL with only a spindle speed output If an axis halt is not permitted then no PLC positioning d
387. function with MP7160 Then however it is no longer possible to cut the thread more than once M2095 and M2048 are set while the cycle is running Positioning window reached MP7150 Ramp from Oriented stop MP3410 3 Oriented stop M05 ee EA Acknowledge ment of M function M2095 Cycle End of start cycle M2499 El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 117 e The positioning window from MP7150 is effective for the tool axis while Cycle 17 is being run The input value must be less than or equal to MP1030 x You define the spindle acceleration and deceleration process in MP3410 3 MP7130 and MP7140 Spindle overshoot is to be avoided during acceleration and approach MP7140 Greater Smaller Greater MP7130 Smaller Marker Function Set Reset M2048 Cycle 2 or cycle 17 active NC NC M2095 Cycle 17 or cycle 18 active NC NC M2499 Open control loop S axis PLC PLC MP3410 3 Ramp slope of the spindle during rigid tapping Entry 0 0000 to 1 9999 V msec MP7130 Spindle run in characteristic Entry 0 001 to 10 000 min matching MP1520 MP7140 Transient response of spindle on acceleration Entry 0 001 to 1 000 matching MP1520 MP7150 Positioning window for tool axis during rigid tapping Entry 0 0001 to 2 0000 mm MP7160 MP7160 Spindle orientation with Cycle 17 Entry 0 or 1 0 spindle orientation before Cycle 17 1 no spindle orientation wi
388. g for instance with a pallet changer Marker Function Set Reset M2061 END PGM M02 or M30 has been executed NC NC 6 16 Overwrite Q parameters The values in the O Parameters Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC In this way information from the PLC can be transferred to the machining program The value which is to be transferred is stored in Doubleword D528 The O parameter which is to be overwritten is defined in Word W516 The transfer is initiated by the strobe marker M2713 during an M S T strobe The Doubleword D528 has a multiple usage See also the sections PLC positioning and Datum shift correction Address Function W516 Number of the O parameter to be overwritten Q100 to Q107 0 to 7 D528 Value to be transferred to the O Parameter 4 154 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o Marker M2713 Function Set Reset Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the PLC NC Q Parameter defined in W516 6 17 Arc end point tolerance The control uses the NC data which is entered to calculate the deviation in the arc radius between the beginning and end of the arc If the tolerance defined in MP7431 is exceeded the error message Arc end point in correct will appear MP7431 Arc end point tolerance Entry 0 0001 to 0 016 mm 6 18 Radius compensation R R A path to be traversed can be increased or decreased by the tool radius by entering R or R The input dialogue is not
389. g accumulator 7 32 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 2 El 33 SC GLOBAL EXTERN not at start of file The commands GLOBAL or EXTERN have been written after another program code in the file These commands must always come before the program code 34 S C Too many modules An attempt has been made to link more than 64 files into one program with the USES instruction 35 GC File not found A file linked with USES cannot be found An attempt has been made to link a file of the PLC type with MP4010 0 EPROM 36 SC File too long The program code for an individual file is bigger than 64 K so cannot be compiled The file must be split up into several files and linked with USES 37 SC Too many local labels More than 1000 labels have been issued in a file All LBL KFIELD and EXTERN instructions are added together also the invisible labels generated by structured commands The file must be split up into several files and linked with USES 38 C Too many global labels Over 1000 global labels have been defined from all participating files 39 C External label not defined A label declared as EXTERN has not been defined as GLOBAL in any of the participating modules 40 SC External label in CASE instruction A label declared as EXTERN has been entered in the CM List of a CASE instruction A local module must be defined that only calls the global module with CM in the simplest case 41 SC External
390. g and processing 1 1 1 Serial parallel Data can be transmitted in either serial or parallel format Basically data is coded in the computer system e g as bytes 8 bits and supplied to the interface in parallel In the case of serial data transmission the parallel information from the computer system has to be converted into a serial data flow by using an USART Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter The receiver accepts the serial data flow and converts it back again into parallel information Sender Empfanger Transmitter Receiver Speicher Schnittstellen Puffer Schnittstellen Puffer Speicher Memory Interface buffer Interface buffer Memory MSB o MSB 0 cs lo gt o l S SSE SEE Se 3 ICH Jo J ICH LSB LSB bh PLPP bP dein a bertragungsstrecke Transmission path A parallel interface on the other hand does not need a USART just a line driver Typically the connection between the computer system and a peripheral consists of a 36 way ribbon cable Its maximum length is generally about 3 metres f 8 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 01 98 2 Sender Empfanger
391. g gt PS K B W D lt Destination address in Word RAM gt CM 9054 Example SO Hex 63 BO 99 0110 0011 Error status after call M3171 0 Binary block was converted 1 Error condition see above 4 5 String Processing 4 5 1 Copying a Number from a String Module 9070 Searches for a numerical value in the source string in the string buffer with the specified source string number The first numerical value found is copied as a string to the string identified by the destination string number Any conflict between source and destination strings is not checked the source string is overwritten if necessary but the module will still function in this case The module recognizes signed and unsigned numbers with and without places after the decimal point Both the comma and the point are accepted as the decimal character The distance in characters of the first character after the number found in the source string is also recorded Possible errors The numbers of source or destination string are outside the valid range 0 3 There is no number in the specified source string The source string has been searched without an end of string being found The found number string is longer than 79 characters i e internal overflow Call PS K BAW D Number of source string gt PS K BAW D Number of destination string gt CM 9070 PL B W D lt Offset end of number string in source string gt 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC
392. gating chain must always start with a load command It is not possible to use a gating command Example The complement of Byte B6 and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 B6 hex Byte B8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 ae A X XX XXX XXX XXX KX XK XK X 1 LN B6 000000000001001001 2 A B5 000000000000001000 00101010 3 B8 000000000000001000 00001000 Line 1 The inverted contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Byte B8 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 39 o 3 1 3 LOAD TWO S COMPLEMENT L Abbreviation for the PLC Editor L LOAD MINUS Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 5 to 1 6 0 5 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 3 Number of bytes 8 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation The contents of the addressed Operand B W D or a Constant K are loaded into the Word Accumulator as a two s complement In addition the Accumulator is filled if necessary according to the sign bit The two s complement allows negative numbers to be stored i e a number loaded with the L command appears in the Accumulator with an inverted sign This command may only be used with Word execution Example The contents of Byte B5 is to be negated added to Byte B6 and t
393. ge II 3000 rom at 8V MP3510 1 MP3210 1 Upper S override limit 125 MP3310 0 Lower S override limit 50 MP3310 1 Max output speed for gear range II 3375 rom MP3515 1 Minimum output voltage 1V MP3240 1 4 1 4 Gear change Gear change is controlled by the PLC program Up to eight gear ranges are available coded in Word W256 The NC enters the gear code for the gear ranges one to eight in Word W256 according to the programmed spindle speeds in the NC program see MP3510 After setting the gear code the marker M2043 is set by the NC as a change signal The spindle speed which is programmed in the NC program as TOOL CALL S is stored in Doubleword D356 and D756 in 1 1000 rpm by the NC If a different spindle speed from the spindle speed fixed by the NC is to be activated by the PLC the speed must be entered by the PLC in D756 this can then be activated by marker M2814 A different gear range from that which is selected by the NC can be activated by setting Word W256 and marker M2814 with the PLC Word W256 remains unchanged until the next gear change signal Marker M2814 is reset by the NC after the gear change Check that the spindle speed selected by the PLC is within the spindle speed limits of the selected gear range 4 100 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 2 1 The PLC program must transfer the gear code to the machine The NC waits for the acknowledgement signal Gear change completed M2480 be
394. gned number and an exponent to the base 10 If the sign is missing the number is detected as positive Both the comma and the point are accepted as the decimal character If the full extent of the mantissa cannot be notated in a doubleword then the last places are omitted and the exponent corrected accordingly If possible the exponent is adjusted to correspond with the ASCII notation of the number Possible errors The number of the source string is outside the valid range 0 3 The source string does not contain a string that can be interpreted as a number The string overflows the end of the string buffer 128 characters were read without an end of string being found Call PS K B WV D Number of source string gt CM 9052 PL B W D lt Numerical value gt PL B W D lt Exponent 10Exx gt Error status after call M3171 0 String was converted 1 Error condition see above 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 149 2 f 4 4 4 Conversion Binary to ASCII Hexadecimal Module 9053 Converts a block of binary values from the word marker range into a string of ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers The specified number of bytes is read from the place specified by the source address and converted to a hexadecimal coded ASCII string Each byte in the source block makes 2 characters in the destination string the destination string is identified by the destination string number Possible errors The address for the so
395. gral factor MP1140 Movement monitoring MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment MP1900 Select axes with digital speed controller Entry XXXXX Bit O X axis 0 Without digital speed controller Bit 1 Y axis 1 With digital speed controller Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 11 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o MP1910 MP1910 0 MP1910 1 MP1910 2 MP1910 3 MP1910 4 The entry is axis specific and made in counting steps MP1910 x monitors the theoretically calculated output voltage of the speed controller If this voltage exceeds the limit specified in MP1910 x the error message Gross positioning error 3F appears This voltage is always limited Monitor speed controller drive monitoring Entry 1 to 16 777 215 counting steps X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis to 10 V at the output The input value for MP1910 x can therefore be calculated as follows MP 1910 x Ulimit MP1920 x 9 7 uV The speed controller integrated in the control system is a PI controller The P and components of the speed controller can be set in machine parameters MP1920 x and MP1940 x MP1920 Integral component for speed controller I component Entry 0 to 65 535 Recommended input range 50 to 100 MP1920 0 Xaxis MP1920 1 Y axis MP1920 2 Zaxis MP1920 3 4th axis MP1920 4 5th axis MP1925 Limiting the integral component for speed controller Entry 0 000 to 65 535 s Recomm
396. gram Program section repeats subprograms program calls functions Fixed cycles Pecking tapping slot cutting rectangular and circular pockets SL cycles milling cycles whose contour descriptions are stored in subprograms the machine tool manufacturer can also integrate customized macros 1 These functions must be implemented by the OEM 2 3D straight line without radius compensation 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 2 3 1 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Q Parameters Mathematical functions X sin cos a angle a from sin a and cos at a fa2 b2 tan arcsin arctan arccos an en In log absolute value of a number the constant m negation truncate places before or after the decimal point logical comparisons gt lt Parenthetical calculations Program test By graphic simulation of the part program Parallel operation Yes no graphics Yes with graphics File management up to 100 files programs in HEIDENHAIN and DIN ISO format also tool PLC datum shift pallet tables and text files Tool compensation Tool length tool radius in machining plane Three dimensional tool compensation with surface normal vectors Central tool file Various tool tables for 254 tools max each with flexible pocket coding tool life monitoring and sister tool organization Data interfaces V 24 RS 232 C and V 11 RS 422 e Blockwise transfer programs that exceed the contro
397. gs M2240 to M2271 Inhibited cycles cannot be defined in NC programs If programs with definitions of inhibited OEM cycles are transferred to the control unit an error message ERRORz is generated in the transferred program and the program cannot be executed Flag Function Set Reset M2240 Inhibit OEM cycle 68 PLC PLC M2241 Inhibit OEM cycle 69 PLC PLC M2242 Inhibit OEM cycle 70 PLC PLC M2271 Inhibit OEM cycle 99 PLC PLC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Creating OEM cycles 9 5 i 1 2 Q parameters and functions in OEM cycles Q parameter programming can be used to create OEM cycles with variable program data with which for example extremely varied drilling patterns curves e g spirals sinusoidal ellipse parabola and shaped components can be milled A detailed description of Q parameters and functions is given in the TNC 407 TNC 415 Operating Manual Q parameters with special significance During a program run data is transferred to the following Q parameters When creating OEM cycles these can be read and also overwritten Q108 Tool radius of tool last called Q109 Current tool axis Q110 M function last output for spindle rotation direction Q111 Coolant on off Q112 Overlapping factor for pocket milling from MP7430 Q113 Main program contains measurements in millimetres or inches FN Functions with special significance The following FN functions can be used to execute various tasks such as error messages a
398. gth taken into account MP7290 Position display step Entry 0 to 6 0 0 1 mm or 0 1 1 0 05 mm or 0 05 2 0 01 mm or 0 01 3 0 005 mm or 0 005 4 0 001 mm or 0 001 5 0 0005 mm or 0 0005 TNC 415 B only 6 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 TNC 415 B only The following input values apply for software types 259 96 TNC 415 A and 243 02 TNC 407 0 0 001 mm or 0 001 1 0 005 mm or 0 005 2 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 TNC 415 A only 4 134 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o MP7290 0 MP7290 1 MP7290 2 MP7290 3 MP7290 4 Marker M2096 M2097 M2098 M2099 M2148 X axis Y axis Z axis Ath axis 5th axis Function Set Reset X Key last pressed NC NC Y Key last pressed Z Key last pressed Key IV last pressed Key V last pressed 6 4 2 Position display with rotary axes Display mode and range of traverse MP810 is used to set whether the range of traverse limits software limit switches are active for rotary axes it also defines the modulo value for the counting mode An entry of 0 means that the software limit switches are active and the display ranges from 99 999 999 to 99 999 999 Any other entry defines the modulo value for the position target position and non linear axis error correction The software limit switches are not active for all entries other than 0 MP810 MP810 0 MP810 1 MP810 2 MP810 3 MP810 4 Display mode for rotary axes and PLC axes Entry 0 000
399. h TOOL CALL PLC PLC M2484 Feedback T code P code with TOOL DEF PLC PLC M2400 Tool number 0 programmed NC NC M2717 Geometry of the tool from W264 PLC NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 229 o 15 2 1 Output of tool number fixed pocket coding Evaluating the tool number is adequate for fixed tool pocket coding MP7480 is used to select whether the tool number should be transferred to the PLC with every TOOL CALL TOOL DEF block or only when the tool number changes input values for MP7480 2 or 1 With this setting the tool number is transferred to the word W262 when a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF block is executed W264 is not used If MP7261 gt 0 then pocket numbers are displayed in the pocket table Entering 5 or 6 in MP7480 0 transfers the pocket number to W262 and the tool number to W264 Unlike the setting with variable pocket coding MP7480 3 or 4 the assignment of tool and pocket numbers in the pocket table does not change 4 230 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 o 15 2 2 Output of pocket number variable pocket coding With variable pocket coding the NC must transfer the pocket number of the called tool to the PLC MP7480 3 or 4 In this setting the pocket number is filed in word W262 In addition to the pocket number the NC also transfers the current tool number in W264 Variable pocket management the assignment of tool number to pocket number in the tool table is handled by the NC
400. he M Function M20 to activate a spindle orientation to the value which is stored in MP4210 47 Main program LN S Activation of the orientation to the value from the HEIDENHAIN cycle M1 M1 M2045 M12 M2482 Generate logic ONE Buffer marker which is continuously ONE M strobe inactive Spindle orientation cycle active Acknowledgement of M code L M1919 Decoded M function 19 A M2045 M code change signal AN M12 Orientation cycle active CMT 180 Activation of the Orientation from the cycle S M12 Orientation cycle active 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 109 e Activation of the orientation to the Value of MP4210 47 L M1920 Decoded M function 20 A M2045 M code change signal AN M12 Orientation cycle active CMT 181 Activation of the orientation from the MP S M12 Orientation cycle active Acknowledgement of the orientation L M1919 Decoded M function 19 O M1920 Decoded M function 20 A M2045 M code change signal A M2007 Spindle in position AN M2712 Strobe for spindle orientation S M2482 Acknowledgement of M code EM Main program end LBL 180 Transfer positional value from the spindle orientation cycle L K O Load the constant value ZEROI BS K 31 Set Bit 31 to ONE D592 Position spindle orientation iL M1 Buffer marker which is continuously ONE S M2712 Strobe for spindle orientation EM LBL 181 Transfer positional value from the mac
401. he axis is stationary off With this marker the PLC can ensure that the current tool geometry is active even when the tool changing process Is interrupted The TOOL DEF block can be used to pre position the tool changer After a tool has been changed the next tool is programmed with TOOL DEF The PLC evaluates the tool and pocket number and pre positions the tool changer at the follow up tool Example of NC program TOOL CALL 1 Z 500 TOOL DEF 2 L Z 20 RO F500 M03 TOOL CALL 2 Z 1000 TOOL DEF 3 Variable and Fixed Pocket Coding The system can be operated with either variable or fixed tool pocket coding Machine parameter MP7480 defines whether the tool number or the pocket number is transferred to the PLC For variable pocket coding the pocket number must be transferred to the PLC MP7480 3 or 4 With fixed pocket coding it is advisable to work with the tool number MP7480 1 or 2 When executing a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF block depending on the setting of MP7480 the NC transfers either only the tool number or the pocket number and the tool number of the programmed tool to the word W262 or W262 and W264 respectively The strobe marker M2046 TOOL CALL or M2047 TOOL DEF is set The NC does not reset these strobe markers until the PLC sets marker M2483 TOOL CALL or M2484 TOOL DEF after processing the tool or pocket number The machining program is resumed when strobe markers M2046 M2047 are reset If tool number 0 is exec
402. he currently selected axis is evaluated so as to be traversed with the keys MP7640 4 MP7641 0 and MP7645 0 0 Key on HR 322 PLC input output key 1170 key 1169 LED 0105 LED 0106 Main program LBL 1 PS K 9 Interrogate selected handwheel axis with module 9035 CM 9035 PL BO E K 0 Delete the 8 markers for Manual B M2456 Traverse of axis X to IV E K FF Set the 8 complement markers B M2472 L MO PLC outputs 0100 ON MO to 0106 are deleted R 0100 All LEDs are R 0101 turned off except the R 0102 LED of the selected axis R 0103 R 0104 R 0105 R 0106 Case BO Evaluation of selected handwheel axis CM 10 X axis CM 11 Y axis CM 12 Z axis ENDC EM LBL 10 X axis LN M2457 Unless X is active A 1170 and key is pressed S M2456 traverses in R M2472 X direction S 0106 LED on key lights up EM LBL 11 Y axis EM LBL 12 Z axis EM LBL 13 Axis IV EM 4 200 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 01 98 L Ei 10 4 HR 410 Portable Handwheel MP7640 6 With MP7645 0 you define whether the keys on the handwheel are evaluated by the NC or the PLC MP7645 0 0 MP7645 0 1 Keys are evaluated by NC Keys are evaluated by PLC O96 1160 097 1161 ES X Z 098 O99 1162 1163 ACTUAL 0100 0103 POSITION CAPTURE 1164 1167 FEED RATE FEED RATE FEED RATE 01 04 OI 05 01 06 SLOW MEDIUM FAST 1168 1169 1170 0109 0110 0111 0109 0110 0111 1173 1174
403. he machine parameters concerned are loaded with nought the standard settings apply E Input A Output MP5203 ASCII character for input identification E MP5203 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5203 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5203 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range 0 to 127 MP5205 ASCII character for input identification E MP5205 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5205 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5205 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range O to 127 8 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o 2 6 External programming In the case of external programming and subsequent transfer attention should be paid to the following lt CR gt lt LF gt or lt LF gt must be programmed at the start of the program and after each program block After the end of program block lt CR gt lt LF gt and in addition the end of text control character must be programmed standard setting lt ETX gt or via MP 5201 x Blank characters between the individual words can be omitted in NC programs When reading in DIN blocks is not needed at the end of the block Comments are separated from the NC block by a semicolon Comments located in front of the program are not stored Block numbers do not need to be programmed they are generated by the TNC only for dialog programming 2 7 Interfacing with other equipment Any other external devices can be interfaced with the TNC by using configurable operating modes ET1 EXT2 EXTS3 For this pur
404. he operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator 32 bits Then the contents of the operand are multiplied with the contents of the Word Accumulator The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further If the multiplication is not correctly executed the Marker M3168 is set otherwise it is reset Example A Constant and a value stored in Word W6 are to be multiplied The result is then stored in Doubleword D8 Initial state Constant 100 dec Word W6 20 dec Doubleword D8 In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents X X 1 L K100 1 x x x x N x x CH CH x CH CH x 2 x W 0 2 0 3 D8 2 000 2 000 Line 1 The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator are multiplied by the contents of Word W6 Line 3 The result is assigned to Doubleword D8 7 68 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o f 3 4 4 DIVISION Abbreviation for the PLC Editor DIVIDE Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 6 6 to 7 7 6 6 to 7 0 6 3 to 6 7 Number of bytes 16 14 16 An error condition Divisor 0 results in an execution time of 1 0 to 1 8 us Operands B W D K Operation With arithmeti
405. he result assigned to Byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 15 dec Byte B6 20 dec Byte B8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 Le El ue wuer pg EE a ml 3 B8 Zo00000000000000107 a 5 0000010 To aid understanding of this example the contents of the Accumulator and operands are shown as decimal values in parentheses Line 1 The contents of Byte B5 are loaded into the Accumulator and the sign of the value is inverted Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B6 are added Line 3 The result is assigned to Byte B8 7 40 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L f 3 1 4 LOAD BYTE LB Abbreviation for the PLC Editor LB LOAD BYTE Execution time us 10 8 to 12 5 Number of bytes 18 Operands M O T C Operation With the command LB 8 Markers Inputs Outputs Timers or Counters with ascending numbering are loaded into the Word Accumulator Each operand occupies 1 bit in the Accumulator The designated operand address occupies the LSB in the Accumulator the designated address 1 the LSB 1 and so on In this way the last affected operand occupies the MSB If necessary the Accumulator is filled according to the sign bit 3 1 5 LOAD WORD LW Abbreviation for the PLC Editor LW LOAD WORD Execution time ps 21 0 to 23 8 Number of bytes 18 Operands M O T C Operation With the command LW 16 Markers Inputs Outputs Timers or Count
406. here are three ways in which the PLC can orient the spindle e with Module 9171 e with Marker M2712 e through initiator with M2501 Spindle orientation with Module 9171 Module 9171 makes it possible to define the velocity angle and the direction of rotation for spindle orientation Marker M2712 is set as long as the spindle is being oriented See the description of Module 9171 in the PLC Programming chapter Spindle orientation with Marker M2712 If spindle orientation is activated with M2712 the nominal position is taken from D592 The nominal position is based on the reference point and can for example be set in machine parameter MP4210 x It must be copied into the Doubleword D592 The nominal position can also be take from the Orientation cycle CYCL DEF 13 In this case MSB of D592 1 and the other bits are set to 0 This must be realized through the PLC program Marker M2408 is set during execution of Cycle 13 The speed of spindle orientation is taken from MP3520 1 For the orientation of a stationary spindle the direction is taken that has the shortest path to the stop position provided that at the start the distance between the nominal and actual positions is not greater than the positioning window MP3420 If the distance is greater than the positioning window the spindle will be positioned according to Marker M2656 with M03 or M04 Sequence of spindle orientation with Marker M2712 or Module 9171 The spindle speed is red
407. hine parameter L D956 MP4210 47 PLC positional value D592 Position spindle orientation L M1 Buffer marker which is continuously ONE S M2712 Strobe for spindle orientation EM 4 110 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 e 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 111 4 4 Tapping There are two tapping cycles available in the control e tapping with floating tap holder and e rigid tapping Tapping with floating tap holder is possible for both analogue and BCD coded spindle speed output Rigid tapping is only possible for analogue spindle speed output The tapping cycle is defined in the NC program and can be called with CYCL CALL M03 Tapping is adjusted to the dynamic behaviour of the machine by machine parameters 4 112 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 4 4 1 Tapping with floating tap holder for analogue spindle speed output The following diagram shows the sequence of events in the cycle A F KR Dwell time from CYCL DEF 2 3 MP7120 l s F a 30 ms Software controlled N 0 Ki e MP3410 0 MP7120 0 M04 j M2482 II hoo NM NN M03 wd e ee ee a EH ee es DZ M04 M2486 M05 w E
408. ial also under vibration The earthing screw of the APE 510 must be joined to the machine signal ground by a potential compensating lead 6 mm See also under the heading Earthing plan 3 38 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 01 98 2 8 2 3 TM 110 The TM 110 measuring touch probe can be mounted to the TNC 415 B and TNC 425 A special software module optional is required for digitizing with TM 110 E E Nr 284 574 mg r Id Nr 285 289 E touch probe TM 110 dl xt eecn Aw gil be WH Aa t SES 2 2 EN 2 2 Sp 15 5V ell 5 5 5 Pai A GN GN Axis X 4 a all a ox 17 h Saul 7 BL SIE BL S a 6 6 6 6 16 Li WH BK WH BK SA BN BK Zu BN BK 5 Ov 7 47 SC EK Soe 19 5V 9 SIE GNB St GN BK orf a Axis Y IER HIEL 0 10 WO 10 10 WON 20 a 15 145 ann 15 15 Geer 9 OV 16 16 RA 16 16 SS 23 5V alle 2 2 A GNI ell Sg SI Axis Z 2 RDW Taia RDM 25 ue 9 19 BLV 19 119 BL VI OI EK 18 18 Se SH 18 18 kt tt 24 bi 21 121 Ey L 91 21 13 OV 14 14 14 14 2 20 20 20 20 6 10 14 18 22 max 12m 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 3 39 L
409. iers Clamp the nominal value lead to 0 V Disconnect and short together the nominal value inputs of the drive amplifiers O V must be applied to the input Connect the servo enable input Connect the servo enable input to 24 V thus activating the servo Connect the power supply to the drive amplifiers Rough offset adjustment If the axis moves even though the nominal value input is clamped to O V the offset potentiometer must be adjusted such that the axis comes to a stop After the offset adjustment remove the short circuit bridge on the nominal value input Rough velocity adjustment Connect battery supply to the nominal value input Adjust the battery supply to 9 V and adjust the drive motor with the tacho potentiometer to the desired speed which equals the maximum rapid traverse rate The rated speed can be read from the drive motor with a tachometer 4 258 1 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 o Tuning of the drive amplifier As far as the control is concerned the actual servo loop consists of the drive amplifier motor and axis slide see section Servo positioning The servo loop must be tuned before the position control loop in the control can be optimized To achieve this a battery supply is used to apply a 9 V step function to the nominal value input of the drive amplifier The step response can be recorded by an oscilloscope via the tachometer signa
410. igned STANDBY BACK End Module 4 248 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 e 15 3 2 Program module TOOL CALL Automatic Toolchange Main Program Clear spindle Another TOOL CALL strobe follows Module Another TOOL CALL strobe follows S N tool M tool IN Module M tool OUT Module MAN OUT IN Module CHANGE Module STANDBY Module Fetch tool to GRE1 TOOL CALL feedback S N tool out M tool in M tool out S N tool in M tool out M tool in Tool already in spindle S N tool out S N tool in 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer El 4 249 e 15 3 3 Program module STANDBY Search for tool and load in GRE1 Pocket in magazine found COMPARE P CODE Load ISTREG Load tool from WITH ISTREG to GRE1 magazine to GRE1 Module 15 3 4 Program module STANDBY BACK Return tool from GRE1 to magazine Pocket in magazine found Bring GRE1 to magazine and Return tool load GRE1 to magazine with zero f 4 250 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 L 15 3 5 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN N gt M or S gt M Manual tool follows Normal or Special tool The old tool is returned to the tool magazine and the operator is prompted to load a manual tool not in tool magazine Move GRE2 to spindle and load SPIREG Old tool out to GRE2 Turn changing As GRE1 is already arm load SPIREG zero this routine has STANDBY B
411. imit switch 4 MP912 4 Software limit switch 5 MP920 Traverse range 1 PLC EDIT 4 16 Default setting after switch on activated by PLC M2817 0 M2816 0 MP920 0 Software limit switch X MP920 1 Software limit switch Y MP920 2 Software limit switch Z M Software limit switch 4 M Software limit switch 5 MP921 Traverse range 2 PLC EDIT 4 17 ivated by PLC M2817 0 M2816 1 Software limit switch X Software limit switch Y Software limit switch Z Software limit switch 4 Software limit switch 5 MP922 Traverse range 3 PLC EDIT 4 17 ivated by PLC M2817 1 M2816 0 MP922 0 Software limit switch X MP922 1 Software limit switch Y MP922 2 Software limit switch Z MP922 3 Software limit switch 4 MP922 4 Software limit switch 5 5 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 Machine parameter MP950 MP951 MP960 Function and input Change via Datum point for positioning blocks with M92 PLC RUN Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or Values referenced to machine datum MP950 0 X axis MP950 1 Y axis MP950 2 Z axis MP950 3 4th axis MP950 4 5th axis Simulated toolchange position for TOOL CALL with PLC RUN block scan 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or Values referenced to machine datum MP951 0 X axis MP951 1 Y axis MP951 2 Z axis MP951 3 4th axis MP951 4 5th axis Machine datum PLC EDIT REF Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm or
412. individual characters see chapter Checking data the parity of the complete transferred block is also checked The BCC Block Check Character always rounds the individual bits of the transferred characters in a data transfer block to even parity Example of BCC generation Character 8 36 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o In this example program 15 that has been written in HEIDENHAIN dialog H is downloaded across the data interface EI A parity bit is also generated for the BCC with even parity the BCC parity bit in this example is assigned significance 1 The character lt DC1 gt is transmitted after the BCC This character XON is necessary for certain devices in order to explicitly request an answer from them and to reactivate the transfer The transfer of the lt DC1 gt character can be suppressed in modes EXT1 EXT2 and EXT by setting bit 3 in machine parameter 5020 X Transmission stop by DC3 to zero see section Freely configurable interfaces The lt DC1 gt character is not required when reading in a file in the format with BCC At the end of every block the receiver checks that it has transferred correctly To do this the receiver computes a BCC from the received block and compares it with the received BCC If the received BCC and the computed BCC are identical the receiver transmits the lt ACK gt character positive checkback i e the data block has been transmitted
413. indle speed S output can be either an analogue voltage output or a coded output The spindle speed is programmed in rpm in the NC program The machine parameter MP3010 determines whether the spindle speed is a coded output or an analogue output and whether the spindle orientation should be active Up to eight gear ranges can be defined by machine parameters Tapping cycles are available for tapping with and without floating tap holder MP3010 Spindle speed output Spindle orientation Entry 0 to 8 0 No spindle speed output 1 Coded output of the spindle speed only if the spindle speed changes 2 Coded output of the spindle speed at every TOOL CALL 3 Analogue output of the spindle speed and gear change signal only when the gear range is changed 4 Analogue output of the spindle speed and gear change signal at every TOOL CALL 5 Analogue output of the spindle speed and no gear change signal 6 As for Entry value 3 but with controlled spindle for orientation 7 As for Entry value 4 but with controlled spindle for orientation 8 As for Entry value 5 but with controlled spindle for orientation The functions are described in detail in the following sections 4 94 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 e 4 1 Analogue output of the spindle speed For analogue output of the spindle speed S analogue spindle speeds can be programmed from 0 to 99 999 999 rpm The programmed spindle speed is avail
414. indow 00C0800 MP7356 Status and PLC window MP7356 0 Background 00C0800 MP7356 1 Axis positions in the status display 03F2C18 MP7356 2 Status display except axis positions 03F280C MP7357 Soft key display Machine MP7357 0 Background 0000000 MP7357 1 Symbols 03F3828 MP7358 Soft key display Programming MP7358 0 Background 0000000 MP7358 1 Symbols 03F3828 MP7360 Graphics 3D view MP7360 0 Background 0000000 MP7360 1 Top surface 0203038 MP7360 2 Front face 00C1820 MP7360 3 Text display in graphics window 03F3F3F MP7360 4 Side face 0102028 MP7361 Graphics view in three planes and Oscilloscope MP7361 0 Background 0000000 MP7361 1 Plan Grid 0203038 MP7361 2 Front and side view not selected channel 0203038 MP7361 3 Cross axes and text in graphics display Cursor data screen window 03F3F3F MP7361 4 Cursor selected channel 03F0000 MP7362 Additional status display in graphics window MP7362 0 Background graphics window 0080400 MP7362 1 Background status display 00C0800 MP7362 2 Status symbols 038240C MP7362 3 Status values 03F2C18 MP7363 Interactive graphics MP7363 0 Background 0000000 MP7363 1 Resolved contour 03F3F3F MP7363 2 Subprograms and frame for zoom 0003F00 MP7363 3 Alternative solutions 0003F00 MP7363 4 Unresolved contour 03F0000 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 131 1 6 3 Graphics window The simulation graphics TNC 407 and TNC 415 or parallel graphics TNC 415
415. ine outside the software limit switch range Yes Machine moves to software limit switch Machine stops Ei 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4 61 e MP1320 Direction for traversing the reference marks Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 positive Bit 1 Y axis 1 positive Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Axis 4 Bit4 Axis5 MP1330 Feed rate for traversing the reference marks Entry 80 to 30 000 mm min MP1330 0 X axis MP1330 1 Y axis MP1330 2 Z axis MP1330 3 Axis 4 MP1330 4 Axis 5 MP1331 Feed rate for leaving the reference end position only for rotary encoders MP1350 2 Entry 80 to 500 mm min MP1331 0 X axis MP1331 1 Y axis MP1331 2 Z axis MP1331 3 Axis 4 MP1331 4 Axis 5 MP1340 Sequence for traversing reference marks Entry 0 no evaluation of the reference mark 1 X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis 4 Axis 4 5 Axis 5 MP1340 0 1st axis MP1340 1 2nd axis MP1340 2 3rd axis MP1340 3 Ath axis MP1340 4 5th axis 4 62 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 o MP1350 MP1350 0 MP1550 1 MP1350 2 MP1350 3 MP1350 4 Marker M2136 M2137 M2138 M2139 M2140 M2556 M2557 M2558 M2559 M2506 Address W272 Type of reference mark approach Entry 0 measuring system with distance coded reference marks 1 measuring system with one reference mark 2 special sequence linear measurement via rotary encoder 3 measuring system with distance coded reference mar
416. ing and editing files The functions TRACE and TABLE as well as a Syntax check on entering the PLC commands and a logical test with the Function COMPILE were introduced to make it easier to find faults in the PLC program see section Test functions 10 ms are available for a PLC run Up to 8 000 logic commands equivalent to 64 KB can be processed within this period executable memory A new PLC run commences every 20 ms in the TNC 415 and every 24 ms in the TNC 407 PLC cycle time i e every 20 ms or 24 ms the inputs are read and outputs are set 1 1 Select PLC operation PLC operation covers all functions for creating and testing the PLC programs for creating the PLC error messages and the dialogue texts for OEM cycles the Help files and compensation lists for non linear axis error correction It can be selected as follows using the code number 807 667 Select NC operating mode Programming and editing Press MOD key Enter code number 807 667 ENT key PLC operation is selected Main menu PLC operation can be stopped by pressing the soft key END or the END key Provided the TNC has not been switched off and the PLC operation has already been selected once with the code number it is possible to return to PLC operation quite simply without using the code number by means of the MOD key and the soft key PLC EDIT 1 7 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 01 98 E 1 2 PLC Main menu After
417. ing to the configuration of the other interface see Constraints The Module was not called from a Submit Job Call PS BMW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt PS B W D K lt Transfer parameters 0 from MP5xxx 2 1 from mode gt CM 9100 Error status after call M3171 0 Interface was configured for PLC 1 Error condition see above 4 8 2 Enable Data Interface Module 9101 Module 9101 cancels the assignment of a serial interface to the PLC and reassigns it to the Input Output program of the NC user interface The receive mode of the interface is cancelled Constraints Module 9101 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job Possible errors The interface was not assigned to the PLC The Module was not called from a Submit Job 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 163 2 Call PS BAW D K lt lnterface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt CM 9101 Error status after call M3171 0 Interface assignment was cancelled 1 Error condition see above 4 8 3 Status of Data Interface Module 9102 Module 9102 reads all the relevant status information about one of the two serial interfaces in bit coded form Constraints The information interface ready is only updated when the interface is assigned to either the PLC or the NC If the interface is not assigned the Module reads the status which was valid before the last interface enable whether by PLC or NC Module 9102 can also be called fr
418. ing value is activated TNC 415 B TNC 425 280 54x 06 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 280 56x 06 TNC 407 280 58x 06 Release 5 96 Improvements MP1925 Limit for integral factor of the speed controller new 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 25 e 2 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 E Mounting and electrical installation Contents 1 Hardware components 3 4 1 1 Changes in the ID number 3 6 2 Assembly hints 3 9 2 1 Electrical noise immunity 3 9 2 2 Heat generation and cooling 3 9 2 3 Humidity 3 10 2 4 Mechanical vibration 3 10 2 5 Mounting position 3 10 2 5 1 Logic unit 3 11 2 5 2 Visual display unit VDU 3 13 2 6 Degree of protection 3 13 3 Summary of connections 3 14 3 1 TNC 415 3 14 3 2 TNC 407 3 15 4 Power supply 3 16 4 1 Logic unit and PLC O board 3 16 4 1 1 NC power supply 3 16 4 1 2 PLC power supply 3 17 4 1 3 Buffer battery 3 18 4 2 Visual display unit VDU 3 19 4 3 Earthing plan 3 20 5 Measuring systems 3 24 5 1 Linear measuring systems 3 24 5 2 Angular measuring systems 3 24 5 3 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal signals 7 to 16 wApp 3 25 5 3 1 Connector assignments 3 25 5 3 2 Connecting cable 3 25 5 4 Measuring system inputs for square wave signals 3 26 5 4 1 Connector assignments 3 26 5 4 2 Connecting cable 3 26 5 5 Measuring system connections 3 28 6 Nominal value output 3 32 6 1 Connector assignment 3 32 6 2 Connecting cable 3 32 7 Reference pulse inhibit input 3 35 7
419. input The reference pulse inhibit input can be used to suppress the evaluation of the reference pulse input of each of the six measuring systems This is achieved by simply applying a positive potential 13 V to 30 3 V to the appropriate reference pulse inhibit input Pin 9 of the female connector X10 reference pulse inhibit must be connected to 0 V of the PLC power supply The reference pulse inhibit inputs are only available in the LE 415 A These inputs are normally unused See also Chapter Machine Integration 7 1 Connector assignment X10 Reference pulse inhibit LE 415 A only Flange socket with female connector insert 9 pin Pin number Assignment Screen Reference pulse inhibit input X1 Reference pulse inhibit input X2 Reference pulse inhibit input X3 Reference pulse inhibit input X4 Reference pulse inhibit input X5 Reference pulse inhibit input X6 Do not use 0 V PLC CO OO NM OQ or BI GNM 7 2 Connecting cable Standard commercially available screened cables can be used for the connections to the reference pulse inhibit inputs HEIDENHAIN can deliver a 9 pin D subminiature connector Id Nr 244 503 ZY for this purpose 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 7 Reference pulse inhibit input 3 35 o 8 Touch probe system input The following 3D touch probe systems are available from HEIDENHAIN TS 120 with cable transmission and integrated APE interface electronics TS 511 with infrared transmission
420. interval PP INT from the scanning cycles Meander and Contour Lines F mm min PP INT mm x oscillations 1 s x 60 s min This relation gives the formula for calculating the input value of MP6210 optimized F mm min PP INT mm x 60 s min Oscillations 1 s 1 The optimized probing feed rate depends on the feed rate in the normal direction MP6230 4 180 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o The feed rate in the normal direction MP6230 is the resultant velocity at which the touch probe is fed from the non deflected to the deflected condition perpendicular to the contour and vice versa Normal direction Apart from the oscillation amplitude the feed rate in the normal direction also determines the maximum scanning feed rate If MP6230 is too low the machine dynamics will be under utilized and he scanning feed rate will also be low If MP6230 is too high the oscillation amplitude will be too high In this case the stylus will be seen to lift off from the contour the stylus taps the surface of he workpiece and the scanning feed rate no longer increases The maximum stylus deflection is defined by machine parameter MP6240 MP6240 will depend on he length of the stylus used MP6240 defines the maximum travel by which the stylus retracts on inside corners If the touch probe is not cleared after the stylus backs out by the travel defined in MP6240 the touch probe axis e g Z is retracted in
421. ion 280 58 280 54 280 56 Central tool file TOOL T must be active via machine parameter The machine must feature a controlled spindle for spindle orientation 9 4 1 Interfacing the TT 110 MP6500 enables the cycles for tool measurement The cycles should only be enabled when a TT 110 is mounted and interfaced MP6505 defines the probing direction for tool radius measurement For tool radius measurement MP6530 defines the distance from the tool bottom to the top of the probe contact In the tool table an additional tool specific offset is entered in the field L OFFS MP6540 defines a safety zone around he probe contact of the TT 110 When a cycle for tool measurement is started the tool moves automatically from the clearance height entered in the cycle at the feed rate defined in MP6550 to he limit of the safety zone The probe disk diameter or the cube edge length is entered in MP6531 The coordinates of the probe contact centre referenced to the machine datum is entered in MP6580 For calibrating and measuring individual teeth the spindle must be brought to a stop at a defined angular orientation MP6560 defines whether the spindle is oriented directly through the NC or through the PLC If the spindle is oriented by the NC the PLC need only reset the Marker M2499 If the PLC orients the spindle the number of the M function is entered in MP6560 The respective positions are then transferred as for the Spindle Orientation c
422. ion controller 11 15 3 4 Oscilloscope 11 16 3 4 1 Soft key rows 11 17 3 4 2 Triggers 11 18 3 4 3 Recording 11 18 4 Cable overview 11 21 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 1 Ki 1 Digital speed control A digital speed controller has been integrated into the TNC 425 The benefits of this concept are e e High Kv factor e e No drift e e Cycle times High dynamic response Trailing errors are virtually nil High geometrical accuracy with high traverse speeds Traverse speeds up to 60 m min Contour interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms Block circuit diagram of TNC 425 with integral speed controller f TNC 425 Feed forward control i Position cont roller Nominal Ei Acceleration precontrol Digital speed control speed Nominal oS position A digital Nominal Servo Amplifier Current controller Power stage Machine Feed motor with rotary encoder for rotor speed and position Machine slide with linear encoder a current S gt ae Actual current Actual speed Actual position 11 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Digital speed control 01 98 2 2 Mounting and electrical installation The connection conditions are the same as for the TNC 415 B the differences between TNC 425 and TNC
423. ion via PLC 4 194 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 e 1 MP6570 Max permissible surface cutting speed at the tool edge Entry 1 0000 to 120 0000 m min MP6580 Coordinates of the TT 110 stylus centre referenced to the machine datum Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6580 0 Axis X MP6580 1 Axis Y MP6580 2 Axis Z Marker Function Set Reset M2390 Cycle for tool calibration started C NC M2391 0 Tool measurement NC NC 1 Tool inspection M2392 Wear tolerance exceeded NC NC M2393 Breakage tolerance exceeded NC NC M2499 Open the control loop for the spindle PLC PLC M2127 Spindle in motion NC NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 195 i 10 Electronic handwheel The following handwheels can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN control systems one integral handwheel HR 130 or one portable handwheel HR 330 or one portable handwheel HR 322 or up to three integral handwheels HR 150 using handwheel adapter HRA 110 see also chapter Mounting and Electrical Installation The operation of the electronic handwheel is described in the User s Manual Machine parameter MP7640 defines which handwheel is connected to the control If a value greater han zero is entered but no handwheel is connected the error message Handwheel appears Shock and vibration can cause a slight movement of the handwheel and thus lead to an unwanted raverse movement In order to avoid this a threshold sensitivity
424. ioning with MDI mode the machine can be positioned by pressing the PNT soft key The machine must move in the direction in which the stylus was deflected If this is not the case the counting directions must be changed in MP6320 MP6322 assigns the touch probe axes the measuring systems in the probe to the machine axes For machines with swivel heads the user must enter the respective mounting position of the touch probe in MP6322 If the touch probe is in a horizontal position the undefined deflection resulting from the stylus s own weight makes it impossible to find the centre of the stylus tip It is therefore not possible to use the TM in a horizontal attitude to locate a workpiece In a horizontal attitude the TM can be used only for digitizing W Danger of breakage The mounting position of the touch probe must be entered correctly in MP6322 otherwise the calculation of the maximum deflection from MP6330 may be incorrect 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 189 o 1 If the stylus is deflected by a distance greater than the value defined in MP 6330 the blinking error message Stylus deflection exceeds max is output The maximum permissible deflection for the TM 110 is 4mm MP 6310 defines the mean constant deflection depth during digitising On standard parts an entry value of 1 mm has proven to be useful On parts with sharp changes in directions steep edges that are scanned at high speed the deflection depth must be
425. ircle P4 50 P5 2 P6 20 P7 100x N70 G79 Call cycle N99999 1000 G71 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 OEM cycles in NC programs 9 11 i Positioning Module Contents PLC positioning module 10 2 1 1 Introduction 10 2 1 2 Hardware 10 3 1 3 EMERGENCY STOP routine 10 5 1 4 Reference signal evaluation 10 6 1 5 Installing the positioning module 10 6 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 1 2 f 1 PLC positioning module 1 1 Introduction One hardware version of the LE 360 the LE 234 003 can be used in conjunction with the TNC407 TNC415 as a positioning module This means that the TNC 407 TNC 415 can be extended by up to 4 secondary axes PLC inputs and outputs of the LE 234 003 can also be used The positioning module can be used for toolchangers for pallet infeed and for controlling rotary axes and swivel heads The NC software of the TNC 360 can also run on the LE 234 003 i e all functions of the TNC 360 are also available with the positioning module Detailed technical particulars are given in Technical Manual TNC 360 f 10 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 01 98 2 1 2 Hardware Differences in hardware between LE 234 003 and LE 360 C the X25 connector contains the RS 232 C V 24 and the RS 422 V 11 there is no X4 measuring system input Sinus X5 measuring system input Square is additional Control loop board X1 Measuring system 1 X2 Measuring system 2
426. is Bit 4 16 Feed rate enable 5th axis 0 No Feed rate enable 5th axis 3 6 2 Axes in position If the axes have reached the defined positioning window MP1030 see section Positioning window after a movement the axis in position markers are set by the NC This also happens after switching on the control voltage As soon as a positioning is started the markers are reset by the NC This is also valid when passing over the reference marks In the Electronic handwheel mode of operation the markers M2008 to M2011 and M2017 are reset For contours which can be machined with constant feed rate the Axis in position markers are not set Marker Function Set Reset M2008 X axis in position NC NC M2009 Y axis in position M2010 Z axis in position M2011 4th axis in position M2017 5th axis in position 4 90 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o 3 6 3 Axes in motion If the axes are in motion the appropriate Axis in motion markers are set by the NC ote The markers are only set in the operating modes Positioning with manual entry Single block and Full sequence Marker Function Set Reset M2128 X axis in motion NC NC M2129 Y axis in motion M2130 Z axis in motion M2131 4th axis in motion M2132 5th axis in motion Example for markers Axis in position and Axis in motion y wo I ry I I I 1 L x80 Y20 RL LXO RL P2 L X80 RL ae E em rm mm P1 PO PO
427. ise the computer will delay transmission until the CTS line is switched to active Hardware handshaking requires as a minimum two data lines TxD and RxD the RTS control line and the CTS signal line and a ground connection 1 2 2 Software handshaking With software handshake control of data transfer is achieved by appropriate control characters transmitted via the data line One such handshake is the XON XOFF method which is in widespread use on the RS 232 C V 24 interface The meaning XON is assigned to an ASCII code control character DC1 and the meaning XOFF to another DC3 Before transmitting a character the computer checks whether the receiving unit is transmitting the XOFF character If it is it delays transmission until it receives the character XON indicating that the connected unit is ready to receive further characters Apart from the data lines TxD RxD and ground no other lines are needed for software handshaking 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 8 9 1 2 TNC data interfaces 2 1 General Besides the standard RS 232 C V 24 interface the TNC 407 415 has another data interface the RS 422 V 11 which is used for long transmission distances The two interfaces differ only in the construction of their hardware signal lines signal levels and pin layout The data format and transmission protocol are the same for both interfaces The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit ME 101 magnetic tape unit no
428. ite in Word Range Module 9020 9021 9022 The defined byte word or doubleword is written to the defined position in the word memory Indexed reading in the memory is possible by specifying a variable as the name of the memory cell Possible errors The defined address is outside the valid range 0 1023 Module 9021 The defined address is not a word address not divisible by 2 Module 9022 The defined address is not a doubleword address not divisible by 4 Call PS B W D K PS B W D K CM 9020 or PS B W D K PS B W D K CM 9021 or PS B W D K PS B W D K CM 9022 lt Number of byte to be written gt lt byte to be written gt write byte lt Number of word to be written gt lt byte to be written gt write word lt Number of doubleword to be written gt lt byte to be written gt write doubleword Example of Module 9020 Wortspeicher STACK B35 B100 Error status after call M3171 Address Value Address Value Address Value PS B10 PS B100 CM9020 0 Byte word doubleword was written 1 Error condition see above 7 138 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 f 4 2 Machine Parameters 4 2 1 Overwrite Machine Parameter Module 9031 Overwrites the value of a machine parameter that is defined by its number and index Constraints The value of the machine parameter must be specified as an integer with the decimal point shifted by
429. ith Block Check Character and with fixed control characters 7 data bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 Freely configurable operating modes data format transmission protocol and control characters can be freely set via machine parameters LSV 2 Two way transfer for TNC diagnostics and remote operation conforms to DIN 66019 This protocol always runs in the background of the TNC and is started externally by a PC The following applies to data transmission protocols except LSV 2 If a file which is read in is already stored in the TNC the message ERASE OVERREAD is displayed In this case the TNC aborts transmission with the appropriate handshake and does not continue transfer until after acknowledgement In the event of an attempt to erase write protected files the error message PROTECTED PGM is displayed and the dialog CONTINUE ENT END NOENT In this case either the next file can be read in or the transfer can be aborted If a file has been read out and the data transfer menu has been terminated with the END key the TNC outputs characters lt ETX gt and lt EOT gt or ASCII characters according to setting in MP5201 x and MP5210 x in operating modes EXT1 EXT2 and EXT3 H a transmission is terminated with the END key the error message PROGRAM INCOMPLETE is issued 3 1 Standard transmission protocol 3 1 1 General This protocol is set as standard in operating mode ME and can also be
430. ive Bit1 Y axis 1 Negative Bit2 Zaxis MP6321 Measuring the centre offset while calibrating the TM110 Entry 0 or 1 0 Calibrate and measure centre offset 1 Calibrate without measuring centre offset 4 190 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o MP6322 Assignment of touch probe axes to the machine axes Entry Oto2 W Touch probe axis X 1 Touch probe axis Y 2 Touch probe axis Z MP6322 0 Machine axis X MP6322 1 Machine axis Y MP6322 2 Machine axis Z MP6330 Maximum stylus deflection measuring touch probe Entry 0 1 to 4 000 mm MP6350 Feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and contour approach measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6360 Probing feed rate measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6361 Rapid traverse in scanning cycle measuring touch probe Entry 10 to 10 000 mm min MP6362 Feed rate reduction if stylus of the TM 110 is deflected away from its path Entry Oor1 0 Feed rate reduction not active 1 Feed rate reduction active MP6390 Target window for contour line end point Entry 0 1000 to 4 0000 mm 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 191 e 9 4 Tool calibration with the TT 110 The HEIDENHAIN TT 110 touch probe serves for measuring and inspecting tools HEIDENHAIN provides standard cycles for automatic tool measurement and calibration with the TT 110 see User s Manual Technical Prerequisites JT 110 TNC 4xx as of software vers
431. ive controlled axes two pairs can be synchronized MP850 Synchronized axes Entry 0 to 5 O Main axis 1 axis tracked to X axis 2 axis tracked to Y axis 3 axis tracked to Z axis 4 axis tracked to 4th axis 5 axis tracked to 5th axis MP850 0 X axis MP850 1 Y axis MP850 2 Z axis MP850 3 Ath axis MP850 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 49 e 1 10 1 Synchronization control The TNC monitors the synchronization of the master and slave axes If the positions of the master and slave axes differ by a distance greater than that entered in MP855 x the error message GROSS POSITIONING ERROR lt AXIS gt A appears indicating the slave axis The positional difference is shown in the LAG display for the slave axis Synchronization monitoring is entered in MP855 x of the slave axis Machine parameter MP860 x defines the datum for synchronization control MP860 x 0 Datum at position upon switch on When the machine is switched on it is assumed that the master and slave axes are synchronized with one another Their position upon switch on is taken as the synchronization reference In this mode passing over the reference mark is only necessary for the master axis and only if the defined references are to be reproduced Synchrony monitoring begins immediately upon switch on MP860 x 1 Datum at reference marks machine datum Both axes position to the same reference value when they have passed over
432. ization and ergonomics 5 3 1 PLC Macros The following macro programs are available in the TNC 355 for controlling the tool changer M3264 Convert tool number or pocket number to binary code M3265 Increment actual value of pocket number M3266 Decrement actual value of pocket number M3267 Compare actual and nominal values of pocket number These macro programs are no longer available in the TNC 407 and TNC 415 The following PLC subroutines can be used in place of the macro programs Convert tool number or pocket number to binary code M2032 to M2039 gt M3024 to M3031 LBL 200 M3264 TNC 355 L W262 T code in binary B M3024 file in bit area K 0 M3043 T code LB M3200 low byte from MP4310 3 B255 load MP4310 3 LB M3024 gt B255 M3044 Tcode gt MP4310 3 1 byte EM Increment actual value of pocket number M3032 to M3039 M3032 to M3039 1 LBL 210 B265 TNC 355 LB M3200 low byte from MP4310 3 B255 number of mag pockets LB M3032 actual value K 1 increment by 1 B M3032 lt B255 _ less than or equal to actual value 7 182 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 01 98 2 JPT 211 L K 1 sload 1 as actual value B M3032 LBL 211 EM Decrement actual value of pocket number M3032 to M3039 M3032 to M3039 1 LBL 220 M3266 TNC 355 LB M3200 low byte from MP4310 3 8 B255 number of mag pockets LB M3032 actual value K 1 decr
433. ize of the Accumulator 32 bits Then the REMAINDER is determined from a division of the contents of the Word Accumulator by the contents of the operand The REMAINDER is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further If the MOD command is not correctly executed then the Marker M3170 is set otherwise it is reset Example The REMAINDER of a division of the value stored in Word W6 by a constant is to be determined The REMAINDER is then stored in Doubleword D8 Initial state Word W6 50 dec Constant K 15 dec Doubleword D8 In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L We 2 MOD eg 3 DB Line 1 The contents of Word W6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the constant and the integer REMAINDER is left in the Accumulator Line 3 The REMAINDER is assigned to Doubleword D8 f 7 70 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 4 6 INCREMENT INC INCREMENT Operand Abbreviation for the PLC Editor INC Operands B W D Operation The contents of the addressed operand increases by one INCREMENT Word Accumulator Abbreviation for the PLC Editor INCW Operation The contents of the word accumulator increases by one INCREMENT
434. ker M500 7 78 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 79 L 3 6 Parentheses with logical gating Execution time and code length are summarised respectively for the open parentheses and corresponding close parentheses commands 3 6 1 AND WH Abbreviation for PLC Editor AL AND Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 6 to 1 2 0 7 to 1 3 Number of bytes 6 6 Operands none 3 6 2 AND NOT ANTI H Abbreviation for PLC Editor ANI AND NOT Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 1 2 0 7 to 1 5 Number of bytes 6 6 Operands none 3 6 3 OR OL Abbreviation for PLC Editor O OR Logic Byte Word Double Execution time us 0 6 to 1 2 0 7 to 1 3 Number of bytes 6 6 Operands none 3 6 4 OR NOT ONT J Abbreviation for PLC Editor ONI OR NOTI Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 0 5 to 1 2 0 7 to 1 5 Number of bytes 6 6 Operands none 7 80 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f 3 6 5 EXCLUSIVE OR GOU Abbreviation for PLC Editor XO EXCL OR Logic Byte Word Double Execution time us 0 5 to 1 2 0 7 to 1 5 Number of bytes 6 6 Operands none 3 6 6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT XONT
435. ket then slot milling 1 Merge programmed contours O Contours merged only if the tool centre paths intersect Contours merged if the programmed contours overlap 1 Clear out and slot milling to pocket depth or for each peck O Clearing out and slot milling performed in one operation for all pecks For each peck first perform slot milling and then feed clearing out depending on Bit 1 before next peck via PLC RUN 4 147 CN 123 PLC RUN 4 178 CN 123 PLC RUN 4 147 CN 123 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters f 5 41 Machine Function and input Change Reaction parameter via Bit 4 Position after machining W Return to position that was approached before cycle was called 1 TNC moves tool to clearance height MP7430 Overlap factor for pocket milling A RU Entry 0 1 to 1 414 N 123 MP7431 Arc end point tolerance RU Entry 0 0001 to 0 016 mm N 123 MP7440 Output of M functions i RU Entry Xxxxx ECH BitO Program halt on M06 0 Program halt on M06 1 No program halt on M06 modal cycle call M89 O normal code transfer of M89 at beginning of block 1 modal cycle call M89 at end of block Program halt on M functions Q Program halt until acknowledgement of M function 1 No program halt does not wait for acknowledgement Select Kv factors with M105 M106 0 function not active 1 function active Reduced feed rate in tool axis with M103 0
436. ks X axis Y axis Z axis Axis 4 Axis 5 Function Reference marks X axis not yet traversed Reference marks Y axis not yet traversed Reference marks Z axis not yet traversed Reference marks axis 4 not yet traversed Reference marks axis 5 not yet traversed Reference end position for X axis Reference end position for Y axis Reference end position for Z axis Reference end position for axis 4 Reference end position for axis 5 Function Operating mode 1 Manual operation 2 Handwheel 3 Positioning with manual entry 4 Program run single block 5 Program run full sequence 7 Pass over reference points 2 2 Machine datum Set NC PLC Set NC Reset NC PLC Reset NC The reference mark defines a point on the measuring system The reference points of all axes define the scale datum MP960 x contains the distance from the scale datum to the machine datum All REF based displays and positioning movements refer to the machine datum see also Section Display and operation 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4 63 T f 4 64 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01 98 i 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes This section describes all the control functions which are imp
437. l The axis should be loaded with the permissible workpiece weight during the acquisition of the step response The subordinate control loop current control spindle speed control must be so optimized that the step response shows an overshoot The following picture shows the ideal response of the tacho signal Given step function i 1 Overshoot U V U max lt Tacho signal T gt ji ms The following pictures show incorrectly adjusted tacho signals Several overshoots U V U max Incorrect t ms The P component of the subordinate control loop is too high or the l component too low UMA E IR Too flat Incorrect t ms The P component of the subordinate control loop is too low or the I component too high 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 259 o Calculating acceleration The maximum acceleration time T can be deduced from the step response ag H gt t ms To calculate the acceleration increase T by 10 From this it follows that Vmax Vmax velocity at U Tx11 max y max a acceleration The step response must be investigated for all axes The acquired acceleration values are entered in MP1060 0 to MP1060 4 After adjustment switch off the supply voltage to the drive amplifiers This concludes the preparation of the drive amplifiers 4 260 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425
438. l No S 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 243 1 N gt S Double Changing Arm M2600 1 The pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred first After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle M2046 0 1 M2483 0 1 M2098 0 1 M2600 0 1 M2401 0 1 M2402 0 1 M2403 0 1 M2601 0 W262 Pocket No S Pocket No N w264 Tool No S Tool No 0 4 244 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 2 NS Special tool follows Manual tool With this tool change sequence two pocket numbers or tool numbers must be transferred in succession M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe M2046 follows Irrespective of flag M2600 and M2601 pocket number 255 and tool number 0 are transferred first Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle Pocket number 255 means that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of the new tool called tool are transferred M2046 M2483 M2093 M2600 M2401 M2402 M2403 M2601 W262 W264 Pocket No 255 Pocket No S Tool No 0 Too No S 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 245 2 15 3 PLC program example This section describes a tool changer and contains the basic sequence diagrams of
439. l capacity can be downloaded block by block and simultaneously executed e Extended data interface with LSV 2 protocol for external TNC operation across the data interface Baud rate 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 150 110 Keyboard TE 400 with integral QWERTY keyboard Screen BC 110 14 colour monitor 640 x 490 pixels Logic unit LE 407 LE 415B LE 425 Axis control Feed pre control or operation with servo lag TNC 425 additional digital speed control Cycle times Contour interpolation 6 ms 3 ms Fine interpolation TNC 415 B 0 6 ms contour TNC 425 0 6 ms speed Position control 0 1 um resolution 1 These functions must be implemented by the OEM 2 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 01 98 E 1 Integral PLC PLC inputs PLC outputs Option analog inputs 10V Option Inputs for thermistors PLC program memory PLC cycle time Error compensation Position encoders Reference mark evaluation Max traverse Max traversing speed Feed rate and spindle override Accessories Electronic handwheel or or Diskette unit Touch trigger 3D probe Measuring 3D probe Touch probe for tool inspection TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 56 1 Control is ready input Option 64 per PL 31 1 Control is ready output Option 31 per PL Two PL 410 max can be connected 4 per PL 4101 or PA 4 per PL 4101 or PA Approx 8000 logic commands 24 ms
440. l coordinates so the postprocessor can disregard the machine geometry The tool radius must still be corrected by the CAD system or postprocessor however Unlike the Tilt working plane function the coordinate system does not swivel For machines with rotary tables therefore remember that rotating the table also rotates the coordinate system in relation to the machine coordinate system This is not affected by the M114 function The programmed feed rate relates to the tool tip but this is only achieved when tool length compensation is provided by the TNC If tool length is already compensated by the CAD system the programmed feed rate will be the feed rate of the tool datum Finally function M114 is deactivated by M115 or END PGM El 4 48 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o 1 10 Synchronized axes With the HEIDENHAIN TNC two controlled axes can be coupled in such a way that they can only be moved simultaneously This facility is required for example for gantry axes and tandem tables and can be activated both for operation with servo lag and in the feed precontrol mode In the following description the main axis and tracked axis are referred to as master and slave respectively The Synchronize function is activated with MP850 which defines the master axis to which the specified slave axis must be tracked Example 4th axis is the slave of the X axis MP850 0 0 MP850 1 0 MP850 2 0 MP850 3 1 MP850 4 0 Of the f
441. l display PLC module 9081 Interrogate PLC window PLC module 9082 Describe PLC window PLC module 9083 Display bar chart Marker Function Set Reset M3171 Error message in PLC modules NC NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 141 o 6 6 Error messages Under certain conditions error messages from the NC or the PLC will be displayed on the screen under the display for the operating mode Non flashing error messages can be cancelled with the CE key In the event of a flashing error message the machine must be switched off and the fault corrected If a non flashing error message is displayed on the screen marker M2190 will be set The manufacturer of the machine determines the conditions under which the PLC will produce error messages Up to 100 different PLC error messages can be generated The dialogues for PLC error messages can be determined by the manufacturer of the machine Please contact HEIDENHAIN about this The standard version has dialogues with the reserved designations PLC ERROR 0 to PLC ERROR 99 These PLC error messages can be activated by the PLC markers M2924 to M3023 The error messages can be cancelled either by pressing the CE key or by resetting the appropriate markers If several PLC error messages are activated simultaneously they can be read out one after another by pressing the CE key If the program run is to be stopped on output of a PLC error message this must be explicitly
442. l length offset TT LOFFS 19 Tool radius offset TT ROFFS 20 Breakage tolerance for tool length LBREAK 21 Breakage tolerance for tool radius RBREAK OO JO OP GO bh a CH 3 No file of specified type with M status found 4 Line number not in file 5 Wrong element number 6 Element value not found PLC Module 9093 Read data from tables selected for execution T D TCH With Module 9093 the contents of a line can be read in a table with M status set selected for execution The module must be told the identifier of the desired table the line number tool number for T vector number for D or pocket number for TCH and the number of the element to be read Constraints The module can only run within a SUBMIT Job The values are returned as integers shifted by the number of definable places after the decimal point Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job There is no file of the specified type that has M status The specified line number is not in the file The specified file type does not exist The specified element does not exist 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 159 2 Call PS BAW D K lt File type gt PS B W D K lt Line number gt PS B W D K lt Element number gt CM 9093 PL B W D lt Element value gt PL B W D lt Error number gt Error status after call M3171 0 Element was read 1 Error condition see above Entry
443. label in JP instruction An attempt has been made to jump to a label defined as EXTERN with a JP JPF JPT instruction 42 GC Global label defined twice The same label has been defined as GLOBAL several times in the same or in different files 43 SC Wrong instruction structure An ELSE ENDI ENDW UNTIL instruction has been programmed without an IF ELSE WHILE REPEAT instruction first Instructions with different structures have been interleaved instead of nested The structures must always be closed in the reverse order in which they were opened 44 SC Structure open at end of file A structured instruction has been opened but not closed again by the end of file 45 SC GLOBAL instruction in main file A module from the main file has been defined as GLOBAL Only modules from files linked with USES can be made accessible to other files using the GLOBAL instruction 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 33 2 46 49 50 51 52 53 R 54 R 55 R 56 R spare Nesting too deep An attempt has been made to nest more than 32 module calls A recursive module call has been programmed which exceeds the nesting depth limit of 32 Stack underflow An attempt has been made to fetch data from the stack even though they were not previously stored there Stack overflow An attempt has been made to store more than 128 bytes of data to the stack Word operands B W D K occupy 4 bytes each logic o
444. lashes Control operational display goes on or flashes 1st PLC scan after interruption of the PLC program Code number 84159 entered 7178 Soft key function not executed 4 165 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 6 3 i Marker Function Let Reset Page M2190 4 142 M2191 4 120 M2192 Markers changeable NC NC 7 178 to via MP4310 0 MP 4310 1 and MP 4310 2 eee M2240 9 5 M2241 9 5 M2242 9 5 M2243 9 5 M2244 9 5 M2245 9 5 M2246 9 5 M2247 9 5 M2248 9 5 M2249 9 5 M2250 9 5 M2251 9 5 M2252 9 5 M2253 9 5 M2254 9 5 M2255 9 5 M2256 9 5 M2257 9 5 M2258 9 5 M2259 9 5 M2260 9 5 M2261 9 5 M2262 9 5 M2263 9 5 M2264 9 5 M2265 9 5 M2266 9 5 M2267 9 5 M2268 9 5 M2269 9 5 M2270 9 5 M2271 9 5 M2390 4 199 M2391 0 Tool measurement 4 199 1 Tool inspection M2392 4 199 M2400 4 229 M2401 Active tool with pocket number NC NC 4 232 ony ial al M2402 Active tool without pocket number NC NC 4 232 MP7260 MP7261 M2403 4 232 M2404 4 232 6 4 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 01 98 i Marker Function L er Reset Page M2408 4 108 M2448 PLC 4 174 M2449 PLC 4 174 M2450 PLC 4 174 M2451 4 90 M2452 7 178 M2453 7 178 M2454 7 178 M2455 7 178 M2456 PLC 7 174 M2457 PLC 7 174 M2458 PLC 4 174 M2459 PLC 4174 M2460 PLC PLC_ 4175 M2461 PLC 4 175 M2462 PLC PLC 4 175 M2463 PLC 4 175 M24
445. lation 5 EXE with 5 fold interpolation MP340 0 X axis MP340 1 Y axis MP340 2 Z axis MP340 3 4th axis MP340 4 5th axis 1 1 2 Direction of traverse The machine parameters MP210 and MP1040 determine the direction of traverse for the axes The direction of traverse for the axes of numerically controlled machine tools are defined by DIN see also under Sections Axis designation and Commissioning and start up procedure MP210 defines the counting direction for the measuring system signals The counting direction depends on the mounting orientation of the measuring systems MP210 Counting direction of the measuring system signals Entry XXXXX Bit O X axis 0 positive Bit 1 Y axis 1 negative Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Machine parameter MP1040 determines the polarity of the nominal value voltage during the positive direction of traverse MP1040 Polarity of the nominal value voltage for the positive direction of traverse Entry XXXXX Bit O X axis 0 positive Bit 1 Y axis 1 negative Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 4 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L The NC uses markers to tell the PLC in which direction the axes are travelling Marker Function Set Reset M2160 Direction of NC NC to M2164 traverse 0 positive 1 negative M2160 X axis M2161 Y axis M2162 Z axis M2163 Ath axis M2164 5th axis 1 1 3 Measuring system monitoring HEIDENHAIN contouring controls ca
446. layed character Because the complete line is always displayed again in the window when a string is displayed even when a column greater than 0 is specified a text e g Spindle Output with the color 0 is always displayed in the color of the numerical value to its left e g color 11 when output is under 110 and color 15 when output is over 110 even though PLC Module 9082 only displays the numerical value again H the color 0 is specified for the first characters on a line however then the color in which these characters are displayed is not defined and can change between two displays of the line When PLC Module 9082 is used in conjunction with software 24305 or 24307 the display of colors 3 to 7 varies with the selected graphics These colors should therefore be avoided where possible to prevent the display changing when different graphics are selected This problem does not arise with NC software releases 25996 24302 and 25993 If no screen window is currently shown for the PLC status display window is not opened or in background the module will run through normally and the string is not displayed until the corresponding screen window is displayed again and provided the string has not been overwritten by a repeat call of Module 9082 in the meantime Module 9081 can be used to check whether the display is currently active This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job 7 154 TNC 407 TNC 4
447. les are to be disabled Input value for MP7224 0 Binary 111 000 Hexadecimal 38 Decimal 56 2 2 2 With software types 243 05 259 96 243 07 and 243 02 only the decimal format is possible for the machine parameters The corresponding decimal input value must be computed for bit coded entries You will find a Power of 2 table in the chapter entitled Appendix 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Input output of machine parameters 5 3 1 2 2 Activating the machine parameter settings After the values for the machine have been entered exit the machine parameter list by pressing the END O key Missing or incorrect entries result in error messages from the control that prompt you to correct your entry The following errors are displayed Entry error Meaning No MP number found Invalid MP number No separator found Entry value incorrect MP doubly defined MP not defined MP can not be stored OO E GO a OH If the control does not recognise any errors it automatically exits the machine parameter editor and is ready for operation If during commissioning no entries are made in the parameter list MP NAME the TNC will generate a standard machine parameter list when the END O key is pressed In this list the TNC is defined as a programming station with the HEIDENHAIN standard colours All other machine parameters assume the minimum value It is also possible to keep several machine parameter lists and load the
448. ll Module CM CMT CMF when the Logic Accumulator is 1 3 12 9 End of Module if Logic Accumulator 0 EMF Abbreviation for the PLC Editor EMF END OF MODULE IF FALSE Operation An EMF command only initiates a return jump to the Call Module CM CMT CMF when the Logic Accumulator is 0 3 12 10 Jump Label LBL Abbreviation for PLC Editor LBL LABEL Execution time us 0 Number of bytes 0 Operands ASCII name up to 32 characters long Operation The jump label defines a program position as an entry point for the CM and JP commands Jump labels may be allocated addresses in the range 0 to 511 Up to 1000 jump labels per file can be defined The ASCII name of the jump label may be up to 32 characters long but only the first 16 characters are used to distinguish jump labels For importing global jump labels see EXTERN instruction 7 110 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 111 L be 3 13 INDEX Register Under the control of the PLC programmer this register can be used for data transfer intermediate storage of results and for index addressing of operands The register is 32 bits wide but only the lower 16 bits are used for index addressing The X registe
449. ll not shift 1 BLK form will shift Bit 3 Show cursor position in 0 not shown 3 plane display 1 cursor position shown 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 133 o 6 4 Status window The status of the control axis positions tools feed M functions etc is displayed on the VDU screen in the status window A Soft key can be used to activate an additional status display in the graphics window instead of the graphics The colours for the status window display can be altered by machine parameters 6 4 1 Position display The input resolutions for the TNCs are TNC 415 B 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 TNC 415 F and TNC 407 0 001 mm or 0 001 The display step for the axis positions can be selected for specific axes by machine parameter Regardless of this selection the TNC always attempts to position precisely to 0 0001 mm or 0 0001 regardless of the grating period of the measuring system and the smallest voltage increment The most recently selected axis is displayed inversely The PLC is informed by a marker which axis has an inverse display This information can be evaluated for example in connection with hand control equipment Machine parameter MP7285 can be used to select whether in the positional display the tool axis takes account of the tool length or not MP7285 Calculation of the tool length in the position display of the tool axis Entry 0 or 1 0 tool length ignored 1 tool len
450. llowed when executing from the EPROM MP4010 0 When executing from the RAM MP4010 1 the file is searched first in the RAM and then in the EPROM The USES instruction only links the file the program code for the file is not executed i e USES cannot be compared to a CM instruction The linked files must therefore contain individual modules which can then be called with CM instructions 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 131 e Example USES PLCMOD1 module depends on MP4010 from RAM or EPROM USES EPRUPG i USES RAMPLC Example of file linking PLCMAIN PLC main program USES SPINDEL PLC USES TCHANGE PLC Code TCHANGE PLC SPINDEL PLC Tool change spindle control USES PLCUPG PLC USES PLCUPG PLC Code Code PLCUPG PLC general subprograms Code 3 19 2 GLOBAL Instruction Up to 1000 local jump labels can be defined in each of the files linked with USES Modules defined in one file must be defined globally before they can be called from another file This is done with the GLOBAL instruction at the beginning of the file Jump labels can only be defined globally when they are defined as LBL later on in the program and not as KFIELD Syntax GLOBAL jump label declaration of jump label beyond the file boundary GLOBAL definitions must not be written in the main program A single jump label cannot be declared globally by more than one module however a name that has been declared globally by file A
451. lock Entry 0 to 4 0 No output 1 Output of tool number only when tool number changes W262 Output of tool number with every TOOL DEF block W262 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 only when tool number changes Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 with every TOOL DEF block MP7490 Number of traverse ranges PLC RUN 4 17 Entry 0 to 3 0 1 traverse range 3 datum points 1 3 traverse ranges 3 datum points 2 1 traverse range 1 datum point 3 3 traverse ranges 1 datum point MP7500 MP7500 Tilt working plane function PLC EDIT 4 42 Entry 0 or 1 0 inactive 1 active MP75x0 MP75x0 Transformed axis PLC EDIT 4 42 Entry XXXXXX Entry 0 means End of transformation sequence Bit O X axis Bit 1 Y axis Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 A axis Bit 4 B axis Bit 5 C axis 5 44 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 e Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP75x1 Supplementary identifier for transformation PLC EDIT 4 42 Entry xx Bit O Swivel axis 0 swivel head 1 tilting table Dimension in MP75x2 0 incremental step for swivel head 1 absolute related to machine datum for tilting table MP75x2 Dimension for transformation PLC EDIT 4 42 Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Entry 0 means free rotating axis 3 13 Hardware Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7620 Feed rate and spi
452. luated until the velocity falls below the value in MP1525 This MP does not exist on old software versions in which the maximum velocity for positioning window evaluation is fixed at 0 5 mm min If the value which is entered is too small the run in time and therefore the time between one program block and the next will be lengthened If the axes have reached the positioning window after a movement the markers M2008 to M2011 and M2017 are set see section Axis in position MP1030 Positioning window Entry 0 0001 to 2 0000 mm MP1030 0 X axis MP1030 1 Y axis MP1030 2 Zaxis MP1030 3 4th axis MP1030 4 5th axis MP1525 Maximum velocity for checking the positioning window Entry 0 100 to 10 000 mm min Recommended value 0 5 mm min As of software versions 280 54x 02 280 56x 02 and 280 58x 02 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 87 e 4 88 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 i 3 6 Controlled axes The machine parameter MP50 determines which of the five NC axes should be controlled MP50 Controlled axes Entry XXXXX Bit O X axis 0 not controlled Bit 1 Y axis 1 controlled Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Further parameters
453. lus deflection As soon as the touch probe is clear it returns to the contour in the inverse travel direction The new scanning direction is defined by the probed points and If the touch probe has failed to clear even after it has backed out by the value of MP6240 the touch probe axis e g Z is cleared in the positive direction If the stylus is still deflected after it reaches the clearance height see Range scanning cycle the scanning sequence is aborted and an error message is displayed 4 184 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o 9 2 3 Optimizing the digitizing sequence The following preparations should be made before optimizing machine and controller Set up the flat workpiece with vertical face and plane surface in the machining plane e g XY plane Probe the surface with probing function Surface Datum MANUAL or EL HANDWHEEL MODE and enter the reference plane as 0 mm Basic setting of the relevant machine parameters for Digitizing MP6210 5 1 s Oscillations in normal direction MP6230 30 mm min Feed rate in normal direction MP6240 5 mm Maximum stylus deflection The interface must be configured in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode depending on the type of desired memory for the digitized data internal controller RAM FE 401 or PC with Block Transfer program See TNC 407 TNC 415 Operating Manual Connect FE 401 or PC to the serial data interface if necessary
454. m or Machine parameter with multiple function PLC EDIT Entry 10 to 30 000 Feed rate for returning to the contour 4 148 To seta number in the PLC in the word range W960 to W968 7 23 Set a number in the PLC Module 9032 7 23 Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Set a number in the PLC Module 9032 7 23 Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Set a number in the PLC W976 to W988 Iess 7 22 Entry 0 to 65 535 7 178 Activation of analogue inputs PLC RUN 4 206 Entry xx Bit O Ono analogue inputs on 1st extension 1 analogue input on 1st extension Bit 1 Ono analogue inputs on 2nd extension 1 analogue input on 2nd extension 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 25 o 3 8 Setting the data interface Machine parameter MP5000 Inhibit data interface Entry 0 to 2 0 Not inhibited 1 RS 232 C V 24 inhibited 2 RS 422 NV 11 inhibited Operating mode EXT Operating mode EXT Operating mode EXT Entry XXXXXXX MP5020 0 MP5020 1 MP5020 2 BitO 7 or 8 Data bi 0 7 Data bits 1 8 Data bits 0 not active 1 active 0 not active 1 active Character parity 0 even 1 odd Character parity 0 not required 1 required it 6 7 Stop bits 1 1 2 Stop Bits 2 Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit 1 Stop Bit MP5030 0 MP5030 1 MP5030 2 ing mode EXT 1 ing mode EXT 2 ing mode EXT 3 PLC Dor ockwise transfer via Block Check Character 0 BCC character op
455. m 4 Ab Measuring system 5 X6 Measuring system S TL X8 Nominal value output 1 2 3 4 5 S X10 Reference pulse inhibit X12 Touch trigger probe X14 Measuring touch probe B Signal ground PLC and graphics board X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 VDU screen BC X44 Power supply 24 V for PLC X45 TNC keyboard TE X46 Machine control panel X47 PLC I O board PL Processor board X21 Data interface RS 232 C V 24 X22 Data interface RS 422 V 11 X23 Electronic handwheel X31 Power supply 24 V DC for NC 3 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Summary of connections 01 98 2 3 2 TNC 407 Processor board X1 Measuring system 1 X2 Measuring system 2 X3 Measuring system 3 X4 Measuring system 4 X5 Measuring system 5 T1 X6 Measuring system S TL X12 Triggering touch probe X8 Nominal value output 1 2 Ona 5S X21 Data interface RS 232 C V 24 X22 Data interface RS 422 V 11 X23 Electronic handwheel B Signal ground PLC and graphics board X41 PLC output X42 PLC input X43 VDU BC X44 Power supply 24 V for PLC X45 TNC keyboard TE X46 Machine control panel X47 PLC I O board PL X31 Power supply 24 VDC for NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Summary of connections 3 15 L Ei 4 Power supply 4 1 Logic unit and PLC I O board Supply Voltage range Max current Power voltage
456. mber number of free sectors will be read in 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 41 e Output selected file The following protocol is followed Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC lt SOH gt lt N gt Name lt A gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt 4 lt ACK gt gt lt STX gt 1st line of file lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt M lt ACK gt lt STX gt Last line of file lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt M lt ACK gt gt lt ETX gt lt EOT gt M att The program name may contain up to 16 characters Output all files The files are output in order as in section 4 1 2 Outputting a selected file Control characters lt ETX gt lt EOT gt are sent to the peripheral device between files Output file with confirmation In this mode a question is asked before each file output in order to determine whether or not the file is to be output After each file control characters lt ETX gt and lt EOT gt are sent as in section 4 1 3 Outputting all files If output of a file is not desired the TNC immediately offers the next file in the directory for output f 8 42 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o Read in selected file If a file is to be read in from an external memory the TNC sends a header with the file name concerned whereupon the peripheral sends the file Peripheral unit Transmission path l TNC l
457. mber was converted 1 Error condition see above Examples Mantissa Exponent Decimal number 23 0 123 123 0 123 23 2 12300 23 3 0 123 23456 3 123 456 23 5 0 00123 00 3 0 1 1234567890 11 0 0123456789 123 11 Error more than 10 places after decimal point 123456789 1 1234567890 123 8 Error more than 10 places before decimal point El 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 147 e 4 4 2 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII Module 9051 Converts a binary numerical value to an ASClIl coded decimal number in the format specified The specified number is converted to a decimal number and stored as a string in the specified address The number is notated as a two s complement When notated without a sign the absolute amount of the number is converted without a sign being put before the string With the signed notation a sign or is placed before the string in any event With the inch notation the numerical value is divided by 25 4 before being converted If the number has more decimal places than the total of specified places before and after the decimal point then the highest value decimal places are omitted With right justified notation leading zeroes before the decimal point are replaced by blanks with left justified notation they are suppressed Trailing zeroes after the decimal point are always converted Constraints The decimal sign is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a decimal co
458. ment no lt ACK gt and awaits acknowledgement If a positive acknowledgement is given then the program is read in Otherwise a header is immediately sent again 8 44 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 2 Peripheral unit lt ACK gt lt STX gt 1st line PGM1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt STX gt 2nd line PGM1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt K ee ane Zeg lt STX gt 3rd line PGM1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt 4 lt STX gt 4th line PGM1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt STX gt 3rd line PGM2 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt ACK gt lt STX gt 1st line PGM3 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt STX gt Last line of last PGM lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt ACK gt lt ETX gt ee E amp E 7T Sa as Transmission path TNC lt SOH gt lt H gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt i lt ACK gt gt lt ACK gt MN Read in program Yes No lt ACK gt Yes V gt Read in program Yes No lt SOH gt lt H gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt No gt lt ACK gt gt l lt ACK gt lt SOH gt lt H gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt EOT gt The number of blocks transmitted before the TNC stops to await acknowledgement will depend on the transfer rate set At a low data transfer rate the TNC will stop after the first block 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 45 2 3 3 LSV 2 Pro
459. mma MP7280 0 or a decimal point MP7280 1 Possible errors The number of the target string is outside the permitted range 0 3 There are more than 16 decimal places in all before and after decimal point No places before the decimal point are specified Call PS K BAW D lt numerical value to be converted gt PS K BMW D lt display mode bit coded gt Bit 3 display with sign Bit 2 display converted to INCH Bit 1 0 Format 00 Sign and number left justified 1 Sign left justified number right justified 10 Sign and number right justified 11 Not permitted PS K BAW D Number of places after the decimal point gt PS K BAW D Number of places before the decimal point gt PS K BMWV D lt Target address in string buffer gt CM 9051 Error status after call M3171 0 Number was converted 1 Error condition see above 7 148 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Examples Binary Mode Before After Dec Number value Dec Dec 23 0 3 0 123 23 0 3 2 1 23 123 8 3 2 1 23 123 9 3 2 1 23 123 10 3 2 41 23 254 0 3 1 254 0 254 4 3 1 10 0 1000 9 3 3 1 000 1000 9 3 3 1 000 123456 0 3 0 456 4 4 2 Number Conversion ASCII to Binary Module 9052 Converts an ASCII coded decimal number possibly with places after the decimal point into a mantissa and an exponent to the base 10 The string identified by the source string number is read and converted to a si
460. mmands If the comparison condition is true the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 Example Initial state Constant 1000 decimal Doubleword D12 15000 decimal Doubleword D36 10 decimal Output O15 The Accumulator contents and operand contents are shown in decimal notation The ten position Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of 2 147 483 647 The Accumulator is again represented in binary notation after program line 5 as the transition to logic execution occurs here 7 90 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o f Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents X XXX X X X XXX 1 LD 15 000 15 000 BA e i 3 L K1000 1 000 4 xD36 10 000 e bit 31 ee 0 5 x x x x 1 x x x x xx xf 6 015 x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 Program stack Line 1 The content of Doubleword D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 Open parentheses buffering of the Accumulator content in the Program Stack Line 3 Loading of a Constant into the Word Accumulator Line 4 The content of the Word Accumulator is multiplied by the content of Doubleword D12 Line 5 Close parentheses Word Accumulator content is gated corresponding to the command gt sl with the content of the Program Stack The transition from Word to Logic processing occurs in this program line The Logi
461. mory are undefined or unused In the event of a Stack overflow an error message will be issued Memory allocation in the Data Stack Bit 15 7 0 xxxxxxxx L xxxxxxxx 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 101 e 3 11 4 Load Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack PSW Abbreviation for PLC Editor PSW PUSH WORDACCU Execution time us 1 0 to 1 1 Number of bytes 20 Operands none Operation The content of the Word Accumulator can be buffered with the PSW command For this purpose the Word Accumulator is copied into the Data Stack The content of the Word Accumulator 32 bit reserves two Words on the Data Stack In the event of a stack overflow an error message will be issued 3 11 5 Acquire Logic Accumulator from the Data Stack PLL Abbreviation for PLC Editor PLL PULL LOGICACCU Execution time us 0 6 to 1 0 Number of bytes 16 Operands none Operation The PLL command complements the PSL command With a PLL instruction bit 7 from the current address of the Data Stack is copied into the Logic Accumulator If the stack is empty an error message will be issued 3 11 6 Acquire Word Accumulator from the Data Stack PLW Abbreviation for PLC Editor PLW PULL WORDACCU Execution time us 1 0 to 1 1 Number of bytes 16 Operands none Operation The PLW command complements the PSW command With a PLW instruction two Words are copied from the Data Stack into the Word Accumulator If the stack is em
462. motion 4 91 3 6 4 Open control loop 4 92 3 6 5 Actual nominal value transfer 4 92 4 1 Analogue output of the spindle speed 4 95 4 1 1 Direction of spindle rotation 4 95 4 1 2 Gear range 4 96 4 1 3 S Override 4 99 4 1 4 Gear change 4 100 4 1 5 Offset adjustment 4 104 4 2 BCD coded output of spindle speed 4 104 4 3 Spindle orientation 4 106 4 4 Tapping 4 112 4 4 1 Tapping with floating tap holder for analogue spindle speed output 4 113 4 4 2 Tapping with floating tap holder and BCD coded_ spindle speed output 4 116 4 4 3 Rigid Tapping 4 117 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 120 5 1 Connection diagram 4 121 5 2 Flow diagram 4 122 5 2 1 TNC 415 4 122 5 2 2 TNC 407 4 124 6 Display and operation 4 126 6 1 Machine datum 4 126 6 2 Colour adjustment 4 130 4 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 6 3 Graphics window 6 3 1 View in three planes 6 3 2 Rotating the coordinate system 6 3 3 BLK form and datum shift 6 4 Status window 6 4 1 Position display 6 4 2 Position display with rotary axes 6 4 3 Feed rate display 6 4 4 Display of the M functions 6 4 5 Control is in operation 6 4 6 Cancel status display 6 5 PLC Window 6 6 Error messages 6 7 Cycles 6 7 1 Cycle inhibit 6 7 2 Pocket milling 6 7 3 Milling cycles for pockets with free programmed contours 6 7 4 Scaling factor 6 7 5 Cylinder interpolation 6 8 Return to the contour 6 9 Files 6 9 1 File types disable and protect 6 9 2 Block numbers step size for ISO programs 6 9 3 Ta
463. mum interpolation factor for handwheel PLC RUN 4 197 Entry 0 to 10 MP7670 0 Interpolation factor for low speed Ir MP7670 1 Interpolation factor for medium speed HR 410 a ae only MP7670 2 Interpolation factor forhighspeed HR410 only MP7671 Manual feed rate in Handwheel operating mode 4 201 with HR 410 Entry 0 to 1000 to MP 1020 MP7671 0_ lowspeed ll MP7671 1 Medium speed _ _ o o o MP7671 2 Highspeed o e e 5 46 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o 1 Machine parameter MP7680 MP7690 Function and input Page via Bit 0 t1 t2 t3 Machine parameter with multiple function PLC RUN Entry X XXX XXX Memory function for axis direction keys 0 not stored 1 stored i Re approaching the contour 0 not active 1 active i block scan mid program startup 0 not active 1 active i Interruption of block scan with STOP or Mo6 0 interruption 1 no interruption Include programmed dwell time during block scan 0 include dwell time do not include dwell time Start calculation with block scan 0 start from cursor position Start from beginning of program Tool length for blocks with surface normal vector O Without DR2 from the tool table 1 With DR2 from the tool table 4 155 4 227 Memory test at switch on 4 154 Entry xx BitO RAM test Bit 1 0 Memory test at switch on 1 No memory test at switch on EPROM test
464. n be used to check whether the display is currently active This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job Aline less than 0 or greater than 1 was specified The bar chart is not displayed on screen in any of these error modes Call PS K B W D Line number 0 1 PS K BMV D Color for bar 0 15 PS K B W D Color for frame and scale graduation 0 15 PS K BMWV D Current length of bar 0 150 PS K BMV D Maximum length of bar 0 150 CM 9083 Error status after call M3171 0 String displayed when screen window for PLC status is displayed 1 No display error condition see above 7 156 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 7 Files 4 7 1 Executing a Pallet Program Module 9090 Selects an NC program and a datum table from a pallet file With module 9090 the PLC can select a block of NC files for execution The file names must be defined in a pallet file P that must be selected by the machine status M in directory Module 9090 can only run within a SUBMIT Job in the PLC Queue Constraints If no datum table is specified in the pallet file then the previous file is retained If the file type Datum Table is disabled in machine parameter MP7224 then any datum table specified in the pallet file will be ignored If the file types Plain Language NC Program or DIN ISO NC
465. n monitor the signal transmissions of the measuring system This measuring system monitoring must be activated by a machine parameter Three different conditions can be checked Error message The absolute position of distance coded reference marks C The amplitude of the measuring system signals A The edge separation of the measuring system signals B If one of the conditions is not fulfilled the error message Measuring system lt axis gt defective A B C will appear For sinusoidal signals the LE monitors the amplitude of the measuring system signals for square wave signals the LE evaluates the fault detection signal Uas of the external electronics EXE MP30 Checking the absolute position of the distance coded reference marks Entry XXXXX Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes MP31 Checking the amplitude of the measuring system signals Entry XXXXXX Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Bit 5 Axis S MP32 Checking the edge separation of the measuring system signals Entry XXXXXX Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Bit 5 S axis 4 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 2
466. n one of two ways Stop transfer by sending the character lt DC3 gt XOFF continue by transmitting character lt DC1 gt XON software handshake By suitable levels on the control and message lines RTS and CTS of interfaces V 24 RS 232 C or V 11 RS 422 hardware handshake Example Protocol for dialog program lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NULS lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 50 times 0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM lt CR gt lt LF gt Program block 1 1 TOOL DEF 1 L 0 R 3 lt CR gt lt LF gt Program block 2 26 END PGM 1 MM lt CR gt lt LF gt End of program lt ETX gt lt EOT gt Close data transfer menu 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 29 o Example of software handshake Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC 12 Z Z FMAX lt CR gt lt LF gt Receive buffer fulll lt DC3 gt Receive butter ready again lt DC1 gt 13 Z 10 F100 M03 lt CR gt lt LF gt M K gs es Ss EE a L Hardware handshake see section Freely configurable interfaces 3 1 2 Protocols This section lists the transfer protocols for the various methods of data output and input The EXT1 mode is set Control character for End of Text lt ETX gt Control character for End of Transfer lt EOT gt Software handshake 8 30 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o Request external directory Using the soft key Show ext direc
467. n tables with code number 105 296 This was the only possible way of entering the correction tables up to software issue 250 94X 07 243 03X 07 The following constraints apply Only one dependency per axis can be programmed Comp point spacing 64 Always 64 compensation points per axis Max correction difference If no CMA file has been defined and non linear axis error compensation is selected with MP730 then the correction tables from code number 105 296 apply MP730 Selection of linear or non linear axis error compensation Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 Linear axis error compensation Bit 1 Y axis 1 Non linear axis error compensation Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 31 e 1 6 5 Temperature compensation Exact measurements of machine thermal behaviour centre of expansion in the axes amount of expansion as a function of temperature are necessary to compensate the effects of thermal expansion The temperature measured through the PA 110 and Pt 100 is filed in PLC words W504 to W510 or W472 to W478 see Section Analog inputs The thermal expansion is largely proportional to the temperature value you can directly determine the amount of expansion by multiplying the temperature value by a certain factor This calculated expansion value must be transferred through the PLC program to the PLC word W576 to W584 As soon as the words W576 to W584 receive a value
468. n time us lt 80 Number of bytes STRING memory 10 Immediate STRING 18 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 24 Operands S lt arg gt Operation The STRING Accumulator is loaded with this L command The selection of the STRINGS to be loaded proceeds using the Argument lt arg gt after the operand designation Refer also to operand explanation 3 14 2 ADD Abbreviation for PLC Editor Execution time us lt 80 Number of bytes STRING memory 10 Immediate STRING 18 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 24 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command another STRING is added to the STRING in the STRING Accumulator The selection of the STRINGS which should be added proceeds using the Argument lt arg gt after the operand designation Refer also to operand explanation The resultant STRING must not be longer than 128 characters 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 115 e 3 14 3 Storinga STRING Abbreviation for PLC Editor Execution time us lt 80 Number of bytes STRING memory 10 Immediate STRING STRING from error message or dialogue files Operands S lt arg gt Operation With the command a STRING from the STRING Accumulator is stored in a STRING memory The selection of the memory into which the STRING should be copied proceeds using the Argument lt arg gt after the operand designation Whereby only the Arguments 0 3 which address a STRI
469. n19 1247 11207 248 11217 1249 1122 Ee 11239 ES EEN 252 MES 1253 11269 1254 1127 ES PL 410B 2 PL 410 2 PL 410B 2 PL 410 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 3 59 i X7 Assignment X8 Assignment Pin number PL410B 1 PL410B 2 Pin number PL410B 1 PL410B 42 PL 410 1 PL 410 2 PL 410 1 PL 410 2 064 080 2 065 2 081 3 066 3 082 4 067 4 083 5 068 5 084 6 069 6 085 7 070 7 O86 8 071 8 087 9 072 9 088 10 073 10 089 11 074 11 090 12 075 12 091 13 076 13 os0 092 14 O77 14 093 15 O78 15 094 16 079 16 Control ready These PLC outputs are not available when analogue inputs are active 11 3 5 Analogue inputs on the PL 410 PL 410B X15 X16 X17 X18 analogue input Pin number Assignment 1 10Vto 10 V 2 DV reference potential 3 Screen 11 3 6 Inputs for thermistors on the PL 410 PL 410B X19 X20 X21 X22 connection for Pt 100 Pin number Assignment constant current for Pt 100 5 mA U measuring input for Pt 100 U measuring input for Pt 100 constant current for Pt 100 Screen Ol BI WO NM gt 3 60 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 01 98 2 f 11 4 Connector assignment on the PA 110 Power supply see section PLC power supply X2 X3 X4 X5 analogue inputs Assignment as X15 X16 X17 X18 on PL 410 X7 X8 X9 X10 connection for Pt 100 Assignment as X19 X20 X21 X22 on PL 410 11 5 Connecting
470. nally in ascending order from 0 to 127 maximum The content of the operand B W addresses the desired module 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 129 e End of Indexed Module Call ENDC Abbreviation for PLC Editor ENDC ENDCASE Byte Word Execution time us 0 0 Number of bytes 0 0 Operands none Operation The ENDC command is used together with the CASE command It must come directly after the list of CM commands Structure of a CASE instruction Internal addressing 0 to 127 max 1 CASE B 150 2 CM 100 lt 0 3 CM 200 lt 1 4 CM 201 lt 2 5 CM 202 lt 3 6 CM 203 lt 4 7 CM 204 lt 5 8 CM 300 lt 6 9 ENDC Line 1 Command Operand the internal address of the required module must be filed in the operand Line 2 Call Module if operand content 0 Line 3 Call Module if operand content 1 Line 4 Call Module if operand content 2 Line 5 Call Module if operand content 3 Line 6 Call Module if operand content 4 Line 7 Call Module if operand content 5 6 Line 8 Call Module if operand conten Line 9 End of CASE instruction 7 130 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei 3 19 Linking Files The source code of the PLC program can be stored in several different files that are managed with the USES GLOBAL and EXTERN commands These must be written at the beginning of the file i e before any PLC instruction
471. ncrement positioning R M2512 Delete marker for increment positioning in X axis R M2513 S M2528 S M2529 L 1138 Increment positioning in X direction AN 1133 S M2512 R M2528 L 1133 Increment positioning in X direction AN 1138 S M2513 R M2529 EM 4 210 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 12 Increment positioning 01 98 e 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 4 211 L 13 Hirth coupling A frequent method of locking rotary axes and swivel heads is the so called Hirth coupling in which more or less finely splined plates engage to form a rigid connection The Hirth functions are implemented in the PLC program The only operation in the NC is a rounding off according to the grid spacing in MP430 when setting the datum point Repositioning is initiated as PLC positioning or an error message is displayed depending on whether the axis is automatically or manually positioned with the Hirth coupling MP420 defines the Hirth coupling functions and MP430 the grid spacing The positioning accuracy and other parameters are defined in free machine parameters 13 1 Positioning in Manual or Electronic Handwheel mode The Axis in Position marker M2011 is reset when selecting the 4th or 5th axis which is traversed with the electr
472. nd data transfer NC gt PLC in the OEM cycles FN14 Output of error messages and dialogs to VDU FN15 Output of error messages dialogs and O parameter values to a file or via a data interface V 24 RS 232 C or V 11 RS 422 FN19 Assignment of two numerical values or O parameter values from an OEM cycle to PLC Function FN19 is described in detail in the PLC Programming Manual 9 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Creating OEM cycles 01 98 L Ei 2 Dialogs for OEM cycles The dialog numbers defined in the dialog blocks of the OEM cycles determine the text to be displayed from the dialog file concerned Which dialog file is active will depend on the dialog language selected MP7230 and whether dialogs are read from the EPROM or are stored in the NC program memory see the section on Functions for file management in the PLC Programming Manual The dialog numbers input 0 to 127 of the dialog block are assigned to the first 128 lines of a dialog file Example DLG DEF 0 1 127 Dialog number in OEM cycle Line number of dialog file Dialog example 0 1 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE 1 2 NUMBER OF HOLES 127 128 PITCH Up to 20 characters can be displayed on a dialog line In all a maximum of 34 characters may be input being reproduced in full in the NC program but only in abbreviated form on the dialog line 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Dialogs for OEM cycles 9 7 1 3 Output in binary code If the OEM cycles have been fully
473. ndition and outputs a torque The time entered for this must be matched to the relevant drives and machine The axes must be stopped immediately by external holding brakes if the control fails and no braking torque can be output 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11 15 e 3 4 Oscilloscope An oscilloscope has been integrated in the TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 for trimming and optimizing the speed and position controllers The characteristic curves which the oscilloscope records can be stored in 4 channels and for all axis The following curves can be displayed Feed rate V ACTUAL Actual value mm min V NOMINAL Nominal value mm min Position and trailing error S ACTUAL mm S NOMINAL mm D DIFF Trailing error for position control mm Speed N ACTUAL Actual speed mm min digital speed control only N NOMINAL Nominal speed mm min N INT Nominal actual difference for speed controller Nominal value U ANALOGUE Analogue voltage mV Note on speed curves Rotational speeds are recorded as feed rates in mm min The speed in rom can be calculated with the help of the distance covered per revolution i e Feed rate mm min Rotational speed rpm Traverse per rev mm The data recorded for the display are stored until an NC graphic is called Likewise a computed graphic simulation is deleted by the oscilloscope display A total of 5 colours can be selected in machine parameters for the oscillosco
474. ndle over ride M2511 Deactivate feed rate over ride M2526 Switch X Y or Z to 4th axis M2542 Complement for M2526 M2585 PLC positioning axis S Isb M2586 PLC positioning axis S M2587 PLC positioning axis S M2588 PLC positioning axis S M2589 PLC positioning axis S msb M2590 Define the axis to be switched to 4th axis Isb M2591 Define the axis to be switched to 4th axis msb M2592 Tool number from M2560 to M2567 M2593 Go to Hirth grid after NC STOP M2594 Central tool file cannot be edited M2595 Output tool number in addition to pocket number M2596 Select central tool file during active program run mode M2598 Transfer tool number M2599 Transfer tool number M2602 Define reference point traverse M2603 Axis sequence for reference point traverse lsb M2604 Axis sequence for reference point traverse M2605 _ Axis sequence for reference point traverse M2606 Axis sequence for reference point traverse M2607 Axis sequence for reference point traverse msb M2657 Display a second auxiliary function M2664 No standstill monitoring X axis M2665 __ No standstill monitoring Y axis M2666 No standstill monitoring Z axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7 185 Marker Function M2667 No standstill monitoring axis 4 M2668 No standstill monitoring axis 5 M2810 Data format of a numerical value in M2560 to M2576 M2811 Data format of a numerical value in M2560 to M2
475. ndle override PLC RUN 4 99 Entry xxxx Bit O Feed rate override if rapid traverse button iS pressed in program run 0 Override not active 1 Override active Feed rate override if rapid traverse buttons and machine direction buttons are pressed in manual operating mode 0 Override not active 1 Override active Spindle override in 1 increments or according to a non linear characteristic curve 0 1 increments 1 non linear characteristic curve 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 45 o Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7640 Machine with handwheel PLC RUN 4 197 Entry 0 to 5 CN 123 0 no handwheel 1 HR 330 all keys evaluated by NC 2 HR 130 or HR 330 3 HR 330 and rapid traverse keys evaluated by PLC 4 HR 332 all keys evaluated by PLC 5 up to three HR 150 via HRA 110 6 HR 410 MP7641 Entry of handwheel interpolation factor PLC RUN 4 197 Entry 0 or 1 CN 123 0 entry at TNC control panel 1 entry via PLC module 9036 MP7645 0 7 Initializing parameters for handwheel PLC RUN 4 197 Entry 0 to 255 CN 123 MP7645 0 4 200 MP7645 1 4 202 MP7645 2 4 202 MP7645 3 7 at present without function 4 202 MP7650 Count direction for handwheel PLC RUN 4 197 Entry 0 or 1 0 Negative count direction 1 Positive count direction MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel PLC RUN 4 197 Entry 0 to 65 535 increments MP7670 Mini
476. ndwheel symbol on the screen The and rapid traverse keys are evaluated directly by the NC and inputs 1160 to 1162 are also set accordingly MP7640 2 HR 330 all keys evaluated by NC The axis keys on the keyboard and on the HR are used to move both the highlight and the on screen handwheel symbol The and rapid traverse keys are evaluated directly by the NC and inputs 1160 to 1162 are also set accordingly MP7640 3 HR 330 and rapid traverse keys evaluated by PLC The axis keys on the keyboard are used to move the highlight for actual value transfer or for setting datum point The axis keys on the HR are used to move the handwheel symbol on the screen The and rapid traverse keys must be evaluated by the PLC Inputs 1160 to 1162 are set accordingly Assignment of keys to PLC inputs Key on HR PLC input 1160 1161 rapid traverse 1162 10 3 Portable handwheel HR 332 MP7640 4 HR 332 all keys evaluated by PLC The axis keys on the keyboard are used to move the highlight for actual value transfer or for setting datum point The axis keys on the HR are used to move the handwheel symbol on the screen MP7645 0 defines whether all 12 keys and their LEDs can be addressed by the PLC or whether the axis select keys and their LEDs are excluded 1 4 198 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 01 98 L 10 3 1 Assignment of keys and LEDs to the PLC inputs and outputs The 12 keys of handwh
477. ne parameter Function provisional entry value MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid 9V traverse MP1060 Acceleration As measured on the machine see Preparation of the machine MP1810 ky factor 1 MP1820 Multiplication factor 1 SE max mach speed 100 MP1830 Kink point Rapid traverse These values can usually be further optimized 1 4 264 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 01 98 o ky factor Adjust the k factor MP1810 so that the voltage characteristic is as described in the section Servo positioning If a different k factor is required for rapid traverse to that for the machining feed rate it must be optimized separately Optimize k factor for the machining feed rate X axis Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer of the servo amplifier of the X axis y Enter following program in PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode LBL 1 X 1001 RO F2 X O ROF CALL LBL 1 REP 100 100 Deng _ Press external START button in PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE operating mode machine runs Caution Set feed rate override to 100 E eer MP1810 Increase entry value until control loop oscillates or overshoot occurs after the acceleration ramp U V gt Machining feed rate ts y MP1810 ky factor Reduce entry value until no oscillations can be detected U V t s Jd Repeat trimming procedure for axes Y Z IV and V
478. ng and Spindle orientation cycles can be found in the section Main spindle 6 7 1 Cycle inhibit Machine parameter MP7245 can be used to selectively inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles MP7245 0 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN Cycles 1 to 15 Entry 0 to 65 535 0 to FFFF Bit 1 Cycle 1 0 do not disable Bit 2 Cycle 2 1 disable Bit 3 Cycle 3 Bit 4 Cycle 4 Bit 5 Cycle 5 Bit 6 Cycle 6 Bit 7 Cycle 7 Bit 8 Cycle 8 Bit 9 Cycle 9 Bit 10 Cycle 10 Bit 11 Cycle 11 Bit 12 Cycle 12 Bit 13 Cycle 13 Bit 14 Cycle 14 Bit 15 Cycle 15 4 144 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o MP7245 1 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard Cycles 16 to 30 Entry 0 to 65 535 0 to FFFF Bit O Cycle 16 0 do not disable Bit 1 Cycle 17 1 disable Bit 2 Cycle 18 Bit 3 Cycle 19 Bit 4 Cycle 20 Bit 5 Cycle 21 Bit 6 Cycle 22 Bit 7 Cycle 23 Bit 8 Cycle 24 Bit 9 Cycle 25 Bit 10 Cycle 26 Bit 11 Cycle 27 Bit 12 Cycle 28 Bit 13 Cycle 29 Bit 14 Cycle 30 Bit 15 Cycle 31 6 7 2 Pocket milling The overlap factor for clearing out a rectangular or circular pocket Cycle 4 and Cycle 5 can be altered by machine parameters Stepover Stepover MP7430 x cutter radius MP7430 Overlap factor for pocket milling Entry 0 100 to 1 414 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 145 2 6 7 3 Milling cycles for pockets with free programmed contours The sequence for milling cycles for pock
479. ng in operation with feed Es cancellable Entry 0 0010 to 30 0000 mm PLC EDIT 4 85 MP1410 0 Xaxis MP1410 1 Y axis MP1410 2 Zaxis MP1410 3 4th axis MP1410 4 5th axis MP1420 Position monitoring in operation with feed PLC EDIT 4 85 precontrol EMERGENCY STOP Entry 0 0010 to 30 0000 mm MP1420 0 Xaxis MP1420 1 Y axis MP1420 2 Zaxis MP1420 3 4th axis MP1420 4 5th axis MP1510 kv factor for feed precontrol PLC RUN 4 76 Entry 0 100 to 20 000 men MP1510 0 Xaxis MP1510 1 Y axis MP1510 2 Zaxis MP1510 3 4th axis MP1510 4 5th axis MP1511 Factor for stiction compensation PLC RUN 4 33 Entry 0 to 16 777 215 MP1511 0 X axis MP1511 1 Y axis MP1511 2 Z axis MP1511 3 4th axis MP1511 4 5th axis MP1512 Limit of extent of stiction compensation Entry O to 16 777 215 counting steps MP1512 0 MP1512 1 MP1512 2 MP1512 3 MP1512 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis PLC RUN 8 4 33 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 17 e Ei Machine parameter MP1513 MP1515 MP1520 MP1525 MP1530 Function and input Page via Feed rate limit for stiction compensation PLC RUN 4 33 Entry 0 to 300 000 mm min MP1513 0 Xaxis MP1513 1 Y axis MP1513 2 Zaxis MP1513 3 4th axis MP1513 4 5th axis k factor for feed precontrol activated M105 PLC RUN 4 76 Entry 0 100 to 20 000 Sm mm MP1510 0 Xaxis MP1510 1 Y axis MP1510 2 Zaxis MP1510 3 4th axis MP1510 4 5th axis Transient respon
480. ng mode EXT3 PLC Entry 0 or 1 0 Standard data transfer 1 Transfer blockwise 8 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 2 For the control characters for the data transmission protocols lt SOH gt lt ETB gt lt STX gt lt ETX gt lt EOT gt lt ACK gt lt NAK gt any other ASCII characters can be chosen using the following machine parameters for table of ASCII characters see Appendix If these machine parameters are loaded with a nought the standard settings given in brackets are active as for FE1 and FE2 operation MP5200 Control character for Start of Text STX MP5200 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5200 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5200 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range 0 to 127 MP5201 Control character for End of Text ETX MP5201 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5201 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5201 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range O to 127 MP5206 Control character for Start of Command Block SOH MP5206 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5206 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5206 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range O to 127 MP5207 Control character for End of Command Block ETB MP5207 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5207 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5207 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range O to 127 MP5208 Control character for Transfer O K ACK MP5208 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5208 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5208 2 In mode EXT 3 PLC Input range 0 to 127 MP5209 Control character for Transfer Defective NAK MP5209 0 In mode EXT 1 MP5209 1 In mode EXT 2 MP5
481. ngth of the program code to be generated exceeds the storage space available in the control 10 SC Assignment to a parenthesis An attempt has been made to assign a gating result to an operand even though not all open parentheses have been closed again 11 SC Parenthesis nesting too deep An attempt has been made to nest more than 16 parentheses 12 SC Jump in a gating chain An unconditional jump has been programmed even though the assignment chain previously begun has not yet been assigned 13 SC Close parenthesis with no open parenthesis A close parenthesis command has been programmed before writing the relevant open parenthesis command 14 SC Label within a parenthesis Alabel has been set inside a parenthesis gate This is not permitted because close parenthesis commands cannot be executed before the corresponding open parenthesis commands 15 SC Label within a gating chain Alabel has been programmed in a gate that has already begun This is not permitted because the first command after the label would have to be interpreted either as a gate or as a load command depending on the program flow 16 SC Jump within a parenthesis Ajump command has been programmed in a parenthesis This is not possible because opened parentheses must always be closed again due to internal implementation and this would not happen with the jump 17 SC Parenthesis opened at end of block An EM instruction has been programmed with parenthesis open
482. nnected with the frame of the machine Necessary cable cross section gt 6 mm2 Encapsulated linear measurement systems should be connected to compressed air SH 1 3 30 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 01 98 o Please check that the mounting block the sensor unit and the scale housing all have a good electrical connection with the chassis frame of the machine Since the connector for the measuring system and the mounting block are connected by the outer screen of the connector cable this test can be carried out between the measuring system connector and the measuring system housing During this test the connector must not be plugged in to the logic unit as this would cause a grounding via the logic unit LS 107 C LS 403 C LS406 C LS 704 C 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 3 31 o 6 Nominal value output HEIDENHAIN contouring controls control the position loop servo with a nominal value potential of 10 volts Maximum loading of the nominal value outputs 2 mA Maximum load capacitance 2 nF 6 1 Connector assignment SI Id Nr 290 110 T max 20 m zx X8 Nominal value output Id Nr 290 109 gt gt JBN 1 1 Nominal value output 1 BN GN 2 2 Do
483. not formatted S Detected during syntax check in PLC Editor Compile soft key S May have been detected during syntax check otherwise during Compiler run C Detected during Compiler run either after control is switched on or in PLC programming mode R Detected at PLC program run time List of error codes Error Code Explanation 0 ESC Not a valid command The read line cannot be interpreted as a PLC command 1 spare earlier versions Operand for jump is no label 2 ESC Invalid operand type An invalid operand type has been defined The command cannot be used with the defined operand type 3 ESC Operand not found A type has been specified for the operand but not a value 4 ESC Operand not in acceptable range An operand number has been defined that is outside the range available for the operand 5 ES No limiter after command The PLC command is followed by other characters that cannot be interpreted 6 ESC No end of line found The line is more than 128 characters long 7 SC Label not defined There is a reference to a label that is not defined elsewhere with LBL KFIELD or EXTERN 7 30 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 o 8 SC No end of block found At the end of the program file there are PLC commands not terminated by an EM or JP command There is an attendant risk of an undefined program range being run at run time 9 SC Program too long RAM Overflow The total le
484. not use YL 8 3 3 Nominal value output 2 RD BL f 4 4 Nominal value output 5 PK GY PK 5 5 Nominal value output 3 6 6 OV Nominal value output 5 RD 7 7 Nominal value output 4 VI 8 8 Nominal value output S axis WH 9 9 OV Nominal value output 1 WH GY 10 10 GN Do not use 11 11 OV Nominal value output 2 GY 12 12 Do not use BL 13 13 OV Nominal value output 3 BK 14 14 OV Nominal value output 4 15 15 OV Nominal value output S axis KN 6 2 Connecting cable HEIDENHAIN offers a connecting cable with a connector at one end Id Nr 290 109 The connecting cable to the nominal value outputs may not have more than one intermediate terminal The terminal must be made in an earthed connection box This is necessary when the cable must branch to physically separate servo inputs It is only possible to earth the screening of the servo leads in this way If required suitable connection boxes are available from HEIDENHAIN with the d Nr 251 249 01 Ska 3 32 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Nominal value output 01 98 L The casing of the connection box must be electrically connected with the frame of the machine The O V of the nominal value differential input must be joined to signal ground cable cross section 6 mm2 see also under Earthing plan Suggested solution for connecting and wiring the screening in the connection box
485. ns The following code numbers have a fixed meaning Code number Function 95 148 Select machine parameter list 807 667 Select PLC mode 105 296 Correction tables for the non linear axis error compensation 86 357 Remove program protection 75 368 Automatic offset adjustment 123 Select the user available list of machine parameters 531 210 Erase markers M1000 to M2000 and byte 0 to byte 127 Special function Switch on control and press MOD key at the same time Enter code number The entire RAM memory is now erased MPs NC programs PLC program all markers and bytes 688 379 Oscilloscope 4 152 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 1 The value of the code number which is entered is stored in Doubleword D276 The machine manufacturer can evaluate this code with the aid of the PLC and define his own functions for code numbers or disable the preset code numbers Address Function D276 Value of the code number most recently entered by MOD 6 12 Programming station Machine parameters can be used to set the control so that it can be utilized as a programming station without the machine In this setting only the operating modes Programming and editing and Program test function It is possible to select whether the PLC should be active or not in the programming station setting MP7210 Programming station Entry values 0 1 2 Entry 0 Control and programming 1 Programming station PLC active 2 Pr
486. nsation of sag and ballscrew pitch error Cycle 3 Slot Milling modified Cycle 27 Cylinder Surface new Working Plane Displays are referenced to the tilted coordinate system Touch probe functions in he tilted coordinate system Datum setting in the tilted system M94 new modulo 360 M103 new reduced feed rate during plunge cutting M105 M106 new second set of ky factors M112 new Tolerance field for Look ahead M116 new feed rate for rotary axes in mm min M118 new Handwheel overlapping Mim and max memory for DNC operation Calculation with parentheses and expanded parameter functions MP7470 was eliminated Graphic depiction of the workpiece blank in the working space M114 new automatic compensation of machine geometry during machining with tilted axes Module 9150 new Input Output of tool and pocket tables Module 9035 was expanded TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 09 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 259 94x 09 This version was supplied from 8 93 only TNC 407 243 03x 09 when expressly requested by the customer New functions The export versions TNC 415F and TNC 425E were improved with linear interpolation in 4 of 5 axes previously 3 of 5 axes TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 10 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 259 94x 10 TNC 407 243 03x 10 Release 9 93 2 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 E TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 11 TNC 415 F TNC 425E
487. nt interruption with CE off line Switch on control voltage voltage axes are in control loop Gross positioning error MP1040 or MP210 wrong Check direction of traverse of ref approach for all axes Ref approach Start ref approach SEN with start key with axis direction modes nua be run YES direction of direction of NO traverse correct traverse of axes NO determined correct determined by MP1320 by MP1040 and Check direction of traverse for all axes This flow diagram must be worked through for every axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start up procedure 4 263 i 16 3 5 Fixing the software limit switch ranges Determine the software limit switch ranges see section Machine axes as follows In Manual operation mode select the REF display with the MOD key Position displays show the distance to the machine datum Move all axes with the aid of the direction keys or the handwheel in positive and negative direction to just before the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches Note the values in the positional displays and their sign Enter the noted values in MP910 or MP920 J Select actual value display with MOD key 16 3 6 Optimizing the control with lag MP1390 1 The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the control characteristics Machi
488. nterrogate state of Input 111 10 JPF 110 Dependent on Input 111 skip the deletion of the Submit program 11 CAN B128 Interrupt execution of the Submit program Or remove program from the queue 12 LBL 110 Jump address Continuation Main program S i XX EM End main program XX LBL 300 Begin Submit program is added as with Modules XX at the end of the main program XX H XX XX EM End Submit program In this case the contents of the Submit program could for example be a display in the PLC window which can be done via a fixed PLC Module 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 125 8 7 126 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 17 Constants Field KF The Constants Field data type can be used to access one of several constants defined in tabular form depending on the value of the Index Register X Addressing is with KF NamelIX where Name is a jump label that identifies the beginning of the Constants Field Constants Fields start with the label KFIELD Name followed by a random not zero number of constants followed by the end label ENDK Constants Fields may only be created when the program has been previously terminated with an EM or JP instruction The name of the Constants
489. ntrol voltage is switched on again The external EMERGENCY STOP is evaluated by the control as an external stop If the external EMERGENCY STOP is triggered during an axis movement the moving axis is stopped in a controlled manner If the drive amplifiers are blocked by the external EMERGENCY STOP the nominal value output may exceed the position monitoring fixed by the machine parameter In this case the error message POSITIONING ERROR or GROSS POSITIONING ERROR lt AxIS gt will be displayed EMERGENCY STOP can be suppressed with Marker M2827 If Marker M2827 is set an external EMERGENCY STOP is not reported to the NC and instead all control loops are opened and the NC stops Marker Function Set Reset M2190 Cancellable error message is displayed NC NC M2191 Error message External EMERGENCY STOP is displayed NC NC M2827 Suppress EMERGENCY STOP open the control loop stop NC PLC PLC 4 120 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 01 98 E 5 1 Connection diagram Under fault conditions the control is ready output should switch off the 24 volt supply Because of the enormous importance of this function this output is tested by the control every time the mains power is switched on Basic circuit diagram Logic unit Switch opens briefly when the control voltage of each microprocessor is switched on X42 4 X41 34 X44 2 X44 1 Control is 24V not 24V Control ready ready interruptible
490. o 1 MP6500 Tool Calibration with TT 110 Entry Oor1 0 Cycles for tool calibration inhibited 1 Cycles for tool calibration not inhibited MP6505 Probing direction for tool measurement Entry Oto3 0 Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis dee Positive probing direction in the 90 axis 23 Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis 0 axis 3 Negative probing direction in the 90 axis MP6507 Calculation of the probing feed rate Entry Oto2 0s Calculation of the probing feed rate with constant tolerance T Calculation of the probing feed rate with variable tolerance 25 Constant probing feed rate MP6510 Max permissible measuring error for tool measurement with rotating tool Entry 0 002 to 0 999 mm MP6520 Probing feed rate for tool measurement with non rotating tool Entry 10 to 3000 mm min MP6530 Distance from tool lower edge to probe contract upper edge for tool radius measurement Entry 0 001 to 99 9999 mm MP6531 Diameter or edge length of the TT 110 probe contact Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6540 Safety zone around the probe contact TT 110 for pre positioning Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6550 Rapid traverse in the probing cycle for TT 110 Entry 10 to 10 000 mm min MP6560 Spindle orientation for measuring individual teeth Entry 0 to 88 1 Spindle orientation directly via NC 0 Function inactive error message 1 to 88 Number of the M function for spindle orientat
491. ockets in pocket table Entry 0 to 254 MP7266 Elements of the tool table Entry 0 to 99 0 no display 1 to 99 position in tool table MP7266 0 Tool name NAME MP7266 1 Tool length L MP7266 2 Tool radius R MP7266 3 Tool radius 2 R2 MP7266 4 Oversize tool length DL MP7266 5 Oversize tool radius DR MP7266 6 Oversize tool radius 2 DR2 MP7266 7 Tool locked TL MP7266 8 Replacement tool RT MP7266 9 TIME 1 MP7266 10 TIME 2 MP7266 11 CURRENT TIME MP7266 12 Comment on the tool DOC MP7266 13 Number of tool cutting edges MP7266 14 Wear tolerance for tool length MP7266 15 Wear tolerance for tool radius RTOL MP7266 16 Cutting direction of the tool DIRECT MP7266 17 PLC status PLC MP7266 18 Tool length offset TT L OFFS MP7266 19 Tool radius offset TT R OFFS MP7266 20 Breakage tolerance for tool length LBREAK MP7266 21 Breakage tolerance for tool radius RBREAK MP7267 Elements of pocket table Entry 0 to 99 0 no display 1 to 99 position in pocket table MP7267 0 Tool number T MP7267 1 Special tool ST MP7267 2 Fixed pocket F MP7267 3 Locked pocket L MP7267 4 PLC Status PLC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 225 e 15 1 1 Special Tools In the pocket table the ST field can be used to define tools as special tools If these are oversize tools that are too big for one pocket in the tool magazine then pockets must be reserved on either side of that pocket In the pocket table
492. oder can result during reversals in traverse direction Depending on the design the movement of the rotary encoder may be advanced or retarded relative to the table The professional jargon describes this as positive or negative backlash Backlash occurring outside the control loop can be automatically compensated by the TNC Positive backlash rotary encoder advanced relative to the table traverse movement of the table is too short Negative backlash rotary encoder retarded relative to the table traverse movement of the table is too long For every direction reversal the TNC subtracts or adds the value from machine parameter MP710 x o the value resulting from the measuring system signals MP710 Backlash compensation Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm or MP710 0 X axis MP710 1 Y axis MP710 2 Z axis MP710 3 Ath axis MP710 4 5th axis f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 23 e 1 6 2 Compensation for reversal errors in circular motion The stiction in the axis bearings can lead to reversal errors at the quadrant transitions during circular movements Commercially available devices such as the HEIDENHAIN Double Ball Bar system can diagnose these errors and determine the size and duration of their peaks T 3 Spitzenweite Peak width YO Oo D OO GA OO ON eecht t t t t t t t t gt 91 923 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 The TNC can then compensate for these errors The si
493. oduced by the manufacturer of the machine Either HEIDENHAIN or the manufacturer of the machine can store this software in EPROMs HEIDENHAIN assigns PLC software numbers to the machine manufacturers on request HEIDENHAIN can archive the specific PLC programs in a data bank so that the installation of the correct PLC program is assured if a control has to be exchanged The PLC EPROM must be written in the format of the corresponding software type Beginning with software types 280 54 280 56 and 280 58 either a 1 MB or a2 MB EPROM can be used for the PLC 3 3 EPROM sockets 3 3 1 TNC 415 A TNC 415 E Sockets on processor board IC 3 PLE 1 MB IC 7 Language 1 MB NC IC 3 1 MB NC IC 4 1 MB NC IC 1 1 MB NC IC 2 1 MB NC IC 5 1 MB NC IC 6 1 MB ICS SW Module Sockets on CLP board 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 11 3 3 2 TNC 415 B TNC 415 F and TNC 425 A TNC 425 E or Sockets on processor board IC 8 PLC 1 MB IC 7 Language 1 MB IC3 IC 4 NC 1 MB INC 1 MB IC 1 IC 2 IC 5 IC 6 NC 2 MB NG 2 MBI leese INC 1 MB NC 1 MB Set jumper to 2M Sockets on processor board ER DLC 1 MB IC 7 Language 1 MB IC 1
494. odule 9121 There is no feed rate override If the axis was previously in the Search Reference Point mode this mode is cancelled Positioning always starts from the current register contents If Modules 9120 Start PLC Axis 9121 Stop PLC Axis and 9122 Traverse reference mark are called more than once for the same axis during a PLC cycle then only the last activated command is executed Any Positioning error status that is set in this axis is cancelled Possible errors Anon existent axis has been specified An axis has been specified that is not declared as a PLC axis by MP10 and MP60 An absolute target position outside the range 0 modulo value has been specified for a modulo axis The axis is already positioning Call PS BMW D K lt Axis gt 0 4 for X Y Z 4 5 PS B W D K lt Target position gt in reference system format 0 0001 mm PS BAD lt Feed rate gt mm min PS BAW D K lt Flag register gt Bit 0 1 Target position incremental CM 9120 PL B W D lt Error code gt 0 Positioning has started 1 Non existent axis specified 2 Axis not configured as PLC axis 3 Axis is already positioning 4 Absolute position outside modulo range Error status after call M3171 0 Positioning has started 1 Error condition see above 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 171 2 Ei 4 9 2 Stop PLC Axis Module 9121 A positioning sequence previously started with Module 9120 St
495. of a STRING is to be addressed then this can be done by addressing SnX see INDEX REGISTER The substring will be addressed from the X th character in the specified STRING Immediate STRING A STRING can also be entered directly into the PLC program The Text STRING which may contain 0 37 characters must be identified by quotation marks Example S COOLANT 1 ON Text from the PLC Error Message files and or from the PLC Dialogue files Text from the active error message or dialogue files may be read by the input of the line number 7 114 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 1 PLC ERROR S Exx xx Line Number from the PLC Error Message file 0 to 999 PLC DIALOG S Dxx xx Line Number from the PLC Dialogue file 0 to 4095 The character sequence Exx or Dxx is entered in the Argument lt arg gt for the STRING Command A 5 Byte long character train lt SUB gt EOxx or lt SUB gt DOxx is loaded into the Accumulator lt SUB gt ASCII lt SUB gt Instead of this character train the line xx of the active error message or dialogue file is read for display on the screen Note The execution times depend on the length of the STRINGS The specified times indicate maximum values For the Immediate STRINGS the length n of the STRINGS must respectively be added to the command length should this be odd the next larger even length must be added 3 14 1 LOAD L Abbreviation for PLC Editor L LOAD Executio
496. of the trigger signal and connectable via APE interface electronics TT 110 for workpiece measurement The TNC 415 and TNC 425 can also support the measuring touch probe system TM 110 For start up and adjustment of the 3D touch probe systems see Chapter Machine Integration 8 1 Connector assignment X12 Touch probe system D subminiature female connector 15 pin Pin number Signal designation Inner screen 0 V Ready standby Start 15V 10 UP 5V 5 UP Battery warning 0 V UN Trigger signal 0 Trigger signal 1 3 A 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 11 to 15 Do not use 2 Stylus in rest position signal high 3 36 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 01 98 o 8 2 Connection of the touch probe system Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables and adapters for the connection to the touch probe system 8 2 1 TS 120 or TT 110 The touch probe system TS 120 is connected directly to the logic unit via a cable adapter See also under the heading Mounting dimensions TS 120 helical cable extended 1 5 m Cable adapter complete el X12 Touch probe inputs Id Nr 274 543 TT 110 cable with metal armour tubing gt n 1 1 2 2 PK 3 3 Standby wal fa alk 1 1 5 5 15V 410 Up TS 120 BN 3 2 A e 6 6 5V 5 Ue or GY 3 3 7 7 Battery warning TT 110 14 4 WH 8 8
497. ogram a At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an LN commana i e the complement of the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 control which did not have the special LN command In PLC programs for the TNC 407 TNC 415 a logic chain should always be started with a load command see L LN L Di Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand M O T C are gated with AND NOT The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator Example Input 14 and Input I5 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to Output O2 Initial state Input 14 1 Input I5 1 Output O2 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 eee 7 0 Le 2 AN IB 3 02 E Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND NOT Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 55 L Word execution with the AND NOT command Operands B W D K Operation The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand B W D K are gated with AND NOT In accordance with the different sizes of operand B 8 bit W 16 bit D K 32 bit 8 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator Thus Bit O in the Accumulator is gated with bit O in the operand Bi
498. ogramming station PLC inactive 6 13 Dialogue language The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are available in ten different dialogue languages see chapter Introduction The dialogue language can be altered by a simple software exchange English as a basic language is stored in every control as a second language and can be selected by machine parameter If the basic language English has been selected then marker M2041 is set by the NC MP7230 Change dialogue language Entry 0 or 1 0 First dialogue language 1 Basic language English Marker Function Set Reset M 2041 Basic language English is selected NC NC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 153 o 6 13 1 Decimal sign The decimal sign can be selected by machine parameter MP7280 Decimal sign Entry 0 or 1 0 Decimal comma 1 Decimal point 6 14 Memory test A machine parameter can be used to select if the RAM and the EPROM memory areas should be tested on switching on the control MP7690 Memory test at switch on Entry xx Bit O RAM test 0 memory test at switch on Bit 1 EPROM test 1 no memory test at switch on 6 15 End of program In the operating modes Program run single block or Program run full sequence if the end of the program is reached the NC sets the marker M2061 This marker is only reset at the start of the next program The information End of program can be evaluated by the PLC This is necessary when operatin
499. olation factor of the EXE at X5 X6 only TNC407 Entry 0 1 5 0 no measuring system on X5 X6 or EXE without interpolation 1 EXE without interpolation 5 EXE with 5 fold interpolation MP340 0 MP340 1 MP340 2 MP340 3 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis RESET RESET 4 8 4 7 MP340 4 5th axis 5 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 2 Machine parameter MP410 MP420 MP430 MP710 MP711 via PLC EDIT RESET i i 7 a Axis designation Entry 0 to 5 A B C U V W MP410 3 4th axis MP410 4 5th axis Hirth coupling Entry 0 or 1 0 No Hirth coupling 1 Hirth coupling active MP420 3 Ath axis MP420 4 5th axis Prescribed step for Hirth coupling Entry 0 0000 to 30 0000 MP430 3 Ath axis MP430 4 5th axis Backlash compensation Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm or MP710 0 MP710 1 MP710 2 MP710 3 MP710 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis 7 Compensation for reversal spikes in circular interpolation Entry 1 0000 to1 0000 mm MP711 0 MP711 1 MP711 2 MP711 3 MP711 4 X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis E Page 4 13 4 212 4 212 4 23 4 24 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters Machine parameter MP712 MP715 MP716 MP720 MP730 Function and input Compensation per control loop cycle time Entry 0 000000 to 99 999999 mm
500. olenoid valves High frequency equipment pulse equipment and stray magnetic fields from switch mode power supplies Mains leads and leads to the above equipment Electrical interference can be avoided by A minimum distance between the logic unit and its leads and interfering equipment gt 20 cm A minimum distance between the logic unit and its leads and cables carrying interference signals gt 10 cm Where signal cables and cables which carry interference signals are laid together in metallic ducting adequate decoupling can be achieved by using a grounded separation screen Screening according to DIN VDE 0160 Potential compensating lines gt 6 mm see earthing plan Use of original HEIDENHAIN cables connectors and couplings 2 2 Heat generation and cooling Please note that the reliability of electronic equipment is greatly reduced by continuous operation at elevated temperatures Please make the necessary arrangements to keep within the permissible ambient temperature range Permissible ambient temperature in operation 0 C to 45 C The following means may be employed to ensure adequate heat removal Provide sufficient space for air circulation Build in a ventilator fan to circulate the air inside the control cabinet The fan must reinforce the natural convection It must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the logic unit and no pre warmed air is blown into the uni
501. om the cyclical PLC program section Possible errors The call parameter for interface selection is outside the permitted range 0 1 Call PS BMW D K lt Interface 0 RS232 1 RS422 gt CM 9102 PL B W D lt Interface status gt Bit 0 Interface is assigned 1 Interface is assigned to PLC 2 Interface is ready see above 3 Transmit buffer is empty 4 Transmit error 5 Receive buffer is full 6 Receive error 7 ETX was received not ready to receive Error status after call M3171 0 Status was read 1 Wrong call parameter 7 164 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 8 4 Transmit String across Data Interface Module 9103 Module 9103 transmits a string from one of the 4 string memories across one of the two serial interfaces References to the PLC error file and PLC dialogue file are deleted see description of Module 9082 Constraints The interface must be assigned to the PLC and initialized by Module 9100 before Module 9103 is called Module 9103 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job Possible errors The call parameters are outside the permitted range 0 1 for the interface 0 3 for the string number The interface is not assigned to the PLC The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job The transmit buffer is not empty Deleting the references to error and dialogue files has resulted in a string that is longer than 127 characters A transfer error was d
502. on 1 9 1 Tilt working plane function The swivel axes are moved either manually or NC controlled The position of the swivel axis is defined in Cycle 19 Tilt working plane e g A 45 B 45 When Cycle 19 is activated the TNC performs a coordinate transformation The Z axis stays parallel to the tool axis while the X Y plane is perpendicular to the direction vector of the tool axis The swivel axes must first be positioned manually or with an appropriate NC block The status window displays the swivelled coordinate system The machining plane can be transformed spatially at random with this procedure However the NC program is still programmed in the normal way in the X Y plane The NC automatically interpolates the affected axes as it runs the program All path functions and cycles such as Set datum and Probe can also be used in the transformed machining plane The combination of coordinate transformation cycles must match the activate and deactivate sequence Tool radius compensation in the machining plane and tool length compensation parallel to the tool axis is active The 3D ROT soft key can be used to activate the swivelled machining plane for Manual and Program Run separately The position of the swivel axes can be edited for manual operation The mechanical offset between the swivel axes is entered in machine parameters The machine parameters that describe the machine geometry are divided into nine blocks each block de
503. on and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP7310 Graphics display PLC RUN 4 133 Entry xxxx CN 123 BitO Changeover of 3 plane display 0 European preferred 1 American preferred Rotation of the coordinate system in the machining plane 90 0 no rotation 1 coordinate system rotated by 90 BLK form after datum shift 0 BLK form will not shift 1 BLK form will shift Show cursor position in 3 plane display 0 not shown 1 cursor position shown MP7315 Tool radius for graphic simulation without 4 272 TOOL CALL Entry 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 mm MP7316 Tool penetration depth PLC RUN 4 272 CN 123 Entry 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 mm MP7317 0 M function to start graphic display PLC RUN 4 272 Entry 0 to 88 CN 123 Entry 0 to 88 CN 123 MP7330 0 Determination of the User parameters PLC RUN 4 151 0 Entry 0 to 9999 00 Number of desired machine MP7330 15 parameter MP7340 0 Dialogues for User parameters PLC RUN 4 151 o Entry 0 to 4095 EPROM address line number of MP7340 15 the dialogue N 4 130 Colour for Standard colour adjustment PLC RU MP7350 Window frame 030200C MP7351 Error messages 03F3FOF MP 7352 Operating mode display Machine MP 7352 0 Background 0000000 MP 7352 1 Text for operating mode 0342008 MP 7352 2 Dialogue 03F3828 MP7353 Operating mode display Programming MP7353 0 Background 0000000 MP7353 1 Text for operating mode 0342008 MP7353
504. on of the feed rate with variable tolerance In this setting the permissible measuring tolerance changes depending on the tool radius This ensures that there is a probing feed rate even for large tool radii The measuring tolerance changes according to the following table Tool radius Measuring tolerance up to 30 mm MP6510 30 to 60 mm 2 x MP6510 60 to 90 mm 3 x MP6510 90 to 120 mm 4 x MP6510 etc MP6507 2 Constant probing feed rate The probing feed rate remains constant regardless of the tool The absolute measuring error grows linearly with increasing tool radius vet r Tool radius mm EEGEN 5 mm SES MP6510 Max permissible measuring error mm v Meas tolerance x n v Probing feed rate m min MP6570 x MP6510 MP6570 Maximum permissible surface speed at the 10xxx102 cutting edge m min Markers in the PLC Marker M2390 is set when a tool measuring cycle is started Marker M2391 indicates whether a cycle for tool measurement or tool inspection was activated If inspection shows that one of the entered tolerances is exceeded the tool is inhibited and Marker M2392 or M2393 is set Markers M2502 M2503 M2022 M2023 M2025 and M2026 function as in the standard probing cycles The cycles for tool measurement must therefore also be released by the PLC with Marker M2503 If the spindle is oriented directly by the NC MP6560 1 Marker M2499 must be reset by the PLC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4 193
505. onic handwheel This can be used to initiate unlocking of the Hirth coupling The same applies to traversing with the axis direction key Setting the Axis in Position marker starts a check of the nominal position compared with grid Repositioning is executed as PLC positioning by the shortest route i e to the nearest grid point 13 2 Positioning in controlled mode NC Start also resets the Axis in Position marker This in turn initiates an internal check of the target position If the target position is not in the grid then an error message is displayed 4 212 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 01 98 2 13 3 Program example The positioning of the 4th axis and locking by the Hirth coupling is described in the following example The following machine parameters and markers are required for the example MP420 3 Activate Hirth coupling axis 4 1 active 0 not active MP4310 1 W978 Direction for PLC positioning for repositioning MP430 3 Hirth grid axis 4 MP960 3 Shift Hirth grid against reference mark machine datum MP4210 3 D776 Positioning window for PLC positioning MP4201 3 D780 Input resolution for controlled mode MP4220 3 W966 Feed rate for PLC positioning W540 PLC Position for axis 4 W566 Feed rate for PLC position D12 Actual value Ref related D20 Trailing error D36 Hirth grid left of nominal value D40 Hirth grid right of nominal value D44 Nominal grid value D28 Hirth grid Hirth positioning in controlle
506. only are depicted in the graphics window It is possible to choose between three different graphics display modes With the aid of a Soft key the operator can select an additional status display instead of the graphics see User s Manual The graphics display on the VDU screen can be altered by machine parameters 6 3 1 View in three planes The 3 plane display mode can be produced according to either European or American convention Co og German preferrred U S preferred Example Fi IR The cursor position can be shown in the 3 plane display mode This function must be activated with machine parameter MP7310 bit 3 6 3 2 Rotating the coordinate system The coordinate system can be rotated by 90 in the machining plane This is useful when for instance the Y axis is fixed as the tool axis 4 No rotation 90 rotation 6 3 3 BLK form and datum shift A number of BLK forms can be programmed in sequence in an NC program Machine parameters are used to select whether after a Cycle 7 Datum Shift the definition of the next BLK form is also shifted 4 132 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 1 MP 7310 Graphics display Entry Xxxxx Bit 0 Switch over display in three planes 0 German preferred 1 U S preferred Bit 1 Rotate coordinate system in machining plane by 90 0 no rotation 1 coordinate system rotated through 90 Bit 2 BLK form after datum shift 0 BLK form wi
507. ontour Lines cycle digitizes a 3 D form meander wise line by line in the pre defined level by level in contour lines within a pre range defined range Level by level digitizing is mainly used for forms with steep edges Z AS During meander digitizing a very flat surface may cause little movement in the probe axis This can result in a lack of lubrication in the probe axis MP6220 and MP6221 make it possible to lubricate the axis at the end of the lines MP6220 Traverse for lubricating the probe axis at end of line Entry 0 000 to 999 999 mm MP6221 Time after which the probe axis must be lubricated Entry 0 to 65 535 min 4 182 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o The acquired data can be stored in the controller s program memory on the FE 401 floppy disk unit or ina PC gt 0000 0000 fo NS i gt oooooooooo000 ODER oooo000 O000 fajul oo oooooo oo oooooo oo 00000000 ooo ooo DCD ooo ooo o ooo DD 0 ooo Further particulars about scanning cycles will be found in the TNC User s Manual 9 2 2 Response of the digitizing sequence at corners The scanning sequence responds differently for inside and outside corners Here the two parameters PP INT maximum probe point interval and TRAVEL from the Meander and Contour Lines scanning cycles operate like a travel limiter Depending on the values that are
508. optionally selected for operating modes EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 via the machine parameters In the following the control characters which are sent and received with this protocol are listed for the various transmission alternatives When outputting a file the lt NUL gt character is sent exactly 50 times at the start of the file When reading in however the control unit ignores this character Therefore it is of no importance how often the peripheral unit sends the lt NUL gt character before the file If however ME mode is set instead of EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 attention must be paid to the following All the programs in a file which end with the end of text character lt ETX gt are stored in the magnetic tape unit ME 8 28 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o 1 The ME transmits this file with all the programs to the control unit The TNC then selects the appropriate program and stores it at A further important difference between EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 mode in the standard protocol and ME mode is that the lt EOT gt character is never sent in ME mode because the magnetic tape unit is incapable of processing this character In this protocol if an error is to be signalled to the TNC the following sequence of instructions must be sent lt ESC gt lt 1 gt ERROR NUMBER The blocks are not checked for correctness but are transmitted one after the other If the receiver s data buffer is full it can stop the transfer and resume i
509. or PLC Editor PL PULL Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time us 1 1 to 1 5 0 9 to 1 3 0 9 to 1 3 Number of bytes 20 20 18 Logic Execution with the PL Command Operands M O T C Operation The PL command complements the PS command Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken from the Data Stack again with PULL With logic execution bit 7 is copied from the current address of the Data Stack into the addressed operand with a PL command If the Stack is empty an error message will be issued Logic Execution with the PL Command Operands B W D Operation The PL command complements the PS command Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken from the Data Stack again with PULL With Word execution two Words are copied from the current address of the Data Stack into the addressed memory area with a PL command If the Stack is empty an error message will be issued 3 11 3 Load Logic Accumulator onto the Data Stack PSL Abbreviation for PLC Editor PSL PUSH LOGICACCU Execution time us 0 6 to 1 0 Number of bytes 20 Operands none Operation The Logic Accumulator can be buffered with the PSL command For this purpose the Logic Accumulator is loaded onto the Data Stack Since the Data Stack is organised as 16 bits it must be written to with a minimum width of one Word During this the content of the Logic Accumulator is copied into the current address of the Data Stack The free bits of the reserved me
510. or at the beginning of movement After a reset or interruption of the PLC program the override value of each PLC axis is set to 100 00 The modules can also be called while a PLC axis is moving The module can be called in addition to a module from the group 9120 9121 9123 in the same PLC scan However it becomes effective after this module Possible errors Anon existent axis was transferred An axis was transferred that has not been declared as a PLC axis in MP10 and MP60 An incorrect override value was transferred Call PS B W D K lt Axis gt 0 4 for X Y Z IV V PS B W D K lt Override gt Format 0 01 CM 9124 PL BAD lt Error code gt 0 Override was set 1 Invalid axis was transferred 2 Axis not defined as PLC axis 3 Incorrect override value Error status after call M3171 0 Override was set 1 See above error conditions 7 174 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 10 Analogue voltage output Module 9130 With Module 9130 it is possible for the PLC to have the NC control send a voltage to an analogue output Constraints Only the analogue voltage for the spindle can be output There is no access to the analogue outputs for the NC nor is there any access to analogue outputs for PLC axes that are driven with Modules 9120 9123 The voltage is output with a slight delay after the end of the PLC run The module should be called only once per PLC run The analogue volt
511. or printer interfacing BCC If calculation of the BCC produces a number less than 20 i e a control character then a Space character 20 is sent in addition immediately before lt ETB gt The BCC will consequently always be greater than 20 and cannot therefore be recognised as a control character 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 21 o 1 Hardware handshaking Bit 2 can be set to determine whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device by using RTS Data output TNC gt EXT When the receiving buffer is full the external device resets the RTS signal The TNC thereby detects that the peripheral unit receiving buffer is full because of the CTS input ee EXT gt we UE en Receiving CTS bufferful CS tars Data Data Data no INN ON 0 PD Start RxD TxD Positive voltage level Negative voltage level Data input EXT gt TNC When the receiving buffer is full the TNC removes the RTS signal which is detected by the peripheral device at its CTS input TNC dk EXT Receiving RTs buffer full ECTS cis RTS TxD T RxD DE Tomm MO MONN TD Start Positive voltage level negative voltage level 8 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o Ei The DTR and DSR signals from the TNC indicate the operational status of the TNC and peripheral these cannot be set via the machine parameters DTR Inte
512. ordinate system Cycle 19 therefore has no influence on PLC positioning commands Datum compensation via PLC is effective also with the Tilt working plane function MP7500 Tilt working plane function Entry O or 1 0 Inactive 1 active MP75x0 Transformed axis Entry XXXXXX Entry 0 means end of transformation sequence Bit O X axis Bit 1 Y axis Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 A axis Bit 4 B axis Bit 5 C axis MP75x1 Supplementary identifier for transformation Entry xx Bit O Swivel axis 0 swivel head 1 tilting table Bit 1 Dimension in MP75x2 0 incremental step for swivel head 1 absolute related to machine datum for tilting table MP75x2 Dimension for transformation Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 Entry 0 means free rotating axis 4 42 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 e Example 1 Double swivel head right angled Zi 200 4 mm 22 3 1 mm Ai 201 5 mm Yi 1 9mm 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 43 1 MP 7500 1 jactivate function MP 7510 000100 shift in Z axis MP 7511 00 swivel head MP 7512 200 4 dimension Z1 MP 7520 000010 shift in Y axis MP 7521 00 swivel head MP 7522 1 9 dimension Y1 MP 7530 001000 free swivel axis A MP 7531 00 swivel head MP 7532 0 variable dimension MP 7540 000001 shift in X axis MP 7541 00 swivel head MP 7542 2019 dimension X1 MP 7550 000100 shift in Z axis MP 7551 00 swi
513. ording is not possible Evaluating the recorded curves with the cursor Whereas the complete memory contents are displayed at the start the time window selected before the start is displayed after the image is restored The time to trigger point is shown as T1 at the left of the display Beneath it is the absolute value in mm min mm or mV If the CURSOR 1 2 key is used to overlay a second cursor for time T2 then this cursor can also be moved using the arrow keys on the TNC control panel The time that is displayed as T2 is the difference from T1 The numerical value overlaid underneath is also the difference from the value associated with T1 The display for T2 and the second cursor are deleted using the END or Cursor 1 2 soft key 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11 19 e 1 Vertical zoom The vertical grid display of each previously selected channel can be modified in fixed steps using soft keys The value of the grid in the vertical axis is overlaid at the left hand margin beneath the channel number and the name of the recording Centring Select vertical resolution to achieve an optimum display Now return to original vertical deflection use the NO ENT key to restore the original display of the stored data in the vertical axis Horizontal zoom The recording gathers 4096 evaluated data Time resolution i e the cycle time between the recorded data can be set from 0 6 to 6 ms The range of display str
514. ortant for the control and monitoring of the NC axes Further parameters for the NC axes can be found under Machine axes The control of the main spindle S axis is described under Main spindle 3 1 The position control loop of an NC machine In CNC machines the servo control is normally implemented as a cascade control see following block diagram The motor speed control and the current control both in the drive amplifier are integrated into the servo position control CNC control The servo controlled system consists of the motor and machine slide CNC Control Servo amplifier Machine Ss Linear Nom Servo Position Nom Speed Nom Current A ei e lat ee Drive ri Tacho angle pos lag controller rom controller cur regulator encoder ES S 5E gt KS lz IK 8 8 S S gle ES 4 2 Z Z aja lt Je Block diagram of the position control loop here as a cascade control 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes Ei 4 65 2 3 2 Servo positioning in TNC controls Two control methods are possible with the control They can be used alternatively 1 control with lag Section 3 2 1 2 control with feedforward control Section 3 2 2 The choice of control method is determined by machine parameters MP1390 and MP1391 The machine adjustmen
515. ory RAM with the OEM cycles and dialogs it is possible to store this data in the PLC EPROM Instructions for creating OEM cycles OEM cycles in the NC program memory can be called for testing by cycle 12 Program call It is thus also possible to test serviceability in the Program run single block mode With a program call all the Q parameters are globally effective Permitted functions in OEM cycles Tool definition with numerical values or Q parameters for tool length and radius only in PLC EPROM Tool call M functions apart from M02 M30 M06 without program run stop Nesting OEM cycles Other OEM cycles or standard cycles can be called in the OEM cycles nesting depth four levels Call from main programs of OEM cycles which are transmitted in block mode and are executed simultaneously The OEM cycles must be stored in the control unit memory Re approach to contour after an external STOP With an external and internal STOP re approach must be via block scan mid program start up see the Machine Interfacing Manual and the TNC 407 TNC 415 Operating Manual Functions not permitted in OEM cycles M functions M02 M30 M06 with program run stop Programmed STOP block Program calls with PGM CALL Definition of cycle 14 Contour Cycle 14 Contour must be defined in the main program Repetition of sections of program with CALL LBL REP OEM cycles with p
516. ossible errors The specified input parameter describes none of the status information available in the software version used Call PS B W D K Number of desired status information gt CM 9035 PL B W D lt Status Information gt Error status after call M3171 0 Status information was read 1 Wrong number specified 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 143 2 f 4 3 2 Write Status Information Module 9036 NC status information that is not protected by a checksum can be modified The information to be overwritten is identified by a specified number The following status information can be modified Specified Function Value number 0 O to 10 1 O to 10 2 O to 10 3 O to 10 4 O to 10 5 to 10 6 Select handwheel axis Axis X MP7640 0 to 4 Axis Y Axis Z Ath axis 5th axis 7 to 9 10 Limit for jog increment 0 to 50 mm limit for jog increment 1 lt 2 or gt 50 cancel the limit and activate the last jog increment entered 2 cancel the limit and enter the minimum of the last jog increment and the last limit value Constraints Handwheel subdivision factors are limited to the lowest possible value according to the rapid traverse of the corresponding axis There is no error message however A handwheel subdivision can only be specified by MP7641 1 The value for the jog increment limit is transmitted in units of 1 10 000 mm After power switch on the jog increment limit is al
517. ouch probe cycles The touch probe can be controlled either with the probing cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel modes or by the Touch Probe function in the NC program see User s Manual The touch probe is interfaced to the measuring conditions using machine parameters Touch probe function Reference Plane Max measuring range Setup clearance MP6130 MP6140 Touch probe cycles i 4 in the Manual and l Electronic Handwheel operating modes F2 Max measuring range MP6130 F1 Rapid traverse during probing cycle MP6150 for triggering touch probe MP6200 0 MP6361 for measuring touch probe MP6200 1 F2 Probing feed rate MP6120 for triggering touch probe MP6200 0 MP6360 for measuring touch probe MP6200 1 4 176 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o 1 An error message Touch point inaccessible appears if the maximum measuring range MP6130 is exceeded Machine parameters MP6140 and MP6150 have no function with the probing cycles in he Manual and Electronic Handwheel modes The probing sequence must be enabled by the PLC with marker M2503 This marker is set by the C when a probing cycle starts and the NC waits until the PLC resets marker M2503 before executing the probing function A number of conditions are transferred to the PLC with markers M2022 to M2027 This information can be processed further in the PLC program The probing unction is controlled entirely from the
518. outputs The logic unit has six analogue outputs Five of these are always used to output the nominal value of the axes The sixth analogue output is usually used as a nominal value output for the spindle If the nominal value for the spindle is not an analogue output or if the spindle is not needed e g water jet and laser cutting machines then an alternative function can be defined for analogue output S X8 Pin 8 in MP3011 See also Chapter 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 4 207 L 4 208 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 01 98 i 12 Increment positioning In the Electronic handwheel mode the function Incremental jog positioning can be activated by the PLC program The function Increment positioning is enabled by marker M2498 In the Electronic Handwheel mode the Jog Increment dialogue is displayed in addition to the Interpolation factor dialogue For increment positioning the start marker and the corresponding complement marker for the desired axis must be activated If start and complement markers are not set correctly then the message ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM XxX appears In the PLC program the activation of in
519. p transmission with lt DC3 gt and continue it with lt DC1 gt If the file name in the first line of the file and the name indicated in the TNC are not identical the TNC reads each block in and searches for the file name concerned If the END PGM block has been read in and the selected name is not known the TNC remains static without an error message and transfer must be terminated with the END key Example Reading in program 100 H Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC 100 H START lt DC1 gt 4 gt lt EOT gt M a If in this case the last PGM block ends with the lt ETX gt character then transfer is terminated without an error message but the data is not stored lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line PGM100 lt CR gt lt LF gt Last line PGM 100 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ETX gt fal 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 33 8 Read in all files If both the peripheral unit and the TNC have been started the following protocol is followed Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC lt DC1 gt 4 lt NUL gt lt NUL gt Last line of file 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt d gt 1st line of file 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt DC1 gt M lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of file 2 lt CR gt lt LF gt gt Last line of file 2 lt CR gt lt LF gt gt lt DC1 gt M lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of la
520. pe display They are selected in exactly the same way as the 3 plane view in NC graphic simulation MP7361 0 Background MP7261 1 Grid MP7361 2 Non selected channels MP7361 3 Cursor line data screen window MP7361 4 Selected channel The Oscilloscope mode is entered by keying in code number 688 379 If you leave the Oscilloscope mode you can re enter it using the MOD key and the OSZI soft key The code number must only be re keyed when the supply voltage has been switched off The following main display appears when the mode is called 11 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o OSCILLOSCOPE OPERATION OUTPUT RAMP NOML FEED RATE H SAMPLE TIME 0 6 MS CHANNEL OFF CHANNEL OFF CHANNEL OFF CHANNEL OFF TRIGGER FREE RUN TRIGGER THRESHOLD 0 SLOPE PRE TRIGGER o MP Use the cursor keys to move the highlight cursor to the desired item and to select the trigger conditions and the axes and parameters you wish to record 3 4 1 Soft key rows osa f d d fefe E a ese pote te ty eet m peer tT t ee in ce eno Meaning of soft keys i Start recording Vertical zoom Optimal vertical E resolution Horizontal zoom centred in screen CURSOR 172 Activate cursor 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11 17 e 3 4 2 Triggers The following entries are possible FREE RUN Recording is terminated manually SINGLE SHOT Records a memory conten
521. pectively for the open parentheses and corresponding close parentheses commands 3 7 1 ADD GI Abbreviation for PLC Editor PLUS Logic Byte Word Double Execution time us 0 9 to 2 2 Number of bytes 6 Operands none 3 7 2 SUBTRACT Abbreviation for PLC Editor MINUS Logic Byte Word Double Execution time us 0 9 to 2 1 Number of bytes 6 Operands none 3 7 3 MULTIPLICATION xI Abbreviation for PLC Editor x MULTIPLY Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 3 7 to 4 7 Number of bytes 12 Operands none Marker M3168 is set if an error occurs 3 7 4 DIVISION Abbreviation for PLC Editor Il DIVIDE Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 6 5 to 7 5 Number of bytes 16 In the event of an error Divisor 0 in the Division and MODULO functions the execution time will be in the range 0 9 to 1 3 us Operands none Marker M3169 is set if an error occurs 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 85 1 3 7 5 REMAINDER MODI Abbreviation for PLC Editor MOD MODULO Logic Byte Word Double Execution time ps 6 5 to 7 5 Number of bytes 14 In the event of an error Divisor 0 in the Division and MODULO functions the execution time will be in the range 0 9 to 1 3 us Operands none Function of Parentheses with Arithmetic Commands With arithmetic commands only wor
522. pen parenthesis command cannot be formed 25 SC Conditional jump with invalid logic accumulator Aconditional jump CMT CMF JPT JPF EMT EMF has been programmed without first beginning a gating chain in the logic accumulator 26 SC ENDC ENDK outside a CASE KFIELD instruction An ENDC command has been programmed without a prior CASE instruction And ENDK command has been programmed without a prior KFIELD label 27 SC Wrong command within CASE table KFIELD Acommand other than CM has been programmed after a CASE instruction and before the corresponding ENDC instruction Acommand other than K has been programmed after a KFIELD label and before the corresponding ENDK label 28 SC Too many table entries in CASE ACASE table with more than 128 entries has been programmed 29 SC Blank CASE instruction KFIELD ACASE instruction has been programmed followed immediately by an ENDC label AKFIELD instruction has been programmed followed immediately by an ENDK label 30 SC String accumulator not loaded Acommand has been programmed which gates assigns or manipulates the already loaded string accumulator even though the accumulator was not previously loaded 31 SC String instruction within parentheses Astring instruction has been programmed within parentheses even though string gates cannot be nested with parentheses 32 SC No string assignment Anew gating chain has started without assigning the gating result previously formed in the strin
523. pen the control loop 4 92 M2832 Key code of the activated inhibited key 7 178 to M2839 M2854 Inhibit keys PLC IPC 4 166 0 4 167 M2875 We M2876 4 165 M2877 4 165 M2878 4 165 M2880 Inhibit keys PLC IPC 4 146 o M2923 M2924 Error messages PLC NC 4 142 SE M3023 M3168 Overflow during multiplication NC PLC 7 68 7 85 CO Wl e M3169 Division by 0 NC PLC 7 69 7 85 SS ie 6 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 01 98 i Marker M3170 M3171 M3172 M3200 to M3263 Set__ Reset _ Page MODULO wrongly executed NC PLC 7 70 7 86 7 123 Error status for PLC modules NC PLC 7 123 NC 7 136ff Reserved for errors which the PLC programmer would like to 7 123 trap Values from MP4310 3 to MP4310 6 o 7 179 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 61 List of markers 2 List of words Words _ Function L age W256 4 101 W258 4 104 W260 4 159 W262 Pocket number with MP7480 3 or 4 4 247 W264 4 247 W270 Help file line number 4 156 1 No help file selected 2 No valid numerical value 0 to 9999 Line number W272 Operating mode 4 63 1 Manual operation 4 164 2 Electronic handwheel 3 Positioning with manual entry 4 Program run single block 5 Program run full sequence 7 Pass over reference point W274 4 164 D276 4 153 D280 7 19 D284 7 19 W320 4 95 W322 4 95 D356 4 95 D360 Programmed feed rate NC gt PLC D388 W464 4
524. perands M I O T C occupy 2 bytes each Time out It took longer than 10 ms to process the program section that runs cyclically Check the subprogram structure if necessary very processor intensive sections will have to be started as SUBMIT jobs The displayed computer time may be increased by V 24 transfers and handwheel mode In case of doubt select handwheel mode and start data transfer with V 24 baud rate 38400 if possible then check MAXIMUM PROCESSING TIME in PLC programming environment 100 corresponds to 5 ms the block processing speed is still achieved with this load Values above 150 should not occur safety margin for adverse operating conditions CASE out of range The operand for the CASE instruction contains a value that cannot be interpreted as an offset in the CM table lt 0 or gt table length 1 Subprogram not defined This error cannot occur at present The address for a write access to data types B W D M I O T C is in a range invalid for this operand type owing to inclusion of the index register While accessing a constants field the index register contains a value which is not possible for that field lt 0 or gt field length 1 The address of a string leads to a prohibited value owing to inclusion of the index register The number of a dialogue S Dn X or an error message S En X leads to a prohibited value owing to inclusion of the index register lt 0 or gt 999 While addre
525. ponds to the PLC cycle time TNC 415 20 ms TNC 407 24 ms The timers are started by setting the markers TO to T47 which also sets the timer to the value from MP4110 X This activation may only be performed for a single PLC run as otherwise the timers will be restarted by every succeeding run The markers T48 to T95 timer running will remain set for the period defined in the machine parameters Example Start of Timer 1 Period in MP4110 1 9 PLC cycles 7 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 o TO T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T10 Entry range for MP4110 X 0 to 65 535 PLC cycles TNC 415 20 ms TNC 407 24 ms Timer start Timer running 48 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP41 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 MP411 Machine parameter 0 0 0 47 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 25 i 2 4 2 Counters 32 counters are available in the PLC Each of these 32 counters is controlled by special markers with the abbreviation symbol C After setting a marker from the range CO to C31 the counter is loaded with the value from machine parameter MP4120 X The marker range C48 to C79 indicates whether the count has been
526. pose machine parameters 5020 x to 5210 x permit relatively free adjustment of the data format the data transmission protocol and the control characters Consider the example of interfacing EXT1 with a printer using a serial interface Example NEC P7PLUS The following setting is selected at the printer itself see the Operating Manual of the printer concerned Serial interface Data bits Even character parity XON XOFF protocol software handshake 9 600 baud The following settings EXT1 are made at the TNC MP5000 0 No interface inhibited MP5020 0 10101001 8 data bits Any BCC character Transfer stop by RTS not active Transfer stop by DC3 active Character parity even Character parity required 1 stop bit MP5030 0 0 Standard data transfer In the RS 232 RS 422 Setup of the TNC the EXT1 operating mode must still be assigned to the RS 232 interface and the baud rate set to 9 600 see the TNC 407 415 Operating Manual 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 27 e 1 3 Data transmission protocols The TNC enables data and files to be transferred using different protocols which can be selected via the interface setup or the machine parameters These transmission protocols can be selected in six different operating modes as follows ME Standard transmission protocol to match HEIDENHAIN magnetic tape unit 7 data bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit FE1 FE2 Transmission w
527. programmed in the PLC program NC STOP In order to show a PLC error message as a flashing message the marker M2815 must also be set If marker M2815 is set but none of the 100 PLC error messages is activated then the flashing error message EMERGENCY STOP PLC will be displayed If for some reason the display of the PLC error message is not wanted in the field under the operating mode display the message can also be displayed in the PLC window Marker Function Set Reset M2815 Flashing PLC error message PLC PLC M2190 Non flashing error message NC NC is displayed M2924 PLC error message 0 PLC NC PLC M2925 PLC error message 1 M2926 PLC error message 2 M3022 PLC error message 98 M3023 PLC error message 99 4 142 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 e 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 143 i 6 7 Cycles The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls permit calling HEIDENHAIN standard cycles within the NC program e g pecking tapping pocket milling etc In addition the manufacturer of the machine can program manufacturer cycles and store them in the control see OEM cycles The sequence of some cycles can be altered by machine parameters and PLC markers The description of the Tappi
528. pty an error message will be issued 7 102 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o Examples for the commands PS PL PSL PSW PLL PLW The Module 15 is to be called at a specific point in the program After the return into the main program the original Accumulator content is again required for further program run Accumulator contents prior to the Call Module 1A 44 3E 18 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents 49 1A 44 3E 18 50 PSW 1A 44 3E 18 52 CM 15 54 PLW 1A 44 3E 18 55 Data stack 1 A 44 saa E 18 Line 50 Save the Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack Line 52 Subprogram 15 is called up Line 54 The original Accumulator contents are transferred back from the Data Stack and is available for further program run PEE at E E E Note The sequence for stack operations is the same for all commands Only the data width varies 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 103 e f 7 104 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 12 Jump Commands 3 12 1 Unconditional Jump JP Abbreviation for PLC Editor JP JUMP Jump processed Jump not processed Execution time us 0 6 to 1 0 Number of bytes 8 Operands jump address LBL Operation A JP command instructs the processo
529. put The PLC inputs 1128 to 1152 are on the connector for the machine control panel X46 See also the heading Machine control panel X42 PLC input D sub 37 pin female connection Pin number Assignment Pin number Assignment 1 10 19 118 2 11 20 119 3 12 21 120 4 I3 Acknowledgment for 22 121 Control is operational test 5 14 23 122 6 I5 24 123 7 I6 25 124 8 I7 26 125 9 I8 27 126 10 9 28 ER 11 10 29 128 12 11 30 129 13 12 31 130 14 13 32 EN 15 14 33 34 Do not use 16 15 35 36 37 0 V PLC test output Do not use 17 16 Housing Outer screen 18 17 3 54 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs 01 98 o 11 2 2 PLC output The PLC outputs OO to 030 and the Control operational output are on connector X41 PLC output The PLC outputs OO to O7 are also to be found on the connector for the machine control panel X46 See also under heading Machine control panel X41 PLC output D sub 37 pin female connection Pin number Assignment Pin number Assignment 1 o0 19 018 2 01 20 019 3 02 21 020 4 03 22 021 5 04 23 022 6 O5 24 023 7 O6 25 024 8 O7 26 025 9 o8 27 026 10 o9 28 027 11 010 29 028 12 011 30 029 13 012 31 030 14 013 32 Do not use 15 014 33 O V PLC test output do not use 16 015 34 Control is operational 17 016 35 36 37 24 V PLC test output do not use 18 017 Housing Outer screen 1 Not switched off by EMERGEN
530. r lt gt NOT EQUAL Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 1 0 to 1 2 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs The content of the Word Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand If the Word Accumulator and the operand are not equal the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the Word Accumulator is equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 The comparison takes place over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i e B 8 bit W 16 bit and D K 32 bit Example A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8 The result is then assigned to marker M500 Output state Constant 16 000 Doubleword D8 15 000 Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation The ten position Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content 1 L K16000 16 000 Bit 31 Se ee 7 0 1 lt gt 08 re ooo 2 M500 Line 1 The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 Contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the following criteria Word Accumulator lt gt Operand If this condition is fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 Line 3 The contents of the Logic Accumulator result of the comparison is assigned to mar
531. r of bits corresponding to the operand i e B 8 bit W 16 bit and D K 32 bit Example A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8 The result is then assigned to Marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 Doubleword D8 15 000 The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K16000 16 000 Bit 31 sek 7 0 2 D8 e ooo 3 M500 5 Line 1 The constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator and the Doubleword D8 are compared Accumulator Operand As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 Line 3 The contents of the Logic Accumulator The result of the comparison are assigned to Marker M500 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 73 e 3 5 2 LESS THAN lt Abbreviation for the PLC Editor lt LESS THAN Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 1 0 to 1 2 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs The contents of the Word Accumulator are compared with the contents of the addressed operand If the Word Accumulator is smaller than the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the Word Accumulator
532. r reference marks etc MP10 Active axes Entry range xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 1 1 Measuring systems Incremental measuring systems can be attached to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls See also chapter Mounting and electrical installation 1 1 1 Signal period o is entered in the machine The signal period of the attached measuring system in um or Gen parameter MP330 x Linear measurement For linear measurement systems with sinusoidal output signals the signal period is the same as the graduation period Signal period grating period The standard linear measurement systems from HEIDENHAIN have a graduation period of 20 um LS models except for LS 101 and LS 405 10 um and 100 um LB model If linear measurement is performed by rotary encoder and ballscrew the line count of the rotary encoder see encoder technical data as well as the ballscrew pitch must be considered when calculating the signal period ballscrew pitch mm e 1000 mm mm line count Signal period Up to 3 decimal places can be entered in MP330 x El 4 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 e For linear measurement systems in combination with the interpolation and digitising electronics EXE for the square wave signal inputs X5 TNC 407 and X6 TNC 407 TNC 415 the interpolation factor of the EXE must be taken into account
533. r U V or W The correlation with the principal axes and the direction of travel are also standardized in ISO 841 Z E U Se MP410 Axis designation Entry O A 1 B 2 C 3 U 4 V 5 W MP410 3 Ath axis MP410 4 5th axis 1 2 1 Assignment The measuring system inputs X1 to X6 and the analogue outputs Output 1 to Output S on the connector X8 can be assigned to the individual axes The assignment is determined by the machine parameters MP110 and MP120 The assignment of measuring system input X6 and the nominal value output S to one of the five axes is only possible when the function Spindle Orientation is not utilised MP110 Assignment of the measuring system inputs to the axes Entry 0 measuring system input X1 1 measuring system encoder input X2 2 measuring system encoder input X3 3 measuring system encoder input X4 4 measuring system encoder input X5 5 measuring system encoder input X6 MP110 0 X axis MP110 1 Y axis MP110 2 Z axis MP110 3 4th axis MP110 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 13 e El MP120 Assignment of the analogue outputs Entry 0 output 1 1 output 2 2 output 3 3 output 4 4 output 5 5 output S MP120 0 X axis MP120 1 Y axis MP120 2 Z axis MP120 3 Ath axis MP120 4 5th axis 1 2 2 Current tool axis In the NC block TOOL CALL it is determined whether the tool moves parallel to one of the principal axes X Y Z or parallel to the fo
534. r can be used anywhere in the program there is no contents validity check however there is a check for address space overflow with indexed write accesses Example B100 X X can assume values from 100 to 923 which corresponds to addressing the complete available address space for the Byte operand type If the address space is overshot the error message ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM 56 flashes in the display Reset with END to display the error line in the PLC Editor qt Before using a command with the index register it must be assigned a defined value At the beginning of each PLC cycle the index register is set to 0 The following operands can be addressed Mn X In X OnIX Cn X Tn X Operand number n X Bn X Operand number n X Wn X Operand number n 2 X Dn X Operand number n 4 X Sn X String number n X S Dn X Dialogue text number n X S En X Error text number n X Sn X Substring from X th characters of n th string The types S K and K cannot be indexed Caution When addressing S Dn X and S En X the sequence lt SUB gt Dnnn or lt SUB gt Ennn is loaded in the string accumulator with nnn as the modified string number 7 112 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o Commands for operating the Index Register The following commands have been introduced to permit data interchange between the Word Accumulator and the Index Register or between the Stack and Index Register LX Load Index to
535. r file in a SUBMIT job and then execute a Reset so the control system boots up with this MP file H the PLC simultaneously issues two commands from memory areas PLC positioning M2704 to M2708 confirm Q parameter M2713 and PLC datum shift M2716 then the NC flashes the message Error in PLC program 1R as these commands use the same memory areas for data transfer PLC positioning in more than one axis counts as a single command If marker M2719 switch over from word processing to TNC 355 mode has the value 0 the same checks will be run with the corresponding TNC 355 strobes The offset for a variable speed spindle is now adjusted with a new algorithm A single offset adjustment is made two seconds after the nominal value has reached target position Every second thereafter the offset voltage is increased by 0 152 mV or decreased by 0 152 mV when servo lag is greater or less than zero respectively and if the voltage computed from the product of servo lag and Kv factor is greater than 0 152 mV This means that the offset voltage changes by 1 mV in 7 seconds approx 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 19 2 TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 93x 08 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 259 94x 08 This versions was supplied from 6 93 only when TNC 407 243 03x 08 expressly requested by the customer New functions LSV2 protocol PLC axes Help files Synchronized axes New compensation value table simultaneous compe
536. r functions in operation with lag as well as with feedforward control MP1410 Position monitoring in operation with precontrol cancellable Entry 0 0010 to 30 0000 mm MP1410 0 Axis X MP1410 1 Axis Y MP1410 2 Axis Z MP1410 3 Ath axis MP1410 4 5th axis MP1420 Position monitoring in operation with precontrol EMERGENCY STOP Entry 0 0010 to 30 0000 mm MP1420 0 Axis X MP1420 1 Axis Y MP1420 2 Axis Z MP1420 3 Ath axis MP1420 4 5th axis MP1150 Delay time before switching off the residual voltage on error message Position error Entry 0 to 65 535 s 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 85 o 1 3 5 3 Monitoring the analogue voltage Monitoring of the analogue voltage is only possible in operation with feedforward control If it exceeds 10 V the flashing error message Gross positioning error B is displayed 3 5 4 Movement monitoring The movement monitoring functions in operation with feedforward control as well as with lag During movement monitoring the actual path travelled is compared with a nominal path calculated by the NC at short intervals several servo cycles If during this period the actual path travelled differs from the calculated path the flashing error message Gross positioning error C is displayed In machine parameter MP1140 a voltage can be stored below which the movement monitoring is out of action If 10 V is entered in this machine par
537. r than the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the Word Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 The comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand i e B 8 bit W 16 bit and D K 32 bit Example A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8 The result is then assigned to Marker M500 Initial state Constant 16 000 Doubleword D8 15 000 The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents 2 147 483 647 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents 1 L K16000 16 000 Bit 31 See 7 0 1 gt ba re oo 2 M500 Line 1 The constant is loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared Accumulator gt Operand As this condition is fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 Line 3 The contents of the Logic Accumulator The result of the comparison are assigned to Marker M500 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 75 e 3 5 4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO lt Abbreviation for the PLC Editor lt LESS EQUAL Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 1 0 to 1 2 0 3 to 0 5 Number of bytes 6 8 Operands B W D K Operation With this command a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs The contents of the
538. r to continue the program at the specified jump address Label This command interrupts a logic sequence 3 12 2 Jump if Logic Accumulator 1 JPT Abbreviation for PLC Editor JPT JUMP IF TRUE Jump processed Jump not processed Execution time ps 0 4 to 1 3 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 12 10 Byte information in brackets A shorter command is employed in certain high priority program sequences Operands jump address LBL Operation A JPT command is a conditional jump command If the Logic Accumulator is 1 the program is continued from the specified jump address Label If the Logic Accumulator is 0 the jump is not processed This command interrupts a logic sequence 3 12 3 Jump if Logic Accumulator 0 JPF Abbreviation for PLC Editor JPF JUMP IF FALSE Jump processed Jump not processed Execution time ps 0 4 to 1 3 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 12 10 Byte information in brackets A shorter command is employed in certain high priority program sequences Operands jump address LBL Operation A JPF command is a conditional jump command If the Logic Accumulator is 0 the program is continued from the specified jump address Label If the Logic Accumulator is 1 the jump is not processed This command interrupts a logic sequence 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 105 e 1 Example for the commands JP JPT JPF A certain program section is to be skipped depending on Input 15 Initial sta
539. ram module CHANGE The spindle is unloaded and the new tool is loaded automatically This module defines whether the tool is to be returned to its old pocket in the tool magazine or not e g Special tool Move GRE2 to spindle load SPIREG to GRE2 Turn changing arm load SPIREG with GRE1 set GRE1 to zero retract arm Swap over GRE1 and GRE2 registers Another TOOL CALL strobe follows Wait Old tool out Turn changing arm and load new tool GRE1 to magazine load Store old tool GRE1 with zero Magazine TOOL CALL feedback Yes TOOL CALL strobe set again Magazine in position COMPARE P CODE WITH Position tool magazine ISTREG Module 4 254 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 e 15 3 9 Program module COMPARE P CODE WITH ISTREG The tool magazine is positioned at the search pocket number by the shortest path Transfer P code to data stack COMPUTE THE SHORTEST PATH IN M3042 Module Index magazine Index magazine forward reverse 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4 255 1 15 3 10 Program module COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG The tool magazine is positioned at the pocket number of the tool in GRE1 by the shortest path Transfer GRE1 to data stack COMPUTE THE SHORTEST PATH IN M3042 Module Index magazine Index magazine forward reverse 4 256 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 o 15 3 11 Program module COMPUTE
540. rameter MP1080 MP1110 MP1140 MP1150 MP1220 MP1320 MP1330 Function and input Page via Integral factor Entry 0 to 65535 MP1080 0 MP1080 1 MP1080 2 integral factor X axis integral factor Y axis integral factor Z axis MP1080 3 integral factor 4th axis MP1080 4 integral factor 5th axis Standstill monitoring Entry 0 0010 to 30 0000 mm MP1110 0 Xaxis MP1110 1 Y axis MP1110 2 Zaxis MP1110 3 4th axis MP1110 4 5th axis Movement monitoring Entry 0 030 to 10 000 V MP1140 0 Xaxis MP1140 1 Y axis MP1140 2 Zaxis MP1140 3 4th axis MP1140 4 5th axis Delay time before switching off the residual voltage on error message Position error Entry 0 to 65 535 s Automatic cyclical offset adjustment Entry 0 to 65 536 s 0 no automatic adjustment Direction for traversing the reference marks Entry Xxxxx itO Axis X it1 Axis Y it 2 Axis Z it3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Feed rate for traversing the reference marks Entry 80 to 300 000 mm min 0 positive 1 negative B B B B MP1330 0 Xaxis MP1330 1 Y axis MP1330 2 Zaxis MP1330 3 4th axis MP1330 4 5th axis PLC RUN B 4 78 PLC EDIT E 4 87 PLC RUN B 4 86 PLC RUN a 4 85 PLC RUN Gd 4 77 PLC EDIT E 4 62 PLC RUN B 4 62 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 15 2 Machine parameter MP1331 MP1340 MP1350 MP1390 MP1391 Function and input Change Page via Feed rate for leaving
541. rameter 4 154 Axis X datum correction 4 222 Position of X axis 1 10 000 mm 4 35 D532 Axis Y datum correction Position Y axis D536 Axis Z datum correction Position Z axis D540 Axis IV datum correction Position 4 axis D544 Axis V datum correction Position 5 axis W560 4 35 W562 4 35 W564 4 35 W566 4 35 W568 4 35 W576 Lag tracking error compensation 4 32 to compensation speed from MP4070 W584 Input range 32 767 to 32 768 LG um W576 Axis X W578 Axis Y W580 Axis Z W582 Axis 4 W584 Axis 5 D592 4 106 D596 4 70 w754 4 136 D756 4 101 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 List of words 6 11 2 1 factor spindle override PLC NC factor feed rate override PLC NC Value from MP4210 0 to MP4210 47 Value from MP4220 0 to MP4220 4 Value from MP 4310 0 to MP4310 6 S code for minimum rpm 6 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 List of words 01 98 L Ei PLC Programming Contents 1 PLC functions 1 1 Select PLC operation 1 2 PLC Main menu 1 3 File management 1 4 Text Editor 1 5 File output via data interface 1 6 Test functions for the PLC program 1 6 1 TRACE functions 1 6 2 Logic diagram 1 6 3 TABLE function 1 6 4 COMPILE function 2 Program creation 2 1 Program structure 2 1 1 Command 2 1 2 Module technique 2 2 Address allocation 2 2 1 Operand directory 2 2 2 Addressing the memory 2 3 Data transfer NC PLC 2 3 1 Number transfer 2 3 2 General
542. rameters 2 1 2 2 2 3 Entry format Activating the machine parameter settings Changing the entry values 2 3 1 Manual input 2 3 2 Changing the entry values via PLC 3 List of machine parameters 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Measuring systems and machines Positioning Operation with feed precontrol Operation with servo lag Digital speed control only TNC 425 Spindle Integral PLC Setting the data interface Measuring with a 3D touch probe 3 9 1 Digitizing with TS 120 only with digitizing option 3 9 2 Digitizing with TM 110 only with digitizing option 3 9 3 Tool calibration with TT 110 3 10 Tapping 3 11 Display and operation 3 12 Machining and program run 3 13 Hardware 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 What is a machine parameter A contouring control must have access to specific data e g traverse distances acceleration before it can execute its programmed instructions The machine tool builder provides these data in so called machine parameters In addition machine parameters can be used to activated certain functions which are possible with HEIDENHAIN contouring controls but are required only on certain types of machines e g automatic tool changing The list of machine parameters is not numbered in sequence but is split into groups according to function Machine parameters Functional group 0 to 999 Measuring systems and machines 1000 to 1399 Positioning 1400 to 16
543. rand contents greater than 32 the operand value Modulo 32 is used i e the integer remainder from the division operand value 32 Example The content of the Doubleword D8 is to be shifted four times to the right and then stored in D12 Initial state DoublewordD8 3E80 hex Doubleword D12 The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation and the operand content in hexadecimal notation Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 1 L D8 00000000 00000000 00111110 10000000 DU 00 3E 80 2 gt K 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000 3 gt K 00000000 00000000 00001111 10100000 4 gt gt K 5 gt gt KI 6 D12 oo 00 03 E8 Line 1 Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator Line 2 to 5 The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the right by the number of bits specified in the operand The complete operation can also be undertaken with the command gt gt K 4 Line 6 The result is stored in Doubleword D12 1 7 94 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 95 i 3 10 Bit Commands 3 10 1 BIT SET BS Abbreviation for PLC Editor BS BIT SET Byte Word Double Constant Execution time us 0 5 to 0 8 0
544. re gated with OR Line 3 The gating result 1 output O2 is set Line 4 The gating result 1 marker M500 is set 7 48 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 3 2 2 RESET R Abbreviation for the PLC Editor R RESET Operand changed Operand unchanged Execution time ps 0 1 to 0 8 0 2 to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 6 Byte value in parentheses With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened Operands M O T C Operation The function of the command is dependent on the contents of the Logic Accumulator If the Logic Accumulator 1 the addressed operand is set to 0 otherwise the operand remains unchanged An R command is used at the end of a logic chain in order that a gating result may influence the operand The command may be used several times in succession see example Example Input 14 and Input 15 should be gated with OR If the gating result 1 Output O2 and Marker M500 should be reset Initial state Input 14 1 Input I5 0 Output 02 Marker M500 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 RR x CH ws X X NS X X A X X X X X 1 Lk 2 O16 5 3 po XX XXX Xxx xX XXX 0 4 R M500 E Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR Line 3 The gating result 1 Output O2 is reset Line 4 The gating result 1 Marker 500 is reset 01 98 TNC 407 TNC
545. re stored in the tool table and complete tool management replacement tool tool life etc is handled by the NC The NC supplies the PLC with the information it needs to control the tool changer via markers and words 15 1 Tool table Pocket table The operator is able to edit the tool table in the Program run mode The tool table is called with the TOOL TABLE soft key From here the operator calls the pocket table with the POCKET TABLE soft key see User s Manual When the operator is in the tool table or pocket table editor he can upload or download the tool or pocket table with the EXT key Identifiers T and R are assigned for the tool table and pocket table respectively on the external memory The following fields can be edited in the tool table NAME 16 character alphanumeric tool name L Tool length R Tool radius R2 Tool radius 2 for toroidal cutters DL Oversize for tool length DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Oversize for tool radius 2 TL Tool locked RT Replacement tool TIME Max tool life M2094 TIME Max tool life TOOL CALL CUR TIME Current tool life DOC S Comment on the tool CUT k Number of tool cutting edges LTOL Wear tolerance for tool length RTOL Wear tolerance for tool radius DIRECT Cutting direction of the tool PLC S Additional information for PLC Module 9093 TT L OFFS Tool length offset TT R OFFS Tool radius offset LBREAK Breakage tolerance for
546. reference list 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 7 9 1 1 4 Text Editor A file which is loaded into the editor EDITOR PGM can be displayed on the screen with the soft key EDIT from the main menu If it is a new file then the screen will be empty apart from the status display for the editor The status display contains the following information FILE Name of the file LINE Current line number of the cursor bright field COLUMN Current column number of the cursor bright field INSERT or OVERWRITE Use the soft key to choose between insert mode INSERT and overwrite mode OVERWRITE See User s Manual for a detailed description of the Text Editor 1 5 File output via data interface The EXT key is used to initiate the output of data across the data interface see chapter entitled Data Interface PLC programs PLC error messages and dialogues for OEM cycles can be transferred as ASCII text via the data interface see chapter Data interface PLC programs PLC error messages dialogues for OEM cycles and the OEM cycles themselves can also be given out as binary code for the creation of EPROMs After operating the soft key OUTPUT BINARY CODE 0001 it is possible to collect the files that are to be transferred in a list The required ID number for the EPROM which is to be created must be entered in the first line of this table The preset names in the list can be overwritten To start data transfer
547. release the flashing error message Error in PLC program 10 Marker M2608 can be used to remove the spindle enable at the same time M03 M04 or M05 is displayed inversely The S analogue voltage will then go to 0 V MP3130 Polarity of the S analogue voltage Entry 0 to 3 0 MO3 positive voltage M04 negative voltage 1 MO03 negative voltage M04 positive voltage 2 M03 and M04 positive voltage 3 MO03 and M04 negative voltage 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 95 MP3140 Count direction of the measuring system signals for the spindle 0 positive count direction with M03 1 negative count direction with MO Marker Function Set Reset M2489 Change direction of spindle rotation PLC PLC M2485 Status display and output of the analogue voltage PLC PLC for M03 M2486 Status display and output of the analogue voltage PLC PLC for M04 M2487 Status display M05 and spindle stop PLC PLC M2608 Inverse display of M03 M04 M05 and PLC PLC S analogue 0 V no spindle enable 4 1 2 Gear range With the aid of the machine parameters MP3510 and MP3210 up to eight gear ranges can be defined The nominal speed for S override 100 and a matching S analogue voltage is entered for each gear range If not all gear ranges are required then the remaining machine parameters are set to zero Machine parameter MP3515 can be used to define a maximum achievable spindle speed for each gear range which cannot be exc
548. rid spacing LBL 340 PLC positioning on grid spacing CM 350 nearest grid spacing PLW D540 new nominal position L W966 MP4220 3 read feed rate W566 feed rate axis 4 MP4220 3 L M1 M1 1 S M2707 start PLC positioning axis 4 EM LBL 350 calculate nearest grid spacing LN M2208 programmable with MP4310 1 JPT 351 L D44 nominal grid value ref value S D36 left grid point PSW left difference CM 390 absolute amount L D44 D40 right grid point PSW right difference CM 390 absolute amount PLW DO right difference PLW left difference gt DO compare JPT 353 load right grid point JPF 354 load left grid point LBL 351 determine direction with preset value from MP L M3 traverse direction for PLC positioning XO M2209 programmable with MP4310 1 JPF 353 load right grid point JPT 354 load left grid point EM LBL 353 load right grid spacing for PLC positioning PS D40 sright nominal grid value EM LBL 354 jload left grid spacing for PLC positioning PS D36 left nominal grid value EM 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 4 217 e LBL 360 actual axis in grid spacing PS KO target address PS K2 REF value CM 9041 upload coordinates L D36 coordinate left grid point ref value D12 current ref position PSW CM 390 absolute amount PL DO L D40 right grid point ref value D12 current ref position PSW
549. rmat xxxx is edited at the start of line As soon as the cursor is moved on a line with a numerical value this value is available in W270 of the PLC and the corresponding command is evaluated in the PLC program If the cursor is moved on a line without a valid numerical value then the value 2 is entered in word W270 If no HELP file is selected the value in W270 is 1 Example PROGRAMMING AND EDITING FILE TOOLCHANGER LINES 4 COLUMN 4 INSERT COMMANDS FOR THE TOOL CHANGER ig 1 CHAIN FORWARD 0002 CHAIN BACKWARD CENDI 0 0000 0 0000 fi o M 5 9 MOVE MOVE PAGE INSERT move TAS il BEGIN END FINO OVERURITE gt gt lt lt TEXT TEXT Several HELP files can be created The user selects the desired file with the PGM NAME key after operating the HELP soft key If a HELP file is selected in the foreground and background modes then the message Background programming not possible will appear HELP files are stored externally with the identifier J Address Function W270 Help file line number 1 No help file selected 2 No valid numerical value 0 to 9999 Line number 4 156 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and oper
550. rogram easy to read and a lot shorter 1 Module 9093 9094 7 178 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 01 98 2 5 1 PLC Program Conversion PLC programs created for the TNC 355 can also be used on the TNC 407 and TNC 415 When these PLC programs are downloaded to the TNC 407 or TNC 415 the following command codes are automatically modified NE gt mMCcC bLlidd ag hs An EM block is automatically appended at the end of the PLC program The programmer must ensure that the PLC program starts with a logic sequence 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7 179 2 El 5 2 Compatibility Markers The table below lists the PLC markers that have only been retained for compatibility with the TNC 355 However the various PLC functions should be programmed with the TNC 407 and TNC 415 using the appropriate PLC words Marker Function Set Reset TNC 407 415 M2032 T Code 1 M2033 T Code 2 M2034 T Code_ 3 M2035 T Code 4 M2036 T Code 5 B M2037 T Code 6 B M2038 T Code 7 Bi M2039 T Code 8 Bit msb M2051 Mode Manual M2052 Mode Electronic handwheel M2053 Mode Position with manual input M2054 Mode Program run Single block M2055 Mode Program run Full sequence M2057 Mode Traverse reference marks M2064 S Code 1 Bit Isb M2065 S Code 2 Bi M2066 S Code_ 3 Bit N w w oO E Di CU W262 W264 D w w alse taa ta als W272
551. rogram section repetitions stored in PLC EPROM cannot be executed However program section repeats can also be programmed via the Q parameter function IF GOTO LBL see the Bolt hole circle example 9 2 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Creating OEM cycles 01 98 L 1 1 Dialog block with DLG DEF or DLG CALL Programming an OEM cycle and by the same token the dialog block is only possible if the program name is in the range 99999968 H to 99999999 H Each of these program names is permanently assigned a cycle number e g program name 99999968 H represents OEM cycle 68 Programming the dialog block is initiated by key LBL SET and then NO ENT DLG DEF If the OEM cycles are to be active in the NC program immediately after the definition a DEF active OEM cycle is programmed with the ENT key e g cycle for co ordinate transformation DLG CALL If the OEM cycles are to be activated later in the NC program via CYCL CALL or M99 a CALL active OEM cycle is programmed with the NO ENT key e g for a machining cycle Up to 15 dialog numbers can then be input The first dialog number is always assigned to the designation of the OEM cycles The remaining numbers are assigned to the Q parameters in ascending order If fewer than 15 dialogs are to be programmed the dialog block can end with END In this connection see also MP7250 in the following description of the relevant machine parameters Example 0 BEGIN PGM 999999
552. rom a SUBMIT Job The module disregards any safety problems when initiating the control reset e g free run out of axes and spindle The module can only be used on files in the RAM The new MP file to be selected is checked a faulty file is not selected There is no return to the calling PLC program if file selection is successful The file name is specified in a string that must contain the file name with extension Additional characters including blanks are not allowed If the PLC program is created externally ensure that lower case letters are not used for the file name Once the NC program has started the module only operates during the output of M G S T T2 O strobes 7 140 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 1 Possible errors The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job The specified string does not conform to the above conventions There is no file with the specified name The file to be selected is faulty The module was called after the NC program started without a strobe marker being active An incorrect string number was specified out of range 0 3 Call PS BMW D K lt String Number gt CM 9033 Warning Program execution ends here if a new file is selected PL B W D lt Error Code gt 0 No error file was already selected 1 String contains no valid file name 2 File not found 3 File is faulty 4 Wrong string number specified 0 3 5 Call was not from a SUBMI
553. rom separate encoders A linear encoder or angle encoder for rotary axes is the standard device for measuring distances Speed is controlled by HEIDENHAIN rotary encoders that are fitted to the motor The new machine parameters for speed control make it possible to specify and optimise the control loop Irrespective of this the controller can still be operated as before in trailing mode or with feed pre control The TNC 425 also positions in the manual modes in trailing mode The term counting step is one which is used in connection with the new machine parameters Counting steps are the counting pulses from the measuring system multiplied internally by a factor of 256 The following additional machine parameters are available for digital soeed control MP1900 Select axes with digital soeed controller MP1910 x Monitor speed controller MP1920 x Integral component for speed controller MP1940 x Proportional component for speed controller MP1950 Polarity for torque signal MP1951 Select measuring system for position control MP1955 x Ratio of grating period LS to ROD MP1960 Compensation for reversal spikes on circular interpolation at the quadrant transitions for digitally controlled axes MP1970 Motion monitor for position and speed MP1980 Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP The following machine parameters are inactive for axes with digital speed control MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid traverse MP1080 Inte
554. rotation of a rotary axis to be defined in machine parameters MP7510 ff see section Swivel Axes The same reference position must apply for a description of the machine geometry via machine parameters MP7510 ff and for any datum shift 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 147 L 6 8 Return to the contour With the HEIDENHAIN contouring control it is possible to resume an interrupted program or to make a block scan up to a predetermined block number see User s Manual qt These functions must be enabled by machine parameters and the PLC program must be changed accordingly Markers inform the PLC about the individual conditions during the resumption of the program or block scan Depending on these markers certain functions can be enabled in the PLC program e g operating the axis direction keys in Manual operation M2018 is set if the MANUAL OPERATION soft key is pressed M2019 is set if the Return to contour function is activated with the RESTORE POSITION soft key M2059 is set if the RESTORE AT N soft key is pressed M2059 is reset if the RESTORE POSITION or INTERNAL STOP soft key is pressed During the block scan the PLC positioning commands are only included in the calculation if they are also executed The TOOL CALL block usually releases PLC positioning commands for the tool change position If these movements are to be offset in the block scan the absolute position must be entered ref
555. rrogated by peripheral it is logic 1 if TNC is ready for service DSR Interrogated by TNC LOW level gt ext data input output not ready HIGH level gt ext data input output ready Software handshaking Bit 3 determines whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device with control character lt DC3 gt Transfer is resumed with character lt DC1 gt If transfer is stopped with character lt DC3 gt up to 12 characters can still be stored The remaining incoming characters are lost Software handshake is normally recommended when interfaces are connected to an external device The following pin layout is possible for the external device CS ba G D Peripheriegera V 24 Adapter Block LE Peripheral unit RS 232 C Adapter block A ECH GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 mus e Gn np 1 1 GND Chassis TXD 2 2K 2 2 ZI 2 g af 2 2 RXD RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 a 3 3 TXD RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 PK 4 4 CTS cts 5 5 5 5 5 5 gr 5 5 RTS DSR 6l 6 6 6 eil 6 a e eil ei DTR GND 1 7 e 7 7 7 7 7 Z GND Signal ground 8 ESA 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 10 0 0 0 10 0 1 1 11 1 1 1 11 1 2 2 12 2 2 2 12 2 3 3 13 3 3 3 13 3 Al 14 14 14 4 14 14 14 5 5 15 5 5 5 15 5 6 6 16 6 6 6 16 6 7 7 17 7 7 7 17 7 8 8 18 8 8 8 18 8 9 9 19 9 9 9 bl BN 19 9 DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 DS
556. rtain circumstances Such problems can be avoided if the data processed by the PLC program are clearly separated from the data processed by the Submit program Up to eight Submit programs can be entered in a queue Submit Queue Each receives an Identifier a number between 1 and 255 allocated by the NC which is transferred into the Word Accumulator With this Identifier and the REPLY function it can be interrogated whether or not the program is in the queue is being processed or is already complete The Submit programs are executed in the order of their placement in the queue Should an error occur during the execution of he Submit programs the following Markers are set M3168 Overflow during Multiplication M3169 Division by 0 M3170 MODULO incorrectly executed M3171 Error status for PLC module M3172 Reserved for errors which the PLC programmer would like to intercept These markers are listed separately in the submit job This means that the same markers can be edited as those in the PLC run program without changing the original markers Exact times cannot be given for the commands for the management of the Submit queue The execution times denote maximum values 3 16 1 Call up of the Submit Program SUBM Abbreviation for PLC Editor SUBM SUBMIT Execution time us lt 30 Number of bytes 10 Operands jump address LBL Operation The SUBM command allots an Identifier 1 to 255 to the subprogram designated by
557. rvo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o ky factor MP1810 Kinkpoint MP1830 Multiplication factor MP1820 Servo amplifier Xs Acceleration if MP1060 MP T080 actor Ys The control calculates a velocity value every 3 ms TNC 415 or every 6 ms TNC 407 from the feed rate programmed in the NC program and the final position allowing for the acceleration which has been stored MP1060 The stored acceleration is valid for the rising as well as the falling slope If several axes are traversed simultaneously then the smallest value for acceleration is effective Every 3 ms 6 ms a nominal position value is derived from the calculated velocity S S V At S Nominal path value So Previous nominal path value v Calculated velocity At Cycle time 3 ms The nominal path value is resolved into the individual axis components depending on which axes have been programmed The axis dependent nominal path value is compared with the actual value of the positions and the lag s is calculated Sax XNoml XActl Sax Lag for X axis Muer Nominal path value for X axis Mao Actual path value for X axis The lag is multiplied by the k factor MP1810 and passed on to the drive amplifier as a nominal velocity value analogue voltage Vy Ky Sax vx Nominal velocity value for X axis Ifthe axes are stopped the integral factor MP1080 is effective as well It causes an offse
558. s 3 28 Monitoring functions 2 15 4 83 4 273 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal Monitoring the analogue voltage 4 86 signals 7 to 16 App iiia 3 25 Mounting dimensions Ee 3 74 Measuring system monitoring s 000 4 9 Mounting position 3 10 Measuring SYSTEMS ccccsccccsceeseceeeees 3 24 4 6 Movement Monitoring ccccccccececeeeeeeeees 4 86 MEGA PROMMER SEENEN 7 28 MSB eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee 8 6 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 Subject Index 13 7 MULTIPLICATION Il MULTIPLICATION Wi Multiplication factor egative backlash esting depth ominal value output ominal spindle speed on linear axis error compensation 4 27 7 161 Non linear override curve Normal direction NOT EQUAL TO lt gt Number Conversion O OORE dads sons ne eege 7 57 Ol e AE 7 80 OEM CCYCIES sssini 4 144 9 1 9 2 Offset adjustment 2 19 4 77 4 104 4 273 Offset Cortechon 4 75 ON OR NOT eves Behe eee 7 59 ONI OR NOT a 7 80 Openi ontrol loops seh ere 4 92 ele EEN 7 16 Operand directory isen ie 7 18 Operand Otter fie Eege 7 16 Operating mode ee ccceecccccccceeeseeeeeeees 4 164 OPES ATOM EE 4 126 OR O ina dave eather oe 7 57 OR NOT ON me 2th abet age baat i 7 59 ORNOT EL OND e e ans 7 80 Oscillation amplitude 0 0c eee 4 181 Oscillations in normal direction 4 188 Ee UE 11 16 Oscillos
559. s active in 1 steps or according to a non linear curve The non linear override curve permits fine a resolution in the lower range of the potentiometer The override values are shown in the PLC in word W766 and W494 If the PLC program overwrites a value in W766 it will become active regardless of the potentiometer setting For 1 steps the value range is O to 150 for a non linear curve it is O to 15000 corresponding to 0 to 150 In the manual operating modes the axis feed rate is displayed not the contour feed rate There is a choice of two display modes The axis specific feed rate from machine parameter MP1020 X is only displayed after pressing an axis direction key If two axis direction keys are pressed simultaneously no feed rate will be shown Even when none of the axis direction keys is operated one feed rate will be displayed which can also be adjusted by the feed potentiometer The smallest feed rate from MP 1020 X is valid for all axes The axis feed rate will also be shown if several axis direction keys are pressed simultaneously MP7270 Display of the feed rates in manual operating modes Manual operation Electronic handwheel Entry 0 or 1 0 display of the axis feed rate only when an axis direction key is pressed axis specific feed from MP1020 X 1 display of the axis feed rate before operating an axis direction key smallest value from MP1020 X for all axes MP7620 Feed rate and spindle override Entry
560. s are high 7 Control voltage switched off externally 8 After switching on the control voltage again the error message can be cancelled followed by normal control operation 9 The control switches off the control is ready output X41 34 after recognizing a fault VDU display RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING EMERGENCY STOP Flashing error message 4 124 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 01 98 E 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine 4 125 i 6 Display and operation Machine parameters and PLC markers can be used to influence the control behaviour for certain functions All machine parameters and PLC markers which influence the display and the operation of the control and for which there is no separate section in this manual are described in the section Display and operation The display is divided into several Windows for optimum depiction of the information on the VDU screen Back Foreground mode oe Graphics window or additional status display Program Text PLC window Status window T Soft keys The VDU screen displays can be changed by machine parameters and PLC markers
561. s display BLUE cursor always inverse The entry values for colour adjustment are byte oriented The preferred entry is hexadecimal Colour Red Green Blue HEX Ranges Oto F Adjustment fine Entry for yellow 0 3 9 3 9 0 0 Since it is possible to make mistakes when setting the colours leg red error messages on red background HEIDENHAIN recommends a standard colour adjustment This standard colour setting is the setting generally used by HEIDENHAIN and is prompted by the control system when creating the MP list The standard colour adjustment is given in the following list Machine Colour for Standard colour adjustment parameter MP7350 Window frame 030200C MP7351 Error messages 03F3FOF MP 7352 Operating mode display Machine MP7352 0 Background 0000000 MP7352 1 Text for operating mode 0342008 MP7352 2 Dialogue 03F3828 MP7353 Operating mode display Programming MP7353 0 Background 0000000 MP7353 1 Text for operating mode 0342008 MP7353 2 Dialogue 03F3828 MP7354 Program text display Machine MP7354 0 Background 0080400 MP7354 1 General program text 038240C MP7354 2 Current block 038341C MP7354 3 Background not active window 00C0800 4 130 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o MP7355 Program Text display Programming MP7355 0 Background 0080400 MP7355 1 General program text 038240C MP7355 2 Current block 038341C MP7355 3 Background not active w
562. s full transfer is suspended until a storage space of 256 bytes is vacated by execution Only then is transfer resumed until once again the memory is filled 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 19 o MP7228 Storage requirement in drip feed mode Entry range 0 to 1024 KBytes MP7228 0 Minimum storage MP7228 1 Maximum storage 2 4 4 Communication between TNCs For certain applications it is necessary for TNCs to be able to exchange data or to communicate with each other This is made possible by both RS 232 C V 24 and RS 422 V 11 interfaces The simplest form of data exchange is the transfer of files e g NC programs from one TNC to another To do this the same transmission format must be set at both control units and transfer started It must be ensured that the reading in control unit is the first to start For the application Positioning module i e further NC axes are required the positioning values have to be transmitted from the master logic unit to the slave logic unit On this basis data can be transferred to another TNC via the data interface using PLC modules at the PLC level see Section 5 Data transfer via PLC 8 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o 2 5 Configuration of interfaces 2 5 1 Selection of interfaces Either data interface may be inhibited with MP 5000 MP 5000 Inhibit data interfaces Input range O to 2 0 no interface inhibited 1 interf
563. s not possible until the reference signal is evaluated 1 5 Installing the positioning module The positioning module is connected to the hardware across the RS 422 V 11 interface by means of a special cable Id Nr 265 479 Software installation is done with the PLC program of the master controller TNC 407 or TNC 415 Modules 9100 and 9107 are used for this they activate the RS 422 V 11 data interface and make it possible to transmit and receive binary data respectively These modules are described in the chapter PLC Programming The PLC program for the positioning module can be written either on the LE 234 003 itself in which case it must be connected up to screen BE 212 and control panel TE 355 A B or on a PC using the HEIDENHAIN PLC programming software Please contact HEIDENHAIN should you have any queries about the PLC programming software 10 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 01 98 2 f TNC 425 Contents 1 Digital speed control 11 2 2 Mounting and electrical installation 11 3 2 1 Hardware 11 3 2 2 Summary of connections 11 4 2 2 1 Pin assignment 11 5 2 3 1 Connection of linear encoders 11 6 2 3 2 Connection of rotary encoders for speed control 11 6 2 3 3 Connection of rotary encoder for spindle orientation 11 7 2 4 Analogue output 11 7 3 Machine interfacing 11 8 3 1 Machine parameters for digital speed control 11 8 3 2 Optimizing the speed controller 11 12 3 3 Optimizing the posit
564. scribing either a paraxial shift or a rotation With swivel heads the starting point is the tool datum of the machine usually the spindle head The shift or rotation to the next nearest swivel axis is then entered one at a time This operation is repeated until a point is reached that is not separated from the machine by a free axis of rotation The swivel head must be in its datum position when the shifts are being calculated e g A 0 B 0 For tilting tables the machine geometry is described starting from the centre of rotation of the first swivel axis as seen from the workpiece and not from tool datum First the centre of rotation is defined in absolute coordinates in relation to the machine datum then the shifts and rotations are entered one at a time until a point is reached that is not separated from the machine by a free axis of rotation When machining with tilting tables the coordinate system stays parallel to the machine coordinate system The Tilt working plane function is enabled with MP7500 The descriptions in MP7510 to MP7592 are also used for other functions e g Cylinder interpolation 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 41 2 1 PLC positioning with M91 or M92 is not possible when Cycle 19 Tilt working plane is active The Basic rotation feature can be executed only when the tilt axes are at their 0 positions PLC positioning commands are always executed paraxially to the machine co
565. se BECEDIE 4 76 Entry 0 100 to 10 000 Maximum velocity for checking the positioning PLC EDIT 4 87 window Entry 0 100 to 10 000 mm min Recommended value 0 5 mm min Damping factor for transient response PLC EDIT 4 76 Only with software types 243 05 259 96 243 07 243 02 Entry 0 010 to 0 999 3 4 Operation with servo lag Machine parameter MP1710 via Position monitoring for operation with lag PLC EDIT 4 84 cancellable Entry 0 0000 to 300 0000 mm MP1710 0 Xaxis MP1710 1 Y axis MP1710 2 Zaxis MP1710 3 4th axis MP1710 4 5th axis 5 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o f Machine parameter MP1720 MP1810 MP1815 MP1820 MP1830 via Position monitoring for operation with lag EMERGENCY STOP Entry 0 0000 to 300 0000 mm MP1720 0 P1720 1 P1720 2 P1720 3 P1720 4 M M M M X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis ky factor for operation with lag Entry 0 100 to 20 000 MP1810 0 MP1810 1 MP1810 2 MP1810 3 MP1810 4 SEH mm X axis Y axis Z axis Ath axis 5th axis k factor for operation with lag activated by M105 Entry 0 100 to 20 000 MP1815 0 MP1815 1 MP1815 2 MP1815 3 MP1815 4 nmin mm X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Multiplication factor for kv Entry 0 001 to 1 000 MP1820 0 MP1820 1 MP1820 2 MP1820 3 MP1820 4 Kink point X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Entry 0 0
566. simulation 4 163 i 8 Key simulation The entry to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls is by the keys on the TNC keyboard TE 400 and the manufacturer s own machine control panel The two control panels are joined to connectors X45 and X46 on the logic unit by a connecting cable see Assembly and electrical installation The key code from the TNC keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC PLC inputs and outputs for the machine control panel are available on connector X46 These PLC inputs and outputs must be evaluated by the PLC and the appropriate information passed to the NC 8 1 TNC keyboard TE 400 The key code from the TNC keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC The keys on the TNC keyboard and the soft keys on the BC 110 B can be inhibited by the PLC With M2876 the entire alphabetic keyboard can be inhibited M2877 inhibits the soft key row and M2878 inhibits the changeover keys to the right of the screen All other keys can be inhibited selectively with M2854 to M2923 If an inhibited key is pressed the NC sets the marker M2182 and deposits the key code for the key which was operated in word W274 The PLC must reset the marker M2182 after evaluating this information The keys on the TNC keyboard and the soft keys on screen can also be simulated by the PLC To achieve this the appropriate key code is entered in Word W516 and activated by the strobe marker M2813 After execution of the key code the NC resets the strobe marker
567. simulation is defined in machine parameter MP7315 MP7316 defines the depth of penetration of the simulated tool The program sections to be displayed are marked with M functions that are defined in machine parameters MP7317 0 and MP7317 1 MP7315 Tool radius for graphic simulation without TOOL CALL Entry 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 mm MP7316 Tool penetration depth Entry 0 0000 to 99 999 9999 mm MP7317 0 M function at start of graphic display Entry 0 to 88 MP7317 1 M function to interrupt graphic display Entry 0 to 88 17 3 Program stop with M functions When an M function is output in the Program run full sequence and Program run single block modes the program run is normally interrupted until the PLC reports that the M function was executed This can be a disadvantage in certain applications such as with laser cutting machines For such applications it is more desirable not to wait for the acknowledgement of the M function but rather to run the program continuously This function can be selected through machine parameter MP7440 Bit 2 There must be no PLC positioning datum shift spindle orientation or limit switch during M function output a This function must not be used on milling machines or boring mills 4 278 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 01 98 e 1 Machine parameters Contents 1 What is a machine parameter TA User parameters 2 Input output of machine pa
568. sion of a data word can begin at any time A quiescent state exists before switch on and is reverted to after each transmission Before a data bit can be transmitted this has to be communicated to the receiver Otherwise if the first bit of the data word has the same value as the quiescent state the receiver will not notice any difference from the quiescent state A so called start bit is used for this purpose For the duration of a single bit the transmitter emits a logic value which clearly differs from the quiescent state and which gives the receiver an opportunity to prepare its polling logic to read in the data bit After the start bit has been sent the data word is transmitted bit by bit starting with the LSB Least Significant Bit After the MSB Most Significant Bit of the data word a so called parity bit is inserted see paragraph 1 1 3 Checking data The parity bit is followed by one or two stop bits These final stop bits ensure that the receiver has enough time to recognise the transmitter again before the start of the next character Synchronization is repeated before each character The complete word is referred to as a character frame Character frame 1st Bit 2nd Bit 3rd Bit 4th Bit 5th Bit 6th Bit 7th Bit Parity LSB MSB bit Data bits Quiescent state Quiescent state Ter 2 stop bits Start bit f 8 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 01 98 8 1 1 3 Checking data Wi
569. ss target address too big Call PS K BMWV D lt Target address Dxxx gt PS K BMW D 0 Actual value 1 Nominal value 2 Actual value in reference system 3 Trailing error 4 Distance to go 5 Deflection measuring touch probe 6 Actual values in the shifted datum system datum shift CM 9041 Error status after call M3171 0 Data were read 1 Faulty call data Module 9042 PLC reads spindle coordinates The coordinates for actual value nominal value actual value in reference system trailing error and distance to go of the spindle are filed in 5 consecutive doublewords starting from the specified target address The data for actual nominal and reference values are standardized to 0 360 000 degrees the data for trailing error and distance to go are displayed between 2879 912 degrees and 2879 912 degrees The display is in 1 1000th degree format Constraints All coordinates are read as 0 when MP3010 lt 6 not a controlled spindle During operation as an analogue spindle M3 M4 active or M5 and spindle control not active the nominal value equals the actual value Trailing error and distance to go are 0 Possible errors The specified target address is not a doubleword address i e not divisible by 4 5 doublewords cannot be written at the specified target address target address too big Call PS B AW D K lt Target address Dxxx gt CM 9042 Error status after call M3171 0 Spindle coor
570. ssage Error in PLC program will appear The displayed code identifies the marker where the error has occurred An axis direction key which has been operated can be stored by marker M2450 Complement marker M2466 This means that the axis will be traversed until NC STOP occurs This memory function must be activated by machine parameter MP7680 Bit 0 MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function Bit 0 Memory function for axis direction keys 0 Not stored 1 Stored Marker Function Error message Set Reset M2448 NC start edge evaluation 1A PLC PLC M2464 Complement NC start M2449 Rapid traverse 1B M2465 Complement rapid traverse M2488 NC stop 0 signifies stop M2450 Memory function for axis direction keys 1C M2466 Complement memory function for axis direction keys M2451 Feed release 1D M2467 Complement feed release M2456 Manual traverse X 1l M2472 Complement manual traverse X M2457 Manual traverse X 1J M2473 Complement manual traverse X M2458 Manual traverse Y 1K M2474 Complement manual traverse Y M2459 Manual traverse Y 1L M2475 Complement manual traverse Y 4 174 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 8 Key simulation 01 98 2 f Marker Function M2460 Manual traverse Z M2476 Complement manua M2461 Manual traverse Z M2477 Complement manua M2462 Manual traverse 4 M2478 Complement manua M2463 Manual traverse 4 M2479 Complement manua M2524 Manu
571. ssing a substring Sn X the value range for the index register 0 127 was overshot 7 34 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 01 98 2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Program creation 7 35 i 3 Commands 3 1 Load and Assign Commands 3 1 1 LOAD L Abbreviation for the PLC Editor L LOAD Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 2 to 0 7 0 5 to 0 8 0 2 to 0 7 0 0 to 0 3 Number of bytes 4 6 4 6 Logic execution with LOAD command Operands M O T C Operation The addressed operand is copied into the Accumulator A load command is always used at the start of a logic chain in order to enable subsequent gating commands The same function is achieved when the gating commands A O XO are used at the start of a logic chain however this should only be used when compatibility with the TNC 355 is required Example Input 14 and Input I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2 Thus the logic state of Input 14 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable subsequent gating commands Initial state Input 4 1 Input I5 0 Output O2 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 BEE H 0 n XM MR RIX RR KR 1 L4 n x xx x x x 1 x x x x x x x 2 Alb on x
572. st In First Out 3 11 1 Load Data onto the Data Stack PS Abbreviation for PLC Editor PS PUSH Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time us 1 4 to 2 0 1 5 to 2 0 1 3 to 1 8 1 0 to 1 1 Number of bytes 24 26 22 24 Logic Execution with the PS Command Operands M O T C Operation With the PS command data can be buffered Thus the addressed operand is loaded onto the Data Stack Since the Data Stack is organised as 16 bit a minimum width of one Word must be used in writing to it During this the operand value is copied into bit 7 of the current address in the Data Stack The free bits of the reserved memory are undefined or unused In the event of a Stack overflow an error message will be issued Memory allocation in the Data Stack Bit 15 7 0 Word Execution with the PS Command Operands B W D K Operation With the PS command data can be buffered Thus the addressed memory area B W D K is copied into the current address of the Data Stack With Word execution two Words are reserved as standard on the Data Stack per PS command The operand is extended in the Stack with sign justification corresponding to the MSB In the event of a Stack overflow an error message will be issued Memory allocation in the Data Stack upon saving of Bit 31 15 7 0 Byte Word Doubleword Constant 7 100 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 1 3 11 2 Acquire Data from the Data Stack PL Abbreviation f
573. st file lt CR gt lt LF gt gt Last line of last file lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ETX gt gt lt EOT gt id If several programs are gathered together in a file which ends with lt ETX gt then these programs are read in without being requested by lt DC1 gt The request lt DC1 gt is not sent until a program has ended with lt ETX gt 8 34 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 e Read in file with acknowledgement After commencement of transfer the peripheral unit sends the first program module until the receiving buffer of the TNC is full The TNC then stops transmission with lt DC3 gt and awaits acknowledgement from the user If the file is to be transferred the TNC sends lt DC1 gt and the program is read in and stored Otherwise the file is in fact read in but not stored If hardware handshaking is set transfer by using the RTS signal is stopped and restarted Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC lt DC1 gt h lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of file 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt gt lt DC3 gt Polling lt DC1 gt Read in Yes No 2nd line of file 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt Last line of file 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ETX gt gt lt DC1 gt id lt NUL gt gt Last line of last file lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ETX gt V lt DC1 gt id lt ETX gt gt lt EOT gt 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TN
574. stics of the machine by machine parameters makes it possible to control the loop with a lag distance which is nearly 0 Deviations in the actual positional value are compensated as described under Operation with lag The servo follows the pre compensated curve The Ky factor for the feedforward control then comes into play If the axes are stopped the integral factor will also be effective it results in an offset correction MP1390 Feedforward control in the Positioning with manual data input Program run single block and Program run full sequence modes Entry Oor1 0 Operation with feedforward control 1 Operation with servo lag MP1391 Feedforward control in the Manual and Handwheel modes Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis AR Operation with servo lag Bit 1 Y axis de Operation with feedforward control Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis The feedforward control value is adjusted to the dynamics of the machine by two machine parameters Precontrol U M MP1520 AN Input value correct 91 Input value too large eer Input value too small MP1060 a NZ t ms The machine parameter MP1060 determines the acceleration slope of the precontrolled speed curve MP1520 determines the transient response into the nominal position when accelerating and decelerating The greater the value which is entered the more the system will tend to oscillate 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TN
575. t GREATER EQUAL Execution time ps lt 100 Number of bytes STRING memory 12 Immediate STRING 20 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 26 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command a direct transition from STRING to logic execution takes place The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument If the STRING Accumulator is greater than or equal to the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the STRING Accumulator is less than the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 7 120 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 1 3 15 6 UNEQUAL lt gt Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt gt NOT EQUAL Execution time ps lt 100 Number of bytes STRING memory 12 Immediate STRING 20 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 26 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command a direct transition from STRING to logic execution takes place The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument If the STRING Accumulator is not equal to the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the STRING Accumulator is equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 Example of STRING execution An Immediate STRING is to be compared with the content of the STRING Memory SO Depending on the comparison result Module 50 is called Initial state STRING memory SO SPINDLE 2 Immedi
576. t initiated by trigger condition CHANNEL Starts recording when the trigger threshold of the selected channel is exceeded Trigger threshold The trigger threshold for the selected channel is entered as a numerical value in the following units Linear speed mm min Position mm Rotational speed mm min Trailing error um Analogue voltage mV Edge Triggering with rising positive and falling negative edge Pre Trigger Defines the start of the recording as a of the total recording time possible entries are 0 25 50 75 and 100 Press the ENT key to select 3 4 3 Recording The recording parameters to be edited are selected with the arrow keys The values for FEED RATE and TRIGGER THRESHOLD are entered with the numerical keys The values for all other recording parameters are selected by pressing the ENT key Output In the Manual mode you can choose between the set ramp and a step function for outputting a nominal value The step function is only possible with digitally controlled axes and is necessary for trimming the speed controller The step function and the oscilloscope recording facility can also be used to determine the maximum acceleration of the machine when the provisional input value is not known In the MDI or Automatic modes acceleration is always by the set ramp 11 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o Feed rate With a step function as the output signal the feed
577. t The warmed up air should flow over surfaces which have good thermal conductivity to the external surroundings e g sheet metal For a closed steel housing without assisted cooling the figure for heat conduction is 3 Watt m of surface per C air temperature difference between inside and outside Use of a heat exchanger with separate internal and external circulation 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 3 9 1 Cooling by blowing external air through the control cabinet to replace the internal air In this case the ventilator fan must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the control cabinet and only filtered air can be drawn in HEIDENHAIN advises against this method of cooling since the function and reliability of electronic assemblies are adversely affected by contaminated air fine dust vapours etc In addition to these disadvantages a filter which is not adequately serviced leads to a loss in cooling efficiency Regular servicing is therefore absolutely vital Incorrect Correct Obstructive elements Heat generating elements 2 3 Humidity Permissible humidity lt 75 in continuous operation lt 95 for not more than 30 days p a randomly distributed In tropical areas it is recommended that the TNC is not switched off so that condensation is avoided on the circuit boards The heat generation prevents condensation and has no further disadvantag
578. t adjustment see the section Offset adjustment 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 67 e The k factor position loop gain determines the amplification of the control loop The optimal k factor must be determined by trial and error If you choose a very high ky factor the lag is very small However this can lead to oscillations when moving into a new position If the k factor is too small the new position will be reached too slowly For axes that are interpolated with each other the k factor must be equal to prevent contour deviations The following diagram shows the response for various k factors U V MP1810 ky correct ky too large ANL Z LE ky too small s MP1060 Mee NU t s The acceleration can be programmed by the machine parameter MP1060 It determines the slope of the ramp on the rising and falling edges For axes which are mutually interpolated the k factor must be the same in order to avoid contour distortion MP1060 Acceleration Entry 0 001 to 5 0 m s2 MP1060 0 Acceleration X axis MP1060 1 Acceleration Y axis MP1060 2 Acceleration Z axis MP1060 3 Acceleration 4th axis MP1060 4 Acceleration 5th axis The following formula shows the relationship among K factor feed rate and servo lag m min kv Ye ky position loop gain enn Sa m Ve rapid traverse Es Sa servo lag mm or v Sa ky 4 68 TNC 4
579. t 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator Example The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to Word W8 Initial state Word W4 36 AA hex Word W6 3C 36 hex Word W8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit Ste 15 7 0 15 87 0 XXX XXX XXX x x x XXX xxx 1 LW6 000011110 0 0 01101 1 0 00111100 00110110 2 AN W4 0000001000 0 0010100 00110110 10101010 3 W8 0000001000f0 0010100 00001000 00010100 Line 1 The contents of Word W6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with AND NOT Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Word W8 7 56 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f 3 3 3 OR O Abbreviation for the PLC Editor O OR Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 2 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 7 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 4 4 4 6 Logic execution with the OR command Operands M O T C Operation This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program a At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an L command i e the logic state of the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355 control which did not have the special L command In PLC programs for the TNC 407 TNC 415 a logic
580. t 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Axis X Axis Y Axis Z 4th Axis 5th Axis MP60 PLC auxiliary axes Entry Xxxxx Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Axis X Axis Y Axis Z Ath Axis 5th Axis 0 not active 1 active 0 not controlled 1 controlled 0 NC axis 1 PLC axis MP110 0 4 Assignment of the measuring system inputs to the axes Entry 0 to 5 0 measuring sys 1 measuring sys 2 measuring sys 3 measuring sys 4 measuring sys 5 measuring sys MP110 0 MP110 1 MP110 2 MP110 3 MP110 4 X axi em input X1 em input X2 em input X3 em input X4 em input X5 em input X6 S Y axi Z axi S S 4th axis 5th axis T RUN 8 4 14 PLC RUN 8 4 89 PLC RUN g 4 38 i 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 7 1 Machine parameter MP120 0 4 MP210 MP330 0 4 MP340 0 4 Function and input Change via Assignment of the nominal value outputs Entry 0 to 5 4 14 0 output 1 1 output 2 2 output 3 3 output 4 4 output 5 5 output S MP120 0 MP120 1 MP120 2 MP120 3 MP120 4 X axis Y axis Z axis Ath axis 5th axis Count direction of the measuring system signals Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis Bit 1 Y axis Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 0 positive 1 negative Signal period Entry 0 100 to 1000 000 um or too P330 0 P330 1 P330 2 P330 3 MP330 4 M M M M X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis 5th axis Interp
581. t SOH gt lt N gt Name lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt 4 lt ACK gt lt STX gt 1st line of file lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt H lt ACK gt M lt STX gt Last line of file lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt i lt ACK gt Id lt ETX gt l gt lt EOT gt Id 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 43 1 Read in all files In this case the TNC sends a header without a program name and the peripheral unit sends the first file The TNC again outputs a header without a program name the next program is sent and so on Peripheral unit I lt ACK gt lt STX gt 1st line PGM1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt M lt STX gt Last line PGM1 lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt lt ACK gt q lt STX gt Last line of last file lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt 4 Read in file with acknowledgement Transmission path TNC lt SOH gt lt H gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt ACK gt gt lt ACK gt lt SOH gt lt H gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt ACK gt lt SOH gt lt H gt lt E gt lt ETB gt BCC lt DC1 gt gt lt EOT gt In this mode the TNC first of all sends a header without a program name The peripheral unit then starts data transfer until it is stopped by the TNC The TNC interrupts transfer by not sending a positive acknowledge
582. t fall under the export restrictions therefore no export version is necessary 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 2 7 1 New functions will be introduced only in the following software types TNC 415B TNC 425 280 54 TNC 415F TNC 425E 28056 TNC 407 280 58 These software types are therefore supplied as standard 3 1 3 Software option HEIDENHAIN offers the Digitising with TS 120 function as a software option see chapter Machine integration An additional software protection module is installed in controls supplied with this software option The Id Nr of the logic unit indicates another version If the software module is installed the option is indicated on the screen under the NC and PLC software numbers Logic units that have already been delivered can be retrofitted with the software protection module Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you wish to buy this option for your existing control The proper component model must be ordered for a specific hardware model Digitizing with TS 120 NC software 243 02 243 03 280 58 Id Nr of the installation kit Id Nr of software module 265 313 01 265 314 01 286 405 01 NC 415A NC 415B TNC 425 246 051 01 280 54 Digitizing with TM 110 Id Nr of the installation kit Id Nr of software module NC software TNC 415B 286 405 02 246 051 03 280 54 TNC 425 2 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Software 01 98 E 3
583. t must always be carried out for both methods of control MP1390 Velocity feedforward control in the operating modes Positioning with MDI Program run single block and Program run full sequence Input Oor1 0 operation with feedforward control 1 operation with servo lag MP1391 Velocity feedforward control in the operating modes Manual and Handwheel Input xxxxx Bit O Axis X O operation with servo lag Bit 1 Axis Y UE operation with feedforward control Bit 2 Axis Z Bit 3 Axis 4 Bit 4 Axis 5 3 2 1 Control with servo lag Servo lag refers to the difference lag between the nominal position which is defined by the NC and the actual position of the axes Control would not be possible without this lag The advantage of operation with servo lag lies in the softer control which is especially suitable for machining 3D contours since corners and radii are smoothed out depending on the Kv factor position loop gain factor and the machining feed rate Depending on how far these contour errors can be tolerated the machine operator or manufacturer must decide and choose either operation with servo lag or with feedforward control Operation with servo lag is depicted in a simplified form in the following block diagram for the X axis It shows a part of the cascade control mentioned previously All machine parameters which influence the control characteristic are shown here El 4 66 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Se
584. t with controlled spindle for orientation As for entry value 4 but with controlled spindle for orientation As for entry value 5 but with controlled spindle for orientation MP3011 Function of analogue output S if MP3010 lt 3 4 275 Entry 0 to 2 No special function Voltage proportional to current contour feed rate dependent on MP3012 Voltage as defined by PLC module 9130 Voltage as defined via M function M200 to M204 MP3012 Feed rate for output of an analogue voltage of 10 V 4 207 MP3011 1 Entry 0 to 300 000 mm min MP3013 0 to Characteristic curve kink points for analogue 4 277 MP3013 11 voltage output with M202 Entry 10 to 300 000 mm min MP3014 0 to Characteristic curve kink points for analogue 4 277 MP3014 11 voltage output with M202 Entry 0 000 to 9 999 V MP3020 5 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o Machine parameter MP3030 MP3120 MP3130 MP3140 MP3210 0 7 MP3240 1 MP3240 2 MP3310 0 MP3310 1 MP3410 0 MP3410 1 MP3410 2 MP3410 3 Function and input Page via Axis halt on TOOL CALL with only a spindle PLC EDIT 4 102 speed output Entry 0 or 1 1 No axis halt on TOOL CALL 0 Axis halt on TOOL CALL 4 97 Zero spindle speed permitted PLC EDIT Entry 0 or 1 0 0 rom permitted 1 0 rpm not permitted Polarity of the S analogue voltage PLC RUN 4 95 Entry 0 to 3 M03 positive voltage
585. ta interfaces 8 17 e 2 4 1 Saving reading files The following table lists all the files which can be saved to external memory floppy disk unit magnetic tape unit and PC and can be read back in from them File File extension Code HEIDENHAIN Dialog NC program H DIN ISO NC program JI Oe D Tool table T Pallet table F J L Datum table O DO N Machine parameters M Compensation table V Compensation Assignment S PLC program P Text file A Error messages 1st language A Error messages English A Dialogs 1st language A Dialogs English A Pocket table Ir O O R Help files J Pocket tables R Help files J Point tables U After the appropriate key numbers for the PLC the machine parameters and the correction table have been entered these files can be written to or read from via the data interfaces Data transfer is initiated with the EXT key as usual Current values of Q parameters PLC error messages and dialogs can also be outputted via the two interfaces NC program FN 15 PRINT The magnetic tape unit is only suitable as an external data carrier to a limited extent because only one file can be stored per cassette side However this file can contain several programs Using the floppy disk unit up to 256 programs approximately 25 000 program blocks can be stored This represents a storage capacity of approximately 790 kilobytes When transmitting and receiving a file the appropriate code file is outputted and
586. te Input 15 1 Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content Bit 31 7 0 1 Lb 2 JPT 10 n xxxxxx i xxxxxxkx 3 LIB A O M500 5 020 6 LBL 10 7 mi00 E Line 1 Load the operand contents in the Accumulator Line 2 Dependent on Input I5 a program jump is processed Line 3 Skipped in this example Line 4 Skipped in this example Line 5 Skipped in this example Line 6 Jump address The program run is continued from here 7 106 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L Ei 3 12 4 Call Module CM Abbreviation for PLC Editor CM CALL MODULE Jump processed Jump not processed Execution time us 1 4 to 2 2 Number of bytes 22 Special Library Call Execution time us 1 6 to 2 1 Number of bytes 24 Operands jump address LBL Operation A Call Module instructs the processor to leave the main program and process the Module designated by the jump address LBL Modules are independent subprograms and are terminated by the command EM They can also be called at multiple points in the main program This command interrupts a logic sequence 3 12 5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator 1 CMT Abbreviation for PLC Editor CMT CALL MODULE IF TRUE Jump processed Jump not processed Execution time ps 1 5 to 2 5 0 1 to 0 5 Number of bytes 26 24 Special Library Call Execution time ps 2 0 to 2 4 0 4 to 0 5 Number of bytes 28 Byte information in brackets A shorter command is employed
587. te Max 60 m Coupling female 12 pin D sub connector male 15 pin Id Nr 267 267 or Connecting cable with one connector Max 60 m D sub connector pin 15 pin Id Nr 268 372 11 6 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 01 98 o 1 2 3 3 Connection of rotary encoder for spindle orientation The encoder for oriented spindle stop is connected at the input X6 square wave signals Max input frequency 300 kHz HEIDENHAIN recommends using the ROD 426 xxx8 1024 lines Cable adapter complete Max 20 m Connector female 12 pin D sub connector pin 15 pin Id Nr 267 268 or Connecting cable with one connector Max 20 m D sub connector pin 15 pin Id Nr 268 372 2 4 Analogue output The TNC 425 from HEIDENHAIN permits installation of commercially standard amplifiers and motors with AC technology The output with the analogue nominal value voltage of the TNC s rpm controller is connected with the torque input of the servo amplifier This drive concept eliminates the need for tachogenerators The rom actual value is measured by a HEIDENHAIN incremental rotary encoder 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 11 7 e f 3 Machine interfacing 3 1 Machine parameters for digital speed control The type of speed control analogue or digital can be selected for each individual axis The position and speed controllers receive their feedback signals f
588. ted by LSV 2 protocol Constraint The message is transmitted to the host by the LSV 2 command M PC lt msg I gt Possible errors The control has no LSV 2 connection to a host computer The transmit buffer for the transfer is full Awrong value was specified for the data type doubleword or string Awrong value was specified for the address String 0 3 Binary 0 1020 divisible by 4 Call PS B W D K Data type gt 0 Binary data doubleword 1 String PS B W D K lt Source address gt With binary number of doubleword 0 1020 With string number of string 0 3 CM 9110 PL B W D lt Error code gt 0 Message transmitted 1 No connection to host 2 Transmit buffer full 3 Wrong data type not 0 or 1 4 Wrong source address Error status after call M3171 0 Message downloaded 1 Error condition see above 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7 169 2 4 8 10 Read a Message by LSV 2 Module 9111 With Module 9111 a message doubleword or string that has been received from a host computer connected by LSV 2 protocol can be read Constraint The message must be sent from the host by the LSV 2 command M PC lt msg I gt Possible errors The control has no LSV 2 connection to a host computer There is no message of the desired type in the receive buffer Awrong value was specified for the data type doubleword or string Awrong value was specified for the address String
589. tele ET EE 8 18 IER 5 5 PUG SoftWare sc Jad eee eile viene 2 11 PLC WINdOW sssini 4 141 7 114 7 152 PLC Data transfer by 8 47 PLC CYVCle tit Eestiss bestershcnhanceaneeeent 7 6 IB 7 115 le RTE 7 119 PLC ERROM arian araa 2 14 PLCEERROR eiiis iileana tenis 7 115 PLCFUNCIONS Ae ne e 7 6 PECAN PUTS teg aa e SR 7 27 PLE OPeratiON EE 7 6 PLC positioning module 10 2 PLGA eie anaa oiia 7 6 PLL PULL LOGICACCU 7 102 PLW PULL WORDACCU 7 102 Pocket MIN genreen 4 145 Pocket tabletat r aa 8 18 Pockets with free programmed contours 4 146 Polarity of the nominal value potential 4 8 Polarity of the S analogue voltage 4 95 Position approach speed 4 74 4 76 Position Control Joen 4 65 POSITION GIS Plays ie eirki eed iin dence 4 134 Position display with rotary axes 4 135 Position monttorimg 4 84 POSITION valeres eege ais ans AE 2 16 Positional deviation ceceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 71 POSITIONING EFTOM cece cece cececcccceeeeeeees 4 84 4 85 Positioning module cccccceeeeeeee 8 20 10 2 POSITIONING WINGOW 0 ccceeceeeeteeeeeeeteee 4 87 Positioning window for spindle 4 108 Positioning window for tool axis 4 118 Positive backlash ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeee 4 23 Power Consumpton 3 16 POWER INTERRUPTED oos 4 155 Powersupply s ee ona aa 3 16 Powers Of 2 aretini ea 12 5 PPN TEn E EE 4 180 EAN ere EE 4 183 Pre Cut out me 4 116
590. tested and the dialogs have been specified the two can be output in binary form for EPROM programming together with the PLC program and the error messages It is possible to output the files located in both the PLC EPROM and the NC program memory in binary code An accurate description of file output via the data interface is given in the PLC Programming Manual 9 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Output in binary code 01 98 o 4 Bolt hole circle OEM cycle example The following Bolt hole circle program is an example of an OEM cycle This cycle has not been loaded in the control unit The Z axis acts as the tool axis The first hole in the circle is at 0 The OEM cycle calculates the angular position of the holes from the number of holes The drilling positions are approached in succession in an anti clockwise direction and the holes are made automatically with an in feed Before the cycle is called the tool is held at the safety clearance YA Input parameters Q1 Number of holes Q2 Radius of bolt hole circle Q3 X co ordinate of centre of bolt hole circle O4 Y co ordinate of centre of bolt hole circle O5 Safety clearance for Z axis negative input Op Hole depth in Z axis negative input Q7 Drilling feed 04 i al al Bolt hole circle OEM cycle 0 BEGIN PGM 99999968 MM 1 DLG CALL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Dialog block 2 FN1 Q6 06 05 Distance traversed in Z 3 FN4 O50 360 DIV Q1 Angl
591. th Cycle 17 Cycle 18 With Cycle 18 the tool axis tracks the actual position of the spindle The starting position is the current position The target position is the total hole depth Approaching and departing movements must be programmed separately During Cycle 18 marker M2095 is set M2499 must be reset so that the cycle is run MP7130 MP7140 and MP7150 have the same function as for Cycle 17 4 118 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 e 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4 119 i 5 EMERGENCY STOP routine A PLC input X42 4 and a PLC output X41 34 and in the PL410 B X8 16 with the designation control is ready are available in the control for the EMERGENCY STOP routine If a malfunction is recognized in the control the TNC switches the control is ready output signal off a flashing error message appears on the VDU screen and the PLC program is stopped This error message can not be cancelled After removing the fault the switch on routine must be gone through again If the control is ready signal is switched off by an event outside the control the error message EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP is displayed and the NC sets the marker M2190 and M2191 This error message can only be cancelled after the co
592. th a 3D touch probe Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP6010 Selection of the touch probe system PLC EDIT 4 177 Entry O or 1 CN 123 0 TS 120 1 TS 511 3 9 1 Digitizing with TS 120 only with digitizing option parameter via MP6120 Probing feed rate triggering touch probe PLC RUN a 4 177 Entry 10 to 3000 mm min CN 123 Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm CN 123 Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm CN 123 MP6150 Rapid traverse for probe cycle triggering touch PLC RUN 4 177 probe CN 123 Entry 10 to 10000 mm min MP6160 Spindle orientation for 180 rotation PLC RUN 4 178 Entry 1 to 88 CN 123 1 Spindle orientation directly through NC 0 Function not active 1 to 88 Number of the M function for spindle orientation by PLC MP6200 Selection of triggering or measuring touch probe 4 177 system only with Digitizing with TM 110 option Entry 0 or 1 0 Triggering touch probe e g TS 120 1 Measuring touch probe e g TM 110 MP6210 Number of oscillations per second in normal PLC RUN 4 181 Entry 0 to 65535 Hz Entry 0 000 to 99 999 999 mm Entry 0 to 65 535 min Entry 0 to 1000 mm min CN 123 Entry 0 to 10 000 mm CN 123 MP6260 Output of M90 on NC blocks of digitized data PLC RUN 4 181 Entry O or 1 CN 123 0 no output of M90 1 output of M90 in every NC block 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 29 o Machine
593. th an asynchronous character frame transmission errors can be detected by using a parity check procedure A parity bit is sent in addition to the data bits The evaluation of this bit enables the receiver to check the parity of received data The parity bit can take three different forms the same form of parity must be set at both interfaces No parity check Error detection is dispensed with Even parity The transmitter counts bits with a value of 1 If the number is odd the parity bit is set to 1 otherwise it is cleared to 0 The sum of the set data bits and the parity bit is therefore always even Upon receiving a word the receiver counts all of the set bits including the parity bit If this count yields an odd number there is a transmission error and the data word must be repeated or an error message will be displayed Odd parity In this case the parity bit is so chosen by the transmitter that the total number of all the set bits is odd In this case an error will be detected if the receiver observes an even number of set bits in its evaluation Example Parity bit 1 Even parity Letter z 1111010 0 Odd parity 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Introduction 8 7 1 1 1 4 Data transfer rate The data transfer rate of an interface is given in BAUD and indicates the number of bits of data transmitted in one second 1 baud DE Common baud rates are 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 3
594. th axis 5th axis The ratio of grating periods of the linear encoder to the motor rotary encoder should be greater than 5 see MP1970 Example 2000 lines per revolution for the rotary encoder 4 mm screw pitch 2 um grating period with ROD 20 um grating period with LS 4000 um _ Grating period of rotary encoder 2000 lines 2 um 20 um _ Entry value for MP1955 2 um 10 11 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o MP1960 Compensation for reversal spikes on circular interpolation at the quadrant transitions for digitally controlled axes Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm MP1960 0 X axis MP1960 1 Y axis MP1960 2 Z axis MP1960 3 Ath axis MP1960 4 5th axis For digitally controlled axes reversal spikes of the order of the entry range of MP1960 x are compensated during circular interpolation at the quadrant transitions MP1970 Motion monitor for position and speed Entry 0 to 300 0000 mm 0 gt No monitoring MP1970 0 X axis MP1970 1 Y axis MP1970 2 Z axis MP1970 3 Ath axis MP1970 4 5th axis MP1970 is used to set encoder monitoring The position is computed from the pulses received from he position encoder LS and from the pulse received from the rotary encoder ROD The input value from MP1955 is used for this The difference between the two results must not exceed MP1970 Movement monitoring by MP1140 is not active W The movement monitor must be active at all times for safety re
595. th axis as axis of rotation C P 810 4 360 modulo value of tool sequence MP 960 4 XX datum shift MP 7261 E XX number of tools with pocket number MP 7480 1 1 to 3 output tool and pocket no with TOOL DEF MP 4210 0 XX D768 feedrate of PLC axis with TOOL DEF P 4210 1 XX D772 feedrate of PLC axis with reference travers Auxiliary addresses D 168 desired position W 230 number of tools in sequence MP 7261 D 232 length of sequence MP 810 B 236 status of PLC axis B 238 Identifier Submit job M 544 reference travers 599 logic one 4 38 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L Main program L M2185 O M2180 e M544 L M544 O M2047 CMT 40 B Jet EM B 40 L M544 CMT 41 L M544 CMT 42 L M2047 JPF 11 PS K 4 CM 9122 PL B236 L B236 BT K 2 JPT 11 LBL 43 L D232 Ty W230 K 1 X L W262 KEL D168 7 POSITION SEQUENCE PS K 4 PS D168 PS D768 PS K 0 CM 9120 L M599 S M2484 EM LGT PLC SCAN AFTER TERRUPT SCAN AFTER POWER ON TE REF TRAVERSE TOOL DEF D OF MODULI Ae Za DI DI D OF MODULI RAVERSE MP RAVERSE TOOL STROBE END OF MODULI 5TH AXIS POLL STATUS STATUS Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne POSITIONING END OF MODUL K RUNNING T D K POSITION CALCU ATION LENG H OF SE
596. th two windows The display with two windows is useful for the input output of data and for copying data from the EPROM The following soft key rows are offered with the two window display PAGE PAGE TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER SELECT WINDOW be ete Scroll Copy file from window to window Select file type Switch to Return to main display with menu one window f 7 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 01 98 E PAGE PAGE CONVERT MODIFY U Il ba hu WINDOW Scroll Change file Modify display type for selected window The soft key functions are only active for the selected window Use the arrow keys to toggle between the two windows Operate the SELECT TYPE soft key to select a different file type The following soft key rows are shown SHOW ALL PLE ER ERE M FILES FILES FILES Display all file PLC programs PLC error PLC error Dialogues for Dialogues for ASCII files types messages first messages OEM cycles OEM cycles language English first language English HLP BIN COM CMA FILES FILES FILES FILES Help files Binary files Compensation Compensation tables assignment Operate the CONVERT soft key to change the type of the selected file The following soft key row is shown CONV PLC CONY PLC CONY PLCIcony PLC ny cl CONVERT LISTING Be LISTING CROSSREF ceosseer UNFORM PLC program Cross PLC program Unformatted with block reference list with block number number and cross
597. the corresponding PLC programs When creating a program the constraints on the PLC program sequence must be remembered set buffer markers etc The example describes a tool changer with the following features Up to 254 tools Variable pocket coding MP7480 4 Special tools are permitted Next tool standby with TOOL DEF Toolchange with TOOL CALL Tools with no pocket number defined in the tool table can be changed by hand Double changing arm Special tools variable M2601 0 SPIREG The following sequence diagram uses variables for greater clarity In the PLC program these variables are replaced by byte addresses ISTREG B10 Pocket number at the tool change position of the tool magazine GRE B11 Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing tool magazine GRE2 B12 Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing spindle SPIREG B13 Pocket number of tool in spindle 4 246 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 e Other PLC operands which are used Marker M2046 M2047 M2093 M2403 M2483 M2484 M2600 M2601 W262 W264 MP7261 12 MP7264 1 MP7480 0 4 MP7480 1 4 Function Set Reset Strobe signal T code P code with TOOL CALL NC NC Strobe signal T code P code with TOOL DEF NC NC Another T code P code follows with TOOL CALL NC NC Special tool called TOOL CALL NC NC Feedback T code P code with TOOL CALL PLC PLC Feedback T code P code
598. the VDU and the TNC keyboard is one of the items supplied with the VDU 3 70 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 14 VDU 01 98 2 14 3 Connecting the BC 120 X43 Visual Display Unit BC 120 Logic unit l Adapter Extension cable BC 120 313 434 02 Id Nr 312 878 D sub connector Assignment 2 row 3 row D sub D sub connector D sub connecto female 15 pin 2 row i z 6 7 8 9 connector female 15 pin male 15 pin male 15 pin 3 row 3 row 3 row Coax Blue Coax S Red Coax S Blue Gray HL Do not assign i GE A a m Ce VO r d UL i i 2 13 Do not assign Ee A R IL Housing f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 14 VDU 3 71 e 01 98 BC 110 B 260 520 01 TE 400 E 250 517 02 15 Cable overview TNC 415 B PL 410 B PL 410 B PA 110 goog 263 371 x2 263 371 x2 262 651 01 TNC 407 Dogm MB 410 20m 0000 293 757 01 Extension cable for separation points with connecting cable L for extending existing connecting cable og oU oo 40m SCH 477 Connecting cable 263 954 included with BC 110B y VL VL 263 955 263 955 vL Sie SE 111 254 640 244 005 A i A Connecting cable between two components that do not have their own cable Cable adapter 30 03 95 VB 263 954 VB 289 111 Encoders Accessories 60m KA 272 291 HR 332 h egeo S 274 556 HR 130 254 040
599. the reference end position PLC RUN 4 62 only for rotary encoders MP1350 2 Entry 80 to 500 mm min MP1331 0 Xaxis MP1331 1 Y axis MP1331 2 Zaxis MP1331 3 4th axis MP1331 4 5th axis 4 62 REF EF Sequence for traversing reference marks PLC RUN Entry 0 no evaluation of reference mark 1 X axis 2 Y axis 3 Z axis 4 4th axis 5 5th axis MP1340 0 1st axis MP1340 1 2nd axis MP1340 2 3rd axis MP1340 3 Ath axis MP1340 4 5th axis Type of reference mark approach PLC EDIT R 4 53 Entry 0 measuring system with distance coded reference marks 1 measuring system with one reference mark 2 special sequence linear measurement by rotary encoder 3 measuring system with distance coded reference marks MP1350 0 Xaxis MP1350 1 Y axis MP1350 2 Zaxis MP1350 3 4th axis MP1350 4 5th axis Feed precontrol in the Positioning with manual PLC EDIT 4 75 data input Program run single block and Program run full sequence modes Entry 0 or 1 0 operation with feed precontrol 1 operation with lag 4 33 4 75 Feed precontrol in the Manual and Handwheel PLC EDIT modes Entry Xxxxx O operation with lag 1 operation with feed precontrol BitO X axis Bit3 4th axis Bit1 Y axis Bit4 5th axis Bit2 Zaxis 5 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01 98 o 3 3 Operation with feed precontrol Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page parameter via MP1410 sition monitori
600. thin the defined level a The DCD signal pin 8 is not used by the TNC i e the TNC delivers no signal from pin 8 DTR Data Terminal Ready This signal shows that the TNC is ready for service e g receiving buffer full gt DTR Low DSR Data Set Ready Peripheral ready for service RTS Request to Send Switch transmission unit on TNC wishes to transmit data CTS Clear to Send Readiness for transmission The peripheral is ready to receive data Earth conductor cables for power supply Chassis GND Casing connection Signal GND 0 Volt lines for all signals 8 12 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o The lines of the RS 232 C V 24 serial interface Chassis GND Transmitted data Received data Switch on transmission unit RTS Transmission readiness Operational readiness Received signal level Terminal unit ready for service DTR Signal ground GND Peripheral TNC 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 13 e m 2 2 4 Pin layouts The differences between the pin layouts of the logic unit and the adapter block of the TNC should be noted The corresponding pin layouts are shown below see the Installation and Electrical Connection Manual Kl P OM V 24 Adapter Block RS 232 C Adapter block LE Chassis GND d 1 1 1 WHBN WHBN 1 1 GND Chassis TXD 2 24 21 2 ge GNA 2 2 RXD RxD i 3
601. tional 1 BCC character not Control character Transmission stop through RTS Transmission stop through DC3 andard data transmission Page 8 21 8 a PLC RUN CN 123 PLC RUN CN 123 8 24 8 24 5 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters f 01 98 2 parameter via MP5040 Data transfer rate in operating mode EXT3 PLC RUN 8 47 data transfer via PLC Entry 0 to 9 110 baud 5 2400 baud 150 baud 6 4800 baud 300 baud 7 9600 baud 600 baud 8 19200 baud 4 1200 baud 9 38400 baud MP5200 Control character for beginning of text STX PLC RUN 8 25 MP5200 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5200 1 in operating mode EXT 2 MP5200 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 MP5201 Control character for end of text ETX PLC RUN 8 25 MP5201 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5201 1 in operating mode EXT 2 MP5201 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 MP5202 ASCII character for file type for data entry PLC RUN 8 26 MP5202 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5202 1 in operating mode EXT 2 MP5202 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 MP5203 ASCII character for input identification E PLC RUN 8 26 MP5203 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5203 1 in operating mode EXT 2 MP5203 2 in operating mode EXT 3 PLC Entry 0 to 127 MP5204 ASCII character for file type for data output PLC RUN 8 26 MP5204 0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123 MP5204 1 in operating mode EXT 2
602. tioning Entry 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5 31 e Machine parameter MP6550 MP6560 MP6570 MP6580 Function and input Change via Rapid traverse in the probing cycle for TT 110 Entry 10 to 10 000 mm min M function for spindle orientation for measuring individual teeth Entry 0 to 88 1 Spindle orientation directly via NC 0 Function inactive error message 1 to 88 Number of the M function for spindle orientation via PLC Max permissible surface cutting speed at the tool edge Entry 1 0000 to 120 0000 m min Coordinates of the TT 110 stylus centre referenced to the machine datum Entry 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 mm MP6580 0 Axis A MP6580 1 Axis Y MP6580 2 Axis Z 3 10 Tapping Machine parameter MP7110 0 MP7110 1 MP7120 0 MP7120 1 MP7120 2 MP7130 MP7140 Function and input Change Reaction via Minimum feed override when tapping PLC RUN Entry 0 to 150 Maximum feed override when tapping PLC RUN Entry 0 to 150 Dwell time for change of direction of spindle PLC RUN rotation in tapping cycle Entry 0 to 65 535 s Spindle run on time after reaching total hole depth PLC RUN Entry 0 to 65 535 s Spindle run in characteristic PLC EDIT Entry 0 001 to 10 min matching MP1520 Transient response of spindle on acceleration PLC EDIT Entry 0 001 to 1 matching MP1530
603. tment PE PO Box 1260 D 83292 Traunreut Germany 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 Contents Technical Manual TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Update Information Introduction L Mounting and Electrical Installation Machine Integration Machine Parameters Markers and Words PLC Programming Data interfaces I Original Equipment Manufacturer s OEM Cycles Positioning Module Update Information No 20 New NC software In May 1996 the following new NC software versions were released TNC 407 280 58x 06 280 590 06 TNC 415B TNC 425 280 54x 06 280 550 06 TNC 415F TNC 425E 280 56x 06 280 570 06 Hardware New Design for TNC 407 A new hardware design was introduced with the new TNC 410 TNC 426 and TNC 430 controls This changed design can also be used for the TNC 407 The visual display unit and keyboard unit with the new design are gray in color and require a larger front panel cutout The new BC 120 visual display unit is connected to the TNC 407 with a new cable Id Nr 312 878 and adapter Id Nr 313 434 02 The matching TE 400 B keyboard unit has the Id Nr 313 038 02 A matching gray MB 420 machine operating panel Id Nr 293 757 12 is also available Documentation No replacement pages will be issued for this Technical Manual You will find the updated documentation on the CD ROM entitled TNCguide OEM Id Nr 208 935 92 available from January 1998 Please contact HEIDENHAI
604. to 99 999 999 mm or Values referenced to the measuring system datum MP960 0 X axis MP960 1 Y axis MP960 2 Z axis MP960 3 Ath axis MP960 4 5th axis MP7295 Disable set datum point Entry XXXXX Bit O X axis 0 not disabled Bit 1 Y axis 1 disabled Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 127 i MP7296 Set datum point with axis keys Entry 0 or 1 0 datum point can be set with axis keys and soft key 1 datum point can only be set with soft key 4 128 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4 129 i 6 2 Colour adjustment The BC 110 is a 14 inch colour graphics screen with a resolution of 640 x 490 pixels The colours in the screen display can be selected by machine parameter For example the colours can be adjusted to suit the corporate image of the machine tool builder image or the design of the machine The following colour adjustments cannot be altered by machine parameters HEIDENHAIN company logo after switching on the machine GREEN flashing error messages RED error message for invalid machine parameter RED plan view in the graphic
605. to 0 5 Number of bytes 8 6 Byte value in parentheses With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened Operands M O T C Operation The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator If the Logic Accumulator 0 then the addressed operand is set to 0 otherwise the operand remains unchanged An RN command is used at the end of a logic chain in order that a gating result may influence the operand The command may be used several times in succession see example Example Input 14 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR If the gating result 0 Output O2 and Marker M500 are reset Initial state Input 14 0 Input I5 0 Output 02 Marker M500 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 7 0 1 LM 2 os 3 RN 02 4 RN M500 Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input Ip are gated with OR Line 3 The gating result 0 Output O2 is reset Line 4 The gating result 0 Marker M500 is reset le e el el 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 51 e 7 52 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 3 Logic Gates 3 3 1 AND A Abbreviation for the
606. to 1 6 0 5 to 0 7 0 2 to 0 3 Number of bytes 6 8 6 8 Logic execution with the LOAD NOT command Operands M O T C Operation The complement of the addressed operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator A load command is always used at the start of a logic chain in order to enable subsequent gating commands The same function is achieved when the gating commands AN ON XON are used at the start of a logic chain however this should only be used when compatibility with TNC 355 is required Example The inverted logic state of Input 14 and Input I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2 Thus the inverted logic state of Input 14 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable subsequent gating commands Initial state Input l4 0 Input Ib 1 Output O2 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 7 0 1 NM H am 02 Line 1 The inverted operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input 15 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 7 38 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f Word execution with the LOAD NOT command Operands B W D K Operation The complement of the contents of the addressed Operand B W D or Constant K is loaded into the Word Accumulator In addition the Accumulator is filled if necessary according to the sign bit In contrast to logic execution a word
607. to 1175 The two switches operate with a 0 V logic e g if switch S1 is in position 3 then input 1162 is logic 0 and inputs 1160 1161 and 1163 to 1167 are logic 1 Step switch S1 Step switch for selecting interpolation factor Switch position PLC input 60 161 62 63 64 65 66 67 1 left stop 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 right stop Step switch S2 Step switch for selecting axis Switch position PLC input 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 1 left stop 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 right stop 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 4 203 e 10 5 2 PLC program example In the following example the positions of switch S1 for selecting the interpolation factor are assigned by evaluating inputs 1160 to 1167 from the lowest permissible interpolation factor from MP7670 to the maximum interpolation factor 10 and transferred from the PLC to the NC MP7640 5 and MP7641 1 In this PLC example the minimum interpolation factor is read from MP7670 and processed with PLC module 9032 LB 1160 Assignment of inputs 1160 to 1167 B1 to byte OV logic negative logic KO if all inputs are O then JPT 103 error message LN B1 Inversion byte 1 positive logic B2 KO if all bits are 0 then JPT 103 error message LBL 100 Loop for bit test of inverted inputs L B2 1160 to 1167 in byte 2 BT B3 JPT 101 Jump when bit set i e input Ixxx OV L B3 prepare next bit for polling i e
608. tocol The LSV 2 protocol is a data transfer protocol for the two way transfer of commands and data according to DIN 66019 The commands and data are transferred in so called telegrams i e the data is split up into blocks telegrams and transmitted The following functions are possible Data transfer File management delete copy and rename files Write screen to a file screen dump Remote operation of the control functions i e the control screen appears on the screen of the computer and all TNC functions can be executed from the external computer Real DNC operation i e starting and stopping the machine from the PC Diagnosis of TNC error messages and key operations for service purposes the last 100 events are stored in the TNC The LSV 2 protocol always runs in the background independently of the interface set up standard baud rate 9600 and is started externally by a PC A higher baud rate can be set in the interface set up at the control HEIDENHAIN offer two software packages TNC REMOTE Software for TNC remote control Can be run on an AT compatible PC with MS DOS All the above functions are available with this software LSV 2 TOOL BOX Software tools in C programming language for creating the transfer telegrams library executable files for telegrams source codes INCLUDE files for LSV 2 MAKE files 8 46 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01 98 o 4 Data transfer by PLC Using
609. tor is also set to 1 if it is O it is set to 0 The program continues in logic execution The selection addressing of the corresponding bit is derived from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant In the bit numbering bit O corresponds to the LSB and bit 31 the MSB For operand contents larger than 32 the operand value Modulo 32 is used i e the integer remainder from the division operand value 32 Example Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator and assign the logic state of bit O to an Output Initial state Doubleword D8 3E 81 hex Output 012 Word Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation the Logic Accumulator in binary representation Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content XX XX XX XX 1 LD8 2 BT K 0 oo 00 3E 81 3 012 Line 1 Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator Line 2 The bit specified in the operand is tested as to its status Line 3 The Logic Accumulator is assigned to Output 012 7 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L f 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 99 i 3 11 Stack Operations It should be noted that with Stack operations all read write operations on the Data Stack take place according to the LIFO principle La
610. tor program The name of a file which was selected with the soft key SELECT can be seen in the line PGM IN EDIT MEM If no executable program has been activated and no Editor program has been selected then the relevant name fields will be empty The various PLC functions can be accessed from inside the Main menu 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 PLC functions 7 7 1 1 3 File management All the EPROM and RAM files can be listed by operating the PGM NAME key on the keyboard unit and the soft key SHOW ALL The following functions appear at the same time in the soft key row PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY MODIFY SELECT WINDOW Sal Sw fee K or Scroll Select file Copy Modify display Select file type Switch to Return to main for selected display with menu window two windows PAGE PAGE PROTECT UNPROTECT RENAME CONVERT 2 Oe O m pa rka Scroll Protect Cancel Rename Change file Return to main program program steps type menu The following soft key row is displayed when the MODIFY WINDOW soft key is operated e SELECT SELECT SELECT Je TNC TNC EPROM EXT Select file type List from RAM List from List across EPROM data interface You can choose whether the file list from the RAM the EPROM or across the data interface will be displayed in the selected window You can also define the type of files to be listed using the SELECT TYPE soft key Use the WINDOW soft key to toggle between the display with one and the display wi
611. tory the list of file names can be requested from an external memory and displayed in the TNC If the external directory is requested the TNC sends control character lt DC1 gt If the request is immediately interrupted with the END key the TNC sends characters lt ETX gt lt EOT gt and no directory is read in If the request is not interrupted the peripheral unit sends all of the external programs in order Their names are then shown in the TNC 1st file 2nd file Last file Peripheral unit lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt Last line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt Last line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt 1st line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt Last line of file lt CR gt lt LF gt lt ETX gt id M Transmission path TNC lt DC1 gt lt EOT gt 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8 31 2 f Output selected file The TNC outputs all of the program lines in order The peripheral unit can stop transmission with character lt DC3 gt and start it again with character lt DC1 gt Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC lt NUL gt lt NUL gt lt NUL gt id 1st
612. ts linear measurement can also be made using a rotary encoder on the ballscrew HEIDENHAIN recommends use of the following linear measuring systems LS 103 C LS 106 C LS 405 C LS 406 C LS 706 C LB 326 ULS 300 C For linear measurement with the aid of a rotary encoder and a ballscrew you could use for example an ROD 450 5 2 Angular measuring systems For direct angular measurement in the A B or C axes the following incremental angular measuring systems are available ROD 250 C ROD 700 C RON 255 C and RON 705 C In order to meet accuracy requirements HEIDENHAIN recommends line counts of at least 18 000 Ei 3 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 01 98 o 5 3 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal signals 7 to 16 uApp The LE 415 can have five measuring systems and the LE 407 four measuring systems connected with sinusoidal inputs 7 to 16 BApp Maximum input frequency is 50 kHz 5 3 1 Connector assignments LE 407 X1 X2 X3 X4 measuring system 1 2 3 4 LE 415 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 measuring system 1 2 3 4 5 Flange socket with female connector insert 9 pin Pin Number Assignment 1 IER 2 l4 5 EE 6 l2 7 lot 8 lo 3 5V 4 OV 9 Inner screen Housing Outer screen housing 5 3 2 Connecting cable Please use only HEIDENHAIN measuring system cables connectors and couplings Standard HEIDENHAIN extension cables enable a maximum distance of 60 m 200 ft to be covered Measuring s
613. ual file types can also be protected so that they cannot be edited or changed Protected files are displayed with the colours defined in MP7354 1 or MP7355 1 in the file directory MP7224 0 Disable file type Entry XXX XXXXX Bit O HEIDENHAIN programs 0 do not disable Bit 1 ISO programs 1 disable Bit 2 Tool tables Bit 3 Datum tables Bit 4 Pallet tables Bit 5 Text files Bit 6 Help files Bit 7 Point tables MP7224 1 Protect file type Entry XXXXXXX Bit O HEIDENHAIN programs 0 not protected Bit 1 ISO programs 1 protected Bit 2 Tool tables Bit 3 Datum tables Bit 4 Pallet tables Bit 5 Text files Bit 6 Help files Bit 7 Point tables 4 150 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01 98 o 6 9 2 Block numbers step size for ISO programs The block number step size for ISO programs can be fixed by a machine parameter MP7220 Block number step size for ISO programs Entry 0 to 150 6 9 3 Table size The size of the pallet and datum tables can be fixed by machine parameters For further information about the tool table see section Tool changer for pallet table see PLC description MP7226 0 Size of pallet tables Entry 0 to 255 lines MP7226 1 Size of datum tables Entry 0 to 255 lines 6 9 4 Datum point for values in datum table MP7475 is used to define whether the values in the datum table refer to the set workpiece datum or the machine datum MP960 MP7475 Datum in datum table Entry 0 or 1
614. ual text as with Immediate STRING The execution times depend on the length of the STRINGS The quoted times represent maximum values With the Immediate STRINGS the length n of the STRINGS respectively must be added to the command length In the event that this is odd the next larger even numbered length must be added 3 15 1 EQUAL TO Abbreviation for PLC Editor EQUAL Execution time ps lt 100 Number of bytes STRING memory 12 Immediate STRING 20 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 26 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command a direct transition from STRING to logic execution takes place The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument If the STRING Accumulator and the operand are equal the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If they are not equal the Logic Accumulator is set to 0 3 15 2 LESS THAN lt Abbreviation for PLC Editor lt LESS THAN Execution time ps lt 100 Number of bytes STRING memory 12 Immediate STRING 20 n STRING from error message or dialogue files 26 Operands S lt arg gt Operation With this command a direct transition from STRING to Logic execution takes place The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument If the STRING Accumulator is smaller than the operand the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1 If the STRING Accumulator is greater than
615. uced along the ramp from MP3410 1 to the speed for spindle orientation Once this speed has been reached the spindle is in the control loop and is oriented to the nominal position along the ramp from MP3410 1 If the spindle does not have to remain in the control loop after reaching the nominal position marker M2499 must be set The spindle is not free of the control loop until this marker has been set If M2499 remains set the control loop is opened after each orientation as soon as the positioning window is reached The spindle can be oriented down to 0 1 degree This value results from the line number of the installed rotary encoder ROD 426 xxx8 with 1024 lines and the 4 fold evaluation in the TNC A positioning window is defined with MP3420 Marker M2007 is set once the spindle is in the positioning window after orientation Machine parameter MP3430 was introduced to make it possible to easily compensate rotary encoder misalignment resulting from imprecise mounting The offset of the nominal and actual position of the reference mark is entered here for compensation during spindle orientation The reference mark is immediately evaluated by the NC the first time the spindle is switched on The reference mark can be evaluated once again for special applications if Marker M2615 is set 4 106 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01 98 2 1 A separate k factor for each gear range can be entered in MP3440 for a more exact control of th
616. ue gt PS B W D K Element number gt PS B W D K lt Line number for beginning the search gt CM 9092 PL B W D lt Line number gt 1 if M3171 1 PL B W D lt Error number gt 7 158 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 Error status after call M3171 0 Element was read 1 Error condition see above Values for file type O T file Tool table 1 D file Datum table 2 TCH file Pocket table Values for element number for D file 0 Offset X 1 Offset Y 2 Offset Z 3 Offset 4 4 Offset 5 Values for element number for TCH file pocket table 0 Tool number 1 if no tool entered 1 Special pocket O no 1 yes 2 Fixed pocket 0 no 1 yes 3 Disabled pocket O no 1 yes 4 PLC status PLC available for OEM Error numbers 0 No error element was read 1 Call was not from SUBMIT Job 2 No such file type Values for element number for T file Tool length Tool radius spare Replacement tool 1 if not defined spare Max tool life Max tool life with Tool Call Current tool life 2nd tool radius Allowance on tool length 10 Allowance on tool radius 11 Allowance on 2nd tool radius 12 Tool disabled O no 1 yes 13 Number of tool cutting edges CUT 14 Tolerance for tool length LTOL 15 Tolerance for tool radius RTOL 16 Cutting direction of the tool DIRECT 0 0 SSF 17 PLC status PLC available for OEM 18 Too
617. unit LE 407 Id Nr Logic unit Change 256 113 99 LE 407A Pilot lot 32 bit bus until 9 90 255 444 99 LE 407A 16 bit bus colour graphics chip 8 90 until 5 91 255 444 89 LE 407A Expansion slot for software module since 9 91 255 444 79 LE 407A Like Id Nr 255 444 89 but with since 9 91 software module 261 092 99 LE 407 A 32 bit bus since 5 91 261 092 89 LE 407 A Expansion slot for software module since 9 91 261 092 79 LE 407 A Like Id Nr 261 092 89 but with since 9 91 software module 264 430 99 LE 407 A Expansion slot for software module since 6 91 264 430 79 LE 407 A Like Id Nr 264 430 99 but with since 9 91 software module 264 430 29 LE 407 A Uninterruptible supply to control panel since 5 93 264 430 24 LE 407 A Like Id Nr 264 430 29 but with since 5 93 software module 3 8 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware components 01 98 2 2 Assembly hints 2 1 Electrical noise immunity Please note that the vulnerability of electronic equipment to noise increases with faster signal processing and higher sensitivity Please protect your equipment by observing the following rules and recommendations Noise voltages are mainly produced and transmitted by capacitive and inductive coupling Electrical noise can be picked up by the inputs and outputs to the equipment and the cabling Likely sources of interference are Strong magnetic fields from transformers and electric motors Relays contactors and s
618. ur Train cycle Scaling factor axis specific cycle Three dimensional tool compensation in DNC mode Extended tool management Extended additional status displays for file information positions tool data and coordinate transformation Stiction compensation PLC axes Extended PLC command set Length of filenames increased to 16 characters Automatic correction of centre offset for probe system Oscilloscope function New organization for PLC files Additional machine parameters for data transfer to PLC BACKUP and RESTORE functions Q parameter for tool length Q114 Axis positions after programmed probe cycle in Q parameters Q115 to Q119 New input format for machine parameters TNC 415 B TNC 415 259 93x 05 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 259 94x 05 Release 11 93 New functions Status information can now be read with module 9035 See TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Description of the Differences from TNC 415 The minimum input range of machine parameters MP6120 MP6350 MP6360 has been changed from 80 mm min to 10 mm min MP7300 has been extended as follows MP7300 Delete status display Q parameter and tool data Entry 0 to 7 delete status display Q parameter and tool data when selecting a program 1 delete status display Q parameter and tool data with M02 M30 END PGM and selecting a program 2 delete status display and tool data when selecting a program
619. urce block is outside the range 0 to 1023 The number of the destination string is outside the valid range 0 3 Call PS K B W D lt Source address in Word RAM gt PS K BAW D Number of destination string gt PS K BMV D Number of data bytes gt CM 9053 Example SO Hex 63 e 3 a BO 99 0110 0011 Error status after call M3171 0 String was converted 1 Error condition see above 4 4 5 Conversion ASCII Hexadecimal to Binary Module 9054 Converts a string of ASCII coded hexadecimal values to a block of binary values in the word marker range The string in the string buffer with the specified number is interpreted as a chain of ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers and converted into a block of corresponding binary bytes Two ASCII characters make one binary byte The binary block is stored in the word marker range starting from the specified destination address Possible errors The number of the source string is outside the permitted range 0 3 The address for the destination block is outside the range 0 to 1023 The source string contains characters that cannot be interpreted as hexadecimal values different characters 0 9 A F The source string contains an uneven number of characters the last byte is not fully defined The destination block has no room at the specified address 7 150 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 1 Call PS K BAW D Number of source strin
620. urth axis The fifth axis may not be defined as a tool axis The markers M2100 to M2103 are used to show which of the four axes is currently defined as the tool axis The appropriate marker is then set Marker Function Set Reset M2100 X axis is tool axis NC NC M2101 Y axis is tool axis M2102 Z axis is tool axis M2103 Ath axis is tool axis 1 3 VDU display Machine parameters can be used to select which of the active axes MP10 should be displayed in the status window The spindle position is displayed only when neither M03 nor M04 is active see under Main spindle MP40 VDU display Entry Xxxxx Bit O X axis 0 not active Bit 1 Y axis 1 active Bit 2 Z axis Bit 3 Ath axis Bit 4 5th axis Bit 5 Axis S 4 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 o 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 15 i 1 4 Traverse ranges For all five axes three different software traverse ranges can be defined by machine parameters e g for pendulum machining The traverse ranges are defined by so called software limit switches The input values for the software limit switches are related to the machine datum MP960 x The momentary software limit switch range is selected by the markers M2817 M2816 and activated by th
621. uted then NC sets marker M2400 and this is not reset until there is a TOOL CALL for another tool 4 228 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01 98 L 1 MP7480 0 Output tool or pocket number with TOOL CALL block Entry 0 to 6 O No output 1 Tool number output only when tool number changes W262 2 Tool number output with every TOOL CALL block W262 3 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 only when tool number changes 4 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 with every TOOL CALL block 5 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 only when tool number changes Pocket table does not change 6 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 with every TOOL CALL block Pocket table does not change MP7480 1 Output tool or pocket number with TOOL DEF block Entry 0 to 4 O No output 1 Tool number output only when tool number changes W262 2 Tool number output with every TOOL DEF block W262 3 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 only when tool number changes 4 Output of pocket number W262 and tool number W264 with every TOOL DEF block Word Function W262 Pocket number if MP7480 3 4 5 o0r6 Tool number if MP7480 1 or 2 W264 Tool number if MP7480 3 4 5 or 6 Marker Function Set Reset M2046 Strobe signal T code P code with TOOL CALL NC NC M2047 Strobe signal T code P code with TOOL DEF NC NC M2483 Feedback T code P code wit
622. uts outputs on the PL 400 are spread over nine connectors assigned as follows Cables with a core cross section gt dia 0 14 mm Cu must be used to connect the PLC inputs and outputs Maximum cable length 20 m X1 X2 Pin number Assignment Assignment Pin number Assignment Assignment PL 400 1 PL 400 2 PL 400 1 PL 400 2 1 064 1 075 2 065 2 076 3 066 3 O77 4 067 4 O78 5 068 5 079 6 069 6 080 7 070 7 081 8 071 8 082 9 072 9 083 10 073 10 084 11 074 11 085 12 Do not use 12 Do not use X3 X4 Pin number Assignment Assignment Pin number Assignment Assignment PL 400 1 PL 400 2 PL 400 1 PL 400 2 1 086 1 1254 2 087 2 1202 3 0887 3 1201 4 0897 4 1200 5 090 5 199 6 091 6 1198 7 0927 7 69 197 8 093 8 i68 1196 9 094 9 1195 10 Control ready 10 leg 1194 11 Do not use 11 i65 os 12 24 V not interruptible by 12 1 ext EMERGENCY STOP Outputs not interruptible by ext EMERGENCY STOP 24V must always be connected even if the non interruptible outputs are not used 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 11 PLC inputs outputs X5 X6 Pin number Assignment Assignment Pin number Assignment Assignment PL 400 1 PL 400 2 PL 400 1 PL 400 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 X7 X8 Pin number Assignment Assignment Pin number Assignment Assignment PL 400 1 PL 400 2 PL 400 1 PL 400 2 1 1 250 2 2 249
623. value is then halved to reduce overshoot to virtually nil Integral component MP1920 x MP1920 x is then increased until large control fluctuations again occur for the actual speed Half this value is then entered in MP1920 x The resulting overshoot should not exceed 40 1 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11 13 e If the motor and drive spindle are linked by a toothed belt then an initial overshoot will occur in the step response this must be disregarded for trimming purposes Monitoring the speed controller Once the proportional and integral components of the speed controller have been trimmed a suitable value must be calculated for MP1910 x Example MP1920 x 180 MP1940 x 60 For MP1910 x with a Vlimit 15 V the following value is obtained Viimit MP1910 x MP1920 x 97 1V 7 9000 11 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01 98 o 3 3 Optimizing the position controller The position controller is trimmed in the same way as with the TNC 415 This rule applies for operation in the trailing error mode and with feed precontrol Please note the description in Chapter 4 Machine Integration and the following information Evaluation of reference marks After trimming the speed controller the desired evaluation of the reference marks must be entered in MP1350 Checking the direction of traverse and counting direction The directions of traverse and counting must be checked again
624. ve for operation with feedforward control as well as for operation with lag The permissible size of the angle depends on the drives in the machine Realistic values are 5 to 15 4 80 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 01 98 o The resulting path is as follows Axis standstill a Change of axis direction Sq Servo lag Path when MP7460 lt a Path when MP7460 gt a MP7460 Constant feed rate in corners Entry value 0 0001 to 179 9999 3 4 3 Constant feed rate in corners with M90 The miscellaneous function M90 was introduced to enable constant surface speed to be achieved in corners without radius compensation This miscellaneous function is only effective in operation with lag Sa oe with M90 without M90 3 4 4 Contour speed related to tool cutting edge The programmed feed rate normally relates to the path of the cutter centre When M function M109 is active the feed rate at radii is increased or reduced to maintain a constant feed rate at the cutting edge of the tool When M function M110 is active the feed rate is reduced only There is no increase in feed rate When M function M111 is active the programmed feed rate is re assigned to the path of the cutter centre 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC axes 4 81 e 1 3 4 5 Preset tolerance at corners 3D forms are often described by a progression of very short linear blocks Th
625. vel head MP 7552 F31 dimension Z2 MP 7560 010000 free swivel axis B MP 7561 00 swivel head MP 7562 0 variable dimension MP 7570 000000 end of transformation sequence 4 44 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 2 Example 2 Double swivel head 45 Li 150 5 mm 22 251 5 mm Ai 45 P 7500 1 jactivate function P 7510 000100 shift in Z axis P 7511 00 swivel head P 7512 4150 5 dimension Z1 P 7520 001000 rotate coordinate system about A axis P 7521 00 swivel head P 7522 45 dimension A1 P 7530 000100 shift in Z axis P 7531 300 swivel head P 7532 2515 dimension Z2 P 7540 100000 free swivel axis C P 7541 00 swivel head P 7542 0 variable dimension P 7550 001000 rotate coordinate system about A axis P 7551 00 swivel head P 7552 45 dimension An P 7560 010000 free swivel axis B P 7561 300 swivel head P 7562 0 variable dimension P 7570 000000 end of transformation sequence 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4 45 2 Ai 1 6 mm Yi 2 7 mm Zi 331 3 mm Z2 125 9 mm Coordinates related to machine datum of the centre of rotation of rotary table C with all swivel axes in datum position XR 420 0 mm YR 151 2 mm ZR 395 4 mm MP 7500 1 MP 7510 000001 MP 7511 11 MP 7512 420 MP 7520 000010 MP 7521 11 MP 7522 151 2 MP 7530 00010
626. ways erased If the jog increment limit is entered in inches the limit value for rotary axes is calculated from the limit value in millimeters divided by 24 5 The input parameter Number of status information does not identify status information that can be overwritten in this software version The specified value is outside the range valid for this status information The entry of this status information is disabled e g by machine parameters Call PS B W D K Number of status information gt PS B W D K lt value to be written gt CM 9036 PL B W D lt Error identifier gt 0 Status written 1 Wrong status identifier 2 Specified value out of range 3 Entry disabled e g by MP Error status after call M3171 0 Status was written 1 Error condition see above 7 144 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01 98 2 4 3 3 Read Coordinates Module 9040 9041 9042 Module 9040 PLC reads axis coordinates Format 0 001 mm Module 9040 downloads axis coordinates for all NC axes from the control loop The values are filed in 5 doublewords in the format 1 1000 mm starting with the specified target address Constraints The values for all axes are always downloaded irrespective of whether individual axes are disabled by machine parameter MP10 The values for disabled axes are undefined Before the reference point is traversed on an axis the coordinate value of that axis is undefined Possible errors The
627. x 2 x0 Is 3 o E Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Output O2 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 61 e El Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command Operands B W D K Operation The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand B W D K are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR In accordance with the different sizes of operand B 8 bit W 16 bit D K 32 bit 8 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator Thus Bit O in the Accumulator is gated with bit O in the operand Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator Example The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned to Word W8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Byte B6 36 hex Word W8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 15 87 0 sae KOK HK RH KKK RM RIOR 1 L Pe 0000000000 0 0110110 00110110 2 XO B5 0000000000 0 0011100 00101010 3 W8 0000000000 0 0011100 00000000 00011100 Line 1 The contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Word W8 7 62 TNC 407 T
628. x x x 1 L M500 XXX xX x xXf Olx x x x x x x o 2 O M501 XX XX xX XITIX x xX xX xX xX X DH 5 O1 XX XXX XITIX xX xX xX XX X 1 6 XX XXX XITIX xX xX xX XX X 7 012 XxX xX x xT x x x x x XX H Program stack XXXXXXXX 1 XXXXXXX La bit 15 7 0 ine 1 Marker state M500 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator ine 2 The Logic Accumulator is gated with Marker M501 ine 3 Open parentheses the Accumulator contents are buffered on the Program Stack ine 4 Input state 10 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator ine 5 The Logic Accumulator is gated with Input 11 ine 6 Close parentheses Accumulator content is gated with the content of the Program Stack according to the command AI OL NOT A Line 7 The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Output O12 edel ee el emg 7 82 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 o 1 Note The functional sequence is in principle the same for word execution with the exception that the whole Accumulator is written onto the Stack 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 83 L El 7 84 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 i 3 7 Parentheses with arithmetic Commands Execution time and code length are summarised res
629. x x x x x x x e e e 499 EM 500 LBL 10 501 LIS n Roe ON Fe OR eee 502 OM 500 a xxxxx XT KK KR eX EIERE 503 020 n xxxxxxlilxxxxxxx 504 EM 7 108 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 L f ne 1 Load the operand contents in the Accumulator ne 2 Dependent on Input 15 the Call Module is processed ine 499 End Module of the main program ine 500 Start of the Module identified by LBL ine 501 Instruction in the subprogram ine 502 Instruction in the subprogram ine 503 Instruction in the subprogram ine 504 End Module Effects the return to the main program ine 3 The main program continues at this point once the Module is processed 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 109 e 3 12 7 End of Module Program End EM Abbreviation for PLC Editor EM END OF MODULE Execution time us 3 3 to 3 8 Number of bytes 4 Operands none Operation Every program and or every subprogram Module is terminated with an EM command An EM command in a Module initiates the return jump to the Call Module CM CMT CMF The program is continued with the instruction following the Call Module The command EM is handled as program end criterion thus subsequent program instructions can be reached using a jump address 3 12 8 End of Module if Logic Accumulator 1 EMT Abbreviation for the PLC Editor EMT END OF MODULE IF TRUE Operation An EMT command only initiates a return jump to the Ca
630. xport version of Id Nr 258 993 99 since 11 90 258 993 89 LE 415 Expansion slot for software module since 9 91 258 993 88 LE 415 E Export version of Id Nr 258 993 89 since 9 91 258 993 79 LE 415 Like Id Nr 251 481 89 but with since 9 91 software module 258 993 78 LE 415 E Export version of Id Nr 258 993 79 since 9 91 264 429 99 LE 415 Expansion slot for software module since 6 91 264 429 98 LE 415 E Export version of Id Nr 264 429 99 since 6 91 264 429 79 LE 415 Like Id Nr 264 429 99 but with since 9 91 software module 264 429 78 LE415E Export version of Id Nr 264 429 79 since 9 91 267 223 29 LE 415 B New processor board since 9 92 267 223 28 LE 415 F Export version of Id Nr 267 223 29 since 9 92 267 223 24 LE 415 B Like Id Nr 267 223 29 but with software module since 9 92 267 223 23 LE 415F Export version of Id Nr 267 223 24 267 223 39 LE 415 B Hardware change since 2 93 267 223 38 LE 415 F Export version of Id Nr 267 223 39 since 2 93 267 223 34 LE 415 B Like Id Nr 267 223 39 but with software module since 2 93 267 223 33 LE 415 F Export version of Id Nr 267 223 34 since 2 93 267 223 49 LE 415 B Uninterruptible supply to since 5 93 control panel 267 223 48 LE 415 F Export version of Id Nr 267 223 49 since 5 93 267 223 44 LE 415 B Like Id Nr 267 223 49 but with since 5 93 software module 267 223 43 LE 415 F Export version of Id Nr 267 223 44 since 5 93 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Hardware components Logic
631. xxxx RO A ee eX o 3 02 nm xxxxx xl 0lxxxxxxx Line 1 The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input 15 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to output O2 7 36 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 01 98 2 f Word execution with the LOAD command Operands B W D K Operation The addressed Operand B W D or a Constant K is copied into the Word Accumulator In addition the Accumulator is filled if necessary according to the sign bit In contrast to logic execution the start of a word gating chain must always be with the L command It is not possible to use a gating command Example A Constant and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8 Initial state Byte B5 2A hex Constant 54 36 hex Byte B8 Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents Bit 31 15 7 0 7 0 XXX XXX XXX x x x XXX xxx 1 L K 54 000000000 0 0j0110110 2 AB5 0000000000f0 0100010 00101010 3 D 0000000000 0 0100010 00100010 Line 1 The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator Line 2 The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND Line 3 The gating result is assigned to Byte B8 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 3 Commands 7 37 e 3 1 2 LOAD NOT LN Abbreviation for the PLC Editor LN LOAD NOT Logic Byte Word Double Constant Execution time ps 0 2 to 0 7 0 5
632. ycle Marker M2127 is set during every spindle orientation Probing feed rate and spindle speed For tool measurement of a non rotating tool the probing feed rate is taken from MP6520 For tool measurement of a rotating tool the probing feed rate and the spindle speed are automatically calculated by the TNC The rotational speed is calculated from the maximum permissible surface cutting speed MP6570 and the tool radius from the tool table The rotational speed is limited to a maximum of 1000 rpm MP6570 n Rotational speed rev min PH RR 10 MP6570 Maximum permissible surface speed of the tool edge m min r Tool radius mm 4 192 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01 98 o 1 The probing feed rate is calculated from the calculated rotational speed and the measuring tolerance given in MP6510 v Meas tolerance x n Meas tolerance Meas tolerance mm depending on MP6507 n Rotational speed rpm MP6507 defines the method of calculating the probing feed rate MP6507 0 Calculation of the feed rate with constant tolerance This setting guarantees that the measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of the tool radius MP6510 If the tool is very large however the necessary probing feed rate comes so close to zero that it falls below the lowest programmable increment The smaller the maximum surface cutting speed and the permissible measuring error the sooner this effect becomes noticeable MP6507 1 Calculati
633. ystem With standard extension cable Id Nr 262 006 With armoured extension cable Id Nr 262 016 01 98 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 3 25 o Ei 5 4 Measuring system inputs for square wave signals One measuring system with square wave signals can be connected to the LE 415 Two such systems can be connected to the LE 407 Maximum input frequency is 300 kHz 5 4 1 Connector assignments LE 407 X5 X6 measuring system 5 S LE 415 X6 measuring system S Flange socket with female connector insert 12 pin Pin Number Assignment 5 Ua1 6 Uar 8 Ua2 1 Uaz 3 Uao 4 Uso 7 Uas 2 5 V Up 12 5 V Up 11 0 V UN 10 0 V UN 9 contact spring screen housing 5 4 2 Connecting cable Please use only HEIDENHAIN measuring system cables connectors and couplings In order to be able to connect a measuring system to the square wave signal input of the logic unit the sinusoidal signal from the measuring system must be converted to a square wave signal This conversion is performed by the interpolation and digitizing electronics EXE The interpolation and digitizing electronics is either integrated into the measuring system or made as an independent unit If the interpolation and digitizing electronics does not have its own power supply it can be supplied from the logic unit In order to ensure a correct supply voltage the total length of the connecting cable between the interpolation an
634. ze of the reversal error which is to be compensated is entered in machine parameter MP711 and the portion of the peaks to be compensated per closed loop cycle time is entered in MP712 The diagram from the DBB system shows the size and duration of a reversal peak The entry value for MP712 can be calculated as follows Duration of the reversal peak Peak width x 27 x Radius mm x 60 360 x Feed rate mm min the peak width is indicated in the diagram feed rate mm min is the programmed contouring feed rate tpr s Compensation per control loop cycle time 3 ms with TNC 415 6 ms with TNC 407 Reversal peaks mm Control loop cycle time s 103 0 5 tPr S The compensation value is entered in MP712 Compensation mm If the computed values have no effect this is because the machine dynamics are too weak MP711 Size of the reversal peaks in circular motion Entry 1 0000 to 1 0000 mm MP711 0 X axis MP711 1 Y axis MP711 2 Z axis MP711 3 4th axis MP711 4 5th axis 4 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01 98 L El MP712 Compensation value per cycle time Entry 0 000000 to 99 999999 mm MP712 0 X axis MP712 1 Y axis MP712 2 Z axis MP712 3 Ath axis MP712 4 5th axis A second block of Kv factors can be activated with M function M105 M106 deactivates A second block of machine parameters for reversal peak compensation is also activated MP715 as MP711

Technical Manual TNC 407, TNC 415 B, TNC 425

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents